WO2024046347A1 - Data sharing method and system, and related apparatus - Google Patents

Data sharing method and system, and related apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024046347A1
WO2024046347A1 PCT/CN2023/115722 CN2023115722W WO2024046347A1 WO 2024046347 A1 WO2024046347 A1 WO 2024046347A1 CN 2023115722 W CN2023115722 W CN 2023115722W WO 2024046347 A1 WO2024046347 A1 WO 2024046347A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
sharing
contact
data
application
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/115722
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
贾银元
王志峰
许浩维
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024046347A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024046347A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72469User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones for operating the device by selecting functions from two or more displayed items, e.g. menus or icons
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/725Cordless telephones
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/12Messaging; Mailboxes; Announcements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/14Direct-mode setup

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a data sharing method, system and related devices.
  • terminals such as smartphones and tablets have begun to support users in sharing pictures, documents and other data to other devices, improving users' office efficiency and experience. For example, users can share pictures, files and other data on smartphones and other terminals to other devices without using data cables.
  • users can share pictures, files and other data on smartphones and other terminals to other devices without using data cables.
  • the operation process is complicated.
  • This application provides a data sharing method, system and related devices, which enables the electronic device to display the currently interacting contacts (for example, current call contacts) in the data sharing interface during or after the interaction with the contacts.
  • options and/or options for recently interacted contacts for example, recent call contacts, recent private message contacts, etc.
  • users can quickly share data with contacts they are currently interacting with or have recently interacted with, improving Improve the user experience of sharing data.
  • this application provides a data sharing method, including: a first electronic device displays a call interface, the call interface includes contact information of the second electronic device, and the call interface is used to represent the relationship between the first electronic device and The second electronic device is making an operator call; the first electronic device receives a first input to share the first designated data during the operator call with the second electronic device; in response to the first input , the first electronic device displays a first sharing interface, and displays a first option corresponding to the second electronic device in the first sharing interface; the first electronic device receives a second input to the first option; responds Upon the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device.
  • the first electronic device can display the options of the second electronic device in the specified data sharing interface during the operator call with the second electronic device. After the first electronic device receives the user's input on the option of the second electronic device, the first electronic device may share the specified data with the second electronic device. In this way, it is convenient for users to quickly share data with contacts who are on the phone, improving the user experience of sharing data.
  • a call mark is displayed around the first option, and the call mark is used to indicate that the first option is an option corresponding to the second electronic device that is talking to the first electronic device.
  • the contact information corresponding to the second electronic device is also displayed around the first option, and the contact information corresponding to the second electronic device includes one or more of the following: the second The phone number of the electronic device, the contact name that the first electronic device has noted for the phone number of the second electronic device, the contact avatar that the first electronic device has noted for the phone number of the second electronic device, and the call application Mark; wherein, the calling application mark is used to represent the calling application to which the calling interface belongs.
  • the first electronic device in response to the second input, sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, specifically including: in response to the second input, the first electronic device The device sends a data transmission request to the second electronic device, where the data transmission request is used to request the transmission of the first specified data to the second electronic device; the first electronic device receives the confirmation information sent by the second electronic device, and the confirmation The information is used to indicate that the second electronic device allows the first electronic device to send the first designated data to the second electronic device; in response to the confirmation information, the first electronic device sends the first designated data to the second electronic device.
  • Electronic equipment in response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, specifically including: in response to the second input, the first electronic device The device sends a data transmission request to the second electronic device, where the data transmission request is used to request the transmission of the first specified data to the second electronic device; the first electronic device receives the confirmation information sent by the second electronic device, and the confirmation The information is used to indicate that the second electronic device allows the
  • a data transmission request can be sent to the second electronic device, and only after receiving confirmation from the second electronic device, the data can be shared to the second electronic device to prevent the second electronic device from receiving the requested data. Force data to be received.
  • the method further includes: in response to the second input, the first electronic device displays a first prompt, the first prompt being used to prompt the user that the first electronic device is requesting a request to the third electronic device.
  • the two electronic devices send the first specified data.
  • the method further includes: during the process of sending the first designated data to the second electronic device, the first electronic device displays a second prompt and a sending progress bar.
  • the second prompt The sending progress bar is used to remind the user that the first electronic device is sending the first specified data to the second electronic device.
  • the sending progress bar is used to remind the user of the progress of the first electronic device sending the first specified data to the second electronic device.
  • the method further includes: during the process of sending the first specified data to the second electronic device, the first electronic device displays a sending cancellation control, the canceling control being used to trigger the first The electronic device suspends sending the first designated data to the second electronic device.
  • the user can stop sharing data to the second electronic device midway.
  • the method further includes: after the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, displaying a third prompt and a withdrawal control, the third prompt being used to prompt The first electronic device of the user has finished sending the first specified data to the second electronic device.
  • the withdrawal control is used to trigger the first electronic device to send a withdrawal instruction to the second electronic device.
  • the withdrawal instruction is used to request the The second electronic device deletes the first designated data that has been received by the first electronic device.
  • the user can actively withdraw the data shared to the second electronic device from the second electronic device, which can prevent privacy leakage caused by the user mistakenly sending data to the second electronic device.
  • the first sharing interface is a system sharing interface, and the first sharing interface also includes options for one or more nearby devices discovered by the first electronic device through near field communication technology, one or more A service option.
  • the option of the nearby device is used to trigger the first electronic device to share the first specified data to the nearby device.
  • the service option can be used to trigger the first electronic device to use the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. Share the first specified data.
  • the option of the current call contact i.e., the second electronic device
  • the option of the current call contact can be displayed in the sharing interface of the operating system of the first electronic device, so as to facilitate the user to realize the communication with the current call contact when activating the sharing function of the operating system.
  • Data sharing for call contacts i.e., the second electronic device
  • the first sharing interface is an in-application sharing interface of the first application, and the first sharing interface also includes one or more functional options in the first application;
  • the first electronic device receives the first input of sharing the first specified data during the operator call with the second electronic device. Specifically, the first electronic device receives the first input of sharing the first specified data with the second electronic device.
  • the operator displays the first interface of the first application.
  • the first interface includes the first specified data and a first control.
  • the first control is used to share the first specified data, wherein the sharing of the first specified data
  • the first designated data includes a retrieval link for sharing the first designated data; the first electronic device receives the first input to the first control.
  • the options of the current call contact i.e., the second electronic device
  • the options of the current call contact can be displayed in the sharing interface within the application of the first electronic device, making it convenient for the user to communicate with the current call contact when calling up the sharing function of the application. data sharing.
  • the first specified data includes one or more of the following: pictures, audios, videos, document files, location information, links, contact information, calendars, application packages, and memos.
  • the method further includes: after the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, the first electronic device and the second electronic device end the operator call; the first electronic device receives a third input to share the second specified data; in response to the third input, the first electronic device displays a second sharing interface, the second sharing interface includes one or more recent interactive contacts People's options; wherein, the most recently interacted contact is a contact who has interacted with the first electronic device within a recent period of time when the first electronic device received the third input, and the one or more recently interacted contacts
  • the options include a third electronic device corresponding to the second option; the first electronic device receives a second input of the second option; in response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the second specified data to the third electronic device.
  • the option of the most recently interacted contacts that have interacted with the second electronic device in the recent period can be displayed in the data sharing interface.
  • the first electronic device receives the user's input of the option of the recently interacted contact
  • the first electronic device The electronic device can share specified data with recently interacted contacts. In this way, users can quickly share data with contacts they have interacted with recently, improving the user experience of sharing data.
  • the contact information of the recently interacted contact is displayed around the option of the recently interacted contact, and the contact information of the recently interacted contact includes one or more of the following: the recently interacted contact
  • the contact information of the interactive contact includes one or more of the following: the phone number of the recently interacted contact, the contact name of the recently interacted contact, the contact avatar of the recently interacted contact, and the contact application tag; among which, The contact application mark is used to represent the application used by the first electronic device to interact with the recently interacted contact.
  • the interaction includes any of the following: making phone calls on an operator, receiving text messages, sending text messages, over-the-top calls, receiving or sending private messages within social applications.
  • the method before the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, the method further includes: the first electronic device establishes the first data with the second electronic device. Transmission link; in response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, specifically including: in response to the second input, the first electronic device The first specified data is sent to the second electronic device on the data transmission link.
  • the method further includes: during the operator call with the second electronic device and before receiving the first input, the first electronic device establishes a connection with the second electronic device. Complete the first data transmission link; in response to the first input, the first electronic device displays a first sharing interface, and displays a first option corresponding to the second electronic device in the first sharing interface, specifically including: : In response to the first input, the first electronic device displays the first sharing interface, and the first sharing interface includes the first option corresponding to the second electronic device.
  • the establishment of the data transmission link between the first electronic device and the second electronic device can be completed before the sharing interface is displayed, which facilitates the user to quickly share data on the first electronic device to the second electronic device.
  • the first electronic device in response to the first input, displays a first sharing interface, and displays a first option corresponding to the second electronic device in the first sharing interface, specifically including: : In response to the first input, the first electronic device displays the first sharing interface; after the first electronic device and the second electronic device establish the first data transmission link, the first electronic device The first option corresponding to the second electronic device is displayed on the first sharing interface.
  • the first electronic device in response to the second input, sends the first specified data to the second electronic device on the first data transmission link, specifically including: in response to The second input, the first electronic device and the second electronic device establish the first data transmission link; after the first data transmission link is established, the first electronic device The first designated data is sent to the second electronic device.
  • the data transmission link can be established with the second electronic device only when the user determines to share the data with the second electronic device, thereby saving the power consumption of the first electronic device in maintaining the data transmission link.
  • the first data transmission link includes one or more of the following links: the main link for operator calls between the first electronic device and the second electronic device, the first electronic device One or more auxiliary links to the second electronic device.
  • the first electronic device can share data with the second electronic device through a combination of multiple transmission links, thereby increasing the data sharing speed.
  • the one or more auxiliary links include one or more of the following: Internet Protocol IP direct link, point-to-point P2P link, and server relay link.
  • the first electronic device and the second electronic device establish a first data transmission link, which specifically includes: The first electronic device obtains the first communication identifier assigned by the cloud server to the first electronic device; the first electronic device sends the phone number and the first communication identifier of the first electronic device to the cloud server for binding and storage.
  • the first electronic device sends a first query request to the cloud server, the first query request includes the phone number of the second electronic device, and the first query request is used to query the second communication identification of the second electronic device;
  • the first electronic device receives the second communication identifier sent by the cloud server; the first electronic device establishes the auxiliary link with the electronic device based on the first communication identifier and the second communication identifier.
  • the establishment of the auxiliary link between the first electronic device and the second electronic device can be completed through the cloud server, thereby realizing far-field communication between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the auxiliary link includes a P2P link;
  • the first communication identifier is a first session identifier used by the first electronic device to communicate with the cloud server, and the second communication identifier is The second session identifier used by the second electronic device to communicate with the cloud server;
  • the first electronic device establishes the auxiliary link with the electronic device based on the first communication identifier and the second communication identifier, which specifically includes:
  • the first electronic device sends a first acquisition request to the cloud server.
  • the first acquisition request is used to request to acquire the first NAT public network information of the first electronic device; the first electronic device receives the first acquisition request sent by the cloud server.
  • a NAT public network information includes the public network IP address of the first electronic device and the port number of the first electronic device from the public network to the intranet; the first electronic device sends to the cloud server
  • the first message carries the second session identifier and the first NAT public network information.
  • the first message is used to exchange NAT public network information between the first electronic device and the second electronic device;
  • An electronic device receives the second NAT public network information of the second electronic device sent by the cloud server.
  • the second NAT public network information includes the public network IP address of the second electronic device and the public network forwarding address of the second electronic device.
  • the port number of the internal network; the first electronic device establishes a P2P link with the second electronic device based on the first NAT public network information and the second NAT public network information.
  • the establishment of a P2P link between the first electronic device and the second electronic device can be completed through the cloud server, thereby realizing far-field communication between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the auxiliary link includes a server relay link; the first communication identifier is a first session identifier used by the first electronic device to communicate with the cloud server; and the second communication identifier The identifier is a second session identifier used by the second electronic device to communicate with the cloud server; the first electronic device establishes the auxiliary link with the electronic device based on the first communication identifier and the second communication identifier, specifically
  • the method includes: the first electronic device sends a second acquisition request, the second acquisition request is used to acquire the first relay address of the first electronic device; the first electronic device receives the first relay address sent by the cloud server ; The first electronic device sends a first message to the cloud server, the first message carries the second session identifier and the first relay address, and the first message is used between the first electronic device and the second Electronic devices exchange relay addresses; the first electronic device receives the second relay address of the second electronic device sent by the cloud server; after the first electronic device and the second electronic device complete the exchange of relay addresses, the first electronic device
  • the establishment of the server relay link between the first electronic device and the second electronic device can be completed through the cloud server, thereby realizing far-field communication between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the present application provides an electronic device, which is a first electronic device including a display screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the display screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes.
  • the computer program codes include computer instructions.
  • the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, such that The electronic device performs the data sharing method in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
  • the present application provides an electronic device, which is a first electronic device and includes one or more functional modules.
  • the one or more functional modules are used to perform any of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects. Data Sharing Methods.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer storage medium that includes computer instructions.
  • the computer instructions are run on a processor, the data sharing method in any of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects is implemented.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product.
  • the computer program product is run on a computer, the data sharing method in any of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects is implemented.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2A is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2B is a schematic diagram of the software structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2C is a schematic diagram of the software structure of another electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figures 3A to 3Y are schematic interface diagrams of a set of data sharing scenarios provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • Figures 4A-4O are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • Figures 5A-5Y are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • FIGS. 6A-6G are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • Figures 7A-7I are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • Figures 8A-8D are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic flow chart of a data sharing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic flow chart of a data sharing method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figures 12A-12C are schematic diagrams of the acquisition process of information on recently interacted contacts provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13A is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13B is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13C is an architectural schematic diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 14A is a schematic structural diagram of a data packet provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 14B is a schematic structural diagram of fields in a data packet provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of an auxiliary link establishment process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of the acquisition principle of a communication identifier provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of the addressing process in an auxiliary link provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 18 is a functional module interaction flow chart of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of a P2P direct link establishment process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 20 is a schematic diagram of a relay link establishment process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 21 is a schematic diagram of a device wake-up process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 22 is a schematic diagram of the data structure of a data packet provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 23 is a schematic flow chart of a file withdrawal mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 24 is a schematic architectural diagram of an interactive voice response call system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the establishment process of an auxiliary link in an interactive voice response call system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only and shall not be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified, “plurality” The meaning is two or more.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system 10 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 10 may include an electronic device 100 and one or more electronic devices 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 can communicate with one or more electronic devices 200 through different communication methods.
  • electronic device 100 may communicate with one or more electronic devices 200 over a cellular network.
  • the cellular network may include but is not limited to global system for mobile communications (GSM), code division multiple access Access (code division multiple access, CDMA), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), time division synchronous code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long-term evolution (long-term evolution) term evolution (LTE), new radio access (new radio, NR) or other future network systems.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • code division multiple access code division multiple access Access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • TD-SCDMA time division synchronous code division multiple access
  • LTE long-term evolution
  • new radio access new radio, NR
  • electronic device 100 may communicate with one or more electronic devices 200 via short-range communication technology.
  • near field communication includes but is not limited to Bluetooth, wireless loca area network (WLAN), near field communication (NFC), ultra wide band (UWB), infrared, etc.
  • electronic device 100 may communicate with one or more electronic devices 200 via a satellite communications network.
  • satellite communication networks can include Beidou communication network, Tiantong communication network, Starlink communication network, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement an over-the-top (OTT) call with one or more electronic devices 200 through the Internet.
  • OTT call can be a cross-operator development based on the open Internet.
  • a video and other data service business can be implemented through WLAN, and for another example, OTT calls can be implemented based on the operator's cellular data service.
  • the device type of the electronic device 100 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a handheld computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, an ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), a netbook, a cellular phone, Personal digital assistant (PDA), as well as smart home devices such as smart large screens and smart speakers, wearable devices such as smart bracelets, smart watches, and smart glasses, augmented reality (AR), virtual reality (virtual reality (VR), mixed reality (MR) and other extended reality (XR) devices, vehicle-mounted devices or smart city devices, etc. Any of them.
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • MR mixed reality
  • XR extended reality
  • the device type of the electronic device 200 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a handheld computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a super mobile personal computer, a netbook, a cellular phone, a personal digital assistant, as well as smart home devices such as smart large screens and smart speakers. , wearable devices such as smart bracelets, smart watches, and smart glasses, extended reality devices such as augmented reality, virtual reality, and mixed reality, vehicle-mounted devices or smart city devices, and so on.
  • the specific types of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are not particularly limited.
  • the hardware structure of the electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
  • FIG. 2A shows a schematic structural diagram of the electronic device 100.
  • the following uses the electronic device 100 as an example to describe the embodiment in detail. It should be understood that the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2A is only an example, and the electronic device 100 may have more or fewer components than shown in FIG. 2A , two or more components may be combined, or Can have different component configurations.
  • the various components shown in Figure 2A may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
  • the electronic device 100 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2.
  • Mobile communication module 150 wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, And subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figures, or some components may be combined, some components may be separated, or some components may be arranged differently.
  • the components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) wait.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller memory
  • video codec digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • different processing units can be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 .
  • the controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • the processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
  • processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL).
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can separately couple the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 can be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 can be coupled with the audio module 170 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 .
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
  • MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through the CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the GPIO interface can be configured through software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, display screen 194, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, sensor module 180, etc.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices, etc.
  • the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention are only schematic illustrations and do not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also provide power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
  • the power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, internal memory 121, external memory, display screen 194, camera 193, wireless communication module 160, etc.
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters.
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be disposed in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
  • a modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal.
  • the demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194.
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • System global navigation satellite system, GNSS
  • frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
  • near field communication technology near field communication, NFC
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi) -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 implements display functions through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the GPU is an image processing microprocessor and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc.
  • Display 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD).
  • the display panel can also use organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active matrix organic light-emitting diode or active matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), miniled, microled, micro-oled, quantum dot light emitting diode (quantum dot light emitting diode, QLED) and other manufacturing.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement the shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise and brightness. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, Image signals in YUV and other formats.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • Electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • MPEG2 MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
  • NPU is a neural network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural network
  • Intelligent cognitive applications of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement the data storage function. Such as saving music, videos, etc. files in external memory card.
  • Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes instructions stored in the internal memory 121 to execute various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 .
  • the internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a data storage area. Among them, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required for a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.).
  • the storage data area may store data created during use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phone book, etc.).
  • the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also called “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
  • Receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • Microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 170C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which in addition to collecting sound signals, may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions, etc.
  • the headphone interface 170D is used to connect wired headphones.
  • the headphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or may be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals.
  • pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 .
  • pressure sensors 180A there are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc.
  • a capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure based on the change in capacitance.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the angular velocity of electronic device 100 about three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle at which the electronic device 100 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. Gyro sensor 180B can still be used For navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • Air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
  • Magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 may utilize the magnetic sensor 180D to detect opening and closing of the flip holster.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices and be used in horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometer and other applications.
  • Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance.
  • Electronic device 100 can measure distance via infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may utilize the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode.
  • the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light outwardly through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect when the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
  • Fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to achieve fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering of incoming calls, etc.
  • Temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute the temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the low temperature from causing the electronic device 100 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also called “touch panel”.
  • the touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194.
  • the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 180K.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type.
  • Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 at a location different from that of the display screen 194 .
  • Bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be provided in an earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the heart rate detection function.
  • the buttons 190 include a power button, a volume button, etc.
  • Key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
  • the motor 191 can generate vibration prompts.
  • the motor 191 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations for different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • Different application scenarios such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
  • the indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be connected to or separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement calls, data communications, etc. Function.
  • the electronic device 100 uses an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the layered architecture software system can be the Android system, the Harmony operating system (operating system, OS), or other software systems.
  • FIG. 2B is a software structure block diagram of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2B takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software architecture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has clear roles and division of labor.
  • the layers communicate through software interfaces.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom: application layer, application framework layer, Android runtime and system libraries, and kernel layer.
  • the application layer can include a series of application packages.
  • the application package can include camera, gallery, calendar, calling, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message and other applications.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (API) and programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • API application programming interface
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer can include a window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can obtain the display size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make this data accessible to applications.
  • Said data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, etc.
  • a view system can be used to build applications.
  • the display interface can be composed of one or more views.
  • a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • the phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 .
  • call status management including connected, hung up, etc.
  • the resource manager provides various resources to applications, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, etc.
  • the notification manager allows applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
  • the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be notifications that appear in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of charts or scroll bar text, such as notifications for applications running in the background, or notifications that appear on the screen in the form of conversation windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a beep sounds, the electronic device vibrates, the indicator light flashes, etc.
  • Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that need to be called by the Java language, and the other is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and application framework layer into binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection and other functions.
  • System libraries can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media libraries (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing libraries (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engines (for example: SGL), etc.
  • the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, composition, and layer processing.
  • 2D Graphics Engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
  • the following exemplifies the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 in conjunction with capturing the photographing scene.
  • the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
  • the kernel layer processes touch operations into raw input events (including touch coordinates, timestamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level.
  • the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event.
  • the touch operation is a touch click operation, and the click operation
  • the corresponding control is the control of the camera application icon.
  • the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer to capture still images or videos through the camera 193 .
  • FIG. 2C exemplarily shows a software system architecture diagram of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may include an application processor system and a wireless communication system. in:
  • the wireless communication system may include, but is not limited to, at least one of the following: cellular communication system (such as 2G/3G/4G/5G/6G, etc.), satellite system (such as Beidou, Tiantong, Starlink, etc.), Wi-Fi, BT, NFC, UWB, etc.
  • cellular communication system such as 2G/3G/4G/5G/6G, etc.
  • satellite system such as Beidou, Tiantong, Starlink, etc.
  • Wi-Fi such as BT, NFC, UWB, etc.
  • the wireless communication system may include a coprocessor (CoProcessor, CP) and/or a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), where the CP in the terminal may be a baseband chip plus a coprocessor or Multimedia accelerator, CP can include the digital components required to communicate with the network, CP can include a reduced instruction set computer (RISC) microprocessor (advanced RISC machines, ARM)-based processor and a DSP.
  • RISC reduced instruction set computer
  • the CP can have an operating system and can communicate with an application processor running Android, IOS, Windows and other operating systems through a high speed (HS) serial connection.
  • CP can implement processing logic such as VR, AR, image processing, high fidelity (HiFi), high-speed data transmission (high data rate, HDR), and sensor management. It is not limited to this, the CP can also be a cellular processor (CP).
  • the application processor system is used to implement control logic such as rendering and presentation of the user interface, input and response to user operations, business functions, and playback of multimedia data such as audio/video.
  • the application processor system may include a sharing module, a discovery module, a Wi-Fi function module, a BT function module, a UWB function module, a satellite (Satellite) function module, a Wi-Fi link module, a BT link module, and a UWB link module. Satellite link module. in:
  • the fusion call (FusionCall) module can be understood as the core functional module for sharing data.
  • the functions of the integrated call module may include but are not limited to the following functions: 1. responsible for calling the network address service module to manage the auxiliary link (for example, the establishment and release of the auxiliary link). 2.
  • responsible for reading shared content data for example, file data, location information, open links, calendars, application installation packages, etc.).
  • 3. responsible for the offloading, transmission, and unpacking of shared content data, etc. 4.
  • UX interfaces including but not limited to: system sharing interface (including options for currently interacting contacts or options for recently interacted contacts), in-app sharing interfaces/windows Options for interactive contacts or options for recently interacted contacts, sending window, receiving window, prompt information, buttons/controls, etc.
  • the discovery module is used to discover nearby devices through near field communication technologies such as Wi-Fi, BT, and D2D.
  • the discovery module is called Nearby, for example. It is not limited to this, and the device can also be discovered through far-field communication technologies such as cellular communication technology, satellite, and Wi-Fi. This application does not limit the communication technology of the discovered device.
  • the network address service module can be used to be responsible for managing the auxiliary link (for example, the establishment and release of the auxiliary link).
  • the Wi-Fi function module is used to implement Wi-Fi communication with other devices based on the Wi-Fi communication protocol.
  • the BT function module is used to communicate with other devices based on BT or Bluetooth low energy (BLE).
  • BLE Bluetooth low energy
  • the UWB function module is used to share data based on UWB communication technology.
  • the satellite function module is used to share data based on satellite communication.
  • the Wi-Fi link module is used to manage Wi-Fi links, such as but not limited to link establishment, release, data transmission, etc.
  • the BT link module is used to manage BT links, including but not limited to link establishment, release, data transmission, etc.
  • the UWB link module is used to manage UWB links, including but not limited to link establishment, release, data transmission, etc.
  • the satellite link module is used to manage communication satellite links, including but not limited to link establishment, release, data transmission, etc.
  • the wireless communication system of the electronic device 100 includes a cellular communication module, a Wi-Fi communication module, a BT communication module and a satellite communication module, wherein:
  • Cellular communication module includes Internet protocol (IP) multimedia system (IP multimedia subsystem, IMS) communication module, circuit switching (circuited switched, CS) communication module and 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast module.
  • IP Internet protocol
  • the communication module can, but is not limited to, realize LTE voice call (voice over LTE, VoLTE), LTE video call (video over LTE, ViLTE), NR voice call (voice over NR, VoNR), NR video call (video over NR, ViNR) , Wi-Fi voice call (voice over Wi-Fi, VoWiFi), Wi-Fi video call (video over Wi-Fi, ViWiFi), evolved packet system fallback (evolved packet system-Fallback, EPS-Fallback), etc. based on IMS protocol call.
  • the CS communication module can provide the CS Fallback function.
  • the 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast module can be used to monitor the 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast channel.
  • the electronic device 100 may be within the coverage area of at least one base station, and any one of the at least one base station may broadcast to electronic devices (including electronic devices) in the coverage area through broadcast channels.
  • the sub-device 100) sends broadcast data (such as audio stream/video stream and other multimedia data). Any base station can maintain at least one channel, and the broadcast data corresponding to different channels can be different. In some examples, the user can select a channel corresponding to the received broadcast data through the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can receive broadcast data sent by the base station through a 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast module, and the 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast module can report it through a cellular communication network card (not shown) at the kernel layer. Processed at the system level.
  • the electronic device 100 can play the received broadcast data through a system application (such as a call) or a third-party application (such as a chat application, conferencing application), and the electronic device 100 can share the played content with other devices.
  • the electronic device 100 may not play the received broadcast data, but directly share the received broadcast data with other devices, or share the processed broadcast data with other devices.
  • the Wi-Fi communication module may include hardware modules for WiFi communication, such as firmware and chips.
  • the BT communication module may include hardware modules for BT communication, such as firmware and chips.
  • the satellite communication module may include hardware modules for satellite communication, such as firmware and chips.
  • the hardware structure of the electronic device 200 may refer to the hardware structure of the electronic device 100 in FIG. 2A
  • the software framework of the electronic device 2000 may refer to the software framework of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2B or 2C .
  • the electronic device 200 may include more, less, or the same hardware structure as the electronic device 100
  • the electronic device 200 may include more, fewer, or the same software modules as the electronic device 100 , which is not limited in this application.
  • Figures 3A to 3Y exemplarily illustrate some data sharing scenarios provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can share locally stored files such as pictures or videos with other devices.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a picture display interface 3010.
  • the picture display interface 3010 includes a picture 3011 and a menu 3012.
  • the menu 3012 may include a share button 3013, a favorite button 3014, an edit button 3015, a delete button 3016, and a more button 3017.
  • the picture 3011 may have a title, for example, "Landscape.”
  • the share button 3013 can be used to trigger opening of the system sharing interface.
  • the collection button 3014 can be used to trigger collection of the picture 3011 to the picture collection folder.
  • the edit button 3015 can be used to trigger editing functions such as rotating, trimming, adding filters, blurring, etc. to the picture 3011.
  • the delete button 3016 can be used to trigger deletion of the picture 3011.
  • the more button 3017 can be used to trigger opening of more image-related functions.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the share button 3013, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing interface 3020 as shown in FIG. 3B.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing interface 3020 as shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the system sharing interface 3020 includes an area 3021, an area 3022 and an area 3023.
  • the area 3021 may be used to display one or more pictures or videos in the gallery of the electronic device 100 , and the one or more pictures or videos may include pictures or videos selected by the user.
  • a mark may be displayed on the selected picture, and the mark may be used to indicate that the corresponding picture is selected (that is, the picture has been selected by the user).
  • the pictures or video images displayed in this area 3021 may be thumbnails.
  • the original image corresponding to the picture or video picture displayed in the area 3021 can be stored on the electronic device 100 .
  • Area 3022 may be used to display options for nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100 (eg, “Alee’s phone” option, “HUAWEI P50” option, “HUAWEI P50 Pro” option).
  • the electronic device 100 When the electronic device 100 is searching for a nearby device, it may display a search prompt in the area 3022 (for example, a text prompt such as "Discovering a nearby device, the other party needs to turn on Bluetooth and WLAN").
  • Icons with one or more service options for example, chat application icon, welink application icon, smooth connection application icon, chat application icon, mail application icon, browser application icon, information application icon, WLAN direct connection
  • the application or protocol corresponding to the service option can support sharing user-selected pictures to contacts or servers. Users can share data through the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. For example, the selected picture is shared to one or more contacts in the chat application, or the selected picture is shared to the dynamic publishing platform (ie, server) of the chat application, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (such as a click) for the option of "Alee's Phone", and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send the picture or video selected by the user to the location corresponding to the option of "Alee's Phone". on the device.
  • the user's input such as a click
  • the electronic device 100 may send the picture or video selected by the user to the location corresponding to the option of "Alee's Phone". on the device.
  • the electronic device 100 can share the playback link of the specified video in the video application to other devices.
  • the designated videos include but are not limited to short videos (for example, videos that are shorter than the designated playback time, etc.), long videos (for example, movies and TV series that exceed the designated playback time, etc.), live videos, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a video application interface 3030.
  • the video application interface 3030 may include a video playback screen 3031 of a short video or a live video, an account icon 3032, a like icon 3033, a comment icon 3034, and a favorite image.
  • logo 3035 and sharing icon 3036 video text (for example, "Seaside Vacation"), video publisher name (for example, "User 1"), etc.
  • the account icon 3032 can display the avatar of the publishing account of the short video or live video
  • the like icon 3033 can be used to mark that the short video or live video is liked by the user
  • the comment icon 3034 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display Comment information for this short video or live video.
  • the favorite icon 3035 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to save the playback link of the short video or live video to the favorites associated with the logged-in account on the video application.
  • the sharing icon 3036 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the play link of the short video or live video.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the share icon 3036, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3040 as shown in FIG. 3D.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3040 as shown in FIG. 3D.
  • the menu window 3040 includes one or more options for sharing services.
  • the sharing service options may include sharing options within the video application (for example, forwarding options, private message options) and/or sharing options for other applications (for example, friend circle options, chat application options, Weilink application options, etc. ).
  • This forwarding option can be used to forward the short video or live video to the circle of friends of the logged-in account on the video application.
  • the private message option can be used by the electronic device 100 to forward the short video or live video to contacts associated with the logged-in account on the video application.
  • the circle of friends option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the play link of the short video or live video to the circle of friends of the logged-in account in the chat application.
  • the chat application option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the play link of the short video or live video to the contact in the chat application.
  • the welink application option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the playback link of the short video or live video to the contact in the welink application.
  • the menu window 3040 may also include other functional controls (for example, reporting controls, collection controls, save controls, link copy controls, etc.).
  • the electronic device 100 may switch to display more options of the sharing service on the menu window 3040 in response to the user's input (eg, sliding input) on the menu window 3040 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display more controls 3041 in the menu window 3040.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more control 3041, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 3050 as shown in FIG. 3F.
  • the system sharing window 3050 may include the play link option 3051, area 3052 and area 3053 of the above-mentioned short video or live video.
  • the play link option 3051 may display description information for the short video or live video (for example, "I just saw this in the short video, come and watch: [Seaside Vacation]”).
  • This area 3052 can be used to display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100, and one or more user options (for example, "Alee's mobile phone” option, "HUAWEI P50" option, "HUAWEI P50 Pro” option). This user option corresponds to nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 When the electronic device 100 is searching for nearby devices, it may display a search prompt in area 3052 (for example, text prompts such as "Discovering nearby devices, the other party needs to turn on Bluetooth and WLAN").
  • Icons with one or more service options for example, chat application icon, welink application icon, smooth connection application icon, chat application icon, mail application icon, browser application icon, information application icon, WLAN direct connection
  • the application or protocol corresponding to the service option can support sharing the playback link of the short video or live video selected by the user to a contact or server. Users can share data through the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. For example, share the playback link of the selected short video or live video to one or more contacts in the chat application, or share the playback link of the selected short video or live video to the dynamic publishing platform (i.e. server) of the chat application. etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (such as a click) for the user option (such as the option of "Alee's mobile phone"), and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may play the link of the short video or live video selected by the user. and the description information is sent to the nearby device corresponding to the option of the user (for example, the option of "Alee's phone").
  • the user's input such as a click
  • the user option such as the option of "Alee's mobile phone
  • the electronic device 100 can share the open link of a specified online article in an information application to other devices.
  • the designated online articles include but are not limited to news, blogs, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a news application interface 3060.
  • the news application interface 3060 may include the title of the news article (for example, "Golf boy Alee won the gold medal in his debut"), the content of the news article (for example, “Yesterday, golf boy Alee made his debut at the golf tournament, winning four rounds of gold”). The total score of 267 won the gold medal.”), the name of the publisher of the news article (for example, "Morning News”) and avatar, more controls 3061.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more control 3061, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a share menu 3070 as shown in FIG. 3H.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a share menu 3070 as shown in FIG. 3H.
  • the sharing menu 3070 may include one or more sharing service options.
  • the one or more sharing service options may include sharing options within the news application (for example, private message options and forwarding options, etc.) and/or sharing options for other applications (for example, friend circle options, chat application options , welink application options, etc.), and system sharing options 3071.
  • This forwarding option can be used to forward the open link of the news article to the circle of friends of the logged-in account on the video application.
  • This private message option is available on electronic devices 100 Send the opening link of the news article to the contact associated with the logged-in account on the video application.
  • the friend circle option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the open link of the news article to the friend circle of the logged-in account in the chat application.
  • the chat application option may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the open link of the news article to the contact in the chat application.
  • the welink application option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the open link of the news article to the contact in the welink application.
  • the sharing menu 3070 may also include other functional controls (for example, collection controls, link copy controls, etc.).
  • the electronic device 100 may respond to the user's input (eg, click) on the system sharing option 3071 in the sharing menu 3070, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 3080 as shown in FIG. 3I.
  • the user's input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 3080 as shown in FIG. 3I.
  • the system sharing window 3080 may include the open link option 3081, area 3082 and area 3083 of the above-mentioned news article.
  • the open link option 3081 may display description information of the news article (for example, "News Information APP: [Golfer Alee wins gold medal in debut]”).
  • This area 3082 can be used to display options for nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100 (for example, "Alee's mobile phone” option, "HUAWEI P50" option, "HUAWEI P50 Pro” option).
  • a search prompt in area 3082 for example, text prompts such as "Discovering nearby devices, the other party needs to turn on Bluetooth and WLAN").
  • Icons with one or more service options may be displayed in the area 3083 icon, etc.
  • the application or protocol corresponding to the service option may support the sharing of user-selected news articles to open connections to contacts or servers. Users can share data through the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. For example, the open link of the selected news article is shared to one or more contacts of the chat application, or the open link of the selected news article is shared to the dynamic publishing platform (i.e., server) of the chat application, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) for the option of "Alee's Phone", and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send an open link of the news article that the user is browsing to the option of "Alee's Phone” on the corresponding nearby device.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may send an open link of the news article that the user is browsing to the option of "Alee's Phone” on the corresponding nearby device.
  • the electronic device 100 can share the location information of a specified location with other devices in a map application.
  • the designated location may be an address selected by the user on the map, or the current location of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can share the location of the scenic spot selected by the user with other devices in a map application.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a map application interface 3090.
  • the map application interface 3090 includes an address search input box 3091, a search control 3092, a map 3093, a mark 3094 of the location of the scenic spot, and a mark 3095 of the location of the electronic device 100 in the map 3093.
  • the address search input box 3091 can be used to receive the address name input by the user.
  • the search control 3092 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the location information corresponding to the address name input by the user.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a selection operation (eg, click) for the marker 3094 of the attraction location, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the address details window 3096 as shown in FIG. 3K .
  • a selection operation eg, click
  • the address details window 3096 may include location information 3097 corresponding to the scenic spot location (for example, "No. 4065, Xilihu Road, Nanshan District, Shenzhen City, Guangdong province", etc.), route controls, and sharing controls. 3098, collection controls, peripheral controls, etc.
  • the route control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display route information corresponding to the location of the electronic device 100 to the location of the scenic spot.
  • the sharing control 3098 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the scenic spot location with other devices or contacts.
  • the collection control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to collect the location information of the scenic spot into favorites, so that the user can quickly find the location information of the scenic spot when opening the map application next time.
  • Electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the share control 3098, and in response to the input, electronic device 100 may display menu window 3100 as shown in FIG. 3L.
  • user input eg, click
  • the menu window 3100 may include one or more options for sharing services.
  • the one or more sharing service options may include sharing options within the map application (for example, private message options) and/or sharing options for other applications (for example, friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc. etc.), and more sharing options3101, etc.
  • the private message option can be used by the electronic device 100 to forward the location information of the attraction location to contacts associated with the logged-in account on the map application.
  • the friend circle option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the location information of the scenic spot location to the friend circle of the logged-in account in the chat application.
  • the chat application option may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the location information of the scenic spot location to the contact in the chat application.
  • the welink application option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the location information of the scenic spot location to the contact in the welink application.
  • the more sharing options 3101 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function on the electronic device 100 and display the system sharing window.
  • the sharing menu 3070 may also include other functional controls (eg, picture generation controls, etc.), which may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to generate a picture of the map portion currently displayed by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to user input (eg, click) in the more sharing options 3101, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a system sharing window 3110 as shown in FIG. 3M.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a system sharing window 3110 as shown in FIG. 3M.
  • the system sharing window 3110 may include the location information option 3111, area 3112 and area 3113 of the scenic spot location.
  • the location information option 3111 may display the location information of the scenic spot location (for example, "This is No. 4065, Xilihu Road, Nanshan District, Shenzhen City, Guangdong province.").
  • This area 3082 can be used to display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100 (for example, "Alee's mobile phone” option, "HUAWEI P50" option, "HUAWEI P50 Pro” option). This user option corresponds to nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 When the electronic device 100 is searching for nearby devices, it may display a search prompt in area 3082 (for example, text prompts such as "Discovering nearby devices, the other party needs to turn on Bluetooth and WLAN").
  • Icons with one or more service options for example, chat application icon, welink application icon, smooth connection application icon, chat application icon, mail application icon, browser application icon, information application icon, WLAN direct connection
  • the application or protocol corresponding to the service option can support sharing user-selected location information to contacts or servers. Users can share data through the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. For example, the selected location information is shared to one or more contacts of the chat application, or the selected location information is shared to the dynamic publishing platform (ie, server) of the chat application, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's input (such as a click) for the option of "Alee's Phone", and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 can send the location information of the above-mentioned attraction location to the vicinity corresponding to the option of "Alee's Phone". on the device.
  • the user's input such as a click
  • the electronic device 100 can send the location information of the above-mentioned attraction location to the vicinity corresponding to the option of "Alee's Phone". on the device.
  • the electronic device 100 shares the location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 with other devices.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a map application interface 3090.
  • the map application interface 3090 you may refer to the text description part of the embodiment shown in FIG. 3J, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's selection operation (eg, click) on the location mark 3095 in the map application interface 3090, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display an address details window 3120 as shown in FIG. 3O.
  • a user's selection operation eg, click
  • the address details window 3120 may include location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 (for example, "at the parking lot at the southeast gate of Shenzhen Wildlife Park"), sharing controls 3121, check-in controls, and so on.
  • the sharing control 3121 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 with other devices or contacts.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the sharing control 3121, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3130 as shown in FIG. 3P.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3130 as shown in FIG. 3P.
  • the menu window 3130 may include one or more options for sharing services.
  • the one or more sharing service options may include sharing options within the map application (for example, private message options) and/or sharing options for other applications (for example, friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc. etc.), and more sharing options 3131, etc.
  • sharing options within the map application for example, private message options
  • sharing options for other applications for example, friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc. etc.
  • sharing options 3131 for the text description of the menu window 3130, please refer to the text description of the menu window 3100 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3L, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to user input (eg, click) in the more sharing options 3131, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a system sharing window 3140 as shown in FIG. 3Q.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a system sharing window 3140 as shown in FIG. 3Q.
  • the system sharing window 3140 may include a location information option 3141, an area 3142 and an area 3143 of the current location of the electronic device 100.
  • the location information option 3141 may display location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 (for example, "I am in the parking lot of the southeast gate of Shenzhen Wildlife Park") and/or an open link of the location.
  • For the text description of the area 3142 please refer to the text description of the area 3112 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M.
  • the text description of the area 3143 please refer to the text description of the area 3113 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M. I won’t go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (eg, click) for the option of "Alee's mobile phone" in the area 3142, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 to "Alee's mobile phone". ” option on nearby devices.
  • the user's input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may send location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 to "Alee's mobile phone". ” option on nearby devices.
  • the electronic device 100 can share the installation package or download link of the application installed on the electronic device 100 to other devices.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 3150.
  • the desktop 3150 displays a page on which application icons are placed.
  • the page includes multiple application icons (for example, weather application icon, stock application icon, calculator application icon, settings application icon, mail application icon, music application icon, video Application icon, browser application icon, map application icon, gallery application icon, memo application icon, voice assistant application icon, etc.).
  • a status bar is displayed in an upper part of the desktop 3150.
  • the status bar may include: one or more signal strength indicators of mobile communication signals (also called cellular signals), battery status indicators, and time. Indicators, etc.
  • Page indicators are also displayed below multiple application icons to indicate the total number of pages on the desktop 3150 and the positional relationship between the currently displayed page and other pages.
  • the desktop 3150 may include three pages, and a white dot in the page indicator may indicate that the currently displayed page is the rightmost page among the three pages. Further optionally, there are multiple trays below the page indicator Icons (such as dialer application icon, messaging application icon, contact application icon, camera application icon), the tray icon remains displayed when switching pages.
  • a white dot in the page indicator may indicate that the currently displayed page is the rightmost page among the three pages.
  • there are multiple trays below the page indicator Icons such as dialer application icon, messaging application icon, contact application icon, camera application icon
  • the electronic device 100 may receive input (eg, long press) for the map application icon 3151, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a shortcut menu 3152 as shown in FIG. 3S.
  • input eg, long press
  • the electronic device 100 may display a shortcut menu 3152 as shown in FIG. 3S.
  • the shortcut menu 3152 may include a sharing control 3153 and an uninstalling control 3154.
  • the sharing control 3153 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing window to share the map application with other devices or contacts.
  • the uninstall control 3154 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to uninstall the map application.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the sharing control 3153, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 3160 as shown in FIG. 3T.
  • user input eg, click
  • the system sharing window 3160 may include a map application option 3161 , an area 3162 and an area 3163 .
  • the map application option 3161 may display the name of the map application (for example, "map"), data size (for example, "40.82MB”), file type (for example, "base.apk”), and so on.
  • the text description for the area 3162 may refer to the text description for the area 3112 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M.
  • the text description for the area 3163 may refer to the text description for the area 3113 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M. I won’t go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's input for the option of "Alee's mobile phone" in the area 3162, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 can send the installation package of the map application or the download link of the map application to "Alee's mobile phone” options on nearby devices.
  • the electronic device 100 can share contact information on the electronic device 100 with other devices.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a contact application interface 3170.
  • the contact application interface 3170 includes options for one or more contacts (eg, "Alice” option 3174, “Anna” option, “Bob” option, “Britney” option, etc.).
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the "Alice” option 3174, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the contact information interface 3180 as shown in FIG. 3V.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display the contact information interface 3180 as shown in FIG. 3V.
  • the contact information interface 3180 may include the name, avatar, phone number (for example, "186XXXXXXX" of the contact "Alice", a voice call control 3181, a video call control 3182, a text message control 3183, and a collection control. 3184, editing control 3185, more options control 3186, and so on.
  • the voice call control 3181 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to make a voice call to the electronic device of the contact "Alice”.
  • the video call control 3182 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to make a video call to the electronic device of the contact "Alice".
  • the text message control 3183 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send a text message to the electronic device of the contact "Alice".
  • the collection control 3184 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to collect the contact information of the contact "Alice” into favorites.
  • the editing control 3185 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to modify the contact information of the contact "Alice”.
  • the more options control 3186 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display more contact functions.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more options control 3186, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3187 as shown in FIG. 3W.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3187 as shown in FIG. 3W.
  • the menu window 3187 may include a share contact option 3188, a blacklist option, a create shortcut option, a delete contact option, and so on.
  • the share contact option 3188 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing window to share the contact information of the contact "Alice” with other contacts or other devices.
  • the add blacklist option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add the contact "Alice” to the blacklist, so as to prohibit the contact "Alice” from making incoming audio calls or video calls and sending text messages.
  • the create shortcut option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to create a shortcut of the contact information interface 3180 and place it on the desktop, so that the user can quickly open the contact interface 3180 directly from the desktop through the shortcut.
  • the delete contact option may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to delete the contact information of the contact "Alice".
  • the electronic device 100 receives user input (eg, a click) to the share contact option 3188, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3190 as described in FIG. 3X.
  • user input eg, a click
  • the menu window 3190 may include one or more sharing mode options and a cancel control 3194.
  • the one or more sharing method options include QR code option 3191, vCard option 3192, text option 3193, and so on.
  • the QR code option 3191 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Alice” in the form of a QR code to other contacts or other devices.
  • the vCard option 3192 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Alice” in the form of a vCard to other contacts or other devices.
  • the text option 3193 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Alice” to other contacts or other devices in text form.
  • the cancel control 3194 is used to close the menu window 3190.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the QR code option 3191, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100
  • the system sharing window 3200 shown in Figure 3Y may be displayed.
  • the system sharing window 3200 may include a contact information option 3201, an area 3202, and an area 3203.
  • the contact information option 3201 may display a QR code or a thumbnail of the QR code generated based on the contact information of the contact "Alice", as well as the data size (for example, 21.79KB), name ( For example, "Alice's contact information.jpg”) and so on.
  • the text description for the area 3202 may refer to the text description for the area 3112 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M.
  • the text description for the area 3203 may refer to the text description for the area 3113 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M. I won’t go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (eg, click) for the option "Alee's mobile phone" in the area 3202, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may generate a QR code based on the contact information of the contact "Alice". , the option to send to "Alee's phone” corresponds to the nearby device.
  • the user's input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may generate a QR code based on the contact information of the contact "Alice”.
  • the option to send to "Alee's phone” corresponds to the nearby device.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 calls the system sharing function to share, it can only share the nearby devices that the electronic device 100 searches for at a close distance. If there are devices nearby 100 or the electronic device 100 cannot search for devices through Bluetooth or WiFi, the electronic device 100 cannot share. If the electronic device 100 wants to share data with these devices near the electronic device 100 or devices that the electronic device 100 cannot search through Bluetooth or WiFi, the same designated application needs to be downloaded on both the electronic device 100 and these devices, and the electronic device 100 needs to The logged-in account of the specified application and the logged-in account of the specified application on these devices must have an associated relationship, that is, the two accounts are friends with each other. In this way, the sharing operation is more complicated.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a data sharing method, which can enable the electronic device 100 to share data (for example, pictures, videos, document files, location information, links, contacts, calendars, The option to add currently interacting contacts (e.g., current call contacts) and/or recently interacted contacts in the system sharing interface (or window) of an application package, etc.) or in the in-app sharing interface (or window) (For example, recent call contacts, recent private message contacts, etc.) options, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's input on the options of the currently interacted contact and/or the options of the recently interacted contact, the electronic device 100 shares the specified data selected by the user to the electronic device 200 corresponding to the contact specified by the user. .
  • the electronic device 100 can share data with devices that are not near the electronic device 100 and can also share content with some unfamiliar devices, which expands the sharing scenarios and improves the user's sharing experience.
  • the interaction between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may include: operator calls, receiving/sending text messages, interactions within social applications, and so on.
  • interactions within social applications can include OTT calls, receiving/sending private messages, liking/being liked, commenting/being commented on, following/being followed, collecting/favoriting the other party’s live broadcast, content posted in friend circles, etc.
  • Interactive social the social applications include but are not limited to instant messaging applications, live video applications, music playing applications, and other applications with multi-user social attributes.
  • a data sharing method provided in the embodiment of this application is introduced below in combination with application scenarios.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input and trigger the processing of specified data ( For example, sharing of pictures, videos, document files, location information, links, contacts, calendars, application packages, memos, etc.).
  • the electronic device 100 may display a system sharing window or system sharing interface for the specified data, wherein the system sharing window or system sharing interface for the specified data includes a sharing object option corresponding to the device currently being called by the electronic device 100 (for example, , the electronic device 200 corresponds to the sharing object option).
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input of the option of the sharing object, and transmit specified data to the device being called through a transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the device being called. In this way, the user can share the data content that the user wants to share with the other party in a timely manner while using the electronic device 100 to communicate with the other party, thereby improving the user's experience of sharing data.
  • 4A to 4I exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram of the electronic device 100 sharing data such as pictures to the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 is talking to the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can make a voice call with the electronic device 200 and display the call interface 4010 .
  • the call interface 4010 may include the phone number 4013 of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXX"), the call duration 4014 (for example, "00:15"), and one or more call function controls, etc.
  • the one or more call function controls include, but are not limited to, recording controls, waiting controls, add call controls, video call controls, mute controls, contact controls, dial controls, hang up controls, external call controls, and so on.
  • the recording control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to record the conversation between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 .
  • the waiting control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to suspend the call with the electronic device 200 .
  • the add call control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add a call with other devices.
  • the video call control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to switch the voice call with the electronic device 200 to a video call.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a video call interface.
  • the video call The interface may include images captured by the camera of the electronic device 200 .
  • the video call interface may also include images captured by the camera of the electronic device 100 .
  • the mute control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending voice data to the electronic device 200 .
  • a status bar 4011 is displayed in an upper part of the call interface 4010.
  • the status bar 4011 may include one or more status indicators.
  • the one or more status indicators include mobile communication signals (also known as One or more signal strength indicators for cellular signals, Wi-Fi signal indicators, battery status indicators, time indicators, etc.
  • the above-mentioned call interface 4010 may also include the contact name 4012 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice") . If the electronic device 100 also stores a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the call interface 4010 may also include a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice").
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an input from the user to exit the call interface 4010 (eg, slide upward from the bottom edge of the display screen), and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 4020 as shown in FIG. 4B .
  • the call interface 4010 e.g, slide upward from the bottom edge of the display screen
  • the desktop 4020 displays a page on which application icons are placed.
  • the page includes multiple application icons (for example, a weather application icon, a stock application icon, a calculator application icon, a settings application icon, and an email application icon). , music application icon, video application icon, browser application icon, map application icon 4022, gallery application icon 4023, memo application icon 4024, voice assistant application icon, etc.).
  • Page indicators are also displayed below multiple application icons to indicate the total number of pages on the desktop 4020 and the positional relationship between the currently displayed page and other pages.
  • the desktop 4020 may include three pages, and a white dot in the page indicator may indicate that the currently displayed page is the rightmost page among the three pages.
  • tray icons such as a dialing application icon, a messaging application icon, a contact application icon 4025, and a camera application icon
  • the tray icons remain displayed when the page is switched.
  • the above-mentioned status bar 4011 is displayed in an upper part of the desktop 4020.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a call icon 4021 on the status bar 4011.
  • the call icon 4021 can display the call time (for example, "00:18").
  • the call icon 4021 can also display the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXX" and/or the electronic device. 200's phone number corresponds to the contact name (for example, "Alice").
  • the call icon 4021 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the above-mentioned call interface 4010.
  • the status bar 4011 can remain displayed in the top area of the touch screen when the display interface on the touch screen is switched.
  • the call icon 4021 can also remain displayed in the status bar 4011 when the interface displayed on the touch screen is switched but the interface displayed on the touch screen is not the above-mentioned call interface 4010.
  • the call icon 4021 may not be displayed in the status bar 4011, or may be displayed anywhere on the touch screen in the form of a floating ball. The user may also drag the call icon 4021 to adjust the call icon 4021. Display position on the touch screen.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the gallery application icon 4023, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the gallery application interface 4030 as shown in FIG. 4C.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display the gallery application interface 4030 as shown in FIG. 4C.
  • the gallery application interface 4030 may include one or more album options (for example, all photo albums 4031, video albums, camera albums, screenshot directory albums, chat application albums, Changlian application albums, etc.) .
  • album options for example, all photo albums 4031, video albums, camera albums, screenshot directory albums, chat application albums, Changlian application albums, etc.
  • each album option is the name of the album and the number of photos and/or videos in the album.
  • the photo album 4031 contains 2160 photos
  • the video album contains 6 videos.
  • the gallery application interface 4030 also includes a new photo album control. The new photo album control can be used to trigger the creation of a new photo album in the gallery application interface 4030.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's operation (eg, click) on the all-photo album 4031, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display an album interface 4040 as shown in FIG. 4D.
  • a user's operation eg, click
  • the title of the album interface 4040 may be "all photos”.
  • the album interface 4040 includes thumbnails of one or more pictures (for example, thumbnail 4041).
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the thumbnail 4041, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a picture display interface 4050 as shown in FIG. 4E.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a picture display interface 4050 as shown in FIG. 4E.
  • the title of the picture display interface 4050 may be "Landscape".
  • the picture display interface 4050 displays a picture 4051 and a menu 4052.
  • the menu 4052 includes a share button 4053, a collection button, an edit button, a delete button, and a more button.
  • the share button 4053 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and open the system sharing interface.
  • the collection button can be used to trigger collection of the picture 4051 to the picture collection folder.
  • the edit button can be used to trigger editing functions such as rotating, trimming, adding filters, blurring, etc. to the image.
  • the delete button can be used to trigger deletion of the image 4051.
  • the More button can be used to trigger the opening of more features related to that image 4051.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the share button 4053, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing interface 4060 as shown in FIG. 4F.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing interface 4060 as shown in FIG. 4F.
  • the system sharing interface 4060 may include an area 4061, an area 4062, and an area 4064. in:
  • This area 4061 can be used to display one or more pictures or videos in the gallery, and the one or more pictures or videos can include pictures or videos selected by the user.
  • a mark may be displayed on the selected picture, and the mark may be used to indicate that the corresponding picture is selected (that is, the picture has been selected by the user).
  • the pictures or video images displayed in this area 4061 may be thumbnails.
  • the original image corresponding to the picture or video picture displayed in area 4061 can be stored on the electronic device 100 .
  • This area 4062 may be used to display device options 4063 of the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking.
  • the device option 4063 may display a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, and the device option 4063 may display a contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice").
  • prompt information 4065 (for example, text prompt "on call”, etc.) may also be displayed around the device option 4063.
  • the prompt information 4065 is used to prompt that the device option 4063 is an electronic device that is talking to the electronic device 100.
  • the area 4062 may also display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the device options of the nearby devices in the area 4062 (for example, the "Alee's mobile phone” option, "HUAWEI P50” option).
  • This area 4064 displays one or more service options (eg, mail icon, browser icon, information icon, WLAN direct icon, etc.).
  • service options eg, mail icon, browser icon, information icon, WLAN direct icon, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can talk to multiple contacts at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display options of the multiple contacts with whom the electronic device 100 is talking in the above-mentioned system sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can make operator calls with multiple contacts.
  • the electronic device 100 can conduct voice conference calls or video conference calls with multiple contacts simultaneously through the operator network.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an incoming call from contact B through the operator network while having an operator call with contact A through the operator network.
  • the electronic device 100 may hold a carrier call with contact A and conduct a carrier call with contact B through the carrier network.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine that the contacts being called by the electronic device 100 include contact A and contact B.
  • the electronic device 100 can make OTT calls with multiple contacts.
  • the electronic device 100 can make a voice conference call or a video conference call with multiple contacts in the OTT application through the OTT application.
  • the electronic device 100 may first make an OTT call with contact A in the OTT application, the electronic device 100 may hold the OTT call with contact A, and make an OTT call with contact B through the OTT application. At this time, the electronic device 100 may determine that the contacts being called by the electronic device 100 include contact A and contact B in the OTT application.
  • the electronic device 100 can conduct operator calls and OTT calls with multiple contacts.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an incoming call from contact B in the OTT application while having an operator call with contact A through the operator network.
  • the electronic device 100 can keep the operator call with contact A and make an OTT call with contact B in the OTT application through the OTT application.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine that the contacts being called by the electronic device 100 include contact A who reserves the call with the operator and contact B who makes the OTT call through the OTT application.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an incoming call from contact A through the operator's network while making an OTT call with contact B through an OTT application.
  • the electronic device 100 may keep the OTT call with contact B and conduct a carrier call with contact A through the carrier network.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine that the contacts being called by the electronic device 100 include contact A who is making the operator call through the operator network and contact B who is holding the OTT call.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the device option 4063, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 4070 as shown in FIG. 4G.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 4070 as shown in FIG. 4G.
  • the sending window 4070 may include the file name of the above picture 4051, the thumbnail 4071 of the above picture 4051, a sending prompt 4072 and a cancel control 4073.
  • the sending prompt 4072 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently requesting to send pictures to the electronic device 200 communicating with the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the sending prompt 4072 can be a text prompt (for example, "Requesting to send 1 picture (2.4MB) to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt.”), picture prompt, animated picture prompt, video prompt, etc. any one or more.
  • the cancel control 4073 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending pictures to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 4080.
  • the confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the picture sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the sending window 4080 may include a thumbnail 4081 of the above picture 4051 and a sending prompt 4082.
  • the sending window 4080 may also include a sending progress bar 4083 and a cancellation control 4084.
  • the sending prompt 4082 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently sending pictures to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the sending prompt 4082 may be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Sending 1 picture (2.4MB) to Alice"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc.
  • the sending progress bar 4083 can be used to indicate the progress of the electronic device 100 sending the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the cancel control 4084 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (for example, click) on the above-mentioned cancel control 4084, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may The transmission of designated data to the electronic device 200 is stopped, and a cancellation command is sent to the electronic device 200 . After receiving the cancellation command, the electronic device 200 may delete part of the content that has been received in the specified data.
  • the electronic device 100 can directly send the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 without the need for the electronic device 200 to return confirmation information.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 4090 after sending the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the sending window 4090 may include the file name of the above picture 4051, the thumbnail 4091 of the above picture 4051, a sent prompt 4092 and a recall control 4093.
  • the sent prompt 4092 may be used to indicate that the electronic device 100 has currently sent the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the recall control 4093 may be used to receive and respond to user input, triggering the electronic device 100 to send a recall instruction to the electronic device 200 . After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the above-mentioned picture 4051 sent by the electronic device 100.
  • the contact information of the electronic device 200 may be stored on the electronic device 100 in advance by the user.
  • the contact information (including phone number, name, avatar, etc.) of the electronic device 200 may be sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 .
  • the contact information (including phone number, name, avatar, etc.) of the electronic device 200 may be delivered to the electronic device 100 by an intermediate device such as an operator's network device or a server.
  • the sending prompt 4072 shown in FIG. 4G, the sending prompt 4082 shown in FIG. 4H, and the sending prompt 4082 shown in FIG. 4I are The recipient identification prompted in the sent prompt 4092 may be the phone number of the electronic device 200 .
  • the sending prompt 4072 shown in FIG. 4G and the sending prompt 4082 shown in FIG. 4H are The recipient identification prompted in the sent prompt 4092 described in FIG. 4I may be the contact name of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXX").
  • 4J to 4N exemplarily show an interface schematic diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving data such as pictures shared by the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 talks with the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the call interface 4100 may include the phone number 4102 of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXX"), the call duration 4103 (for example, "00:22"), and one or more call function controls, etc.
  • the one or more call function controls include, but are not limited to, recording controls, waiting controls, add call controls, video call controls, mute controls, contact controls, dial controls, hang up controls, external call controls, and so on.
  • the recording control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to record the conversation between the electronic device 200 and the electronic device 100 .
  • the waiting control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to suspend the call with the electronic device 100 .
  • the add call control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to add a call with other devices.
  • the video call control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to switch the voice call with the electronic device 100 to a video call.
  • the electronic device 200 can display a video call interface, and the video call interface can include the electronic device 100
  • the video call interface may also include images captured by the camera of the electronic device 200 .
  • the mute control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop sending voice data to the electronic device 100 .
  • the above-mentioned call interface 4100 may also include the contact name 4101 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") . If the electronic device 200 also stores a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the call interface 4100 may also include a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel").
  • the receiving window 4110 may be displayed.
  • the data transfer request may include information related to the data to be shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 (for example, including thumbnails and/or data sizes and/or names of picture files, etc.).
  • the receiving window 4110 may include a thumbnail 4111 of a picture that the electronic device 100 wants to share with the electronic device 200 , a receiving prompt 4112 , a reject control 4113 and a receiving control 4114 .
  • the receiving prompt 4112 may be used to prompt the user's electronic device 100 to request sharing the picture to the electronic device 200 .
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 4112 can be any of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share a picture (2.4MB) with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. kind or variety.
  • the rejection control 4113 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send rejection information to the electronic device 100.
  • the rejection The information may be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel sharing the picture to the electronic device 200 .
  • the receiving control 4114 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100 , and the confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the picture to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 4114, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends picture of.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 4120.
  • the receiving window 4120 may include a thumbnail 4121 of the picture being shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 and a receiving prompt 4122.
  • the receiving window 4120 may also include a receiving progress bar 4123 and a cancellation control 4124.
  • the receiving prompt 4122 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 200 is currently receiving pictures sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 4122 can be any one of text prompts (for example, "receiving 1 picture (2.4MB) shared by Daniel with you"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc., or Various.
  • the reception progress bar 4123 may be used to indicate the progress of the electronic device 200 receiving the picture sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the cancel control 4124 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop receiving pictures sent by the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 4130.
  • the receiving window 4130 may include a thumbnail 4131 of a picture that the electronic device 100 has shared with the electronic device 200, a receiving prompt 4132, an opening control 4133, and a storage control 4134.
  • the reception prompt 4132 may be used to prompt the user that the current electronic device 200 has received the picture sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 4132 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "I have received a picture sent to you by Daniel"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc.
  • the opening control 4133 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to display a display interface including pictures sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the storage control 4134 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the picture sent by the electronic device 100 in a designated storage path local to the electronic device 200 .
  • Electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to storage control 4134, and in response to the input, electronic device 200 may display storage interface 4140 as shown in FIG. 4N.
  • user input eg, click
  • the storage interface 4140 may include one or more storage path options, a return to previous page control 4141, and so on.
  • the one or more storage path options may include one or more album options (for example, the "all photo album” option 4142, the "camera album” option, "Screenshot directory album” option, "Chat application album” option, “Changan application album” option, “Other albums” option, etc.).
  • the storage interface 4140 may also include a new control 4143, which may be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to add a new photo album option in the storage interface 4140.
  • the electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the "all photo albums" option 4142, and in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may store the pictures shared by the electronic device 100 to the all photo albums corresponding to under the storage path. After the electronic device 200 stores the pictures shared by the electronic device 100 to the storage paths corresponding to all photo albums, when the electronic device 200 opens the album interface of all photo albums in the gallery application, the album interface of all photo albums The thumbnail of the picture shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 may be included.
  • the receiving prompt 4112 shown in FIG. 4K, the receiving prompt 4122 shown in FIG. 4L, and the receiving prompt 4122 shown in FIG. 4M are The sender identification prompted in the reception prompt 4132 may be the phone number of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 stores a contact name (for example, “Daniel”) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100
  • a contact name for example, “Daniel”
  • the sender identification prompted in the reception prompt 4132 described in FIG. 4M may be the contact name of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXX").
  • the electronic device 100 displays the system When sharing the interface 4060, the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, 186XXXXXXXX) can be directly displayed around the device option 4063 in the system sharing interface 4060.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the system sharing message.
  • the phone number for example, "186XXXXXXXX"
  • the contact name for example, "Alice”
  • the failure of the electronic device 100 to obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 includes: the electronic device 100 has not obtained the contact name from the local electronic device 100, and/or the electronic device 200, and/or the operator's network equipment and/or server. The contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 is obtained.
  • the vicinity of the device option 4063 in the system sharing interface 4060 can also be To display the call mark 4066, the call mark 4066 can be used to prompt that the device option 4063 is a device option corresponding to the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are in the process of talking.
  • the electronic device 100 is not limited to sharing picture data to the electronic device 200, but can also share other types of data, such as audio, video, documents (such as word, excel). , PPT, PDF and other formats of document files), article links, video playback links, web page opening links, application installation packages or application download links, contact information, location information, text, memos and other types of data.
  • the electronic device 200 can receive and respond to the user's input and perform operations corresponding to the types of data.
  • 5A to 5E exemplarily show interface diagrams of applications and other data shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 communicates with the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking and the desktop 4020 is displayed.
  • the desktop 4020 For the text description of the desktop 4020, reference may be made to the text description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4B, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the map application icon 4022 in the desktop 4020, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the shortcut menu 5010 shown in FIG. 5B.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display the shortcut menu 5010 shown in FIG. 5B.
  • the shortcut menu 5010 may include a sharing control 5011 and an uninstalling control 5012.
  • the sharing control 5011 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing window to share the map application with other devices or contacts.
  • the uninstall control 5012 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to uninstall the map application.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the sharing control 5011, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 5020 as shown in FIG. 5C.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 5020 as shown in FIG. 5C.
  • the system sharing window 5020 may include a map application option 5021, an area 5022, and an area 5024.
  • the map application option 5021 may display the name of the map application (for example, "map"), data size (for example, "40.82MB”), file type (for example, "base.apk”), and so on.
  • This area 5022 may be used to display device options 5023 of the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking.
  • the device option 5023 may display a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 , and the device option 5023 may display a contact name (for example, "Alice”) or phone number corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 around the device option 5023 .
  • the device option 5023 can also be displayed with prompt information 5025 (for example, a text prompt "on call", etc.), the prompt information 5025 is used to prompt that the device option 5023 is an electronic device that is talking to the electronic device 100 200 corresponding device options.
  • the area 5022 may also display options for nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100. For example, after searching for nearby devices, the electronic device 100 may display device options for nearby devices in the area 5022 (for example, the "Alee's cell phone" option, "HUAWEI P50" option).
  • the text description of the area 5024 please refer to the text description of the area 3023 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the device option 5023, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 5030 as shown in FIG. 5D.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 5030 as shown in FIG. 5D.
  • the sending window 5030 may include a map application icon 5031 as well as the data size (for example, "40.82MB”) and file type (for example, "base.apk”) of the map application, a sending prompt 5032 and a cancel control. 5033 and so on.
  • the sending prompt 5032 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently requesting to send a map application to the electronic device 200 communicating with the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the sending prompt 5032 can be any of text prompts (for example, "Requesting to send map application (40.82MB) to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. Kind or variety.
  • the cancellation control 5033 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 5040 .
  • the confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the sending window 5040 may include a map application icon 5041 as well as the map application's data size (for example, "40.82MB") and file type (for example, "base.apk”), a sending prompt 5042, and so on.
  • the sending prompt 5042 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 communicating with the electronic device 100 .
  • the sending window 5040 may also include a sending progress bar 5043 and a cancellation control 5044.
  • the prompt type of the sending prompt 5042 may be any one or more of a text prompt (for example, "Sending a map application (40.82MB) to Alice"), a picture prompt, an animation prompt, a video prompt, and so on.
  • the sending progress bar 5043 may be used to indicate the progress of the electronic device 100 sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
  • the cancel control 5044 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 can directly send the above map to the electronic device 200 without the need for the electronic device 200 to return confirmation information.
  • Application installation package
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input. Enter, and send a withdrawal instruction of the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200. After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the installation package of the map application that has been sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the recipient identification prompted in the above-mentioned sending prompt 5032 shown in Figure 5D and the sending prompt 5042 shown in Figure 5E It may be the phone number of the electronic device 200.
  • the sending prompt 5032 shown in FIG. 5D and the sending prompt 5042 shown in FIG. 5E are The recipient identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice”) and/or the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXX").
  • 5F to 5I exemplarily illustrate the interface diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving application and other data shared by the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 200 talks with the electronic device 100 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the call interface 5050 may include the phone number 5052 of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXX", the call duration 5053 (for example, "00:21"), and one or more call function controls, etc.
  • the call interface 5050 may also include the contact name 5051 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") .
  • the call interface 5050 may also include a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel").
  • a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 for example, "Daniel"
  • the receiving window 5060 may be displayed.
  • the data transmission request may include relevant information of the map application to be shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200.
  • the relevant information of the map application may include the icon of the map application, the name of the map application (for example, "map application"), Data size (e.g., 40.82MB), file type (e.g., base.apk), etc.).
  • the receiving window 5060 may include information related to the map application that the electronic device 100 wants to share with the electronic device 200 (for example, map application icon 5061, name of the map application, data size, file type, etc.), receiving prompt 5062, rejection Control 5063 and receive control 5064, and so on.
  • the receiving prompt 5062 may be used to prompt the user's electronic device 100 to request sharing of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 5062 can be any of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share the map application (40.82MB) with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. or more.
  • the rejection control 5063 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send rejection information to the electronic device 100 , and the rejection information can be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel sharing the map application to the electronic device 200 .
  • the receiving control 5064 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100 .
  • the confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 5064, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends The installation package of the map application.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends The installation package of the map application.
  • the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 5070 .
  • the receiving window 5070 may include information related to the map application (for example, map application icon 5071, name of the map application, data size, file type, etc.) and a receiving prompt 5072.
  • the receiving window 5070 may also include a receiving progress bar 5073 and a cancellation control 5074.
  • the receiving prompt 5072 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 200 is currently receiving the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 5072 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "receiving the map application (40.82MB) sent to you by Daniel"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. kind.
  • the reception progress bar 5073 may be used to indicate the progress of the electronic device 200 receiving the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the cancel control 5074 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop receiving the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 5080 .
  • the receiving window 5080 may include information related to the map application (for example, map application icon 5081, name of the map application, data size, file type, etc.), and one or more functional controls.
  • the one or more functional controls include the immediate installation control 5082, the re-download control 5083, the next installation control 5084, and so on.
  • the immediate installation control 5082 may be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to install the map application based on the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the re-download control 5083 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to switch to display the interface of the application market application and re-download the map application from the application market server.
  • the re-install control 5084 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100, and the next time the user manually triggers the electronic device 200 to install the map application based on the installation package of the map application.
  • the sender identification prompted in the above reception prompt 5062 shown in Figure 5G and the reception prompt 5072 shown in Figure 5H It may be the phone number of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 stores the contact name (for example, “Daniel”) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the above-mentioned reception prompt 5062 shown in FIG. 5G and the reception prompt 5072 shown in FIG. 5H
  • the sender identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXX").
  • 5J to 5P exemplarily illustrate interface diagrams of contact information and other data shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 talks to the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the contact interface 5090 includes options for one or more contacts (eg, "Alice” options, “Anna” options, “Bob” options 5091, "Britney” options, etc.).
  • Electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the "Bob” option 5091, and in response to the input, electronic device 100 may display contact information interface 5100 as shown in FIG. 5K.
  • user input eg, click
  • electronic device 100 may display contact information interface 5100 as shown in FIG. 5K.
  • the contact information interface 5100 may include the name, avatar, phone number (for example, "180XXXXXXX") of the contact "Bob", a voice call control 5101, a video call control 5102, a text message control 5103, and a collection control. 5104, edit control 5105, more options control 5106, and so on.
  • the voice call control 5101 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to make a voice call to the electronic device of the contact "Bob".
  • the video call control 5102 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to make a video call to the electronic device of the contact "Bob".
  • the text message control 5103 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send a text message to the electronic device of the contact "Bob".
  • the collection control 5104 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to collect the contact information of the contact "Bob” into favorites.
  • the editing control 5105 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to modify the contact information of the contact "Bob”.
  • the more options control 5106 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display more contact functions.
  • Electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more options control 5106, and in response to the input, electronic device 100 may display menu window 5107 as shown in FIG. 5L.
  • user input eg, click
  • the menu window 5107 may include a share contact option 5108, a blacklist option, a create shortcut option, a delete contact option, and so on.
  • the share contact option 5108 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing window to share the contact information of the contact "Bob" with other contacts or other devices.
  • Electronic device 100 receives user input (eg, click) to the share contact option 5108, and in response to the input, electronic device 100 may display menu window 5110 as described in FIG. 5M.
  • user input eg, click
  • the menu window 5110 may include one or more sharing mode options, wherein the one or more sharing mode options include a QR code option 5111, a vCard option 5112, a text option 5113, and so on.
  • the QR code option 5111 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Bob” in the form of a QR code to other contacts or other devices.
  • the vCard option 5112 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Bob” in the form of a vCard to other contacts or other devices.
  • This text option 5113 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Bob” in text form to other contacts or other devices.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the QR code option 5111, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 5120 as shown in FIG. 5N.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 5120 as shown in FIG. 5N.
  • the system sharing window 5120 may include a contact information option 5121, an area 5122, and an area 5124.
  • the contact information option 5121 can display a QR code or a thumbnail of the QR code generated based on the contact information of the contact "Bob", as well as the data size (for example, 21.79KB), name ( For example, "Bob's contact information.jpg”) and so on.
  • This area 5122 may be used to display device options 5123 of the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking.
  • the device option 5123 may display a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 , and the device option 5123 may display a contact name (for example, "Alice") or phone number corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 around the device option 5123 .
  • prompt information 5125 (for example, text prompt "on call", etc.) may also be displayed around the device option 5123.
  • the prompt information 5125 is used to prompt that the device option 5123 is an electronic device that is talking to the electronic device 100. 200 corresponding device options.
  • the area 5122 may also display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the device options of the nearby devices in the area 5122 (for example, the "Alee's mobile phone” option, "HUAWEI P50” option).
  • the text description of the area 5124 please refer to the text description of the area 3023 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the device option 5123, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 5130 as shown in FIG. 5O.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 5130 as shown in FIG. 5O.
  • the sending window 5130 may include a QR code or a thumbnail 5131 of the QR code generated based on the contact information of the contact "Bob" and the data size of the QR code (for example, "21.79KB” ), send prompt 5132 and cancel control 5133 and so on.
  • the sending prompt 5132 can be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently requesting to send a message to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100.
  • the prompt type of the sending prompt 5132 can be any one of text prompts (for example, "Requesting to send Bob's contact information to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc., or Various.
  • the cancel control 5033 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending the contact information of the contact "Bob" of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 5140.
  • the confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the contact information of the contact “Bob” sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the sending window 5140 may include a QR code or a thumbnail 5141 of the QR code generated based on the contact information of the contact "Bob", as well as the data size of the QR code (for example, "21.79KB") and a sending prompt 5142 etc.
  • the sending prompt 5142 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently sending the contact information of the contact "Bob” to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 .
  • the sending window 5140 may also include a sending progress bar 5143 and a cancellation control 5144.
  • the prompt type of the sending prompt 5142 may be any one or more of a text prompt (for example, "Sending Bob's contact information to Alice"), a picture prompt, an animation prompt, a video prompt, and so on.
  • the sending progress bar 5143 may be used to represent the progress of the electronic device 100 sending the contact information of the contact “Bob” to the electronic device 200 .
  • the cancel control 5144 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending the contact information of the contact "Bob” to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 can directly send the contact to the electronic device 200 without the need for the electronic device 200 to return confirmation information.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input and send the withdrawal of the contact information of the contact "Bob” to the electronic device 200. instruct. After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the contact information of the contact "Bob" that has been received.
  • the recipient identification prompted in the sending prompt 5132 shown in FIG. 5O and the sending prompt 5142 shown in FIG. 5P It may be the phone number of the electronic device 200.
  • the sending prompt 5132 shown in FIG. 5O and the sending prompt 5142 shown in FIG. 5P are The recipient identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice”) and/or the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXX").
  • 5Q to 5S exemplarily illustrate the interface diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving data such as contact information shared by the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the call interface 5150 may include the phone number 5152 of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXX", the call duration 5153 (for example, "00:21"), and one or more call function controls, etc.
  • the call interface 5150 may also include the contact name 5151 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") .
  • the call interface 5150 may also include a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel").
  • a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 for example, "Daniel"
  • the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 5160.
  • the data transmission request may include the name of the above-mentioned QR code (for example, "Bob's contact information (QR code)"), the data size (for example, "21.79KB”), and so on.
  • the receiving window 5160 may include the name of the above-mentioned QR code, data size, receiving prompt 5162, reject control 5163, receiving control 5164, and so on.
  • the reception prompt 5162 may be used to prompt the user electronic device 100 to request sharing the contact information of contact “Bob” to the electronic device 200 .
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 5162 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share Bob's contact information with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. kind.
  • the rejection control 5163 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send rejection information to the electronic device 100 , and the rejection information can be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel sharing the contact information of the contact "Bob" with the electronic device 200 .
  • the receiving control 5164 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100.
  • the confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the contact information of the contact "Bob" to the electronic device 200.
  • the electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 5164, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends Contact information for "Bob".
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends Contact information for "Bob".
  • the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 5170.
  • the receive window 5170 may include a receive prompt 5172.
  • the receiving window 5170 may also include a receiving progress bar 5173 and a cancellation control 5174.
  • the receiving prompt 5172 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 200 is currently receiving the contact information of the contact "Bob" sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 5172 can be any of text prompts (for example, "receiving Bob's contact information sent to you by Daniel"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. or more.
  • the receiving progress bar 5173 may be used to represent the progress of the electronic device 200 receiving the contact information of the contact “Bob” sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the cancel control 5174 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop receiving the contact information of the contact "Bob” sent by the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 5180.
  • the receiving window 5180 may include a QR code corresponding to the contact information of the contact "Bob” and one or more functional controls.
  • the one or more functional controls include the recognition QR code control 5182, the save to gallery control 5183, and so on.
  • the recognition QR code control 5182 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to recognize the contact information of the contact "Bob” in the QR code.
  • the save to gallery control 5183 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the above QR code to the gallery.
  • the sender identification prompted in the above reception prompt 5162 shown in Figure 5R and the reception prompt 5172 shown in Figure 5S It may be the phone number of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 stores the contact name (for example, "Daniel") corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the above-mentioned reception prompt 5162 shown in Figure 5R and the reception prompt 5172 shown in Figure 5S
  • the sender identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXX").
  • 5T to 5W exemplarily illustrate interface diagrams of text and other data shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 communicates with the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the document editing interface 5190 may include a text editing area 5191.
  • the text editing area 5191 may display text content (for example, "When you go to the zoo, bring your membership card").
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's selection input (for example, a long press operation) of the text content in the text editing area 5191, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu bar 5192 as shown in FIG. 5U.
  • the user's selection input for example, a long press operation
  • the menu bar 5192 may include a share control 5193, a cut control, a copy control, a paste control, and so on.
  • the sharing control 5193 can trigger sharing of text content selected by the user.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the sharing control 5193, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 5200 as shown in FIG. 5V.
  • user input eg, click
  • the system sharing window 5200 may include text options 5201, area 5202, and area 5204.
  • the text option 5201 can display the name, data size, etc. of the text content selected by the user.
  • This area 5202 may be used to display device options 5203 of the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking.
  • Prompt information 5205 may also be displayed around the device option 5023 (for example, a text prompt "on call", etc.).
  • the text description of the area 5202 please refer to the text description of the area 5202 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5C.
  • the text description of the area 5024 please refer to the text description of the area 3023 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B. This will not be described again.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the device option 5203, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 5210 as shown in FIG. 5W.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 5210 as shown in FIG. 5W.
  • the sending window 5210 can include the name 5211 of the text content selected by the user, the sending prompt 5212, the cancel control 5213, and so on.
  • the sending prompt 5212 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently requesting to send text to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the sending prompt 5212 may be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Requesting to send text to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc.
  • the cancel control 5213 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending text to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input and send a withdrawal instruction for the text to the electronic device 200. After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the text sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • 5X to 5Y exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving text and other data shared by the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 talks to the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the receiving window 5220 may be displayed.
  • the data transfer request may include the name of the text, etc.
  • the receiving window 5220 may include a text icon, a receiving prompt 5222, a reject control 5223, a receiving control 5224, and so on.
  • the receiving prompt 5222 may be used to prompt the user's electronic device 100 to request sharing text to the electronic device 200 .
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 5222 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share a text with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc.
  • the reject control 5223 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to electronically
  • the device 100 sends a rejection message, which may be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel sharing the text to the electronic device 200 .
  • the receiving control 5224 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100 , and the confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the text to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 5224, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends text.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends text.
  • the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 5230.
  • the receiving window 5230 may include part or all of the text content 5231 and one or more functional controls.
  • the one or more functional controls include a copy to clipboard control 5232, a save to memo control 5233, a delete control 5234, and so on.
  • the copy to clipboard control 5232 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the content in the text to the clipboard.
  • the save to memo control 5233 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the content in the text to the memo.
  • the delete control 5234 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to delete the text.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input during a call (voice call, video call, etc.) with other devices (eg, the electronic device 200), and perform the specified application in an application.
  • the interface triggers the display of the sharing menu that comes with the specified application, and adds to the in-application sharing menu a sharing object option corresponding to the device currently talking to the electronic device 100 (for example, the sharing object option corresponding to the electronic device 200).
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input of the option of the sharing object, and transmit specified data to the device being called through a transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the device being called.
  • the other party can be displayed in the sharing menu of the designated application, and the data content selected by the user in the designated application can be shared with the other party in a timely manner, thereby improving the efficiency of the conversation. Improve the user experience of sharing data.
  • 6A to 6D exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram of the electronic device 100 sharing data such as links with the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 is talking to the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may be talking to the electronic device 200 and display the news information application interface 6010.
  • the news information application interface 6010 may include the title of the news article (for example, "Golf boy Alee won gold in his debut"), the content of the news article (for example, “Yesterday, golf boy Alee made his debut in the golf tournament, winning four rounds of gold”). The total score of 267 won the gold medal.”), the name of the publisher of the news article (for example, "Morning News") and avatar, more controls 6013.
  • a status bar 6011 may be displayed on the top of the news information application interface 6010.
  • the electronic device 100 may be talking to the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 may display the call time (for example, "00:18") on the call icon 6012 in the status bar 6011.
  • the call icon 6012 The telephone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXX") and/or the contact name corresponding to the telephone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice") may also be displayed.
  • the call icon 6012 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display a call interface for talking to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more control 6013, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a share menu 6020 as shown in FIG. 6B.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a share menu 6020 as shown in FIG. 6B.
  • the sharing menu 6020 may include one or more sharing service options.
  • the one or more sharing service options may include device options 6021 corresponding to the electronic device 200 that the electronic device 100 is talking to, sharing options within the news information application (for example, private message options and forwarding options, etc.) and/ Or other application sharing options (for example, friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc.), and system sharing options 6022.
  • the sharing menu 6020 may also include other functional controls (for example, collection controls, link copy controls, etc.).
  • the system sharing option 6022 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing interface to share the news article.
  • the text description of the system sharing interface for sharing the news article can refer to the sharing shown in Figure 5C above.
  • the system sharing interface of the map application installation package will not be described in detail here.
  • the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 for example, "Alice" and/or the phone number of the electronic device 200 may be displayed around the device option 6021, and a prompt message 6023 may also be displayed around the device option 6021.
  • the prompt information 6023 is used to prompt that the device option 6021 is a device option corresponding to the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking.
  • a call mark can also be displayed near the device option 6021 (for example, the upper left corner of the device option 6021). The call mark can be used to prompt that the device option 6021 corresponds to the electronic device 200 that the electronic device 100 is talking to.
  • Device options for example, “Alice”
  • the phone number of the electronic device 200 for example, "Alice”
  • a prompt message 6023 may also be displayed around the device option 6021.
  • the prompt information 6023 is used to prompt that the device option 6021 is a device option corresponding to
  • the electronic device 100 can talk to multiple contacts at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display options for the multiple contacts with whom the electronic device 100 is talking in the above-mentioned sharing menu 6020 .
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the device option 6021, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 6030 as shown in FIG. 6C.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 6030 as shown in FIG. 6C.
  • the sending window 6030 may include the description information 6031 of the above-mentioned news article (for example, "News Information APP: [High Young golfer Alee won gold in his first show]”), sending prompt 6032 and cancel control 6033.
  • the sending prompt 6032 can be used to prompt the user that the current electronic device 100 is requesting to send a news article to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 Open the link.
  • the prompt type of the sending prompt 6032 can be any of text prompts (for example, "Requesting to send news information to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt.”), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc.
  • the cancel control 6033 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 6040 .
  • the confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the picture sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the sending window 6040 may include the description information 6041 of the news article and the sending prompt 6042.
  • the sending window 6040 may also include a sending progress bar 6043 and a cancellation control 6044.
  • the sending prompt 6042 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the sending prompt 6042 may be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Sending news information to Alice"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, and so on.
  • the sending progress bar 6043 may be used to represent the progress of the electronic device 100 sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 .
  • the cancel control 6044 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 can directly send the opening link of the above news article to the electronic device 200 without the need for the electronic device 200 to return confirmation information.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input and send a withdrawal instruction of the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200.
  • the electronic device 200 may delete the open link of the news article sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • 6E to 6G exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving data such as a shared link from the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 200 communicates with the electronic device 100 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 200 and the electronic device 100 are talking, and the call interface 6050 is displayed.
  • the call interface 6050 reference can be made to the text description of the call interface 4100 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4J, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 6060.
  • the data transmission request may include the description information of the above-mentioned news article (for example, "News Information APP: [Golfer Alee wins gold medal in debut]").
  • the receiving window 6060 may include the description information 6061 of the above-mentioned news article, a receiving prompt 6062, a reject control 6063, a receiving control 6064, and so on.
  • the receiving prompt 6062 may be used to prompt the user's electronic device 100 to request the electronic device 200 to open a link to the news article.
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 6062 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share news information with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc.
  • the rejection control 6063 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send rejection information to the electronic device 100 , and the rejection information can be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel the open link of the news article shared with the electronic device 200 .
  • the receiving control 6064 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100 .
  • the confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 6064, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends Open link to a news article.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends Open link to a news article.
  • the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 6070 .
  • the receive window 6070 may include a receive prompt 6072.
  • the receiving window 6070 may also include a receiving progress bar 6073 and a cancellation control 6074.
  • the receiving prompt 6072 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 200 is currently receiving the open link of the news article sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the prompt type of the receiving prompt 6072 may be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "receiving news information sent to you by Daniel"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc.
  • the reception progress bar 6073 may be used to represent the progress of the electronic device 200 receiving the opened link of the news article sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the cancel control 6074 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop receiving open links of news articles sent by the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 6080 .
  • the receiving window 6080 may include description information 6081 of the news article and one or more functional controls.
  • the one or more functional controls include an open control 6082 in a news information application, an open control 6083 using a browser, a copy to memo control 6084, and so on.
  • the open in news information application control 6082 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to identify an open link based on the news article in the news information application, and display an interface including the news article.
  • the open with browser control 6083 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to use a browser application to open a link based on the news article to display the news article.
  • the copy to memo control 6084 may be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to copy the open link of the news article into the memo.
  • the electronic device 200 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the sender identification prompted in the above reception prompt 6062 shown in Figure 6E and the reception prompt 6072 shown in Figure 6F It may be the phone number of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 stores the contact name (for example, "Daniel") corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the above-mentioned receiving prompt 6062 shown in FIG. 6E and the receiving prompt 6072 shown in FIG. 6F
  • the sender identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXX").
  • the electronic device 100 may display a data sharing control on the call interface when making a call (voice call, video call, etc.) with another device (eg, the electronic device 200) and displaying the call interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input to the data sharing control, allow the user to select specified data on the electronic device 100, and transmit the specified data to the device being called through a transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the device being called. device for calling.
  • the user can trigger the sharing of data to the other party directly on the call interface, which facilitates the user to share the data on the electronic device 100 with the other party and improves the user's ability to share data. experience.
  • FIG. 7A to 7G exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram for sharing data with the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 communicates with the electronic device 200 and displays the call interface in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may be talking to the electronic device 200 and display the call interface 7010 .
  • the call interface 7010 may include the phone number 7013 of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXX"), the call duration 7014 (for example, "00:15"), and one or more call function controls, etc.
  • the one or more call function controls include, but are not limited to, recording controls, waiting controls, add call controls, video call controls, mute controls, contact controls, dial controls, hang up controls, external call controls, and so on.
  • the one or more call function controls reference can be made to the aforementioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a sharing menu 7020 in a floating manner on the call interface 7010 .
  • the sharing menu 7020 may include a call mode switching control 7021, a location sending control 7022, a file sharing control 7023, and so on.
  • the call module switching control 7021 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to switch the call mode with the electronic device 200 .
  • the location sending control 7022 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send the location information of the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the file sharing control 7023 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send the file data stored on the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the file sharing control 7023, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a file selection interface 7030 as shown in FIG. 7B.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a file selection interface 7030 as shown in FIG. 7B.
  • a status bar 7011 may be displayed on the top of the file selection interface 7030. Since the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking and have exited the call interface, the electronic device 100 can display a call icon 7015 in the status bar 7011. The call icon 7015 can be used to indicate that the electronic device 100 and other devices are currently talking.
  • the file selection interface 7030 may include one or more file options (eg, picture file options 7031, document options, and send controls, etc.), a send control 7035, a delete control 7034, and so on. Each file option may be displayed with a selection box corresponding to it.
  • the picture file option 7031 may be displayed with a thumbnail of the picture 7032, and the right side of the picture file option 7032 may be with a selection box 7032.
  • the document file option may display the name of the document (for example, "Letter to Parents”) and the file format (for example, ".docx”) and so on.
  • the delete control 7033 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to delete the selected file.
  • the sending control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send the selected file to the electronic device 200
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) for the selection box 7033, and in response to the input, as shown in FIG. 7C, the electronic device 100 may display a check mark in the selection box 7033, and the check mark may be used to The user is prompted that the image file corresponding to the image file option 7031 is currently selected.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a check mark in the selection box 7033, and the check mark may be used to The user is prompted that the image file corresponding to the image file option 7031 is currently selected.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's input (for example, click) on the sending control 7035, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 can send a data transmission request to the electronic device 200. , and the sending window 7040 shown in Figure 7D is displayed.
  • the sending window 7040 may include a thumbnail 7041 of the above picture file, a sending prompt 7042, and a cancel control 7043.
  • a sending window 7040 please refer to the text description of the sending window 4070 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4G, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 7050 .
  • the confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the picture file sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the text description of the sending window 7050 please refer to the text description of the sending window 4080 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4H, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a sending window 7060 .
  • the sending window 7060 may include a thumbnail 7061 of the sent picture file, a sending prompt 7062, a withdrawal control 7063, and a continue sending control 7064.
  • the withdrawal control 7063 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to The sub-device 200 sends a withdrawal instruction.
  • the electronic device 200 may delete the above picture file sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the continue sending control 7064 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to switch to displaying the file selection interface shown in FIG. 7B , allowing the user to continue selecting files to send to the electronic device 200 .
  • the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A can remain suspended and displayed at a fixed position on the call interface 7010.
  • the sharing menu 7020 may remain suspended and displayed on the top of the call interface 7010 .
  • the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A can also remain suspended and displayed at the top of all interfaces.
  • the sharing menu 7020 can remain suspended and displayed on the top layer of other application interfaces.
  • the display position of the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A can be adjusted according to the user's input.
  • call mode switching control 7021 location sending control 7022
  • file sharing control 7023 can be used as call function controls and displayed on the call interface.
  • the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A may be displayed after the data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is established. or,
  • the file sharing control 7023 in the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A can be enabled after the data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is established.
  • the file sharing control 7023 in the sharing menu 7020 can be enabled.
  • 7023 can trigger the electronic device 100 to display the above file selection interface in response to the user's input.
  • the file sharing control 7023 is in a disabled state before the data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is established.
  • the file sharing control 7023 cannot trigger the electronic device 100 to display the above file selection. interface.
  • the display color of the file sharing control 7023 in the non-enabled state is different from the display color in the enabled state.
  • the display color in the non-enabled state can be gray, and the display color in the enabled state can be white. or green.
  • the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A may also include the phone number corresponding to the electronic device 200 and/or the contact name (for example, Alice) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 and/or The contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the sharing menu 7070 in a floating manner on the call interface 7010 .
  • the sharing menu 7070 may include the contact name (for example, Alice) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the contact avatar 7071 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the exit control 7072, the call mode switching control 7073, and the location.
  • the phone mode switching control 7073, the location sending control 7074, and the file sharing control 7075 please refer to the text description of the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A, and will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input (eg, dragging) on the sharing menu 7070 and adjust the display position of the sharing menu 7070 .
  • the electronic device 100 may hide the share menu 7070.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the mark button 7076.
  • the mark button 7076 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to re-display the sharing menu 7070 .
  • the mark button 7076 can be displayed on the edge of the touch screen to save the display space of the touch screen.
  • the electronic device 100 can hide the sharing menu 7070 and display the above-mentioned mark button. 7076.
  • the display position of the mark button 7076 may also be adjusted based on user input.
  • the mark 7076 may also display the telephone number of the electronic device 200 and/or the contact name corresponding to the telephone number of the electronic device 200, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 can interact with a contact (for example, the contact "Alice" corresponding to the electronic device 200) (for example, make a call, send a text message, or send a private message or like/ After commenting on the content sent by the contact in the circle of friends, etc.), when the user triggers the sharing of the specified data, the specified data will be displayed in the sharing interface (system sharing interface or in-app sharing interface) or sharing window (system sharing window or The option of one or more recent contacts is displayed in the in-app sharing window).
  • the electronic device 100 can transmit the specified data to the specified contact's device. In this way, users can share data with recent contacts, improving the user experience of sharing data.
  • 8A-8B exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram for sharing data to recently interacted contacts on the system sharing interface in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a picture display interface 8010.
  • the picture display interface 8010 includes a picture 8011 and a menu 8012.
  • the menu 8012 includes a share button 8013, a collection button, an edit button, a delete button, and a more button.
  • menu 8012 reference may be made to menu 4052 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4E, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the share button 8013, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing interface 8020 as shown in FIG. 8B.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing interface 8020 as shown in FIG. 8B.
  • the system sharing interface 8020 may include an area 8021, an area 8022, and an area 8023. in:
  • This area 8021 can be used to display one or more pictures or videos in the gallery, and the one or more pictures or videos can include pictures or videos selected by the user.
  • a mark may be displayed on the selected picture, and the mark may be used to indicate that the corresponding picture is selected (that is, the picture has been selected by the user).
  • the pictures or video images displayed in this area 8021 may be thumbnails.
  • the original image corresponding to the picture or video picture displayed in area 8021 can be stored on the electronic device 100 .
  • the area 8022 may include options (eg, options 8024 and 8027, etc.) corresponding to one or more recently interacted contacts with which the electronic device 100 has recently interacted (eg, interacted in the last half hour).
  • the option corresponding to the recently interacted contact may display the avatar of the recent contact, and the option corresponding to the recently interacted contact may display the name of the most recent contact.
  • Prompt information for example, a text prompt "Recent Contact”
  • the prompt information is used to remind the user that this option is an option for recent contacts.
  • an application mark may be displayed around the option corresponding to the recent contact, and the application mark may be used to indicate the application to which the recent contact belongs.
  • option 8024 corresponds to the contact "Alice" in the phone application on the electronic device 100.
  • the contact name "Alice” and prompt information 8025 (for example, "Recent Contacts”) may be displayed below the option 8024.
  • the upper left corner of the option 8024 Corner can be displayed with phone application mark 8026.
  • Option 8027 corresponds to the contact "Kiki” in the chat application on the electronic device 100.
  • the contact name "Kiki” and prompt information 8028 (for example, "Recent Contacts") can be displayed below the option 8027.
  • the upper left corner of the option 8027 can Chat application tag 8029 is displayed.
  • the area 8022 may also display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100. For example, after the electronic device 100 searches for nearby devices, the device options of the nearby devices may be displayed in the area 8022 (for example, the "HUAWEI P50" option).
  • This area 8023 displays one or more service options (eg, mail icon, browser icon, information icon, WLAN direct icon, etc.).
  • service options eg, mail icon, browser icon, information icon, WLAN direct icon, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (for example, click) on the option 8024, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send the picture selected by the user to the electronic device 200 corresponding to the recent interaction contact "Alice".
  • the electronic device 100 may send a data transmission request to the electronic device 200 before sending the data selected by the user to the electronic device 200 corresponding to the recent interaction contact "Alice".
  • the electronic device 100 receives the confirmation information sent by the electronic device 200
  • the electronic device 100 sends the data selected by the user to the electronic device 200 corresponding to the recent interactive contact "Alice”.
  • the sending window displayed on the electronic device 100 can refer to the aforementioned embodiment shown in FIGS. 4G-4I
  • the receiving window displayed on the electronic device 200 can refer to the aforementioned Figure 4K-FIG.
  • the embodiment shown in 4M will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 recently interacts with a contact in an instant messaging application, the electronic device 100 can send the content selected by the user through the instant messaging application and the server of the instant messaging application. on the electronic device 200 corresponding to the recently interacted contact.
  • the instant messaging application is installed on the electronic device 200, and the account of the recently interacted contact is logged in.
  • Figures 8C-8D exemplarily illustrate the interface diagram of sharing data to recently interacted contacts in the in-application sharing interface in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a news information application interface 8030.
  • the news information application interface 8030 may include the title of the news article (for example, "Golf boy Alee won gold in his debut"), the content of the news article (for example, “Yesterday, golf boy Alee made his debut in the golf tournament, winning four rounds of gold”). The total score of 267 won the gold medal.”), the name of the publisher of the news article (for example, "Morning News") and avatar, more controls 8031.
  • the text description of the news information application interface 8030 please refer to the text description of the news information application interface 6010 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6A, which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more control 8031, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a share menu window 8040 as shown in FIG. 6B.
  • user input eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 may display a share menu window 8040 as shown in FIG. 6B.
  • the sharing menu window 8040 may include one or more sharing service options.
  • the one or more sharing service options may include options (for example, option 8024 and option 8027, etc.) corresponding to one or more recently interacted contacts with which the electronic device 100 has recently interacted (for example, interacted in the last half hour).
  • sharing options within the news information application e.g., private message options, forwarding options, etc.
  • sharing options in other applications e.g., friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc.
  • system sharing option 8047 e.g., friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc.
  • the sharing menu 8040 may also include other functional controls (for example, collection controls, link copy controls, etc.).
  • the system sharing option 8047 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function, and display the system sharing interface to share the news article.
  • the text description of the system sharing interface for sharing the news article can refer to the sharing shown in Figure 8B above. pictorial The system sharing interface will not be described in detail here.
  • the option corresponding to the recently interacted contact may display the avatar of the recent contact, and the option corresponding to the recently interacted contact may display the name of the most recent contact.
  • Prompt information for example, a text prompt "Recent Contact”
  • the prompt information is used to remind the user that this option is an option for recent contacts.
  • an application mark may be displayed around the option corresponding to the recent contact, and the application mark may be used to indicate the application to which the recent contact belongs.
  • option 8041 corresponds to the contact "Alice” in the phone application on the electronic device 100.
  • the contact name "Alice” and prompt information 8042 (for example, "Recent Contacts") may be displayed below the option 8041.
  • the upper left corner of the option 8041 Corner can be displayed with phone application mark 8043.
  • Option 8044 corresponds to the contact "Kiki” in the chat application on the electronic device 100.
  • the contact name “Kiki” and prompt information 8045 (for example, "Recent Contacts”) can be displayed below the option 8044.
  • the upper left corner of the option 8044 can Shows chat application tag 8046.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (for example, click) on the option 8041, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send the open link of the news article selected by the user to the electronic device corresponding to the recent interaction contact "Alice" 200.
  • the display form of the content in the above-mentioned system sharing interface or in-application sharing interface is not limited, and may be presented in the form of an interface, or may be presented in the form of a window or menu.
  • the system sharing interface when the content in the system sharing interface is presented in the form of an interface, it can be called the system sharing interface.
  • the system sharing interface When the content in the system sharing interface is presented in the form of a window or menu, it can be called the system sharing window, system sharing menu, etc. wait.
  • the content in the in-application sharing interface is presented in the form of an interface, it can be called an in-application sharing interface.
  • the content in the in-application sharing interface is presented in the form of a window or menu, it can be called a sharing menu window, or Share menu, in-app sharing window, and more.
  • the type of user input there is no limit to the type of user input.
  • the above embodiment only lists preferred user input types.
  • the user input type can be any one of the following or a combination of multiple operations: Single Click, double-click, long press, slide, drag, multi-finger press and hold, multi-finger swipe, knuckle touch, knuckle slide, and more.
  • Figure 9 shows a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system 90 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 90 may include an electronic device 100 and an electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 can communicate with the electronic device 200 through the main link.
  • the call between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may include, but is not limited to, operator calls and/or OTT calls.
  • the types of calls between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can also be divided into voice calls, video calls, conference calls, ringback tones, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 can share content data to the electronic device 200 through the primary link, and can also share content data to the electronic device 200 through the auxiliary link.
  • the electronic device 100 can talk to the electronic device 200 through the operator's call link, and the electronic device 100 can share content data to the electronic device 200 through the operator's call link.
  • the electronic device 100 can talk to the electronic device 200 through the operator call link, and the electronic device 100 can share content data to the electronic device 200 through the auxiliary link.
  • the electronic device 100 can talk to the electronic device 200 through the operator call link, and the electronic device 100 can share content data to the electronic device 200 through the operator call link and the auxiliary link.
  • part of the shared content data can use the operator's call link, and the other part can use the auxiliary link.
  • the auxiliary link can be a data transmission link established through near field communication technology, for example, through Wi-Fi, BT, end-to-end (device-to-device, D2D), vehicle to everything (V2X) ), and other data transmission links established by communication technology.
  • the auxiliary link can also be a data transmission link established through far-field communication technology, such as primary card/secondary card cellular communication (for example, 2G/3G/4G/5G/6G) technology, satellite communication technology, Wi-Fi Data transmission links established by other communication technologies.
  • the auxiliary link can be a link established by any of the above types of communication technologies, or it can be multiple links established by multiple same or different communication technologies.
  • the data shared by the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may be local to the electronic device (for example, pictures, videos, audios, contact information, application APKs, PPT/PDF/Word/Excel documents, etc.), or may be Content in third-party applications (for example, pictures, videos, audios, news articles, location information, links, etc.).
  • Figure 10 shows a data sharing method provided in the embodiment of this application.
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's sharing input that triggers sharing of specified data.
  • the specified data can be file-type data, text-type data, link-type data, pasteboard-type data, and other types of data.
  • File data can include pictures, videos, audios, documents in DOCX/PPTX/PDF/XLS and other formats, and application APKs/installations Packages, contact QR codes, contact vCards, location information in the form of images/rich media, etc.
  • Text data can include contact text, textual location information, etc.
  • Link data may include: links to local application or third-party application content (for example, pictures, videos, audios, news, articles, etc.), and location information viewing links.
  • Pasteboard data can include the currently selected content, or the content or objects on the pasteboard.
  • the specified data may also be other types of data content that can be shared with other devices, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the sharing input can be as shown in the embodiments shown in the above-mentioned Figures 4A to 4O, or Figures 5A to 5Y, or Figures 8A to 8B, etc.
  • the operation type of sharing input for example, it can be click, long press, slide, double-click, etc.
  • FIGS. 4A to 4O, or FIGS. 5A to 5Y, or FIGS. 8A to 8B, etc. which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 determines whether the electronic device 100 is in a call.
  • the call may include but is not limited to operator calls and/or OTT calls (for example, chat voice calls or video calls).
  • OTT calls for example, chat voice calls or video calls.
  • the types of calls can also be divided into voice calls, video calls, conference calls, ringback tones, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 obtains the information of the current call contact.
  • the information of the current call contact may include one or more of the following: the current call contact's phone number, contact name, contact avatar, etc. If the above call is an OTT call, the information of the current call contact may include one or more of the following: contact account ID, contact nickname, contact avatar, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 establishes a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
  • the electronic device 100 determines whether the data transmission link has been established with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the options of the current call contact on the system sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can immediately display options for the current call contact in the system sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can share the data in the system after at least one of the auxiliary links is established.
  • the interface displays options for current call contacts.
  • the timing of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 of the current call contact may be before the electronic device 100 receives the above sharing input, or after receiving the above sharing input.
  • the electronic device 100 can first establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 . After displaying the system sharing interface in response to the above sharing input, the electronic device 100 can display the system sharing interface, and display the option of the current call contact in the system sharing interface. After establishing the auxiliary link, the electronic device 100 can display the system sharing interface in the system sharing interface. Updates the option to display current call contacts.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the system sharing interface in response to the above sharing input. At this time, there is no system sharing interface. Including options for current call contacts. After the electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 establish a data transmission link, the electronic device 100 can update and display the options for current call contacts in the system sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may first respond to the above sharing input, display the system sharing interface and display the options of the current call contact in the system sharing interface. After receiving the user's selection operation on the option of the current call contact, the electronic device 100 may establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact in response to the selection operation. After establishing the data transmission link, the electronic device 100 can send designated data to the electronic device 200 based on the data transmission link.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's selection operation on the options of the current call contact.
  • the electronic device 100 obtains specified data in response to the selection operation.
  • the electronic device 100 can open and read the file-type data through an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) of the system file operation. For example, you can open file data through the function "fopen” and read the file content through the function "fread". Among them, the reading method can be text reading or binary stream reading. When the specified data is text, link, or data on the pasteboard, the electronic device 100 can also use a similar system interface function. Data can be read through the interface of digital or third-party APP.
  • API application programming interface
  • the electronic device 100 sends the specified data to the electronic device 200 of the current call contact through the data transmission link.
  • the displayed interface changes may refer to the embodiments shown in the aforementioned Figures 4A to 4O, or Figures 5A to 5Y, or Figures 8A to 8B, etc. I won’t go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 can obtain information of one or more recently interacted contacts.
  • the most recently interacted contacts may be contacts with which the user of the electronic device 100 interacted with the contact corresponding to the electronic device 100 within a specified time range (for example, within the last hour).
  • the interaction between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may include: operator calls, receiving/sending text messages, interactions within social applications, and so on.
  • interactions within social applications can include OTT calls, receiving/sending private messages, liking/being liked, commenting/being commented on, following/being followed, favorites/being favorites, the other party’s live broadcast, content posted in friend circles, etc.
  • Interactive social interaction the social applications include but are not limited to instant messaging applications (for example, Changlian application, etc.), live video applications (for example, Huawei Video application, etc.), music playback applications (for example, Huawei Music application, etc.), and other applications with multi-user social attributes.
  • the most recently interacted contacts may also be contacts with whom the user of the electronic device 100 has interacted with one or more of the above specified applications within a specified time range.
  • the electronic device 100 can also sort the contacts from recent to far in terms of interaction time, and determine a specified number (for example, 3) of recent interaction contacts with the most recent interaction time.
  • Information about recently interacted contacts may include one or more of the following: phone number of recently interacted contacts, application ID of recently interacted contacts, account ID of recently interacted contacts, nickname of recently interacted contacts, recently interacted contacts avatar, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 displays options for one or more recently interacted contacts on the system sharing interface.
  • system sharing interface 8020 For the option of displaying one or more recently interacted contacts in the system sharing interface, please refer to the system sharing interface 8020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8B , which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may send the specified data on the data transmission link to the electronic device corresponding to the specified recently interacted contact. 200.
  • the displayed interface changes may refer to the embodiments shown in the aforementioned FIGS. 4A to 4O, or FIGS. 5A to 5Y or 8A to 8B, which will not be mentioned here. Again.
  • the electronic device 100 may perform the above steps S1010 and S1011.
  • the electronic device 100 can also simultaneously display options for current call contacts and recently interacted contacts in the system sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can share the specified data with the device of the current call contact.
  • the electronic device 100 can Share specified data to devices of recently interacted contacts.
  • Figure 11 shows a data sharing method provided in another embodiment of the present application.
  • the method may include:
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's input to trigger sharing of specified data in a specified application.
  • the specified data can be file-type data, text-type data, link-type data, pasteboard-type data, and other types of data.
  • File data can include pictures, videos, audios, documents in DOCX/PPTX/PDF/XLS and other formats, application APK/installation packages, contact QR codes, contact vCards, pictures/rich media location information, etc.
  • Text data can include contact text, textual location information, etc.
  • Link data may include: links to local application or third-party application content (for example, pictures, videos, audios, news, articles, etc.), and location information viewing links.
  • Pasteboard data can include the currently selected content, or the content or objects on the pasteboard.
  • the specified data may also be other types of data content that can be shared with other devices, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the input that triggers the sharing of specified data in the specified application can be the input of the sharing control/button in the embodiments shown in Figures 6A to 6G, or Figure 8C to 8D, etc.
  • the operation type of sharing input for example, it can be click, long press, slide, double click, etc.
  • FIGS. 6A to 6G, or 8C to 8D, etc. please refer to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 6A to 6G, or 8C to 8D, etc., in This will not be described again.
  • the electronic device 100 determines whether to enter system sharing.
  • the electronic device 100 determines whether it is in a call.
  • the call may include but is not limited to operator calls and/or OTT calls (for example, voice calls or video calls of chat applications).
  • OTT calls for example, voice calls or video calls of chat applications.
  • the types of calls can also be divided into voice calls, video calls, conference calls, ringback tones, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 can obtain the information of the current call contact.
  • the information of the current call contact may include one or more of the following: the current call contact's phone number, contact name, contact avatar, etc. If the above call is an OTT call, the information of the current call contact may include one or more of the following: contact account ID, contact nickname, contact avatar, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine whether the data transmission link has been established with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
  • the electronic device 100 can display options for the current call contact on the in-application sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can immediately display options for the current call contact in the in-application sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can, after at least one of the auxiliary links is established, within the application. Option to display current call contacts in the sharing interface.
  • the timing of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 of the current call contact may be before the electronic device 100 receives the above input that triggers the sharing of specified data in the specified application, or may be after receiving to the above trigger to share the input of specified data in the specified application.
  • the electronic device 100 can first establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 . After displaying the in-application sharing interface in response to the input of specified data in the triggering sharing specified application, the electronic device 100 may display the in-application sharing interface, and display the option of the current call contact in the in-application sharing interface to establish the auxiliary link. way, the electronic device 100 can update the option of displaying the current call contact in the system sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may respond to the input of specified data in the specified application that triggers sharing. , display the in-application sharing interface. At this time, the in-application sharing interface does not include the option of the current call contact.
  • the electronic device 100 can Updated options showing current call contacts.
  • the electronic device 100 may first respond to the input of specified data in the specified application that triggers sharing, display the in-application sharing interface and display the option of the current call contact in the in-application sharing interface. After receiving the user's selection operation on the option of the current call contact, the electronic device 100 may establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact in response to the selection operation. After establishing the data transmission link, the electronic device 100 can send designated data to the electronic device 200 based on the data transmission link.
  • FIGS. 6A to 6G For text descriptions of the in-application sharing interface and the options of the current call contact, please refer to the aforementioned FIGS. 6A to 6G, or FIGS. 8C to 8D, and other embodiments of the sharing menu or sharing menu window. Here No longer.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's selection operation on the options of the current call contact.
  • the electronic device 100 can obtain specified data.
  • the electronic device 100 can open and read the file-type data through an application programming interface (API) for system file operations. For example, you can open file data through the function "fopen” and read the file content through the function "fread". Among them, the reading method can be text reading or binary stream reading. When the designated data is text, links, or data on a pasteboard, the electronic device 100 can also use similar system interface functions or third-party APP interfaces to read the data.
  • API application programming interface
  • the electronic device 100 can send the specified data to the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
  • the displayed interface changes may refer to the aforementioned embodiments of FIGS. 6A-6G, or 8C-8D, etc., which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 can obtain the information of the recently interacted contacts.
  • the interaction between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may include: calling with the operator, receiving/sending text messages, Interactions within social apps, and more.
  • interactions within social applications can include OTT calls, receiving/sending private messages, liking/being liked, commenting/being commented on, following/being followed, favorites/being favorites, the other party’s live broadcast, content posted in friend circles, etc.
  • Interactive social interaction the social applications include but are not limited to instant messaging applications (for example, Changlian application, etc.), live video applications (for example, Huawei Video application, etc.), music playback applications (for example, Huawei Music application, etc.), and other applications with multi-user social attributes.
  • the most recently interacted contacts may also be contacts with whom the user of the electronic device 100 has interacted with one or more of the above specified applications within a specified time range.
  • the electronic device 100 can also sort the contacts from recent to far in terms of interaction time, and determine a specified number (for example, 3) of recent interaction contacts with the most recent interaction time.
  • Information about recently interacted contacts may include one or more of the following: phone number of recently interacted contacts, application ID of recently interacted contacts, account ID of recently interacted contacts, nickname of recently interacted contacts, recently interacted contacts avatar, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can display recently interacted contacts on the in-application sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may send the specified data on the data transmission link to the electronic device corresponding to the specified recently interacted contact. 200.
  • the displayed interface changes may refer to the aforementioned embodiments of FIGS. 6A-6G, or 8C-8D, etc., which will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device 100 may perform the above steps S1111 and S1112.
  • Figures 12A-12C exemplarily illustrate the process of obtaining information about recently interacted contacts in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a system sharing module and interactive applications.
  • the system sharing module can be used to provide the electronic device 100 with the function of sharing data.
  • Interactive applications may include applications that are provided by the system on the electronic device 100 (for example, dialing applications, text messaging applications (which may also be called messaging applications), etc.), or may be social applications that are not provided by the system, where the social application Including but not limited to instant messaging applications (for example, Changlian application, etc.), live video applications (for example, Huawei Video application, etc.), music playback applications (for example, Huawei Music application, etc.), etc. and other applications with multi-user interaction.
  • instant messaging applications for example, Changlian application, etc.
  • live video applications for example, Huawei Video application, etc.
  • music playback applications for example, Huawei Music application, etc.
  • the interactive application can provide a calling interface for the system sharing module to call.
  • the system sharing module can call the acquisition function to obtain the information of a specified number of recent interactive contacts in the interactive application.
  • the interactive application can return the information of a specified number of recent interactive contacts.
  • the recently interacted contact information may include one or more of the following: interactive application ID (appid), user ID (userid), phone number (phonenumber), avatar (portrait), nickname (nickname), interaction time (time) ),etc.
  • the system sharing module can obtain the information of a specified number of recently interacted contacts in an interactive application by calling the acquisition function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)", where the interactive application is carried in the calling function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)" ID ("appid") and the number of recently interacted contacts ("count”).
  • the interactive application After receiving the call request sent by the system sharing module through the acquisition function "get_last_interaction(appid,count)", the interactive application can return the specified number of recent interactive contact information to the system sharing module.
  • the system sharing module can use recently interacted contacts as objects to be shared, and display options for recently interacted contacts in the system sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can call the acquisition function simultaneously or sequentially to obtain the information of one or more recently interacted contacts in each interactive application, and then obtain information from the multiple interactive applications. From the information of one or more recently interacted contacts in the application, a specified number of recently interacted contacts with the most recent time are filtered out as objects to be shared, and the option of the recently interacted contacts is displayed in the system sharing interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may periodically (for example, every 3 minutes) call the acquisition function to obtain information about recent interactive contacts in the interactive application.
  • the system sharing module can provide a registration interface for interactive applications to register the information of one or more interactive contacts.
  • the interactive application can actively register the information of one or more interactive contacts with the system sharing module by calling the registration function in the kit mode.
  • an interactive application can register the information of interactive contacts within the interactive application with the system sharing module by calling the registration function "register interaction(appid, userid, portrait, nickname, status)".
  • the recently interacted contact information may include one or more of the following: interactive application ID (appid), user ID (userid), avatar (portrait), nickname (nickname), status (status), and so on.
  • the interactive application can register the interactive contact information to the system sharing module by calling the registration function at the beginning and end of the interaction.
  • the status can include interaction start (start) or interaction end (end).
  • the system sharing module can filter out one or more recently interacted contacts from the interactive contacts registered in one or multiple interactive applications as objects to be shared, and display them in the system sharing interface.
  • the interactive application can only register the interactive contact information to the system sharing module by calling the registration function at the end of the interaction.
  • the recent interactive contact information can include one or more of the following: Interactive application ID (appid), user ID (userid), avatar (portrait), nickname (nickname), etc.
  • the system sharing module can filter out one or more recently interacted contacts from the interactive contacts registered by one or multiple interactive applications as objects to be shared, and display them in the system sharing interface.
  • the system sharing module can provide a calling interface for the sharing application to call, share
  • the application can call the acquisition function to obtain the information of the specified number of recently interacted contacts from the system sharing module.
  • the system sharing module can return the information of a specified number of recently interacted contacts to the sharing application.
  • the sharing application may be an application with an in-application sharing function in the above embodiment. For example, news information applications, map applications, etc.
  • a sharing application can obtain the information of a specified number of recently interacted contacts from the system sharing module by calling the acquisition function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)", where the interactive application is carried in the calling function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)" ID ("appid") and the number of recently interacted contacts ("count”).
  • the system sharing module can return the information of a specified number of recently interacted contacts to the sharing application after receiving a request to call the function "get_last_interaction(appid,count)" from the sharing application.
  • the sharing application can filter out one or more recently interacted contacts from a specified number of recently interacted contacts as objects to be shared, and display them in the in-app sharing interface (or in-app sharing window).
  • the sharing application module can set the ID ("appid") of the interactive application carried in the calling function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)" to the all-select value (for example, "0"), and the system sharing module can When receiving that the value of the "appid" is a select-all value (for example, "0"), the information of the specified number of recently interacted contacts in all types of applications is given to the sharing application.
  • the sharing application can filter out one or more recently interacted contacts from a specified number of recently interacted contacts in all types of applications as objects to be shared, and display them in the in-app sharing interface (or in-app sharing window).
  • FIG. 13A exemplarily shows an architectural diagram of a communication system 1300 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 1300 may include an electronic device 100 , an electronic device 200 and a cloud server 300 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include an application processor (application processor, AP) 1310, a high-fidelity (high-fidelity, HiFi) module 1320, and a modem (modem) 1330.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • AP application processor
  • HiFi high-fidelity
  • modem modem
  • the application processor 1310 may include one or more functional modules, and the one or more functional modules may include a fusion call (FusionCall) module 1311 and a network address translation service (Network address translation service, NatService) module 1312.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can be used to perform user-level authentication with the account server 1371 in the cloud server 300 to obtain an access token (access token, AT).
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can also be used to request the business cloud server 1380 to authenticate AT, generate point to point tokens (P2P Token), exchange session identifiers (session identifiers, sessionID) for NAT traversal, and push service docking. ,etc.
  • the NatService module 1312 can be used to interact with the network address translation (NAT) traversal cloud server 1390 for NAT traversal signaling to complete a point-to-point (P2P) auxiliary link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 NAT traversal and a relay link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are established.
  • NAT network address translation
  • P2P point-to-point
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can also be used to request the business cloud server 1380 to perform device-level authentication on the electronic device 100, for example, to verify the device certificate of the electronic device 100.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can also be used to perform data interaction with the HiFi module 1320, and perform operations such as intercepting, and/or merging, and/or replacing RTP data packets, so as to realize the data content selected by the user through the call.
  • the main link is sent to the electronic device 200.
  • the role of the FusionCall module 1311 may also include but is not limited to the following functions: responsible for calling the network address service module to manage the auxiliary link (for example, the establishment and release of the auxiliary link).
  • responsible for reading shared content data for example, file data, location information, open links, calendars, application installation packages, etc.).
  • responsible for offloading, transmitting, unpacking, etc. of shared content data responsible for writing and storing shared content data.
  • UX relevant user experience
  • system sharing interface including options for currently interacting contacts or options for recently interacted contacts
  • the NatService module 1312 can be used to implement the establishment and release of auxiliary links, etc.
  • the HiFi module 1320 can be used to realize the transmission of real-time call data through the real-time transport protocol (real-time transport protocol, RTP)/real-time transport control protocol (real-time transport control protocol, RTCP).
  • real-time transport protocol real-time transport protocol, RTP
  • real-time transport control protocol real-time transport control protocol, RTCP
  • the modem 1330 may include a routing Internet protocol (IP) multimedia system (IP multimedia subsystem, IMS) adapter (IMS adapter, IMSA) and an IMS protocol stack.
  • IP Internet protocol
  • IMS IP multimedia subsystem
  • IMSVA can be used to implement protocol data transmission between the RTP/RTCP protocol and the IMS protocol stack.
  • the modem 1330 may be used to implement IMS calls with the electronic device 200 on the main link on the operator's network based on the IMS protocol stack.
  • IMS calls may include but are not limited to VoLTE, ViLTE, VoNR, ViNR, VoWiFi, ViWiFi, EPS-Fallback and other types of calls.
  • the electronic device 200 may include an application processor 1340, a HiFi module 1350, and a modem 1360.
  • the application processor 1340 may include one or more functional modules, and the one or more functional modules may include a FusionCall module 1341 and a NatService module 1342.
  • the FusionCall module 1341 can be used to perform user-level authentication with the account server 1371 in the cloud server 300 to obtain an access token (access token, AT).
  • the FusionCall module 1341 can also be used to request the business cloud server 1380 to authenticate AT, generate P2P Token, exchange session ID for NAT traversal, push service docking, etc.
  • the NatService module 1342 can be used to interact with NAT traversal signaling with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 to complete NAT traversal between the P2P auxiliary link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 and between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 The trunk link is established.
  • the FusionCall module 1341 can also be used to request the service cloud server 1380 to perform device-level authentication on the electronic device 100, for example, to verify the device certificate of the electronic device 100.
  • the FusionCall module 1341 can also be used to perform data interaction with the HiFi module 1320, and perform operations such as interception, and/or merging, and/or replacement of RTP data packets to achieve reception on the main link of the call.
  • the data content sent by the electronic device 100 can also be used to perform data interaction with the HiFi module 1320, and perform operations such as interception, and/or merging, and/or replacement of RTP data packets to achieve reception on the main link of the call.
  • the NatService module 1342 can be used to implement the establishment and release of auxiliary links, etc.
  • the HiFi module 1350 can be used to transmit real-time call data through RTP/RTCP.
  • the modem 1360 may include IMSVA and IMS protocol stack.
  • the IMSVA can be used to implement protocol data transmission between the RTP/RTCP protocol and the IMS protocol stack.
  • the modem 1360 can be used to implement IMS calls with the electronic device 200 on the main link on the operator's network based on the IMS protocol stack.
  • IMS calls may include but are not limited to VoLTE, ViLTE, VoNR, ViNR, VoWiFi, ViWiFi, EPS-Fallback and other types of calls.
  • the cloud server 300 may include one or more cloud service function modules.
  • the one or more cloud service function modules may include an account and wake-up cloud server 1370, a business cloud server 1380, and a network address translation (network address translation, NAT) traversal cloud server 1390.
  • the account and wake-up cloud server 1370 may include an account server 1371 and a push server 1372.
  • the business cloud server 1380 may include a wise function (WiseFunction) module 1381.
  • the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 may include a terminal router system (TRS) server 1391, a session traversal utilities for NAT (STUN) server 1392 in a NAT environment, and a relay penetration NAT (travelersal using relays around NAT).
  • TRS terminal router system
  • STUN session traversal utilities for NAT
  • the account server 1371 may be used to authenticate the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200, where the authentication includes user-level authentication and device-level authentication (for example, verifying the device certificate of the electronic device).
  • the account server 1371 may generate an AT to the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200 after successfully authenticating the user account of the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200 .
  • different user accounts generate different ATs.
  • the AT can be used as a resource credential required when the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200 calls an application programming interface (API) to access resources on the cloud server 300.
  • API application programming interface
  • the electronic device 100 can access services.
  • Server 1380 may generate an AT to the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200 after successfully authenticating the user account of the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200 .
  • the AT can be used as a resource credential required when the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200 calls an application programming interface (API) to access resources on the cloud server 300.
  • API application programming interface
  • the process of generating AT through user-level authentication can be as follows:
  • the application client on the electronic device 100 identifies the required user permissions.
  • the application client on the electronic device 100 redirects the user to the account server 1371 (for example, oAuth server), and carries the permission (scope) list applied to the user in the redirect link.
  • the account server 1371 for example, oAuth server
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user account and password of the device system input by the user.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the confirmation input from the user who authorizes the user account and password of the device system to log in to the application client. If the application client is an authorization-free application, the electronic device 100 can directly use the user account and password of the device system to authorize and log in to the application client.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the user account and password to send a login request to the account server 1371 (eg, oAuth server).
  • the account server 1371 eg, oAuth server
  • the account server 1371 can verify the user account and password on the electronic device 100 .
  • the account server 1371 (for example, oAuth server) can issue an AT and send the AT to the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 can store the AT, for example, into the electronic device 100 In the client's small text file (cookie) or local storage (local stroge).
  • the cloud server 300 can first verify the AT carried in the request through the account server 1371. If the verification is successful, the cloud server 300 can return the requested data to the electronic device 100.
  • the account server 1371 can generate AT based on the user account and other information. For example, you can use the user information data obtained from the user account, system time, random number, and expiration time, perform RSA asymmetric encryption/AES symmetric encryption on the user information data to obtain an encrypted string, and sign the encrypted string again to obtain a signature. data. Then the signature data and encrypted string are spliced, and finally encoded using the base64 algorithm to obtain the final AT.
  • the account server 1371 can return AT to the electronic device 100 through an HTTP response, where the content of the HTTP response can be as follows:
  • the electronic device when using device-level authentication, can generate a digest from the device certificate, then use a private key to sign to obtain the signature data, and send the device certificate and signature data to the cloud.
  • Server 300 After receiving the device certificate and signature data, the cloud server 300 can use the public key corresponding to the private key to verify the signature data. If the verification is successful, the cloud server 300 can allow the electronic device 100 to access the data on the cloud server 300 .
  • the cloud server 300 can also verify the serial number (SN) code of the electronic device. After the verification is passed, the cloud server 300 can allow the electronic device to access data on the cloud server 300.
  • SN serial number
  • the push server 1372 can be used to wake up the electronic device 200 to start establishing the auxiliary link.
  • the service cloud server 1380 can be used to implement link addressing, such as session ID exchange for NAT traversal, wake-up docking of wake-up services between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 , and so on.
  • link addressing such as session ID exchange for NAT traversal, wake-up docking of wake-up services between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 , and so on.
  • session ID exchange process please refer to subsequent embodiments and will not be described in detail here.
  • the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can be used to implement NAT P2P traversal link establishment and transmission between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 based on the NAT traversal signaling between the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200, or, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200.
  • the TURN relay link between devices 200 is established and transmitted.
  • the specific processes of NAT P2P traversal link establishment and transmission, and TURN relay link establishment and transmission can be referred to subsequent embodiments and will not be described again here.
  • Figure 13B exemplarily shows the architecture diagram of another communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the application processor 1310 of the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311, a system sharing module 1313, In-application sharing module 1314 and data channel (DC) module 1315.
  • the modem 1330 of the electronic device 100 may include a data routing module 1331 and a quality of service class identifier (QCI)/5G quality of service class identifier (5QI) configuration module 1332.
  • QCI quality of service class identifier
  • 5QI quality of service class identifier
  • the system sharing module 1313 can be used to provide a system sharing function.
  • the in-application sharing module 1314 may be used to provide functionality for sharing data within the application.
  • Channel management and routing configuration of data channels can be implemented in the DC module 1315.
  • the DC module 1315 can also realize the transmission of media streams or control streams in the data channel in the main link based on the stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, STCP) and datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocols. .
  • the DC module 1315 may transmit the media stream (including data content of specified data) and the control stream (including control instructions for sharing specified data) to the modem 1330 .
  • the modem 1330 can realize the transmission of media streams between the electronic device 200 and the data channel of the main link based on the TCP/IP protocol stack.
  • the modem 1330 can implement control flow transmission between the electronic device 200 and the data channel of the main link based on the IMS protocol stack and the TCP/IP protocol stack.
  • the data routing module 1331 in the modem 1330 can implement routing control in the media stream or control stream.
  • the QCI/5QI configuration module 1332 in the modem 1330 may be based on implementing the classification and identification of quality of service levels in media streams or control streams.
  • the application processor 1340 of the electronic device 200 may include a FusionCall module 1341, a system sharing module 1343, an in-application sharing module 1344, and a data channel (data channel, DC) module 1345.
  • the modem 1360 of the electronic device 200 may include a data routing module 1361 and a quality of service class identifier (QCI)/5G quality of service class identifier (5QI) configuration module 1362.
  • QCI quality of service class identifier
  • 5QI quality of service class identifier
  • the system sharing module 1343 can be used to provide a system sharing function.
  • the in-application sharing module 1344 may be used to provide functionality for sharing data within the application.
  • the DC module 1345 can also realize the transmission of media streams or control streams in the data channel in the main link based on the stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, STCP) and datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocols. .
  • the DC module 1345 may transmit the media stream (including the data content of the specified data) and the control stream (including the control instructions when sharing the specified data) to the modem 1360.
  • the modem 1360 can realize the transmission of media streams between the electronic device 200 and the data channel of the main link based on the TCP/IP protocol stack.
  • the modem 1360 can implement control flow transmission between the electronic device 200 and the data channel of the main link based on the IMS protocol stack and the TCP/IP protocol stack.
  • the data routing module 1361 in the modem 1360 can implement routing control in the media stream or control stream.
  • the QCI/5QI configuration module 1361 in the modem 1360 may be based on implementing the classification and identification of service quality levels in media streams or control streams.
  • Figure 13C exemplarily shows the architecture diagram of another communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the application processor 1310 of the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311, a system sharing module 1313, an in-application sharing module 1314, and a data channel (data channel, DC) management module 1316.
  • the modem 1330 of the electronic device 100 may include a data routing module 1331, a quality of service class identifier (QCI)/5G quality of service class identifier (5QI) configuration module 1332, Data channel (DC) protocol module 1333.
  • QCI quality of service class identifier
  • 5QI Data channel
  • the DC management module 1316 can implement channel management and routing configuration of the data channel.
  • the DC protocol module 1333 can realize the transmission of media streams or control streams in the data channel in the main link based on the stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, STCP) and datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocols. .
  • the DC protocol module 1333 may transmit the media stream (data content including specified data) to the TCP/IP protocol stack of the modem 1330 for processing.
  • the DC protocol module 1333 can transmit the control flow (including control instructions when sharing specified data) to the IMS protocol stack of the modem 1330 for processing. After the IMS protocol stack processes the control flow, it transmits it to the TCP/IP protocol stack for continued processing.
  • the application processor 1340 of the electronic device 200 may include a FusionCall module 1341, a system sharing module 1343, an in-application sharing module 1344, and a data channel (data channel, DC) management module 1346.
  • the modem 1360 of the electronic device 200 may include a data routing module 1361, a quality of service class identifier (QCI)/5G quality of service class identifier (5QI) configuration module 1362, Data channel (DC) protocol module 1363.
  • QCI quality of service class identifier
  • 5QI Data channel
  • the DC management module 1346 can implement channel management and routing configuration of the data channel.
  • the DC protocol module 1363 can realize the transmission of the media stream or control stream in the data channel in the main link based on the stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, STCP) and the datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocol. lose.
  • the DC protocol module 1363 may transmit the media stream (data content including specified data) to the TCP/IP protocol stack of the modem 1360 for processing.
  • the DC protocol module 1363 can transmit the control flow (including control instructions when sharing specified data) to the IMS protocol stack of the modem 1360 for processing. After the IMS protocol stack processes the control flow, it transmits it to the TCP/IP protocol stack for continued processing.
  • the following describes the process of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the data transmission link may be established in the following ways:
  • the IMS protocol is used.
  • the original RTP message can be expanded to add message types for transmitting shared data.
  • the synchronization source identifier (SSRC) in the RTP message can be used to mark whether the RTP message carries the voice/video frame data of the call or the designated data shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the core network equipment of the cellular network equipment needs to enter the transparent transmission mode and does not filter or transcode the RTP packets.
  • the call link established between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 using the IMS protocol includes a data channel.
  • This data channel is a data transmission channel other than the call signaling QCI5 channel and the audio QCI1/audio QCI2 channel.
  • the introduction of this data channel can refer to the protocol specification TS 26.114, which will not be repeated here.
  • Electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 can negotiate to establish a secondary link by carrying connection information through the RTCP packet of the main call link.
  • connection information can be carried in an RTCP source description (SDES) packet and sent to the electronic device 200 .
  • the connection information may include communication ID, IP address and other information used for NAT traversal.
  • connection information can carry the canonical name (CNAME) item in the SDES entry (items) field.
  • CNAME canonical name
  • RTCP data may include a header and one or more chunks.
  • the header can include a version number (V) field, a source description item number (SC) field, a packet type (packet type, PT) field, a length (length) field, and padding (P). ) field.
  • V version number
  • SC source description item number
  • P padding
  • the chunk can include source identifiers (synchronous source identifiers (SSRC) or special source identifiers (CSRC)) and source description items (SDES items).
  • SSRC synchronous source identifiers
  • CSRC special source identifiers
  • SDES items source description items
  • the value of the version number field can be "2”
  • the value of the PT field can be "202" (used to indicate that the RTCP data packet is an SDES packet.
  • the SDES items field may include a CNME field (the value may be "1"), a length field (for example, the length may be 36 bits), and connection information.
  • the length field may be used to indicate the The data length of the connection information.
  • Electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 can address each other's communication ID through cloud server 300.
  • Electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 can establish an auxiliary link between electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 based on the communication IDs of both parties.
  • Figure 15 illustrates an auxiliary link establishment process provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the link establishment process may include the following three stages: registration/login stage, addressing stage, and link establishment stage.
  • the registration/login phase includes the following steps S1501 to S1502, the addressing phase includes the following steps S1503 to S1506, and the link establishment phase includes the following step S1507. in:
  • the electronic device 100 binds, registers and logs in the ID group A and the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 to the cloud server 300 and saves them.
  • the electronic device 200 binds and registers the ID group B and the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 to the cloud server 300.
  • the query request A can be used to obtain the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may send a query request A to the cloud server 300, where the query request A carries all or part of the information of the ID group B of the electronic device 200.
  • the cloud server 300 may return the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 200 may send a query request B to the cloud server 300.
  • the query request B carries all or part of the information of the ID group A of the electronic device 100.
  • the query request B can be used to query the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 .
  • the cloud server 300 may return the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 establish an auxiliary link based on the communication identifier A and the communication identifier B.
  • the auxiliary link includes an IP direct link, a NAT penetration point-to-point link, or a server relay link, etc.
  • the cloud server 300 shown in FIG. 15 may specifically be the business cloud server 1380 in the cloud server 300 .
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram illustrating the principle in which the electronic device 100 obtains the communication identification of the electronic device 200 from the business cloud server 1380 in the implementation of this application.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can register and log in to the business cloud server 1380 after binding their respective ID groups and communication identifiers. That is, the electronic device 100 can bind the ID group A and the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 into binding information A, register and log in to the business cloud server 1380 and save it.
  • the electronic device 200 can bind the ID group B and the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 into binding information B, register it on the service server 1380 and save it.
  • the ID group may include one or a combination of the following: one or more phone numbers, one or more OTT IDs (for example, user ID of an instant messaging application, email address, etc.), and so on.
  • the binding information can be registered and logged into the business server 1380 and saved after being deprived of privacy (for example, hash operation).
  • the binding information saved on the business server 1380 may be temporary, and the business server 1380 controls whether to delete it, or it may be accurate, and the electronic device (electronic device 100 or electronic device 200) controls whether to delete it.
  • the business server 1380 can set a session time threshold (session timer) for the session with the electronic device, for example, 10 minutes. After the session duration between the business server 1380 and the electronic device exceeds the session timer, the service server 1380 can automatically delete the binding information of the electronic device, or set it to an inactive state. The electronic device can refresh the session and extend the session timer before the session exceeds the session timer.
  • session timer session time threshold
  • the electronic device can decide when to delete the binding information. For example, the electronic device can request the service server 1380 to delete the saved binding information after the call ends or after the network status changes.
  • the process of the electronic device 100 querying the communication identification of the electronic device 200 from the business cloud server 1380 may include the following steps:
  • the electronic device 100 obtains all or part of the information in the ID group A of the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 sends a query request to the service server 1380 to query the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 .
  • the query request carries all or part of the information in ID group B of the electronic device 200 .
  • the business server 1380 After receiving the query request of the electronic device 100, the business server 1380 queries the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 based on all or part of the information in the ID group B of the electronic device 200, and returns the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100. Communication identification B.
  • the communication identification may be a session identification (sessionID) generated by the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 for the electronic device (electronic device 100 or electronic device 200).
  • the electronic device can perform session communication with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 through the session identifier.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are addressed through the business cloud server 1380 and exchange session IDs of both parties.
  • sessionID session identification
  • the communication identifier can be the IP address of the electronic device in the local area network.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can directly use Establish an auxiliary link (including P2P link or server relay link) with the IP address in the other party's LAN.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can obtain each other's IP address in the local area network through the cloud server 300, or they can obtain each other's IP address in the local area network through the routing device in the local area network.
  • the communication identifier may be the IPV6 address of the electronic device (electronic device 100 or electronic device 200).
  • IPV6 address information including the IPV6 address and port number
  • the cloud server 300 After the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 obtain the other party's IPV6 address information (including the IPV6 address and port number) through the cloud server 300, they directly establish an auxiliary link (including a P2P link or a server) based on the other party's IPV6 address information. relay link).
  • IPV6 Internet Protocol Version 6
  • Figure 17 shows a schematic diagram of the addressing process in an auxiliary link provided in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the addressing process may include the following four stages: authentication and generation of point-to-point token (P2P Token) stage, binding or refreshing stage, addressing stage, and session end stage.
  • the authentication and P2P Token generation phase may include steps S1701 to S1702
  • the binding or refreshing phase may include steps S1703 to S1704
  • the addressing phase may include steps S1705 to S1704.
  • S1713, the session end phase includes steps S1714 to S1715. in:
  • the electronic device 100 performs authentication with the business cloud server 1380 (including user-level authentication or device-level authentication).
  • the business cloud server 1380 After the business cloud server 1380 passes the authentication of the electronic device 100, it can return the point-to-point token A (P2P Token-A) to the electronic device 100.
  • P2P Token-A point-to-point token A
  • the P2P Token-A can be used by the electronic device 100 to access the data of the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 and request the service function on the NAT traversal cloud server 1390.
  • the electronic device 100 can send a long connection request to the NAT traversal cloud server 1390, requesting to establish a long connection with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390.
  • the long connection request carries the P2P Token-A.
  • the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can request the business cloud server 1380 to verify the P2P Token-A. If the verification is successful, the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can generate the session ID A (sessionID-A) of the long connection session for the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 100.
  • Equipment 100 is the session ID A of the long connection session for the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 sends the binding information A to the business cloud server 1380 for storage.
  • the binding information A includes the ID group A of the electronic device 100 and the session ID A (sessionID-A) returned by the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 to the electronic device 100 .
  • the ID group A may include one or more combinations of the following IDs of the electronic device 100: one or more phone numbers, one or more application account IDs (for example, user IDs of instant messaging applications, email addresses, etc. ),etc.
  • the electronic device 100 compresses the ID of the electronic device 100 and puts it into ID group A.
  • the electronic device 100 can run two SIM cards, and the mobile phone numbers of these two SIM cards are mobile phone number A1 and mobile phone number A2 respectively.
  • the electronic device 100 can perform a hash operation on the mobile phone number A1 to obtain a hash value 1, and perform a hash operation on the mobile phone number A2 to obtain a hash value 2. And put hash value 1 and hash value 2 into ID group A.
  • S1704, the electronic device 100 can update the binding information A, and save the updated binding information A to the business cloud server 1380.
  • the electronic device 100 may update the binding information A when the information in the ID group A and/or the session ID A assigned to the electronic device 100 by the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 changes, and save the updated binding information A. Go to business cloud server 1380.
  • the electronic device 100 may operate with 2 SIM cards, SIM Card 1 and SIM Card 2.
  • SIM card 1 corresponds to mobile phone number A1
  • SIM card 2 corresponds to mobile phone number A2.
  • the electronic device 100 can put the mobile phone number A1 and the mobile phone number A2 into the ID group A and bind the session identifier A to generate the binding information A, and send the binding information A to the business cloud server 1380.
  • the electronic device 100 can put the mobile phone number A2 into the ID group A and the session identifier. A binds, generates updated binding information A, and sends the updated binding information A to the business cloud server 1380.
  • the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 may generate a new session identifier A for the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may bind the ID group A and the new session identification A to generate updated binding information A, and send the updated binding information A to the business cloud server 1380 .
  • the electronic device 100 can send a query request A to the business cloud server 1380.
  • the query request A can include all or part of the information in the ID group B of the electronic device 200.
  • the query request A can be used to query the session of the electronic device 200.
  • ID group B may include one or a combination of the following IDs of the electronic device 200: one or more phone numbers, one or more application account IDs (for example, user IDs of instant messaging applications, email addresses, etc. wait wait wait.
  • ID group B may refer to all IDs in ID group B or one or more IDs.
  • the business cloud server 1380 may determine whether the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 is matched.
  • the business cloud server 1380 After the business cloud server 1380 matches the session identifier B of the electronic device 200, it may return the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100.
  • the business cloud server 1380 may determine whether the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up.
  • the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 200 is in a sleep state or a non-awakened state such as a screen-off state, the electronic device 200 may not be able to access the business cloud.
  • Server 1380 Therefore, the business cloud server 1380 can wake up the electronic device 200 to communicate with the business server 1380 .
  • the business cloud server 1380 can wake up the electronic device 200 through the push server 1372.
  • the business cloud server 1380 can return the failure reason to the electronic device 200.
  • the failure reasons may include the electronic device 200 not waking up, the electronic device 200 being powered off, and so on.
  • the electronic device 200 can authenticate with the business cloud server 1380.
  • the business cloud server 1380 can return a point-to-point token B (P2P Token-B) to the electronic device 200.
  • P2P Token-B point-to-point token B
  • the P2P Token-B can be used by the electronic device 200 to access the data of the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 and request the service function on the NAT traversal cloud server 1390.
  • the electronic device 100 can send a long connection request to the NAT traversal cloud server 1390, requesting to establish a long connection with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390.
  • the long connection request carries the P2P Token-B.
  • the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can request the business cloud server 1380 to verify the P2P Token-B. If the verification is successful, the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can generate the session ID B (sessionID-B) of the long connection session for the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 200.
  • Equipment 100 is the session ID B (sessionID-B) of the long connection session for the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 200.
  • the electronic device 200 sends the binding information B to the business cloud server 1380 for storage.
  • the binding information B includes the ID group B of the electronic device 100 and the session identifier B returned by the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the business cloud server 1380 may return the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 After receiving the session identifier B of the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can actively request to release the long connection session with the business cloud server 1380.
  • the business cloud server 1380 can also automatically release the session with the electronic device 100 after sending the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100.
  • Figure 18 shows the functional module interaction process between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311 and a Network Address Translation Service (NatService) module 1312.
  • the electronic device 200 may include a FusionCall module 1341 and a NatService module 1342.
  • the interaction process between the above functional modules can be as follows:
  • FusionCall module 1311 initializes the transmission service of NatService module 1312.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can initialize the transmission service in the NatService module 1312 through the function "RfcManager.int".
  • the FusionCall module 1311 applies to the NatService module 1312 for the session identifier A of the long connection channel.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can apply to the NatService module 1312 for the session ID A of the long connection channel with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 through the function "allocTunnelID(p2ptoken, cb)".
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can provide the P2P Token-A generated by the business cloud server 1380 for the electronic device 100 to the NatService module 1312 through the function "allocTunnelID (p2ptoken, cb)".
  • the NatService module 1312 can carry the P2P Token-A when sending a long connection request to the NAT traversal cloud server 1390.
  • the NatService module 1312 returns the session identifier A of the long connection channel to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can return the session ID A to the FusionCall module 1311 through the function "cb(TunnelID)".
  • the parameter "TunnelID" is session ID A.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 requests the NatService module 1312 to create a session with the electronic device 200.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can provide the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312, and request the NatService module 1312 to establish a transmission session with the electronic device 200.
  • the NatService module 1312 may send the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the NAT traversal cloud server 1390, and request the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 to complete the establishment of a transmission session between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can request the NatService module 1312 to establish a transmission session with the electronic device 200 through the function "createSessionByTunnelID (p2ptoken, remoteTunnelID, flag, IsessionCallback callback)".
  • the parameter "p2ptoken” in the function "createSessionByTunnelID (p2ptoken, remoteTunnelID, flag, IsessionCallback callback)" is the above-mentioned P2P Token-A
  • the parameter "remoteTunnelID" is the session ID B of the electronic device 200.
  • the NatService module 1312 returns the transmission session creation result to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • the transfer session creation result may include creation success and creation failure.
  • the NatService module 1312 can return the session creation result to the FusionCall module 1311 through the function "ISessionCallback".
  • the function "ISessionCallback” can include the creation success function “onSessionCreate(Session session)" and the creation failure function "onconnectorState(int errorCode, String desc)".
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can add a listening event to the NatService module 1312.
  • the NatService module 1312 adds a listening event, it can be used to monitor the data sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 on the transmission session.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can add a listening event to the NatService module 1312 through the function "addListener (p2ptoken, ISessionListener listener)" to listen to data from the electronic device 200 on the transmission session.
  • the NatService module 1312 can return the listening result of the listening event to the FusionCall module 1311 through the function "ISessionListener listener".
  • the FusionCall module 1341 on the electronic device 200 provides sending data to the NatService module 1342.
  • the NatService module 1342 sends the data to the NatService module 1312 on the electronic device 100 through P2P direct transmission/server relay, etc.
  • the NatService module 1312 may return the received data to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • the NatService module 1312 can use the function "onAcceptBytes(byte[]data)" to return to the FusionCall module 1311 the data sent by the electronic device 200 after being successfully monitored.
  • the NatService module 1312 can use the function "onLisetenError(int errorCode, String desc)" to return the reason for the monitoring failure (for example, error code "errorCode") to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • FusionCall module 1311 provides sending data to NatService module 1312.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can provide the NatService module 1312 with data to be sent to the electronic device 200 through the function "Session.sendBytes(byte[]data)".
  • the NatService module 1312 sends the session transmission data to the NatService module 1342 on the electronic device 200 through P2P direct transmission/server relay, etc.
  • the NatService module 1342 on the electronic device 200 may return the received data to the FusionCall module 1341.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 removes the listening event from the NatService module 1312.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can remove the listening event to the NatService module 1312 after the data between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is completed.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can remove the listening event to the NatService module 1312 through the function "removeListener (SessionListener listener)".
  • the FusionCall module 1311 requests the NatService module 1312 to release the session.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can request the NatService module 1312 to release the transmission session with the electronic device 200 through the function "releaseSession (Session session)".
  • the FusionCall module 1311 requests the NatService module 1312 to destroy the transmission service.
  • the FusionCall module 1311 can request the destruction of the initialized transmission service on the NatService module 1312 through the function "RfcManager.free(Session session)".
  • Figure 19 shows a schematic diagram of a P2P direct link establishment process provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311 and a NatService module 1312.
  • NAT traversal cloud server The server 1390 may include a TRS server 1391, a Connector server 1394, a TURN server 1393, and a STUN server 1392.
  • the P2P direct link establishment process may include the following stages:
  • the NAT traversal stage includes:
  • Steps S1901 to S1911 may be as follows:
  • the NatService module 1312 may send a route acquisition request to the TRS server 1391.
  • the route acquisition request is used to obtain the address information of the Connector server 1394, the address information of the TURN server 1393, and the address information of the STUN server 1392.
  • the address information may include an IP address and a port number.
  • the route acquisition request may carry the P2P Token-A sent by the service server 1380 to the electronic device 100.
  • the NatService module 1312 can obtain the routing information on the TRS server 1391 through the interface "getroute" provided by the TRS server 1391.
  • the interface protocol of the TRS server 1391 can be transmission control protocol (transmission control protocol, TCP) or hyper text transfer protocol (hyper text transfer protocol over secure socket layer, HTTPS), etc.
  • the TRS server 1391 may return routing information to the NatService module 1312.
  • the routing information includes obtaining the address information of the Connector server 1394, the address information of the TURN server 1393, and the address information of the STUN server 1392.
  • the address information may include an IP address and a port.
  • the NatService module 1312 logs in to the TRS server 1391 through a long connection.
  • the NatService module 1312 logs in to the TRS server 1391 through a long connection through the interface provided by the Connector server 1394, it sends P2P Token-A to the Connector server 1394.
  • the interface protocol of the Connector server 1394 may be TCP or transport layer security (TLS).
  • TCP transport layer security
  • the data reading and writing method of P2P Token-A can be the binary big-endian reading and writing method, that is, the most significant byte of P2P Token-A is stored in the low address.
  • the Connector server 1394 returns the session ID A (sessionID-A) to the NatService module 1312.
  • FusionCall module 1311 exchanges session identifiers of both parties with electronic device 200 through service server 1380.
  • the NatService module 1312 sends an acquisition request for the NAT public network information of the electronic device 100 to the STUN server 1392.
  • the request for obtaining the NAT public network information of the electronic device 100 carries the above-mentioned P2P Token-A.
  • the NatService module 1312 can send a request for obtaining the NAT public network information of the electronic device 100 to the STUN server 1392 through the function "Binding" through the interface provided by the STUN server 1392.
  • the interface protocol of the STUN server 1392 may be the STUN protocol or the datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocol.
  • the STUN server 1392 returns the NAT public network information A of the electronic device 100 to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • the NAT public network information A may include the public network IP address of the electronic device 100 and the port number from the public network to the intranet.
  • the STUN server 1392 may compress or encrypt the NAT public network information A of the electronic device 100 and return it to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • the NAT public network information A can be XORed and then returned to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • the NatService module 1312 sends message A to the Connector server 1394.
  • the message A carries the NAT public network information A of the electronic device 100 and the session ID-B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200 .
  • the session ID-B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200 is a session ID generated by the Connector server 1394 for the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 can conduct a long connection session with the Connector server 1394 based on sessionID-B.
  • the Connector server 1394 forwards the NAT public network information A of the electronic device 100 in the message to the electronic device 200.
  • the Connector server 1394 may send the NAT public network information B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312.
  • the electronic device 200 may also send a request for obtaining the NAT public network information of the electronic device 200 to the STUN server 1392.
  • the request for obtaining the NAT public network information of the electronic device 200 carries the P2P Token-B assigned to the electronic device 200 by the business cloud server 1380.
  • the STUN server 1392 may return the NAT public network information B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the NAT public network information B includes the public network IP address of the electronic device 200 and the port number from the public network to the intranet.
  • Electronic device 200 may send message B to Connector server 1394.
  • Message B carries the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the NAT public network information B of the electronic device 200 .
  • the Connector server 1394 can forward the NAT public network information B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312 on the electronic device 100 .
  • the NatService module 1312 can perform connection detection with the electronic device 200 based on the NAT public network information B and establish a P2P transmission link.
  • the electronic device 100 can transmit specified data content selected by the user to be shared with the electronic device 200 based on the P2P transmission link, as well as control information (such as withdrawal instructions, file destruction instructions, etc.) to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may also return control information (eg, confirm receipt of instructions, refuse to receive instructions, etc.) or other data to the electronic device 100 based on the P2P transmission link.
  • Figure 20 shows a schematic diagram of a relay link establishment process provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311 and a NatService module 1312.
  • the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 may include a TRS server 1391, a Connector server 1394, a TURN server 1393, and a STUN server 1392.
  • the trunk link establishment process may include the following stages:
  • the NAT traversal stage includes:
  • Step S2001 to step S2016 may be as follows:
  • the NatService module 1312 may send a route acquisition request to the TRS server 1391.
  • the TRS server 1391 may return routing information to the NatService module 1312.
  • the NatService module 1312 logs in to the TRS server 1391 through a long connection.
  • the TRS server 1391 returns the session ID A (sessionID-A) to the NatService module 1312.
  • FusionCall module 1311 exchanges session identifiers of both parties with electronic device 200 through service server 1380.
  • steps S2001 and S2005 reference may be made to steps S1901 to S1905 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 19 , which will not be described again here.
  • the NatService module 1312 sends an acquisition request for the relay address of the electronic device 100 to the TURN server 1393.
  • the acquisition request for the relay address of the electronic device 100 carries the above-mentioned P2P Token-A.
  • the NatService module 1312 may send an acquisition request for the relay address of the electronic device 100 to the TURN server 1393 through the function "Allocation" or "Refresh” in the interface provided by the TURN server 1393.
  • the interface protocol of the TURN server 1393 may be the TURN protocol or the datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocol.
  • the function "Allocation” or “Refresh” can read and write the data of P2P Token-A in binary big-endian way, that is, the most significant byte of P2P Token-A is stored in the low address.
  • the data format of P2P Token-A can be tag length value (TLV) format.
  • the TURN server 1393 returns the relay address A of the electronic device 100 to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • the STUN server 1392 may compress or encrypt the relay address A of the electronic device 100 and return it to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • the relay address A can be XORed and then returned to the FusionCall module 1311.
  • the NatService module 1312 sends message C to the Connector server 1394.
  • the message C carries the relay address A of the electronic device 100 and the session ID-B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200 .
  • the session ID-B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200 is a session ID generated by the Connector server 1394 for the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 can conduct a long connection session with the Connector server 1394 based on sessionID-B.
  • the NatService module 1312 can send message A to the Connector server 1394 through the function "SendMsg()" in the interface provided by the Connector server 1394.
  • the data in the message C can be read and written in binary big-endian format.
  • the interface protocol of the Connector server 1394 may be the TCP protocol or the TLS protocol.
  • the Connector server 1394 forwards the relay address A of the electronic device 100 in the message C to the electronic device 200.
  • the Connector server 1394 may send the relay address B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312.
  • the electronic device 200 may also send an acquisition request for the relay address of the electronic device 200 to the TURN server 1393.
  • the request for obtaining the relay address of the electronic device 200 carries the P2P Token-B assigned to the electronic device 200 by the business cloud server 1380.
  • the TURN server 1393 may return the relay address B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 200 .
  • Electronic device 200 may send message D to Connector server 1394.
  • the message D carries the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the relay address of the electronic device 200 .
  • the Connector server 1394 may forward the relay address B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312 on the electronic device 100 .
  • the NatService module 1312 may send the license creation request A to the TURN server 1393.
  • the license creation request A may carry the P2P Token-A of the electronic device 100 and the relay address B of the electronic device 200.
  • the permission creation request A may be used to request the TURN server 1393 to create a relay forwarding link from the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 .
  • the NatService module 1312 can send the permission creation request A to the TURN server 1393 through the function "CreatePermission()" based on the TURN protocol or the DTLS protocol on the interface of the TURN server 1393.
  • the electronic device 200 may send the license creation request B to the TURN server 1393.
  • the license creation request B may carry the P2P Token-B of the electronic device 200 and the relay address A of the electronic device 100.
  • This permission creation request B may be used to request the TURN server 1393 to create a relay forwarding link from the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 can send the permission creation request B to the TURN server 1393 through the function "CreatePermission()" based on the TURN protocol or the DTLS protocol on the interface provided by the TURN server 1393.
  • the NatService module 1312 can send data packet A to the TURN server 1393.
  • the data packet A carries the session ID B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200, the relay address B and the data A of the electronic device 200.
  • the NatService module 1312 can send the data packet A to the TURN server 1393 through the function "Send()" on the interface provided by the TURN server 1393.
  • the data in the data packet A can be read and written in the binary big-endian reading and writing mode, that is, the most significant byte of the data in the data packet A is stored at the low address.
  • the data format of packet A may be tag length value (TLV) format.
  • the TURN server 1393 may forward the data packet A to the electronic device 200.
  • the TURN server 1393 After receiving the data packet A, the TURN server 1393 can parse out the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 and the relay address B of the electronic device 200 carried in the data packet A. Therefore, the TURN server 1393 can determine that the data in the data packet A is sent to the electronic device 200 based on the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 and the relay address B of the electronic device 200 . The TURN server 1393 forwards the data A in the data packet A to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 can send data packet B to the TURN server 1393.
  • the data packet B carries the session ID A (sessionID-A) of the electronic device 100, the relay address B and the data B of the electronic device 200.
  • the TURN server 1393 can forward the data packet B to the NatService module 1312.
  • the TURN server 1393 After receiving the data packet B, the TURN server 1393 can parse out the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the relay address A of the electronic device 100 carried in the data packet B. Therefore, the TURN server 1393 can determine that the data in the data packet B is sent to the electronic device 100 based on the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the relay address A of the electronic device 100 . The TURN server 1393 may forward data B in the data packet B to the electronic device 100 .
  • the NatService module 1312 can receive the data B through the function "Recv()" on the interface provided by the TURN server 1393.
  • the reading and writing method of the data B can be the binary big-endian reading and writing method, that is, the most significant byte of the data B is stored in the low address.
  • the data format of packet A may be tag length value (TLV) format.
  • the relay address A of the electronic device 100 can be used to instruct the TURN server 1393 to provide a communication interface for the electronic device 200
  • the relay address B of the electronic device 200 may be used to indicate the IP address of the access terminal B on the TURN server 1393 that provides a communication interface for the electronic device 200 .
  • the IP address of access terminal A and the IP address of access terminal B may be the same.
  • the IP address of access terminal A and the IP address of access terminal B may also be different.
  • Figure 21 shows a schematic diagram of a device wake-up process in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 200 may include applications, mobile services (for example, Huawei mobile service (HMS), etc.), push agents (push agents), etc. agent).
  • the cloud server 300 may include a push server and a business cloud server 1380.
  • the device wake-up process may include the following steps:
  • the integrated call application can request a push token from the mobile service.
  • the mobile service can send a broadcast to the push agent.
  • the push agent After receiving the broadcast, the push agent can request the push Token from the push server 1372.
  • the push server 1372 returns push token A (push Token-A) to the push agent.
  • the push server 1372 can authenticate the electronic device 100, and after successful authentication, return push token-B to the push agent.
  • the authentication includes user-level authentication or device-level authentication.
  • For the authentication process of the electronic device 100 reference can be made to the aforementioned embodiment shown in FIG. 13A, which will not be described again here.
  • the push agent can return the push Token to the converged call application.
  • the integrated call application can save push Token-B to the application server.
  • the converged call application is closed, thereby disconnecting the long connection with the business cloud server 1380 .
  • the business cloud server 1380 may determine that the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up.
  • the business cloud server 1380 may query whether the session ID of the electronic device 200 is stored on the business cloud server 1380. If the business cloud server 1380 does not query the session ID of the electronic device 200 and the long connection between the business cloud server 1380 and the electronic device 200 has been disconnected, the business cloud server 1380 may determine that the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up.
  • the business cloud server 1380 can send a notification to the electronic device 100.
  • the notification is used to notify the electronic device 100 that the electronic device 200 has not woken up.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an input from the user confirming to wake up the electronic device 200, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a wake-up indication to the business cloud server 1380. After receiving the wake-up instruction, the business cloud server 1380 may determine that the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up.
  • the business cloud server 1380 may send a wake-up instruction to the push server 1372.
  • the wake-up command carries push Token-B.
  • the business cloud server 1380 can send a wake-up message to the push agent.
  • the push agent can wake up the integrated call application to log in to the business cloud server 1380 through a long connection after receiving the wake-up message.
  • the push Token-B carries the application identification of the converged call application and the device identification of the electronic device 200 .
  • the push server 1372 can send a wake-up message to one or more push agents that have established long connections with the push server 1372, where the wake-up message includes the following push Token-B.
  • the push agent on the electronic device 200 can determine whether the device identification carried in the push Token-B is the device identification of the electronic device 200. If so, the push agent on the electronic device 200 can wake up the push Token.
  • the push agent of the electronic device 200 may send the application identification of the fused call application and the device identification of the electronic device 200 to the push server 1372.
  • the push server 1372 may generate push Token-B based on the application identification of the integrated call application and the device identification of the electronic device 200 .
  • the push server 1372 may bind the application identification of the converged calling application, the device identification of the electronic device 200 and the push Token-B into a mapping relationship and save them.
  • the push server 1372 may determine from the local storage mapping relationship that the converged call application on the electronic device 200 needs to be awakened based on the push Token-B in the wake-up instruction.
  • the push server 1372 may send a wakeup message to the push agent of the electronic device 200 .
  • the wake-up message carries the application identification of the converged calling application, or the wake-up message carries the application identification of the converged calling application and the device identification of the electronic device 200 .
  • the push agent of the electronic device 200 can wake up the human fusion call application of the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 may not save the push Token-B to the business cloud server 1380.
  • the electronic device 100 may obtain the push Token-B of the electronic device 200 before waking up the electronic device 200, and the electronic device 100 may receive the user
  • the input to wake up the electronic device 200 is confirmed, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a wake-up indication to the business cloud server 1380 .
  • the wake-up instruction carries the push Token-B of the electronic device 200.
  • the business cloud server 1380 may determine that the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up, and send the above-mentioned wake-up message carrying push Token-B to the push agent of the electronic device 200.
  • the electronic device 100 After reading the designated data selected by the user, the electronic device 100 can perform packet processing on the designated data.
  • the data When transmitting the specified data through the network, the data needs to be aligned in network byte order. Therefore, a data packet format is provided in this embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 22 shows the data structure of a data packet provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the data packet may include a transmission header (transmission head, TransHead) and transmission data (transmission data, TransData).
  • TransData can be the binary data of the specified data selected by the above user.
  • the definition of the data package can be as follows:
  • TransHead can include a data type (type) field, a length (length) field, and a sequence number (sequence number, seq) field.
  • the data type field can be used to indicate the type of data transmitted in this packet.
  • the types of transmitted data may include raw image format (RAW), command (CMD), voice (voice), and other types.
  • the length field can be used to indicate the data length of the transmitted data.
  • the sequence field can be used to indicate the sequence number of the data packet in multiple data packets after the specified data fragmentation.
  • the specified data needs to be cut into multiple data packets according to the above data packet format.
  • TransHead since TransHead includes the seq field, it indicates the sequence number of the data packet. Therefore, the receiving end can easily assemble multiple data packets into complete specified data based on the seq field in TransHead. In this way, no matter whether the underlying protocol uses UDP, TCP protocol or quick protocol, the receiving end can still recover the specified data from multiple data packets.
  • the seq field can not be set in TransHead and the underlying TCP protocol can be directly used for transmission. In this way, the sequential transmission of specified data can be completed at the TCP layer.
  • a transport protocol appropriate for that type may be used.
  • the RTP protocol can be used to transmit real-time streaming media data
  • the file transfer protocol (FTP) can be used to transmit file data.
  • the electronic device 100 shares the designated data selected by the user with the electronic device 200, it can use the main link of the call or the auxiliary link. And there can also be multiple auxiliary links. Therefore, a data offloading strategy needs to be determined. Among them, the strategy can be as follows:
  • the electronic device 100 may select one or more data transmission links with the fastest transmission speed among the primary link and the auxiliary link, or concurrently transmit specified data selected by the user in multiple links among the primary link and the auxiliary link.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 chooses to concurrently transmit some data packets on multiple links, the electronic device 100 can redundantly and repeatedly transmit some data packets in the multi-links, so that the electronic device 200 can obtain data from the data packets transmitted in the multi-links. Recover the specified data selected by the user.
  • the electronic device 100 can select the link with lower power consumption during transmission among the primary link and the auxiliary link to transmit the specified data selected by the user.
  • the electronic device 100 can select the link with the lowest cost among the primary link and the auxiliary link to transmit the specified data selected by the user. For example, specified data selected by the user can be prioritized for transmission over the Wi-Fi link.
  • Figure 23 illustrates a schematic flow chart of a file recall mechanism provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the file recall mechanism may include the following steps:
  • the electronic device 100 can transmit specified data to the electronic device 200.
  • the electronic device 200 After receiving the specified data, the electronic device 200 can save the specified data and record the saving path of the specified data.
  • the electronic device 200 can monitor and record the saving path of the specified data after being moved/or copied.
  • the electronic device 100 may send a withdrawal instruction to the electronic device 200.
  • the electronic device 100 may send the withdrawal instruction to the electronic device 200 on the data transmission link.
  • the electronic device 100 may send the withdrawal instruction to the electronic device 200 on the data transmission link.
  • the electronic device 200 may determine whether the storage time of the specified data has expired.
  • the electronic device 200 can find the storage path of the specified data and delete the specified data.
  • the electronic device 200 may directly find the storage path of the specified data and delete the specified data without determining whether it times out.
  • the reception status of the specified data can be updated.
  • the electronic device 200 may display a withdrawal prompt, which is used to remind the user that the specified data has been withdrawn.
  • the electronic device 200 may display an option of specifying data in the received file list, and mark the status of the option of specifying data as a withdrawn status.
  • the following describes how the electronic device 100 performs permission management on designated data sent to the electronic device 200 in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can also perform permission management on designated data sent to the electronic device 200 .
  • the permission management includes burning after reading (that is, only allowing the electronic device 200 to view and not allowing the electronic device 200 to transfer), only allowing the electronic device 200 to store and not allowing the electronic device 200 to forward, allowing the electronic device 200 to forward, and so on.
  • more rights management can be performed on the designated data, for example, the electronic device 200 is not allowed to modify the content in the designated data, and so on.
  • permissions can be managed on designated data in the following ways:
  • the electronic device 100 Before the electronic device 100 transmits specified data to the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can negotiate the key and certificate with the electronic device 200.
  • the certificate includes the permission of the electronic device 100 to allow the electronic device 200 to operate the specified data.
  • the electronic device 100 may encrypt the specified data using the negotiated key, and send the encrypted specified data to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 200 After receiving the encrypted designated data, the electronic device 200 may store the encrypted designated data separately from the previously negotiated key device certificate.
  • the electronic device 200 may first verify whether the certificate includes permission for the specified operation. If there is permission, the electronic device 200 200 can continue to verify the key, and perform specified operations on the specified data after verifying the key. If there is no authority, the electronic device 200 may not perform the specified operation on the specified data.
  • the electronic device 100 can add permission information to the file header of the specified data.
  • the electronic device 200 may first determine whether there is permission to perform the specified operation on the specified data based on the permission information in the file header of the specified data. If there is permission, the electronic device 200 can perform the specified operation on the specified data. If not, the electronic device 200 refuses to perform the specified operation on the specified data.
  • the counterparty of the call to the electronic device 100 may be a non-mobile phone device.
  • the electronic device 100 can communicate with an agent device connected to the service center through a service center.
  • IVR interactive voice response
  • the electronic device 100 may send specified data selected by the user to the agent device during the conversation.
  • Figure 24 shows an IVR call system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the IVR call system may include electronic device 100, operator network, service center and agent equipment.
  • the electronic device 100 can dial the service number of the service center and establish a call link with the service center through the operator's network.
  • the service center can establish a call link with the agent device and transfer the call from the electronic device 100 to the agent device.
  • the electronic device 100 can communicate with the agent device through a call link composed of a communication path from the operator network to the service center and a communication path from the service center to the agent device.
  • One or more auxiliary links may be created between the electronic device 100 and the agent device, and designated data selected by the user may be sent to the agent device through the one or more auxiliary links.
  • the electronic device 100 can establish an auxiliary link 1 with the service center, and send the specified data selected by the user to the agent device through the auxiliary link 1 and the call link between the service center and the agent device.
  • the electronic device 100 can establish an auxiliary link 2 with the agent device, and send the specified data selected by the user to the agent device through the auxiliary link 2 .
  • the electronic device 100 can simultaneously use the auxiliary link 1 and the call link between the service center and the agent device, and the auxiliary link 2 to send the specified data selected by the user to the agent device.
  • Figure 25 shows the establishment process of an auxiliary link in an IVR call system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the establishment process of the auxiliary link in the IVR call system may include the following steps:
  • the electronic device 100 establishes a call link with the agent device through the operator network and service center.
  • the electronic device 100 can communicate with the agent device based on the communication link.
  • the electronic device 100 may send the call binding information A to the addressing server.
  • the call binding information A includes the communication identification A of the electronic device 100, the phone number of the electronic device 100, the service number of the service center, and the call device type A of the electronic device 100 (for example, a mobile phone).
  • the addressing server After receiving the call binding information A, the addressing server can save the call binding information A.
  • the service center can send the call binding information B to the addressing server.
  • the call binding information B includes the communication identifier B of the service center, the telephone number of the electronic device 100, the service number of the service center, and the call equipment type B of the service center (eg, service center).
  • the addressing server After receiving the call binding information B, the addressing server can save the call binding information B.
  • the agent device can send the call binding information C to the addressing server.
  • the call binding information C includes the communication identifier C of the agent device, the phone number of the electronic device 100, the service number of the service center, and the call device type C of the agent device (for example, the agent device).
  • the addressing server After receiving the call binding information C, the addressing server can save the call binding information C.
  • the electronic device 100 can send a query request A to the addressing server.
  • the query request A can be used to query the communication identifier B of the service center and/or the communication identifier C of the agent device.
  • the query request A carries the calling device type B and/or the calling device type C.
  • the query request A is used to query the communication identifier B of the service center.
  • the query request A is used to query the communication identifier C of the agent device.
  • the query request A carries the communication device type B and the communication device type C, the query request A is used to query the communication identifier B of the service center and the communication identifier C of the agent device.
  • the addressing server may return the communication identification B of the service center and/or the communication identification C of the agent device to the electronic device 100.
  • the service center can send a query request B to the addressing server.
  • the query request B can be used to query the communication identification A of the electronic device 100.
  • the query request B carries the calling device type A.
  • the addressing server may return the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 to the service center.
  • the agent device can send a query request C to the addressing server.
  • the query request C can be used to query the communication identification A of the electronic device 100.
  • the query request B carries the calling device type A.
  • the addressing server may return the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 to the agent device.
  • the electronic device 100 and the service center establish the auxiliary link 1 through the communication identifier A and the communication identifier B.
  • the electronic device 100 and the agent device establish the auxiliary link 2 through the communication identifier A and the communication identifier C.
  • the addressing server in the embodiment of the present application may be the business cloud server 1380 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 13A and FIG. 15 to FIG. 20 .
  • auxiliary link 1 and auxiliary link 2 For the establishment process of auxiliary link 1 and auxiliary link 2 in the embodiment of the present application, you can refer to the process of establishing a link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 in the embodiment shown in Figures 15 to 20, and will not be described again here. .

Abstract

The present application provides a data sharing method and system, and a related apparatus. An electronic device displays an option of a current interactive contact (for example, a current call contact) and/or an option of a most recent interactive contact (for example, a most recent call contact or a most recent private contact) in a system sharing interface for data or in an application sharing interface during or after interaction with the contact, etc. The electronic device shares specified data selected by a sharing user with a specified contact selected by the user after the electronic device receives the input made by the user on the option of the current interactive contact and/or the option of the most recent interactive contact. In this way, it can be convenient for the user to quickly share data with a contact who is currently interacting with the user or has interacted with the user most recently, thereby enhancing data sharing experience.

Description

一种数据分享方法、系统及相关装置A data sharing method, system and related devices
本申请要求于2022年09月01日提交中国专利局、申请号为202211067060.6、申请名称为“一种数据分享方法、系统及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the China Patent Office on September 1, 2022, with the application number 202211067060.6 and the application title "A data sharing method, system and related devices", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference. in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种数据分享方法、系统及相关装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a data sharing method, system and related devices.
背景技术Background technique
随着无线通信技术的发展,智能手机、平板电脑等终端开始支持用户分享图片、文档等数据给其他设备,提高了用户的办公效率和办公体验。例如,用户可以无须使用数据线将智能手机等终端上的图片、文件等数据分享给其他设备。目前,当用户想要分享智能手机等便携式终端设备上的数据给其他设备时,操作过程复杂。With the development of wireless communication technology, terminals such as smartphones and tablets have begun to support users in sharing pictures, documents and other data to other devices, improving users' office efficiency and experience. For example, users can share pictures, files and other data on smartphones and other terminals to other devices without using data cables. Currently, when users want to share data on portable terminal devices such as smartphones to other devices, the operation process is complicated.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供了一种数据分享方法、系统及相关装置,实现了电子设备在与联系人进行互动过程中或之后,在数据的分享界面中显示当前互动的联系人(例如,当前通话联系人)的选项和/或最近互动的联系人(例如,最近通话联系人、最近私信联系人,等等)的选项,这样,可以方便用户快速将数据分享给正在互动或者最近互动过的联系人,提升了用户分享数据的体验。This application provides a data sharing method, system and related devices, which enables the electronic device to display the currently interacting contacts (for example, current call contacts) in the data sharing interface during or after the interaction with the contacts. options and/or options for recently interacted contacts (for example, recent call contacts, recent private message contacts, etc.), so that users can quickly share data with contacts they are currently interacting with or have recently interacted with, improving Improve the user experience of sharing data.
第一方面,本申请提供了一种数据分享方法,包括:第一电子设备显示通话界面,该通话界面包括该第二电子设备的联系人信息,该通话界面用于表示该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备正在进行运营商通话;该第一电子设备在与该第二电子设备进行该运营商通话的过程中,接收到分享第一指定数据的第一输入;响应于该第一输入,该第一电子设备显示第一分享界面,并在该第一分享界面中显示该第二电子设备对应的第一选项;该第一电子设备接收到对该第一选项的第二输入;响应于该第二输入,该第一电子设备将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备。In a first aspect, this application provides a data sharing method, including: a first electronic device displays a call interface, the call interface includes contact information of the second electronic device, and the call interface is used to represent the relationship between the first electronic device and The second electronic device is making an operator call; the first electronic device receives a first input to share the first designated data during the operator call with the second electronic device; in response to the first input , the first electronic device displays a first sharing interface, and displays a first option corresponding to the second electronic device in the first sharing interface; the first electronic device receives a second input to the first option; responds Upon the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device.
通过本申请提供的一种数据分享方法,可以实现第一电子设备在与第二电子设备进行运营商通话的过程中,在指定数据的分享界面中显示第二电子设备的选项。当第一电子设备接收到用户对第二电子设备的选项的输入之后,第一电子设备可以将指定数据分享给第二电子设备。这样,可以方便用户快速将数据分享给正在通话的联系人,提升了用户分享数据的体验。Through a data sharing method provided by this application, the first electronic device can display the options of the second electronic device in the specified data sharing interface during the operator call with the second electronic device. After the first electronic device receives the user's input on the option of the second electronic device, the first electronic device may share the specified data with the second electronic device. In this way, it is convenient for users to quickly share data with contacts who are on the phone, improving the user experience of sharing data.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一选项的周围显示有通话标记,该通话标记用于表示该第一选项为正在与该第一电子设备进行通话的第二电子设备对应的选项。In a possible implementation, a call mark is displayed around the first option, and the call mark is used to indicate that the first option is an option corresponding to the second electronic device that is talking to the first electronic device.
这样,可以方便用户在分享界面上快速找到第二电子设备的选项。In this way, it is convenient for the user to quickly find the option of the second electronic device on the sharing interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一选项的周围还显示有该第二电子设备对应的联系人信息,该第二电子设备对应的联系人信息包括以下一项或多项:该第二电子设备的电话号码、该第一电子设备对该第二电子设备的电话号码已备注的联系人名称、该第一电子设备对该第二电子设备的电话号码已备注的联系人头像、通话应用标记;其中,该通话应用标记用于表示该通话界面所属的通话应用。In a possible implementation, the contact information corresponding to the second electronic device is also displayed around the first option, and the contact information corresponding to the second electronic device includes one or more of the following: the second The phone number of the electronic device, the contact name that the first electronic device has noted for the phone number of the second electronic device, the contact avatar that the first electronic device has noted for the phone number of the second electronic device, and the call application Mark; wherein, the calling application mark is used to represent the calling application to which the calling interface belongs.
这样,可以方便用户在分享界面上找到第二电子设备的选项。In this way, it is convenient for the user to find the option of the second electronic device on the sharing interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该响应于该第二输入,该第一电子设备将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备,具体包括:响应于该第二输入,该第一电子设备向该第二电子设备发送数据传输请求,该数据传输请求用于请求向该第二电子设备传输该第一指定数据;该第一电子设备接收该第二电子设备发送的确认信息,该确认信息用于表示该第二电子设备允许该第一电子设备发送该第一指定数据给该第二电子设备;响应于该确认信息,该第一电子设备将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备。 In a possible implementation, in response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, specifically including: in response to the second input, the first electronic device The device sends a data transmission request to the second electronic device, where the data transmission request is used to request the transmission of the first specified data to the second electronic device; the first electronic device receives the confirmation information sent by the second electronic device, and the confirmation The information is used to indicate that the second electronic device allows the first electronic device to send the first designated data to the second electronic device; in response to the confirmation information, the first electronic device sends the first designated data to the second electronic device. Electronic equipment.
这样,可以在向第二电子设备分享数据之前,向第二电子设备发送数据传输请求,在得到第二电子设备的确认后,才向第二电子设备分享数据,防止第二电子设备接收到被强制接收数据。In this way, before sharing data to the second electronic device, a data transmission request can be sent to the second electronic device, and only after receiving confirmation from the second electronic device, the data can be shared to the second electronic device to prevent the second electronic device from receiving the requested data. Force data to be received.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:响应于该第二输入,该第一电子设备显示第一提示,该第一提示,用于提示用户该第一电子设备正在请求向该第二电子设备发送该第一指定数据。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: in response to the second input, the first electronic device displays a first prompt, the first prompt being used to prompt the user that the first electronic device is requesting a request to the third electronic device. The two electronic devices send the first specified data.
这样,可以让用户感知到数据的分享过程。In this way, users can perceive the data sharing process.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一电子设备在将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备的过程中,显示第二提示和发送进度条,该第二提示用于提示用户该第一电子设备正在向该第二电子设备发送该第一指定数据,该发送进度条用于提示用户该第一电子设备向该第二电子设备发送该第一指定数据的进度。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: during the process of sending the first designated data to the second electronic device, the first electronic device displays a second prompt and a sending progress bar. The second prompt The sending progress bar is used to remind the user that the first electronic device is sending the first specified data to the second electronic device. The sending progress bar is used to remind the user of the progress of the first electronic device sending the first specified data to the second electronic device. .
这样,可以让用户感知到数据的分享过程。In this way, users can perceive the data sharing process.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一电子设备在该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备的过程中,显示发送取消控件,该取消控件用于触发该第一电子设备暂停发送该第一指定数据给该第二电子设备。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: during the process of sending the first specified data to the second electronic device, the first electronic device displays a sending cancellation control, the canceling control being used to trigger the first The electronic device suspends sending the first designated data to the second electronic device.
这样,可以让用户中途停止分享数据给第二电子设备。In this way, the user can stop sharing data to the second electronic device midway.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在该第一电子设备将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备之后,显示第三提示和撤回控件,该第三提示用于提示该用户该第一电子设备已经向该第二电子设备发送完该第一指定数据,该撤回控件用于触发该第一电子设备向该第二电子设备发送撤回指示,该撤回指示用于请求该第二电子设备删除已接收到该第一电子设备发送的该第一指定数据。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: after the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, displaying a third prompt and a withdrawal control, the third prompt being used to prompt The first electronic device of the user has finished sending the first specified data to the second electronic device. The withdrawal control is used to trigger the first electronic device to send a withdrawal instruction to the second electronic device. The withdrawal instruction is used to request the The second electronic device deletes the first designated data that has been received by the first electronic device.
这样,让用户在分享数据给第二电子设备之后,可以主动从第二电子设备上撤回已分享给第二电子设备的数据,可以防止因为用户误发数据给第二电子设备而造成的隐私泄露。In this way, after sharing data to the second electronic device, the user can actively withdraw the data shared to the second electronic device from the second electronic device, which can prevent privacy leakage caused by the user mistakenly sending data to the second electronic device. .
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一分享界面为系统分享界面,该第一分享界面还包括该第一电子设备通过近场通信技术发现的一个或多个附近设备的选项、一个或多个服务选项,该附近设备的选项用于触发该第一电子设备将该第一指定数据分享给该附近设备,该服务选项可用于触发该第一电子设备通过该服务选项对应的应用程序或协议分享该第一指定数据。In a possible implementation, the first sharing interface is a system sharing interface, and the first sharing interface also includes options for one or more nearby devices discovered by the first electronic device through near field communication technology, one or more A service option. The option of the nearby device is used to trigger the first electronic device to share the first specified data to the nearby device. The service option can be used to trigger the first electronic device to use the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. Share the first specified data.
这样,可以在第一电子设备的操作系统自带的分享界面中显示当前通话联系人(即,第二电子设备)的选项,方便用户在调起操作系统自带的分享功能时,实现与当前通话联系人的数据分享。In this way, the option of the current call contact (i.e., the second electronic device) can be displayed in the sharing interface of the operating system of the first electronic device, so as to facilitate the user to realize the communication with the current call contact when activating the sharing function of the operating system. Data sharing for call contacts.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一分享界面为第一应用的应用内分享界面,该第一分享界面还包括该第一应用中的一个或多个功能选项;In a possible implementation, the first sharing interface is an in-application sharing interface of the first application, and the first sharing interface also includes one or more functional options in the first application;
该第一电子设备在与该第二电子设备进行该运营商通话的过程中,接收到分享第一指定数据的第一输入,具体包括:该第一电子设备在与该第二电子设备进行该运营商通话的过程中,显示第一应用的第一界面,该第一界面包括有该第一指定数据和第一控件,该第一控件用于分享该第一指定数据,其中,该分享该第一指定数据包括分享该第一指定数据的获取链接;该第一电子设备接收到对该第一控件的该第一输入。The first electronic device receives the first input of sharing the first specified data during the operator call with the second electronic device. Specifically, the first electronic device receives the first input of sharing the first specified data with the second electronic device. During the call, the operator displays the first interface of the first application. The first interface includes the first specified data and a first control. The first control is used to share the first specified data, wherein the sharing of the first specified data The first designated data includes a retrieval link for sharing the first designated data; the first electronic device receives the first input to the first control.
这样,可以在第一电子设备的应用内的分享界面中显示当前通话联系人(即,第二电子设备)的选项,方便用户在调起应用自带的分享功能时,实现与当前通话联系人的数据分享。In this way, the options of the current call contact (i.e., the second electronic device) can be displayed in the sharing interface within the application of the first electronic device, making it convenient for the user to communicate with the current call contact when calling up the sharing function of the application. data sharing.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指定数据包括以下一项或多项:图片、音频、视频、文档文件、位置信息、链接、联系人信息、日历、应用程序包、备忘录。In a possible implementation, the first specified data includes one or more of the following: pictures, audios, videos, document files, location information, links, contact information, calendars, application packages, and memos.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在该第一电子设备将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备之后,该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备结束该运营商通话;该第一电子设备接收到分享第二指定数据的第三输入;响应于该第三输入,该第一电子设备显示第二分享界面,该第二分享界面包括一个或多个最近互动联系人的选项;其中,该最近互动联系人为在该第一电子设备接收到该第三输入时的最近一段时间内与该第一电子设备互动过的联系人,该一个或多个最近互动联系人的选项包括第三电子设备对应的第二 选项;该第一电子设备接收到该第二选项的第二输入;响应于该第二输入,该第一电子设备将该第二指定数据发送给该第三电子设备。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: after the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, the first electronic device and the second electronic device end the operator call; the first electronic device receives a third input to share the second specified data; in response to the third input, the first electronic device displays a second sharing interface, the second sharing interface includes one or more recent interactive contacts People's options; wherein, the most recently interacted contact is a contact who has interacted with the first electronic device within a recent period of time when the first electronic device received the third input, and the one or more recently interacted contacts The options include a third electronic device corresponding to the second option; the first electronic device receives a second input of the second option; in response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the second specified data to the third electronic device.
这样,可以实现在数据的分享界面中显示近段时间与第二电子设备互动过的最近互动联系人的选项,当第一电子设备接收到用户对最近互动联系人的选项的输入之后,第一电子设备可以将指定数据分享给最近互动联系人。这样,可以方便用户快速将数据分享给最近互动过的联系人,提升了用户分享数据的体验。In this way, the option of the most recently interacted contacts that have interacted with the second electronic device in the recent period can be displayed in the data sharing interface. When the first electronic device receives the user's input of the option of the recently interacted contact, the first electronic device The electronic device can share specified data with recently interacted contacts. In this way, users can quickly share data with contacts they have interacted with recently, improving the user experience of sharing data.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该最近互动联系人的选项的周围显示有该最近互动联系人的联系人信息,该最近互动联系人的联系人信息包括有以下一项或多项:该最近互动联系人的联系人信息包括以下一项或多项:该最近互动联系人的电话号码、该最近互动联系人的联系人名称、该最近互动联系人的联系人头像、联系应用标记;其中,该联系应用标记用于表示该第一电子设备与该最近互动联系人进行互动时所使用的应用。In a possible implementation, the contact information of the recently interacted contact is displayed around the option of the recently interacted contact, and the contact information of the recently interacted contact includes one or more of the following: the recently interacted contact The contact information of the interactive contact includes one or more of the following: the phone number of the recently interacted contact, the contact name of the recently interacted contact, the contact avatar of the recently interacted contact, and the contact application tag; among which, The contact application mark is used to represent the application used by the first electronic device to interact with the recently interacted contact.
这样,可以方便用户在分享界面上快速找到最近互动联系人的选项。In this way, users can quickly find options for recently interacting contacts on the sharing interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该互动包括以下任一种:运营商通话、接收短信、发送短信、过顶OTT通话、在社交应用内接收或发送私信。In a possible implementation, the interaction includes any of the following: making phone calls on an operator, receiving text messages, sending text messages, over-the-top calls, receiving or sending private messages within social applications.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在该第一电子设备将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备之前,该方法还包括:该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备建立第一数据传输链路;该响应于该第二输入,该第一电子设备将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备,具体包括:响应于该第二输入,该第一电子设备在该第一数据传输链路上将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备。In a possible implementation, before the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, the method further includes: the first electronic device establishes the first data with the second electronic device. Transmission link; in response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, specifically including: in response to the second input, the first electronic device The first specified data is sent to the second electronic device on the data transmission link.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一电子设备在与该第二电子设备进行该运营商通话过程中且在接收到该第一输入之前,与该第二电子设备建立完该第一数据传输链路;该响应于该第一输入,该第一电子设备显示第一分享界面,并在该第一分享界面中显示该第二电子设备对应的第一选项,具体包括:响应于该第一输入,该第一电子设备显示该第一分享界面,该第一分享界面包括该第二电子设备对应的该第一选项。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: during the operator call with the second electronic device and before receiving the first input, the first electronic device establishes a connection with the second electronic device. Complete the first data transmission link; in response to the first input, the first electronic device displays a first sharing interface, and displays a first option corresponding to the second electronic device in the first sharing interface, specifically including: : In response to the first input, the first electronic device displays the first sharing interface, and the first sharing interface includes the first option corresponding to the second electronic device.
这样,可以在显示分享界面之前完成第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间数据传输链路的建立,方便用户在第一电子设备上可以快速将数据分享给第二电子设备。In this way, the establishment of the data transmission link between the first electronic device and the second electronic device can be completed before the sharing interface is displayed, which facilitates the user to quickly share data on the first electronic device to the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该响应于该第一输入,该第一电子设备显示第一分享界面,并在该第一分享界面中显示该第二电子设备对应的第一选项,具体包括:响应于该第一输入,该第一电子设备显示该第一分享界面;在该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备建立完该第一数据传输链路后,该第一电子设备在该第一分享界面中显示该第二电子设备对应的第一选项。In a possible implementation, in response to the first input, the first electronic device displays a first sharing interface, and displays a first option corresponding to the second electronic device in the first sharing interface, specifically including: : In response to the first input, the first electronic device displays the first sharing interface; after the first electronic device and the second electronic device establish the first data transmission link, the first electronic device The first option corresponding to the second electronic device is displayed on the first sharing interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该响应于该第二输入,该第一电子设备在该第一数据传输链路上将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备,具体包括:响应于该第二输入,该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备建立该第一数据传输链路;在该第一数据传输链路建立完之后,该第一电子设备在该第一数据传输链路上将该第一指定数据发送给该第二电子设备。In a possible implementation, in response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device on the first data transmission link, specifically including: in response to The second input, the first electronic device and the second electronic device establish the first data transmission link; after the first data transmission link is established, the first electronic device The first designated data is sent to the second electronic device.
这样,可以等到用户确定要将数据分享给第二电子设备时,才与第二电子设备建立数据传输链路,节省第一电子设备维持数据传输链路的所用的功耗。In this way, the data transmission link can be established with the second electronic device only when the user determines to share the data with the second electronic device, thereby saving the power consumption of the first electronic device in maintaining the data transmission link.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一数据传输链路包括以下一条或多条链路:该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备进行运营商通话的主链路、该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备之间的一条或多条辅助链路。In a possible implementation, the first data transmission link includes one or more of the following links: the main link for operator calls between the first electronic device and the second electronic device, the first electronic device One or more auxiliary links to the second electronic device.
这样,第一电子设备可以通过多种传输链路的组合方式,将数据分享给第二电子设备,提高了数据的分享速度。In this way, the first electronic device can share data with the second electronic device through a combination of multiple transmission links, thereby increasing the data sharing speed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该一条或多条辅助链路包括以下一种或多种:互联网协议I P直连链路、点对点P2P链路、服务器中继链路。 In a possible implementation, the one or more auxiliary links include one or more of the following: Internet Protocol IP direct link, point-to-point P2P link, and server relay link.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当该第一数据传输链路包括该一条或多条辅助链路时,该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备建立第一数据传输链路,具体包括:该第一电子设备获取云服务器为该第一电子设备分配的第一通信标识;该第一电子设备将该第一电子设备的电话号码和该第一通信标识发送到该云服务器上绑定保存;该第一电子设备发送第一查询请求给该云服务器,该第一查询请求包括该第二电子设备的电话号码,该第一查询请求用于查询该第二电子设备的第二通信标识;该第一电子设备接收该云服务器发送的该第二通信标识;该第一电子设备基于该第一通信标识和该第二通信标识与该电子设备建立该辅助链路。In a possible implementation, when the first data transmission link includes the one or more auxiliary links, the first electronic device and the second electronic device establish a first data transmission link, which specifically includes: The first electronic device obtains the first communication identifier assigned by the cloud server to the first electronic device; the first electronic device sends the phone number and the first communication identifier of the first electronic device to the cloud server for binding and storage. ; The first electronic device sends a first query request to the cloud server, the first query request includes the phone number of the second electronic device, and the first query request is used to query the second communication identification of the second electronic device; The first electronic device receives the second communication identifier sent by the cloud server; the first electronic device establishes the auxiliary link with the electronic device based on the first communication identifier and the second communication identifier.
这样,可以通过云服务器完成第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间辅助链路的建立,实现第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间的远场通信。In this way, the establishment of the auxiliary link between the first electronic device and the second electronic device can be completed through the cloud server, thereby realizing far-field communication between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该辅助链路包括P2P链路;该第一通信标识为该第一电子设备与该云服务器进行会话通信时使用的第一会话标识,该第二通信标识为该第二电子设备与该云服务器进行会话通信时使用的第二会话标识;该第一电子设备基于该第一通信标识和该第二通信标识与该电子设备建立该辅助链路,具体包括:该第一电子设备发送第一获取请求给该云服务器,该第一获取请求用于请求获取该第一电子设备的第一NAT公网信息;该第一电子设备接收该云服务器发送的该第一NAT公网信息,该第一NAT公网信息包括该第一电子设备的公网IP地址和该第一电子设备的公网转内网的端口号;该第一电子设备向该云服务器发送第一消息,该第一消息中携带有该第二会话标识和该第一NAT公网信息,该第一消息用于该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备交换NAT公网信息;该第一电子设备接收该云服务器发送的该第二电子设备的第二NAT公网信息,该第二NAT公网信息包括该第二电子设备的公网IP地址和该第二电子设备的公网转内网的端口号;该第一电子设备基于该第一NAT公网信息和该第二NAT公网信息与该第二电子设备建立P2P链路。In a possible implementation, the auxiliary link includes a P2P link; the first communication identifier is a first session identifier used by the first electronic device to communicate with the cloud server, and the second communication identifier is The second session identifier used by the second electronic device to communicate with the cloud server; the first electronic device establishes the auxiliary link with the electronic device based on the first communication identifier and the second communication identifier, which specifically includes: The first electronic device sends a first acquisition request to the cloud server. The first acquisition request is used to request to acquire the first NAT public network information of the first electronic device; the first electronic device receives the first acquisition request sent by the cloud server. A NAT public network information, the first NAT public network information includes the public network IP address of the first electronic device and the port number of the first electronic device from the public network to the intranet; the first electronic device sends to the cloud server The first message carries the second session identifier and the first NAT public network information. The first message is used to exchange NAT public network information between the first electronic device and the second electronic device; An electronic device receives the second NAT public network information of the second electronic device sent by the cloud server. The second NAT public network information includes the public network IP address of the second electronic device and the public network forwarding address of the second electronic device. The port number of the internal network; the first electronic device establishes a P2P link with the second electronic device based on the first NAT public network information and the second NAT public network information.
这样,可以通过云服务器完成第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间P2P链路的建立,实现第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间的远场通信。In this way, the establishment of a P2P link between the first electronic device and the second electronic device can be completed through the cloud server, thereby realizing far-field communication between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该辅助链路包括服务器中继链路;该第一通信标识为该第一电子设备与该云服务器进行会话通信时使用的第一会话标识,该第二通信标识为该第二电子设备与该云服务器进行会话通信时使用的第二会话标识;该第一电子设备基于该第一通信标识和该第二通信标识与该电子设备建立该辅助链路,具体包括:该第一电子设备发送第二获取请求,该第二获取请求用于获取该第一电子设备的第一中继地址;该第一电子设备接收到该云服务器发送的第一中继地址;该第一电子设备向该云服务器发送第一消息,该第一消息中携带有该第二会话标识和该第一中继地址,该第一消息用于该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备交换中继地址;该第一电子设备接收该云服务器发送的该第二电子设备的第二中继地址;在该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备交换完中继地址后,该第一电子设备与该第二电子设备建立完服务器中继链路。In a possible implementation, the auxiliary link includes a server relay link; the first communication identifier is a first session identifier used by the first electronic device to communicate with the cloud server; and the second communication identifier The identifier is a second session identifier used by the second electronic device to communicate with the cloud server; the first electronic device establishes the auxiliary link with the electronic device based on the first communication identifier and the second communication identifier, specifically The method includes: the first electronic device sends a second acquisition request, the second acquisition request is used to acquire the first relay address of the first electronic device; the first electronic device receives the first relay address sent by the cloud server ; The first electronic device sends a first message to the cloud server, the first message carries the second session identifier and the first relay address, and the first message is used between the first electronic device and the second Electronic devices exchange relay addresses; the first electronic device receives the second relay address of the second electronic device sent by the cloud server; after the first electronic device and the second electronic device complete the exchange of relay addresses, the first electronic device The first electronic device and the second electronic device have established a server relay link.
这样,可以通过云服务器完成第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间服务器中继链路的建立,实现第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间的远场通信。In this way, the establishment of the server relay link between the first electronic device and the second electronic device can be completed through the cloud server, thereby realizing far-field communication between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
第二方面,本申请提供了一种电子设备,为第一电子设备,包括显示屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。该显示屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,使得电子设备执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的数据分享方法。In a second aspect, the present application provides an electronic device, which is a first electronic device including a display screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The display screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes. The computer program codes include computer instructions. When the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, such that The electronic device performs the data sharing method in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
第三方面,本申请提供了一种电子设备,为第一电子设备,包括一个或多个功能模块,该一个或多个功能模块用于执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的数据分享方法。In a third aspect, the present application provides an electronic device, which is a first electronic device and includes one or more functional modules. The one or more functional modules are used to perform any of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects. Data Sharing Methods.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,包括计算机指令,当计算机指令在处理器上运行时,实现上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的数据分享方法。In a fourth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer storage medium that includes computer instructions. When the computer instructions are run on a processor, the data sharing method in any of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects is implemented.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,实现上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的数据分享方法。In a fifth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product. When the computer program product is run on a computer, the data sharing method in any of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects is implemented.
其中,第二方面至第五方面的有益效果,可以参考第一方面及第一方面的任一项可能的实现方式,在 此不再赘述。Among them, the beneficial effects of the second to fifth aspects can be obtained with reference to the first aspect and any possible implementation method of the first aspect. This will not be described again.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2A为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的硬件结构示意图;Figure 2A is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2B为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的软件结构示意图;Figure 2B is a schematic diagram of the software structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2C为本申请实施例提供的另一种电子设备的软件结构示意图;Figure 2C is a schematic diagram of the software structure of another electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3A-图3Y为本申请实施例提供的一组数据分享场景的界面示意图;Figures 3A to 3Y are schematic interface diagrams of a set of data sharing scenarios provided by embodiments of the present application;
图4A-图4O为本申请实施例提供的一组分享数据的界面示意图;Figures 4A-4O are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application;
图5A-图5Y为本申请实施例提供的另一组分享数据的界面示意图;Figures 5A-5Y are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application;
图6A-图6G为本申请实施例提供的另一组分享数据的界面示意图;Figures 6A-6G are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application;
图7A-图7I为本申请实施例提供的另一组分享数据的界面示意图;Figures 7A-7I are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application;
图8A-图8D为本申请实施例提供的另一组分享数据的界面示意图;Figures 8A-8D are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces for sharing data provided by embodiments of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种数据分享方法的流程示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic flow chart of a data sharing method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请另一实施例提供的一种数据分享方法的流程示意图;Figure 11 is a schematic flow chart of a data sharing method provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图12A-图12C为本申请实施例提供的对最近互动联系人的信息的获取过程示意图;Figures 12A-12C are schematic diagrams of the acquisition process of information on recently interacted contacts provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13A为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图;Figure 13A is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13B为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图;Figure 13B is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13C为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图;Figure 13C is an architectural schematic diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图14A为本申请实施例提供的一种数据包的结构示意图;Figure 14A is a schematic structural diagram of a data packet provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图14B为本申请实施例提供的一种数据包中字段的结构示意图;Figure 14B is a schematic structural diagram of fields in a data packet provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种辅助链路建立流程的示意图;Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of an auxiliary link establishment process provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种通信标识的获取原理示意图;Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of the acquisition principle of a communication identifier provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的一种辅助链路中寻址流程示意图;Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of the addressing process in an auxiliary link provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的功能模块交互流程图;Figure 18 is a functional module interaction flow chart of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的一种P2P直连链路建立流程的示意图;Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of a P2P direct link establishment process provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种中继链路建立流程的示意图;Figure 20 is a schematic diagram of a relay link establishment process provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图21为本申请实施例提供的一种设备唤醒流程的示意图;Figure 21 is a schematic diagram of a device wake-up process provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图22为本申请实施例提供的一种数据包的数据结构示意图;Figure 22 is a schematic diagram of the data structure of a data packet provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图23为本申请实施例提供的一种文件撤回机制的流程示意图;Figure 23 is a schematic flow chart of a file withdrawal mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图24为本申请实施例提供的一种交互式语音应答通话系统的架构示意图;Figure 24 is a schematic architectural diagram of an interactive voice response call system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图25为本申请实施例提供的一种交互式语音应答通话系统中辅助链路的建立流程示意图。Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the establishment process of an auxiliary link in an interactive voice response call system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、详尽地描述。其中,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described clearly and in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. Among them, in the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise stated, "/" means or, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in the text is only a way to describe related objects. The association relationship means that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiment of the present application , "plurality" means two or more than two.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms “first” and “second” are used for descriptive purposes only and shall not be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified, “plurality” The meaning is two or more.
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种通信系统10。The following introduces a communication system 10 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
图1示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种通信系统10的架构示意图。FIG. 1 shows a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system 10 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图1所示,该通信系统10可以包括电子设备100和一个或多个电子设备200。As shown in FIG. 1 , the communication system 10 may include an electronic device 100 and one or more electronic devices 200 .
其中,电子设备100可以通过不同的通信方式和一个或多个电子设备200通信。The electronic device 100 can communicate with one or more electronic devices 200 through different communication methods.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以通过蜂窝网络与一个或多个电子设备200进行通信。其中,该蜂窝网络可以包括但不限于全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM)、码分多址 接入(code division multiple access,CDMA)、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)、时分同步码分多址(time division synchronous code division multiple ac,TD-SCDMA)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)、新无线接入(new radio,NR)或其他未来网络系统。In some embodiments, electronic device 100 may communicate with one or more electronic devices 200 over a cellular network. Among them, the cellular network may include but is not limited to global system for mobile communications (GSM), code division multiple access Access (code division multiple access, CDMA), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), time division synchronous code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long-term evolution (long-term evolution) term evolution (LTE), new radio access (new radio, NR) or other future network systems.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以通过短距通信技术和一个或多个电子设备200通信。其中,近场通信包括但不限于蓝牙、无线局域网(wireless loca area network,WLAN)、近距离无线通信(near field communication,NFC)、超宽带(ultra wide band,UWB)、红外线等。In some embodiments, electronic device 100 may communicate with one or more electronic devices 200 via short-range communication technology. Among them, near field communication includes but is not limited to Bluetooth, wireless loca area network (WLAN), near field communication (NFC), ultra wide band (UWB), infrared, etc.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以通过卫星通信网络与一个或多个电子设备200通信。例如,卫星通信网络可以北斗通信网络、天通通信网络和星链通信网络等等。In some embodiments, electronic device 100 may communicate with one or more electronic devices 200 via a satellite communications network. For example, satellite communication networks can include Beidou communication network, Tiantong communication network, Starlink communication network, etc.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以通过互联网与一个或多个电子设备200实现过顶(over the top,OTT)通话,在一些示例中,OTT通话可以是越过运营商发展基于开放互联网的各种视频等数据服务的业务。例如,OTT通话可以通过WLAN实现,又例如,OTT通话可以基于运营商的蜂窝数据业务实现。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can implement an over-the-top (OTT) call with one or more electronic devices 200 through the Internet. In some examples, the OTT call can be a cross-operator development based on the open Internet. A video and other data service business. For example, OTT calls can be implemented through WLAN, and for another example, OTT calls can be implemented based on the operator's cellular data service.
本申请实施例中,电子设备100的设备类型可以是手机、平板电脑、手持计算机、桌面型计算机、膝上型计算机、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本、蜂窝电话、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA),以及智能大屏、智能音箱等智能家居设备,智能手环、智能手表、智能眼镜等可穿戴设备,增强现实(augmented reality,AR)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)、混合现实(mixed reality,MR)等扩展现实(extended reality,XR)设备,车载设备或智慧城市设备,等等中的任一种。In the embodiment of the present application, the device type of the electronic device 100 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a handheld computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, an ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), a netbook, a cellular phone, Personal digital assistant (PDA), as well as smart home devices such as smart large screens and smart speakers, wearable devices such as smart bracelets, smart watches, and smart glasses, augmented reality (AR), virtual reality (virtual reality (VR), mixed reality (MR) and other extended reality (XR) devices, vehicle-mounted devices or smart city devices, etc. Any of them.
电子设备200的设备类型可以是手机、平板电脑、手持计算机、桌面型计算机、膝上型计算机、超级移动个人计算机、上网本、蜂窝电话、个人数字助理,以及智能大屏、智能音箱等智能家居设备,智能手环、智能手表、智能眼镜等可穿戴设备,增强现实、虚拟现实、混合现实等扩展现实设备,车载设备或智慧城市设备,等等中的任一种。The device type of the electronic device 200 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a handheld computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a super mobile personal computer, a netbook, a cellular phone, a personal digital assistant, as well as smart home devices such as smart large screens and smart speakers. , wearable devices such as smart bracelets, smart watches, and smart glasses, extended reality devices such as augmented reality, virtual reality, and mixed reality, vehicle-mounted devices or smart city devices, and so on.
本申请实施例中,对电子设备100和电子设备200的具体类型不作特殊限制。In the embodiment of the present application, the specific types of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are not particularly limited.
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种电子设备100的硬件结构。The hardware structure of the electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图2A示出了电子设备100的结构示意图。FIG. 2A shows a schematic structural diagram of the electronic device 100.
下面以电子设备100为例对实施例进行具体说明。应该理解的是,图2A所示电子设备100仅是一个范例,并且电子设备100可以具有比图2A中所示的更多的或者更少的部件,可以组合两个或多个的部件,或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图2A中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现。The following uses the electronic device 100 as an example to describe the embodiment in detail. It should be understood that the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2A is only an example, and the electronic device 100 may have more or fewer components than shown in FIG. 2A , two or more components may be combined, or Can have different component configurations. The various components shown in Figure 2A may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
电子设备100可以包括:处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 100 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2. Mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, And subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figures, or some components may be combined, some components may be separated, or some components may be arranged differently. The components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units. For example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) wait. Among them, different processing units can be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
其中,控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 . The controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。 The processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(serial clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL). In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 110 can separately couple the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 110 can be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 110 can be coupled with the audio module 170 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 . In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 . For example, the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 . MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc. In some embodiments, the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through the CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100 . The processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured through software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, display screen 194, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, sensor module 180, etc. The GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention are only schematic illustrations and do not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger. Among them, the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also provide power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110. The power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, internal memory 121, external memory, display screen 194, camera 193, wireless communication module 160, etc. The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters. In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 . In other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。 在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be disposed in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。A modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Among them, the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. The demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. After the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor, it is passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194. In some embodiments, the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc. The GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi) -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 implements display functions through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. The GPU is an image processing microprocessor and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD)。显示屏面板还可以采用有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),miniled,microled,micro-oled,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等制造。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc. Display 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD). The display panel can also use organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active matrix organic light-emitting diode or active matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), miniled, microled, micro-oled, quantum dot light emitting diode (quantum dot light emitting diode, QLED) and other manufacturing. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can implement the shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise and brightness. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB, YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, Image signals in YUV and other formats. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. Electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。NPU is a neural network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transmission mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process input information and can continuously learn by itself. Intelligent cognitive applications of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement the data storage function. Such as saving music, videos, etc. files in external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions. The processor 110 executes instructions stored in the internal memory 121 to execute various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 . The internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a data storage area. Among them, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required for a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.). The storage data area may store data created during use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phone book, etc.). In addition, the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。Speaker 170A, also called "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。Receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 100 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。Microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 170C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C. The electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which in addition to collecting sound signals, may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions, etc.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The headphone interface 170D is used to connect wired headphones. The headphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or may be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals. In some embodiments, pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 . There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc. A capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material. When a force is applied to pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure based on the change in capacitance. When a touch operation is performed on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用 于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 . In some embodiments, the angular velocity of electronic device 100 about three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) may be determined by gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle at which the electronic device 100 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. Gyro sensor 180B can still be used For navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。Air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。Magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 may utilize the magnetic sensor 180D to detect opening and closing of the flip holster. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a flip machine, the electronic device 100 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices and be used in horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometer and other applications.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance. Electronic device 100 can measure distance via infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may utilize the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light outwardly through the light emitting diode. Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect when the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。Fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to achieve fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering of incoming calls, etc.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。Temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute the temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the low temperature from causing the electronic device 100 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 180K, also called "touch panel". The touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194. The touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen". The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 180K. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type. Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 194 . In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 at a location different from that of the display screen 194 .
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。Bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be provided in an earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone. The audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the voice function. The application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the heart rate detection function.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The buttons 190 include a power button, a volume button, etc. Key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 can generate vibration prompts. The motor 191 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations for different applications (such as taking pictures, audio playback, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194 . Different application scenarios (such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等 功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card. The SIM card can be connected to or separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 . The electronic device 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement calls, data communications, etc. Function. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。例如,分层架构的软件系统可以是安卓(Android)系统,也可以是鸿蒙(harmony)操作系统(operating system,OS),或其它软件系统。The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture. For example, the layered architecture software system can be the Android system, the Harmony operating system (operating system, OS), or other software systems.
图2B是本发明实施例的电子设备100的软件结构框图。图2B以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件架构。FIG. 2B is a software structure block diagram of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2B takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software architecture of the electronic device 100 .
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has clear roles and division of labor. The layers communicate through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom: application layer, application framework layer, Android runtime and system libraries, and kernel layer.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can include a series of application packages.
如图2B所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,短信息等应用程序。As shown in Figure 2B, the application package can include camera, gallery, calendar, calling, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message and other applications.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (API) and programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图2B所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in Figure 2B, the application framework layer can include a window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can obtain the display size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make this data accessible to applications. Said data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, etc. A view system can be used to build applications. The display interface can be composed of one or more views. For example, a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备100的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 . For example, call status management (including connected, hung up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources to applications, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, etc.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager allows applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc. The notification manager can also be notifications that appear in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of charts or scroll bar text, such as notifications for applications running in the background, or notifications that appear on the screen in the form of conversation windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a beep sounds, the electronic device vibrates, the indicator light flashes, etc.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that need to be called by the Java language, and the other is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and application framework layer into binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection and other functions.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。System libraries can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media libraries (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing libraries (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engines (for example: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, composition, and layer processing.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。2D Graphics Engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
下面结合捕获拍照场景,示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。The following exemplifies the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 in conjunction with capturing the photographing scene.
当触摸传感器180K接收到触摸操作,相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将触摸操作加工成原始输入事件(包括触摸坐标,触摸操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件,识别该输入事件所对应的控件。以该触摸操作是触摸单击操作,该单击操作所 对应的控件为相机应用图标的控件为例,相机应用调用应用框架层的接口,启动相机应用,进而通过调用内核层启动摄像头驱动,通过摄像头193捕获静态图像或视频。When the touch sensor 180K receives a touch operation, the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer. The kernel layer processes touch operations into raw input events (including touch coordinates, timestamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level. The application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. The touch operation is a touch click operation, and the click operation For example, the corresponding control is the control of the camera application icon. The camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer to capture still images or videos through the camera 193 .
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的电子设备100的软件系统.The software system of the electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of this application is introduced below.
图2C示例性的示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种电子设备100的软件系统架构图。FIG. 2C exemplarily shows a software system architecture diagram of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图2C所示,电子设备100的软件系统可以包括应用处理器(application processor)系统和无线通信系统。其中:As shown in FIG. 2C, the software system of the electronic device 100 may include an application processor system and a wireless communication system. in:
无线通信系统可以但不限于包括以下至少一项:蜂窝通信系统(例如2G/3G/4G/5G/6G等)、卫星系统(例如北斗、天通、星链等)、Wi-Fi、BT、NFC、UWB等。在一种实施方式中,无线通信系统可以包括协处理器(CoProcessor,CP)和/或数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),其中,CP在终端中可以为基带芯片加协处理器或者多媒体加速器,CP可以包括与网络通信所需的数字组件,CP可以包括一个基于精简指令集计算机(reduced instruction set computer,RISC)微处理器(advanced RISC machines,ARM)的处理器和一个DSP。CP可以具有操作系统,可以通过高速(high speed,HS)串行连接和运行Android、IOS、Windows等操作系统的应用处理器进行通信。CP可以实现VR、AR、图像处理、高保真(high fidelity,HiFi)、高速数据传输(high data rate,HDR)、传感器管理等处理逻辑。不限于此,CP也可以是蜂窝调制解调器(cellular processor,CP)。The wireless communication system may include, but is not limited to, at least one of the following: cellular communication system (such as 2G/3G/4G/5G/6G, etc.), satellite system (such as Beidou, Tiantong, Starlink, etc.), Wi-Fi, BT, NFC, UWB, etc. In one implementation, the wireless communication system may include a coprocessor (CoProcessor, CP) and/or a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), where the CP in the terminal may be a baseband chip plus a coprocessor or Multimedia accelerator, CP can include the digital components required to communicate with the network, CP can include a reduced instruction set computer (RISC) microprocessor (advanced RISC machines, ARM)-based processor and a DSP. The CP can have an operating system and can communicate with an application processor running Android, IOS, Windows and other operating systems through a high speed (HS) serial connection. CP can implement processing logic such as VR, AR, image processing, high fidelity (HiFi), high-speed data transmission (high data rate, HDR), and sensor management. It is not limited to this, the CP can also be a cellular processor (CP).
应用处理器系统用于实现用户界面的渲染和呈现,用户操作的输入和响应,业务功能以及音频/视频等多媒体数据的播放等控制逻辑。The application processor system is used to implement control logic such as rendering and presentation of the user interface, input and response to user operations, business functions, and playback of multimedia data such as audio/video.
应用处理器系统可以包括分享模块、发现模块、Wi-Fi功能模块、BT功能模块、UWB功能模块、卫星(Satellite)功能模块、Wi-Fi链路模块、BT链路模块、UWB链路模块、卫星链路模块。其中:The application processor system may include a sharing module, a discovery module, a Wi-Fi function module, a BT function module, a UWB function module, a satellite (Satellite) function module, a Wi-Fi link module, a BT link module, and a UWB link module. Satellite link module. in:
融合通话(fusion call,FusionCall)模块可以理解为是分享数据的核心功能模块。其中,该融合通话模块的作用可以包括但不限于如下功能:1、负责调用网络地址服务模块管理辅助链路(例如,辅助链路的建立与释放)。2、负责分享内容数据的读取(例如,文件数据、位置信息、打开链接、日历、应用安装包,等等)。3、负责分享内容数据的分流封包、传输、解包,等等。4、负责分享内容数据的写入与存储。5、负责相关用户体验(user experience,UX)界面显示,例如包括但不限于:系统分享界面(包括正在互动联系人的选项或最近互动联系人的选项)、应用内分享界面/窗口中的正在互动联系人的选项或最近互动联系人的选项、发送窗口、接收窗口、提示信息,按钮/控件,等等。The fusion call (FusionCall) module can be understood as the core functional module for sharing data. Among them, the functions of the integrated call module may include but are not limited to the following functions: 1. Responsible for calling the network address service module to manage the auxiliary link (for example, the establishment and release of the auxiliary link). 2. Responsible for reading shared content data (for example, file data, location information, open links, calendars, application installation packages, etc.). 3. Responsible for the offloading, transmission, and unpacking of shared content data, etc. 4. Responsible for writing and storing shared content data. 5. Responsible for the display of relevant user experience (UX) interfaces, including but not limited to: system sharing interface (including options for currently interacting contacts or options for recently interacted contacts), in-app sharing interfaces/windows Options for interactive contacts or options for recently interacted contacts, sending window, receiving window, prompt information, buttons/controls, etc.
发现模块用于通过Wi-Fi、BT、D2D等近场通信技术发现附近设备,发现模块例如称为Nearby。不限于此,也可以通过蜂窝通信技术、卫星、Wi-Fi等远场通信技术发现设备,本申请对发现设备的通信技术不作限定。The discovery module is used to discover nearby devices through near field communication technologies such as Wi-Fi, BT, and D2D. The discovery module is called Nearby, for example. It is not limited to this, and the device can also be discovered through far-field communication technologies such as cellular communication technology, satellite, and Wi-Fi. This application does not limit the communication technology of the discovered device.
网络地址服务模块可用于负责管理辅助链路(例如,辅助链路的建立与释放)。The network address service module can be used to be responsible for managing the auxiliary link (for example, the establishment and release of the auxiliary link).
Wi-Fi功能模块用于基于Wi-Fi通信协议与其他设备实现Wi-Fi通信。The Wi-Fi function module is used to implement Wi-Fi communication with other devices based on the Wi-Fi communication protocol.
BT功能模块用于基于BT或低功耗蓝牙(bluetooth low energy,BLE)实现与其他设备的通信。The BT function module is used to communicate with other devices based on BT or Bluetooth low energy (BLE).
UWB功能模块用于基于UWB通信技术实现对数据的分享。The UWB function module is used to share data based on UWB communication technology.
卫星功能模块用于基于卫星通信实现对数据的分享。The satellite function module is used to share data based on satellite communication.
Wi-Fi链路模块用于管理Wi-Fi的链路,例如但不限于包括链路的建立、释放、数据的传输等。The Wi-Fi link module is used to manage Wi-Fi links, such as but not limited to link establishment, release, data transmission, etc.
BT链路模块用于管理BT的链路,例如但不限于包括链路的建立、释放、数据的传输等。The BT link module is used to manage BT links, including but not limited to link establishment, release, data transmission, etc.
UWB链路模块用于管理UWB的链路,例如但不限于包括链路的建立、释放、数据的传输等。The UWB link module is used to manage UWB links, including but not limited to link establishment, release, data transmission, etc.
卫星链路模块用于管理通信卫星的链路,例如但不限于包括链路的建立、释放、数据的传输等。The satellite link module is used to manage communication satellite links, including but not limited to link establishment, release, data transmission, etc.
电子设备100的无线通信系统包括蜂窝通信模块、Wi-Fi通信模块、BT通信模块和卫星通信模块,其中:The wireless communication system of the electronic device 100 includes a cellular communication module, a Wi-Fi communication module, a BT communication module and a satellite communication module, wherein:
蜂窝通信模块(modem)包括互联网(internet protocol,IP)多媒体系统(IP multimedia subsystem,IMS)通信模块、电路交换(circuited switched,CS)通信模块和3G/4G/5G/6G广播模块,其中,IMS通信模块可以但不限于实现LTE语音通话(voice over LTE,VoLTE)、LTE视频通话(video over LTE,ViLTE)、NR语音通话(voice over NR,VoNR)、NR视频通话(video over NR,ViNR)、Wi-Fi语音通话(voice over Wi-Fi,VoWiFi)、Wi-Fi视频通话(video over Wi-Fi,ViWiFi)、演进分组系统回退(evolved packet system-Fallback,EPS-Fallback)等基于IMS协议的通话。CS通信模块可以提供CS Fallback的功能。Cellular communication module (modem) includes Internet protocol (IP) multimedia system (IP multimedia subsystem, IMS) communication module, circuit switching (circuited switched, CS) communication module and 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast module. Among them, IMS The communication module can, but is not limited to, realize LTE voice call (voice over LTE, VoLTE), LTE video call (video over LTE, ViLTE), NR voice call (voice over NR, VoNR), NR video call (video over NR, ViNR) , Wi-Fi voice call (voice over Wi-Fi, VoWiFi), Wi-Fi video call (video over Wi-Fi, ViWiFi), evolved packet system fallback (evolved packet system-Fallback, EPS-Fallback), etc. based on IMS protocol call. The CS communication module can provide the CS Fallback function.
3G/4G/5G/6G广播模块可以用于监听3G/4G/5G/6G的广播信道。电子设备100可以处于至少一个基站的覆盖区域内,这至少一个基站中的任意一个基站可以通过广播信道向处于覆盖区域的电子设备(包括电 子设备100)发送广播数据(例如音频流/视频流等多媒体数据),任意一个基站可以维护至少一个频道,不同频道对应的广播数据可以不同。在一些示例中,用户可以通过电子设备100选择接收的广播数据对应的频道。在一些示例中,电子设备100可以通过3G/4G/5G/6G广播模块接收基站发送的广播数据,3G/4G/5G/6G广播模块可以通过内核层的蜂窝通信网卡(未示出)上报到系统层进行处理。在一些示例中,电子设备100可以通过系统应用(例如通话)或第三方应用(例如聊天应用、会议应用)播放接收到的广播数据,电子设备100可以将播放的内容分享给其他设备。在另一些示例中,电子设备100可以不播放接收到的广播数据,而是将接收到的广播数据直接分享给其他设备,或者将处理后的广播数据分享给其他设备。The 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast module can be used to monitor the 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast channel. The electronic device 100 may be within the coverage area of at least one base station, and any one of the at least one base station may broadcast to electronic devices (including electronic devices) in the coverage area through broadcast channels. The sub-device 100) sends broadcast data (such as audio stream/video stream and other multimedia data). Any base station can maintain at least one channel, and the broadcast data corresponding to different channels can be different. In some examples, the user can select a channel corresponding to the received broadcast data through the electronic device 100 . In some examples, the electronic device 100 can receive broadcast data sent by the base station through a 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast module, and the 3G/4G/5G/6G broadcast module can report it through a cellular communication network card (not shown) at the kernel layer. Processed at the system level. In some examples, the electronic device 100 can play the received broadcast data through a system application (such as a call) or a third-party application (such as a chat application, conferencing application), and the electronic device 100 can share the played content with other devices. In other examples, the electronic device 100 may not play the received broadcast data, but directly share the received broadcast data with other devices, or share the processed broadcast data with other devices.
Wi-Fi通信模块可以包括WiFi通信的硬件模块,例如固件和芯片。The Wi-Fi communication module may include hardware modules for WiFi communication, such as firmware and chips.
BT通信模块可以包括BT通信的硬件模块,例如固件和芯片。The BT communication module may include hardware modules for BT communication, such as firmware and chips.
卫星通信模块可以包括卫星通信的硬件模块,例如固件和芯片。The satellite communication module may include hardware modules for satellite communication, such as firmware and chips.
本申请实施例中,电子设备200的硬件结构可以参考上述图2A中电子设备100的硬件结构,电子设备2000的软件框架可以参考上述图2B或图2C所示的电子设备100的软件框架。电子设备200可以包括有与电子设备100更多、更少或相同的硬件结构,电子设备200可以包括有与电子设备100更多、更少或相同的软件模块,本申请在此不作限定。In this embodiment of the present application, the hardware structure of the electronic device 200 may refer to the hardware structure of the electronic device 100 in FIG. 2A , and the software framework of the electronic device 2000 may refer to the software framework of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2B or 2C . The electronic device 200 may include more, less, or the same hardware structure as the electronic device 100 , and the electronic device 200 may include more, fewer, or the same software modules as the electronic device 100 , which is not limited in this application.
下面基于介绍本申请实施例提供的一些数据分享场景。The following is an introduction to some data sharing scenarios provided by the embodiments of this application.
图3A-图3Y示例性的示出了本申请实施例提供的一些数据分享场景。Figures 3A to 3Y exemplarily illustrate some data sharing scenarios provided by embodiments of the present application.
在一种数据分享场景中,电子设备100可以将本地存储的图片或视频等等文件,分享给其他设备。In a data sharing scenario, the electronic device 100 can share locally stored files such as pictures or videos with other devices.
示例性的,如图3A所示,电子设备100可以显示图片展示界面3010。该图片展示界面3010中包括有图片3011和菜单3012。该菜单3012中可以包括分享按钮3013、收藏按钮3014、编辑按钮3015、删除按钮3016、更多按钮3017。该图片3011可以有标题,例如,“风景”。其中,分享按钮3013可用于触发打开系统分享界面。收藏按钮3014可用于触发收藏该图片3011到图片收藏文件夹。编辑按钮3015可用于触发对图片3011的旋转、修剪、增加滤镜、虚化等编辑功能。删除按钮3016可用于触发删除该图片3011。更多按钮3017可用于触发打开更多与图片相关的功能。For example, as shown in FIG. 3A , the electronic device 100 can display a picture display interface 3010. The picture display interface 3010 includes a picture 3011 and a menu 3012. The menu 3012 may include a share button 3013, a favorite button 3014, an edit button 3015, a delete button 3016, and a more button 3017. The picture 3011 may have a title, for example, "Landscape." Among them, the share button 3013 can be used to trigger opening of the system sharing interface. The collection button 3014 can be used to trigger collection of the picture 3011 to the picture collection folder. The edit button 3015 can be used to trigger editing functions such as rotating, trimming, adding filters, blurring, etc. to the picture 3011. The delete button 3016 can be used to trigger deletion of the picture 3011. The more button 3017 can be used to trigger opening of more image-related functions.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该分享按钮3013的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3B所示的系统分享界面3020。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the share button 3013, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing interface 3020 as shown in FIG. 3B.
如图3B所示,该系统分享界面3020中包括有区域3021、区域3022和区域3023。其中,区域3021可用于显示电子设备100的图库中的一个或多个图片或视频,这一个或多个图片或视频中可以包括用户选择的图片或视频。其中,已选定图片上可以显示有标记,标记可用于表示其对应的图片被选定(也即图片已被用户选择)。该区域3021中显示的图片或视频画面可以是缩略图。区域3021中显示的图片或视频画面对应的原图可以存储于电子设备100上。As shown in Figure 3B, the system sharing interface 3020 includes an area 3021, an area 3022 and an area 3023. The area 3021 may be used to display one or more pictures or videos in the gallery of the electronic device 100 , and the one or more pictures or videos may include pictures or videos selected by the user. A mark may be displayed on the selected picture, and the mark may be used to indicate that the corresponding picture is selected (that is, the picture has been selected by the user). The pictures or video images displayed in this area 3021 may be thumbnails. The original image corresponding to the picture or video picture displayed in the area 3021 can be stored on the electronic device 100 .
区域3022可用于显示电子设备100发现的附近设备的选项(例如,“Alee的手机”选项,“HUAWEI P50”选项,“HUAWEI P50 Pro”选项)。其中,电子设备100在正在搜索附近的设备时可以在区域3022中显示搜索提示(例如,“正在发现附近的设备,对方需要开启蓝牙、WLAN”等文字提示)。区域3023中可以显示有一个或多个服务选项的图标(例如,聊天应用图标、welink应用图标、畅连应用图标、闲聊应用图标、邮件应用图标、浏览器应用图标、信息应用图标、WLAN直连图标,等)。服务选项对应的应用程序或协议可支持分享用户选择的图片至联系人或服务器。用户可以通过服务选项对应的应用程序或协议进行数据分享。例如将选择的图片分享至聊天应用中的一个或多个联系人,又例如将选择的图片分享至闲聊应用的动态发布平台(即服务器),等等。Area 3022 may be used to display options for nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100 (eg, “Alee’s phone” option, “HUAWEI P50” option, “HUAWEI P50 Pro” option). When the electronic device 100 is searching for a nearby device, it may display a search prompt in the area 3022 (for example, a text prompt such as "Discovering a nearby device, the other party needs to turn on Bluetooth and WLAN"). Icons with one or more service options (for example, chat application icon, welink application icon, smooth connection application icon, chat application icon, mail application icon, browser application icon, information application icon, WLAN direct connection) may be displayed in the area 3023 icon, etc.). The application or protocol corresponding to the service option can support sharing user-selected pictures to contacts or servers. Users can share data through the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. For example, the selected picture is shared to one or more contacts in the chat application, or the selected picture is shared to the dynamic publishing platform (ie, server) of the chat application, and so on.
电子设备100可以接收用户针对“Alee的手机”的选项的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以将用户选中的图片或视频发送给“Alee的手机”的选项对应的附近设备上。The electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (such as a click) for the option of "Alee's Phone", and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send the picture or video selected by the user to the location corresponding to the option of "Alee's Phone". on the device.
在另一种数据分享场景中,电子设备100可以将视频应用中指定视频的播放链接分享给其他设备。其中,该指定视频包括但不限于短视频(例如,小于指定播放时长的视频等等)、长视频(例如,超过指定播放时长的影视剧等等)、直播视频,等等。In another data sharing scenario, the electronic device 100 can share the playback link of the specified video in the video application to other devices. The designated videos include but are not limited to short videos (for example, videos that are shorter than the designated playback time, etc.), long videos (for example, movies and TV series that exceed the designated playback time, etc.), live videos, and so on.
示例性的,如图3C所示,电子设备100可以显示视频应用界面3030。该视频应用界面3030中可以包括有短视频或直播视频的视频播放画面3031、账户图标3032、点赞图标3033、评论图标3034、收藏图 标3035和分享图标3036、视频配文(例如“海边度假”)、视频发布者名称(例如“用户1”)等等。其中,该账户图标3032可显示有该短视频或直播视频的发布账户的头像,该点赞图标3033可用于标记该短视频或直播视频受用户喜欢,该评论图标3034可用于触发电子设备100显示该短视频或直播视频的评论信息。该收藏图标3035可用于触发电子设备100将该短视频或直播视频的播放链接保存至视频应用上已登录账户关联的收藏夹中。该分享图标3036可用于触发电子设备100分享该短视频或直播视频的播放链接。For example, as shown in FIG. 3C , the electronic device 100 may display a video application interface 3030. The video application interface 3030 may include a video playback screen 3031 of a short video or a live video, an account icon 3032, a like icon 3033, a comment icon 3034, and a favorite image. logo 3035 and sharing icon 3036, video text (for example, "Seaside Vacation"), video publisher name (for example, "User 1"), etc. Among them, the account icon 3032 can display the avatar of the publishing account of the short video or live video, the like icon 3033 can be used to mark that the short video or live video is liked by the user, and the comment icon 3034 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display Comment information for this short video or live video. The favorite icon 3035 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to save the playback link of the short video or live video to the favorites associated with the logged-in account on the video application. The sharing icon 3036 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the play link of the short video or live video.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该分享图标3036的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3D所示的菜单窗口3040。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the share icon 3036, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3040 as shown in FIG. 3D.
如图3D所示,该菜单窗口3040包括一个或多个分享服务的选项。例如,该分享服务的选项可以包括该视频应用内的分享选项(例如,转发选项、私信选项)和/或其他应用的分享选项(例如,好友圈选项、聊天应用选项,weilink应用选项,等等)。该转发选项可用于将该短视频或直播视频转发到视频应用上已登录账户的好友圈。该私信选项可用于电子设备100将该短视频或直播视频转发给视频应用上已登录账户关联的联系人。该好友圈选项可用于触发电子设备100将该短视频或直播视频的播放链接转发到聊天应用中已登录账户的好友圈。聊天应用选项可用于触发电子设备100将该短视频或直播视频的播放链接转发给聊天应用中联系人。welink应用选项可用于触发电子设备100将该短视频或直播视频的播放链接转发给welink应用中的联系人。该菜单窗口3040中还可以包括其他功能功控(例如,举报控件、收藏控件、保存控件、链接复制控件,等等)。As shown in Figure 3D, the menu window 3040 includes one or more options for sharing services. For example, the sharing service options may include sharing options within the video application (for example, forwarding options, private message options) and/or sharing options for other applications (for example, friend circle options, chat application options, Weilink application options, etc. ). This forwarding option can be used to forward the short video or live video to the circle of friends of the logged-in account on the video application. The private message option can be used by the electronic device 100 to forward the short video or live video to contacts associated with the logged-in account on the video application. The circle of friends option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the play link of the short video or live video to the circle of friends of the logged-in account in the chat application. The chat application option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the play link of the short video or live video to the contact in the chat application. The welink application option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the playback link of the short video or live video to the contact in the welink application. The menu window 3040 may also include other functional controls (for example, reporting controls, collection controls, save controls, link copy controls, etc.).
电子设备100可以响应于用户在菜单窗口3040上的输入(例如,滑动输入),在菜单窗口3040上切换显示更多分享服务的选项。The electronic device 100 may switch to display more options of the sharing service on the menu window 3040 in response to the user's input (eg, sliding input) on the menu window 3040 .
如图3E所示,电子设备100可以在菜单窗口3040中显示更多控件3041。电子设备100可以接收用户对该更多控件3041的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示出如图3F所示的系统分享窗口3050。As shown in FIG. 3E, the electronic device 100 may display more controls 3041 in the menu window 3040. The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more control 3041, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 3050 as shown in FIG. 3F.
如图3F所示,该系统分享窗口3050中可以包括上述短视频或直播视频的播放链接选项3051、区域3052和区域3053。该播放链接选项3051上可以显示有对该短视频或直播视频的描述信息(例如,“我刚在短视频看到这个,快来围观:【海边度假】”)。该区域3052中可用于显示电子设备100发现的附近设备选项,以及一个或多个用户选项(例如,“Alee的手机”选项,“HUAWEI P50”选项,“HUAWEI P50 Pro”选项)。该用户选项对应电子设备100发现的附近设备。其中,电子设备100在正在搜索附近的设备时可以在区域3052中显示搜索提示(例如,“正在发现附近的设备,对方需要开启蓝牙、WLAN”等文字提示)。区域3053中可以显示有一个或多个服务选项的图标(例如,聊天应用图标、welink应用图标、畅连应用图标、闲聊应用图标、邮件应用图标、浏览器应用图标、信息应用图标、WLAN直连图标,等)。服务选项对应的应用程序或协议可支持分享用户选择的短视频或直播视频的播放链接至联系人或服务器。用户可以通过服务选项对应的应用程序或协议进行数据分享。例如将选择的短视频或直播视频的播放链接分享至聊天应用的一个或多个联系人,又例如将选择的短视频或直播视频的播放链接分享至闲聊应用的动态发布平台(即服务器),等等。As shown in Figure 3F, the system sharing window 3050 may include the play link option 3051, area 3052 and area 3053 of the above-mentioned short video or live video. The play link option 3051 may display description information for the short video or live video (for example, "I just saw this in the short video, come and watch: [Seaside Vacation]"). This area 3052 can be used to display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100, and one or more user options (for example, "Alee's mobile phone" option, "HUAWEI P50" option, "HUAWEI P50 Pro" option). This user option corresponds to nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100 . When the electronic device 100 is searching for nearby devices, it may display a search prompt in area 3052 (for example, text prompts such as "Discovering nearby devices, the other party needs to turn on Bluetooth and WLAN"). Icons with one or more service options (for example, chat application icon, welink application icon, smooth connection application icon, chat application icon, mail application icon, browser application icon, information application icon, WLAN direct connection) may be displayed in the area 3053 icon, etc.). The application or protocol corresponding to the service option can support sharing the playback link of the short video or live video selected by the user to a contact or server. Users can share data through the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. For example, share the playback link of the selected short video or live video to one or more contacts in the chat application, or share the playback link of the selected short video or live video to the dynamic publishing platform (i.e. server) of the chat application. etc.
电子设备100可以接收用户针对该用户选项(例如,“Alee的手机”的选项)的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以将用户选中的短视频或直播视频的播放链接和描述信息发送给该用户选项(例如,“Alee的手机”的选项)对应的附近设备上。The electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (such as a click) for the user option (such as the option of "Alee's mobile phone"), and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may play the link of the short video or live video selected by the user. and the description information is sent to the nearby device corresponding to the option of the user (for example, the option of "Alee's phone").
在另一种数据分享场景中,电子设备100可以将资讯类应用中指定网络文章的打开链接分享给其他设备。其中,该指定网络文章包括但不限于新闻、博客,等等。In another data sharing scenario, the electronic device 100 can share the open link of a specified online article in an information application to other devices. Among them, the designated online articles include but are not limited to news, blogs, etc.
示例性的,如图3G所示,电子设备100可以显示新闻应用界面3060。该新闻应用界面3060中可以包括有新闻文章的标题(例如,“高尔夫小将Alee首秀夺金”)、新闻文章的内容(例如,“昨日,高尔夫小将Alee在高尔夫锦标赛上首秀,以四轮267杆的总成绩夺得金牌。”)、新闻文章的发布者名称(例如,“新闻早报”)及头像、更多控件3061。For example, as shown in FIG. 3G, the electronic device 100 can display a news application interface 3060. The news application interface 3060 may include the title of the news article (for example, "Golf boy Alee won the gold medal in his debut"), the content of the news article (for example, "Yesterday, golf boy Alee made his debut at the golf tournament, winning four rounds of gold"). The total score of 267 won the gold medal."), the name of the publisher of the news article (for example, "Morning News") and avatar, more controls 3061.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该更多控件3061的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3H所示的分享菜单3070。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more control 3061, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a share menu 3070 as shown in FIG. 3H.
如图3H所示,该分享菜单3070中可以包括一个或多个分享服务的选项。例如,该一个或多个分享服务的选项可以包括该新闻应用内的分享选项(例如,私信选项和转发选项,等等)和/或其他应用的分享选项(例如,好友圈选项、聊天应用选项,welink应用选项,等等),以及系统分享选项3071。该转发选项可用于将该新闻文章的打开链接转发到视频应用上已登录账户的好友圈。该私信选项可用于电子设备100 将该新闻文章的打开链接发给视频应用上已登录账户关联的联系人。该好友圈选项可用于触发电子设备100将该新闻文章的打开链接转发到聊天应用中已登录账户的好友圈。聊天应用选项可用于触发电子设备100将该新闻文章的打开链接转发给聊天应用中联系人。welink应用选项可用于触发电子设备100将该新闻文章的打开链接转发给welink应用中的联系人。该分享菜单3070中还可以包括其他功能控件(例如,收藏控件、链接复制控件,等等)。As shown in Figure 3H, the sharing menu 3070 may include one or more sharing service options. For example, the one or more sharing service options may include sharing options within the news application (for example, private message options and forwarding options, etc.) and/or sharing options for other applications (for example, friend circle options, chat application options , welink application options, etc.), and system sharing options 3071. This forwarding option can be used to forward the open link of the news article to the circle of friends of the logged-in account on the video application. This private message option is available on electronic devices 100 Send the opening link of the news article to the contact associated with the logged-in account on the video application. The friend circle option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the open link of the news article to the friend circle of the logged-in account in the chat application. The chat application option may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the open link of the news article to the contact in the chat application. The welink application option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the open link of the news article to the contact in the welink application. The sharing menu 3070 may also include other functional controls (for example, collection controls, link copy controls, etc.).
电子设备100可以响应于用户在分享菜单3070中系统分享选项3071的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3I所示的系统分享窗口3080。The electronic device 100 may respond to the user's input (eg, click) on the system sharing option 3071 in the sharing menu 3070, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 3080 as shown in FIG. 3I.
如图3I所示,该系统分享窗口3080中可以包括上述新闻文章的打开链接选项3081、区域3082和区域3083。该打开链接选项3081上可以显示有对该新闻文章的描述信息(例如,“新闻资讯APP:【高尔夫小将Alee首秀夺金】”)。该区域3082中可用于显示电子设备100发现的附近设备的选项(例如,“Alee的手机”选项,“HUAWEI P50”选项,“HUAWEI P50 Pro”选项)。其中,电子设备100在正在搜索附近的设备时可以在区域3082中显示搜索提示(例如,“正在发现附近的设备,对方需要开启蓝牙、WLAN”等文字提示)。区域3083中可以显示有一个或多个服务选项的图标(例如,聊天应用图标、welink应用图标、畅连应用图标、闲聊应用图标、邮件应用图标、浏览器应用图标、信息应用图标、WLAN直连图标,等)。服务选项对应的应用程序或协议可支持分享用户选择的新闻文章的打开连接至联系人或服务器。用户可以通过服务选项对应的应用程序或协议进行数据分享。例如将选择的新闻文章的打开链接分享至聊天应用的一个或多个联系人,又例如将选择的新闻文章的打开链接分享至闲聊应用的动态发布平台(即服务器),等等。As shown in Figure 3I, the system sharing window 3080 may include the open link option 3081, area 3082 and area 3083 of the above-mentioned news article. The open link option 3081 may display description information of the news article (for example, "News Information APP: [Golfer Alee wins gold medal in debut]"). This area 3082 can be used to display options for nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100 (for example, "Alee's mobile phone" option, "HUAWEI P50" option, "HUAWEI P50 Pro" option). When the electronic device 100 is searching for nearby devices, it may display a search prompt in area 3082 (for example, text prompts such as "Discovering nearby devices, the other party needs to turn on Bluetooth and WLAN"). Icons with one or more service options (for example, chat application icon, welink application icon, smooth connection application icon, chat application icon, mail application icon, browser application icon, information application icon, WLAN direct connection) may be displayed in the area 3083 icon, etc.). The application or protocol corresponding to the service option may support the sharing of user-selected news articles to open connections to contacts or servers. Users can share data through the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. For example, the open link of the selected news article is shared to one or more contacts of the chat application, or the open link of the selected news article is shared to the dynamic publishing platform (i.e., server) of the chat application, and so on.
电子设备100可以接收用户针对“Alee的手机”的选项的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以将用户正在浏览的新闻文章的打开链接发送给“Alee的手机”的选项对应的附近设备上。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) for the option of "Alee's Phone", and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send an open link of the news article that the user is browsing to the option of "Alee's Phone" on the corresponding nearby device.
在另一种数据分享场景中,电子设备100可以在地图类应用中将指定位置的位置信息分享给其他设备。其中,该指定位置可以是用户在地图上选择的地址,或者电子设备100当前所处的位置。In another data sharing scenario, the electronic device 100 can share the location information of a specified location with other devices in a map application. The designated location may be an address selected by the user on the map, or the current location of the electronic device 100 .
示例性的,电子设备100可以在地图类应用中将用户选中的景点位置分享给其他设备。如图3J所示,电子设备100可以显示出地图应用界面3090。该地图应用界面3090中包括有地址搜索输入框3091,搜索控件3092,地图3093,景点位置的标记3094,电子设备100的位置在地图3093中的位置标记3095。其中,该地址搜索输入框3091可用于接收用户输入的地址名称。该搜索控件3092可用于触发电子设备100显示用户输入的与地址名称对应的位置信息。For example, the electronic device 100 can share the location of the scenic spot selected by the user with other devices in a map application. As shown in Figure 3J, the electronic device 100 can display a map application interface 3090. The map application interface 3090 includes an address search input box 3091, a search control 3092, a map 3093, a mark 3094 of the location of the scenic spot, and a mark 3095 of the location of the electronic device 100 in the map 3093. Among them, the address search input box 3091 can be used to receive the address name input by the user. The search control 3092 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the location information corresponding to the address name input by the user.
电子设备100可以接收用于对该景点位置的标记3094的选择操作(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3K所示的地址详情窗口3096。The electronic device 100 may receive a selection operation (eg, click) for the marker 3094 of the attraction location, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the address details window 3096 as shown in FIG. 3K .
如图3K所示,该地址详情窗口3096可以包括有该景点位置对应的位置信息3097(例如,“广东省-深圳市-南山区-西丽湖路4065号”等),路线控件,分享控件3098、收藏控件、周边控件等等。该路线控件可用于触发电子设备100显示电子设备100所处位置至该景点位置对应的路线信息。该分享控件3098可用于触发电子设备100将该景点位置分享给其他设备或联系人。该收藏控件可用于触发电子设备100将该景点位置的位置信息收藏至收藏夹中,方便用户下次打开地图应用时快速查找该景点位置的位置信息。As shown in Figure 3K, the address details window 3096 may include location information 3097 corresponding to the scenic spot location (for example, "No. 4065, Xilihu Road, Nanshan District, Shenzhen City, Guangdong Province", etc.), route controls, and sharing controls. 3098, collection controls, peripheral controls, etc. The route control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display route information corresponding to the location of the electronic device 100 to the location of the scenic spot. The sharing control 3098 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the scenic spot location with other devices or contacts. The collection control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to collect the location information of the scenic spot into favorites, so that the user can quickly find the location information of the scenic spot when opening the map application next time.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该分享控件3098的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3L所示的菜单窗口3100。Electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the share control 3098, and in response to the input, electronic device 100 may display menu window 3100 as shown in FIG. 3L.
如图3L所示,该菜单窗口3100可以包括一个或多个分享服务的选项。例如,该一个或多个分享服务的选项可以包括该地图应用内的分享选项(例如,私信选项)和/或其他应用的分享选项(例如,好友圈选项、聊天应用选项,welink应用选项,等等),以及更多分享选项3101,等等。该私信选项可用于电子设备100将该景点位置的位置信息转发给地图应用上已登录账户关联的联系人。该好友圈选项可用于触发电子设备100将该景点位置的位置信息转发到聊天应用中已登录账户的好友圈。聊天应用选项可用于触发电子设备100将该景点位置的位置信息转发给聊天应用中联系人。welink应用选项可用于触发电子设备100将该景点位置的位置信息转发给welink应用中的联系人。该更多分享选项3101可用于触发电子设备100调用电子设备100上的系统分享功能,并显示出系统分享窗口。该分享菜单3070中还可以包括其他功能控件(例如,图片生成控件,等等),该图片生成控件可用于触发电子设备100将电子设备100当前显示的地图部分生成图片。As shown in Figure 3L, the menu window 3100 may include one or more options for sharing services. For example, the one or more sharing service options may include sharing options within the map application (for example, private message options) and/or sharing options for other applications (for example, friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc. etc.), and more sharing options3101, etc. The private message option can be used by the electronic device 100 to forward the location information of the attraction location to contacts associated with the logged-in account on the map application. The friend circle option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the location information of the scenic spot location to the friend circle of the logged-in account in the chat application. The chat application option may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the location information of the scenic spot location to the contact in the chat application. The welink application option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to forward the location information of the scenic spot location to the contact in the welink application. The more sharing options 3101 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function on the electronic device 100 and display the system sharing window. The sharing menu 3070 may also include other functional controls (eg, picture generation controls, etc.), which may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to generate a picture of the map portion currently displayed by the electronic device 100 .
电子设备100可以接收并响应于用户在更多分享选项3101的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3M所示的系统分享窗口3110。 The electronic device 100 may receive and respond to user input (eg, click) in the more sharing options 3101, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a system sharing window 3110 as shown in FIG. 3M.
如图3M所示,该系统分享窗口3110可以包括上述景点位置的位置信息选项3111、区域3112和区域3113。该位置信息选项3111上可以显示有该景点位置的位置信息(例如,“这里是广东省深圳市南山区西丽湖路4065号…”)。该区域3082中可用于显示电子设备100发现的附近设备选项(例如,“Alee的手机”选项,“HUAWEI P50”选项,“HUAWEI P50 Pro”选项)。该用户选项对应电子设备100发现的附近设备。其中,电子设备100在正在搜索附近的设备时可以在区域3082中显示搜索提示(例如,“正在发现附近的设备,对方需要开启蓝牙、WLAN”等文字提示)。区域3083中可以显示有一个或多个服务选项的图标(例如,聊天应用图标、welink应用图标、畅连应用图标、闲聊应用图标、邮件应用图标、浏览器应用图标、信息应用图标、WLAN直连图标,等)。服务选项对应的应用程序或协议可支持分享用户选择的位置信息至联系人或服务器。用户可以通过服务选项对应的应用程序或协议进行数据分享。例如将选择的位置信息分享至聊天应用的一个或多个联系人,又例如将选择的位置信息分享至闲聊应用的动态发布平台(即服务器),等等。As shown in Figure 3M, the system sharing window 3110 may include the location information option 3111, area 3112 and area 3113 of the scenic spot location. The location information option 3111 may display the location information of the scenic spot location (for example, "This is No. 4065, Xilihu Road, Nanshan District, Shenzhen City, Guangdong Province..."). This area 3082 can be used to display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100 (for example, "Alee's mobile phone" option, "HUAWEI P50" option, "HUAWEI P50 Pro" option). This user option corresponds to nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100 . When the electronic device 100 is searching for nearby devices, it may display a search prompt in area 3082 (for example, text prompts such as "Discovering nearby devices, the other party needs to turn on Bluetooth and WLAN"). Icons with one or more service options (for example, chat application icon, welink application icon, smooth connection application icon, chat application icon, mail application icon, browser application icon, information application icon, WLAN direct connection) may be displayed in the area 3083 icon, etc.). The application or protocol corresponding to the service option can support sharing user-selected location information to contacts or servers. Users can share data through the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. For example, the selected location information is shared to one or more contacts of the chat application, or the selected location information is shared to the dynamic publishing platform (ie, server) of the chat application, and so on.
电子设备100可以接收用户针对“Alee的手机”的选项的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以将上述景点位置的位置信息发送给“Alee的手机”的选项对应的附近设备上。The electronic device 100 can receive the user's input (such as a click) for the option of "Alee's Phone", and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 can send the location information of the above-mentioned attraction location to the vicinity corresponding to the option of "Alee's Phone". on the device.
又示例性的,电子设备100将电子设备100当前所处位置的位置信息分享给其他设备。如图3N所示,电子设备100可以显示地图应用界面3090。针对该地图应用界面3090的文字说明,可以参考上述图3J所示实施例的文字描述部分,在此不再赘述。In another example, the electronic device 100 shares the location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 with other devices. As shown in FIG. 3N, the electronic device 100 can display a map application interface 3090. For the text description of the map application interface 3090, you may refer to the text description part of the embodiment shown in FIG. 3J, which will not be described again here.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该地图应用界面3090中位置标记3095的选择操作(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3O所示的地址详情窗口3120。The electronic device 100 may receive a user's selection operation (eg, click) on the location mark 3095 in the map application interface 3090, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display an address details window 3120 as shown in FIG. 3O.
如图3O所示,该地址详情窗口3120可以包括电子设备100当前所处位置的位置信息(例如,“在深圳市野生动物园东南门停车场”)、分享控件3121、打卡控件,等等。该分享控件3121可用于触发电子设备100将电子设备100当前所处位置的位置信息分享给其他设备或联系人。As shown in Figure 3O, the address details window 3120 may include location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 (for example, "at the parking lot at the southeast gate of Shenzhen Wildlife Park"), sharing controls 3121, check-in controls, and so on. The sharing control 3121 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 with other devices or contacts.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该分享控件3121的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3P所示的菜单窗口3130。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the sharing control 3121, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3130 as shown in FIG. 3P.
如图3P所示,该菜单窗口3130可以包括一个或多个分享服务的选项。例如,该一个或多个分享服务的选项可以包括该地图应用内的分享选项(例如,私信选项)和/或其他应用的分享选项(例如,好友圈选项、聊天应用选项,welink应用选项,等等),以及更多分享选项3131,等等。其中,针对该菜单窗口3130的文字说明可以参考上述图3L所示实施例中针对菜单窗口3100的文字说明,在此不再赘述。As shown in Figure 3P, the menu window 3130 may include one or more options for sharing services. For example, the one or more sharing service options may include sharing options within the map application (for example, private message options) and/or sharing options for other applications (for example, friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc. etc.), and more sharing options 3131, etc. For the text description of the menu window 3130, please refer to the text description of the menu window 3100 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3L, which will not be described again here.
电子设备100可以接收并响应于用户在更多分享选项3131的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3Q所示的系统分享窗口3140。The electronic device 100 may receive and respond to user input (eg, click) in the more sharing options 3131, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a system sharing window 3140 as shown in FIG. 3Q.
如图3Q所示,该系统分享窗口3140可以包括电子设备100当前所处位置的位置信息选项3141、区域3142和区域3143。该位置信息选项3141上可以显示有电子设备100当前所处位置的位置信息(例如,“我在深圳市野生动物园东南门停车场…”)和/或该位置的打开链接。其中,针对该区域3142的文字说明可以参考上述图3M所示实施例中针对区域3112的文字说明,针对该区域3143的文字说明可以参考上述图3M所示实施例中针对区域3113的文字说明,在此不再赘述。As shown in Figure 3Q, the system sharing window 3140 may include a location information option 3141, an area 3142 and an area 3143 of the current location of the electronic device 100. The location information option 3141 may display location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 (for example, "I am in the parking lot of the southeast gate of Shenzhen Wildlife Park...") and/or an open link of the location. For the text description of the area 3142, please refer to the text description of the area 3112 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M. For the text description of the area 3143, please refer to the text description of the area 3113 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M. I won’t go into details here.
电子设备100可以接收用户针对该区域3142中“Alee的手机”的选项的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以将电子设备100当前位置的位置信息发送给“Alee的手机”的选项对应的附近设备上。The electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (eg, click) for the option of "Alee's mobile phone" in the area 3142, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send location information of the current location of the electronic device 100 to "Alee's mobile phone". ” option on nearby devices.
在另一种数据分享场景中,电子设备100可以将电子设备100上已安装的应用的安装包或下载链接分享给其他设备。In another data sharing scenario, the electronic device 100 can share the installation package or download link of the application installed on the electronic device 100 to other devices.
示例性的,如图3R所示,电子设备100可以显示桌面3150。该桌面3150中显示了一个放置有应用图标的页面,该页面包括多个应用图标(例如,天气应用图标、股票应用图标、计算器应用图标、设置应用图标、邮件应用图标、音乐应用图标、视频应用图标、浏览器应用图标、地图应用图标3151、图库应用图标、备忘录应用图标、语音助手应用图标,等等)。可选的,在该桌面3150的上方部分区域显示有状态栏,该状态栏可以包括:移动通信信号(又可称为蜂窝信号)的一个或多个信号强度指示符,电池状态指示符,时间指示符,等等。多个应用图标下方还显示包括有页面指示符,以表明桌面3150上页面总数,以及当前显示的页面与其他页面的位置关系。例如,桌面3150可以包括三个页面,该页面指示符中为白点可以表示当前显示页面为三个页面中最右边的一个页面。进一步可选的,页面指示符的下方有多个托盘 图标(例如拨号应用图标、信息应用图标、联系人应用图标、相机应用图标),托盘图标在页面切换时保持显示。For example, as shown in FIG. 3R, the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 3150. The desktop 3150 displays a page on which application icons are placed. The page includes multiple application icons (for example, weather application icon, stock application icon, calculator application icon, settings application icon, mail application icon, music application icon, video Application icon, browser application icon, map application icon, gallery application icon, memo application icon, voice assistant application icon, etc.). Optionally, a status bar is displayed in an upper part of the desktop 3150. The status bar may include: one or more signal strength indicators of mobile communication signals (also called cellular signals), battery status indicators, and time. Indicators, etc. Page indicators are also displayed below multiple application icons to indicate the total number of pages on the desktop 3150 and the positional relationship between the currently displayed page and other pages. For example, the desktop 3150 may include three pages, and a white dot in the page indicator may indicate that the currently displayed page is the rightmost page among the three pages. Further optionally, there are multiple trays below the page indicator Icons (such as dialer application icon, messaging application icon, contact application icon, camera application icon), the tray icon remains displayed when switching pages.
电子设备100可以接收用于对该地图应用图标3151的输入(例如长按),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3S所示的快捷菜单3152。The electronic device 100 may receive input (eg, long press) for the map application icon 3151, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a shortcut menu 3152 as shown in FIG. 3S.
如图3S所示,该快捷菜单3152中可以包括分享控件3153、卸载控件3154。该分享控件3153可用于触发电子设备100调用系统分享功能,并显示出系统分享窗口,将该地图应用分享给其他设备或联系人。该卸载控件3154可用于触发电子设备100卸载该地图应用。As shown in Figure 3S, the shortcut menu 3152 may include a sharing control 3153 and an uninstalling control 3154. The sharing control 3153 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing window to share the map application with other devices or contacts. The uninstall control 3154 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to uninstall the map application.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该分享控件3153的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3T所示的系统分享窗口3160。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the sharing control 3153, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 3160 as shown in FIG. 3T.
如图3T所示,该系统分享窗口3160可以包括地图应用选项3161、区域3162和区域3163。该地图应用选项3161上可以显示有该地图应用的名称(例如,“地图”)、数据大小(例如,“40.82MB”)和文件类型(例如,“base.apk”),等等。其中,针对该区域3162的文字说明可以参考上述图3M所示实施例中针对区域3112的文字说明,针对该区域3163的文字说明可以参考上述图3M所示实施例中针对区域3113的文字说明,在此不再赘述。As shown in FIG. 3T , the system sharing window 3160 may include a map application option 3161 , an area 3162 and an area 3163 . The map application option 3161 may display the name of the map application (for example, "map"), data size (for example, "40.82MB"), file type (for example, "base.apk"), and so on. The text description for the area 3162 may refer to the text description for the area 3112 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M. The text description for the area 3163 may refer to the text description for the area 3113 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M. I won’t go into details here.
电子设备100可以接收用户针对该区域3162中“Alee的手机”的选项的输入,响应于该输入,电子设备100可以将该地图应用的安装包或者地图应用的下载链接发送给“Alee的手机”的选项对应的附近设备上。The electronic device 100 can receive the user's input for the option of "Alee's mobile phone" in the area 3162, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 can send the installation package of the map application or the download link of the map application to "Alee's mobile phone" options on nearby devices.
在另一种数据分享场景中,电子设备100可以将电子设备100上联系人信息分享给其他设备。In another data sharing scenario, the electronic device 100 can share contact information on the electronic device 100 with other devices.
示例性的,如图3U所示,电子设备100可以显示联系人应用界面3170。该联系人应用界面3170中包括有一个或多个联系人的选项(例如,“Alice”选项3174、“Anna”选项、“Bob”选项、“Britney”选项,等等)。For example, as shown in FIG. 3U, the electronic device 100 may display a contact application interface 3170. The contact application interface 3170 includes options for one or more contacts (eg, "Alice" option 3174, "Anna" option, "Bob" option, "Britney" option, etc.).
电子设备100可以接收用户对该“Alice”选项3174的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3V所示的联系人信息界面3180。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the "Alice" option 3174, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the contact information interface 3180 as shown in FIG. 3V.
如图3V所示,该联系人信息界面3180可以包括联系人“Alice”的名称、头像、电话号码(例如,“186XXXXXXXX”)、语音通话控件3181、视频通话控件3182、短信控件3183、收藏控件3184、编辑控件3185、更多选项控件3186,等等。该语音通话控件3181可用于触发电子设备100向该联系人“Alice”的电子设备拨打语音通话。该视频通话控件3182可用于触发电子设备100向该联系人“Alice”的电子设备拨打视频通话。该短信控件3183可用于触发电子设备100向该联系人“Alice”的电子设备发送短信。该收藏控件3184可用于触发电子设备100将该联系人“Alice”的联系人信息收藏至收藏夹中。该编辑控件3185可用于触发电子设备100对该联系人“Alice”的联系人信息进行修改。该更多选项控件3186可用于触发电子设备100显示出更多的联系人功能。As shown in Figure 3V, the contact information interface 3180 may include the name, avatar, phone number (for example, "186XXXXXXXX") of the contact "Alice", a voice call control 3181, a video call control 3182, a text message control 3183, and a collection control. 3184, editing control 3185, more options control 3186, and so on. The voice call control 3181 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to make a voice call to the electronic device of the contact "Alice". The video call control 3182 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to make a video call to the electronic device of the contact "Alice". The text message control 3183 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send a text message to the electronic device of the contact "Alice". The collection control 3184 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to collect the contact information of the contact "Alice" into favorites. The editing control 3185 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to modify the contact information of the contact "Alice". The more options control 3186 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display more contact functions.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该更多选项控件3186的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3W所示的菜单窗口3187。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more options control 3186, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3187 as shown in FIG. 3W.
如图3W所示,该菜单窗口3187可以包括分享联系人选项3188、加入黑名单选项、创建快捷方式选项、删除联系人选项,等等。该分享联系人选项3188可用于触发电子设备100调用系统分享功能,并显示出系统分享窗口,以将联系人“Alice”的联系人信息分享给其他联系人或其他设备。该加入黑名单选项可用于触发电子设备100将该联系人“Alice”加入黑名单中,以禁止该联系人“Alice”的音频电话或视频电话的呼入以及短信的发入。该创建快捷方式选项可用于触发电子设备100创建该联系人信息界面3180的快捷方式,放置在桌面上,让用户从桌面上可以直接通过该快捷方式快速的打开该联系人界面3180。该删除联系人选项可用于触发电子设备100将删除该联系人“Alice”的联系人信息。As shown in Figure 3W, the menu window 3187 may include a share contact option 3188, a blacklist option, a create shortcut option, a delete contact option, and so on. The share contact option 3188 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing window to share the contact information of the contact "Alice" with other contacts or other devices. The add blacklist option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add the contact "Alice" to the blacklist, so as to prohibit the contact "Alice" from making incoming audio calls or video calls and sending text messages. The create shortcut option can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to create a shortcut of the contact information interface 3180 and place it on the desktop, so that the user can quickly open the contact interface 3180 directly from the desktop through the shortcut. The delete contact option may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to delete the contact information of the contact "Alice".
电子设备100接收用户对该分享联系人选项3188的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图3X所述的菜单窗口3190。The electronic device 100 receives user input (eg, a click) to the share contact option 3188, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu window 3190 as described in FIG. 3X.
如图3X所示,该菜单窗口3190可以包括一个或多个分享方式的选项和取消控件3194。其中,该一个或多个分享方式的选项包括二维码选项3191、vCard选项3192和文本选项3193,等等。该二维码选项3191可用于触发电子设备100将联系人“Alice”的联系信息以二维码的形式分享给其他联系人或其他设备。该vCard选项3192可用于触发电子设备100将联系人“Alice”的联系信息以vCard形式分享给其他联系人或其他设备。该文本选项3193可用于触发电子设备100将联系人“Alice”的联系信息以文本形式分享给其他联系人或其他设备。取消控件3194用于关闭该菜单窗口3190。As shown in Figure 3X, the menu window 3190 may include one or more sharing mode options and a cancel control 3194. Among them, the one or more sharing method options include QR code option 3191, vCard option 3192, text option 3193, and so on. The QR code option 3191 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Alice" in the form of a QR code to other contacts or other devices. The vCard option 3192 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Alice" in the form of a vCard to other contacts or other devices. The text option 3193 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Alice" to other contacts or other devices in text form. The cancel control 3194 is used to close the menu window 3190.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该二维码选项3191的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100 可以显示如图3Y所示的系统分享窗口3200。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the QR code option 3191, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 The system sharing window 3200 shown in Figure 3Y may be displayed.
如图3Y所示,该系统分享窗口3200可以包括联系信息选项3201、区域3202和区域3203。其中,该联系信息选项3201上可以显示有基于联系人“Alice”的联系信息生成的二维码或二维码的缩略图,以及该二维码的数据大小(例如,21.79KB)、名称(例如,“Alice的联系方式.jpg”)等等。其中,针对该区域3202的文字说明可以参考上述图3M所示实施例中针对区域3112的文字说明,针对该区域3203的文字说明可以参考上述图3M所示实施例中针对区域3113的文字说明,在此不再赘述。As shown in Figure 3Y, the system sharing window 3200 may include a contact information option 3201, an area 3202, and an area 3203. Among them, the contact information option 3201 may display a QR code or a thumbnail of the QR code generated based on the contact information of the contact "Alice", as well as the data size (for example, 21.79KB), name ( For example, "Alice's contact information.jpg") and so on. The text description for the area 3202 may refer to the text description for the area 3112 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M. The text description for the area 3203 may refer to the text description for the area 3113 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3M. I won’t go into details here.
电子设备100可以接收用户针对该区域3202中“Alee的手机”的选项的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以将基于联系人“Alice”的联系信息生成的二维码,发送给“Alee的手机”的选项对应的附近设备上。The electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (eg, click) for the option "Alee's mobile phone" in the area 3202, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may generate a QR code based on the contact information of the contact "Alice". , the option to send to "Alee's phone" corresponds to the nearby device.
从上述数据分享场景中可以看出,电子设备100在分享数据的过程中,在调用系统分享功能进行分享时,只能对电子设备100在近距离搜索到的附近设备进行分享,对于不在电子设备100附近的设备或者电子设备100通过蓝牙或WiFi搜索不到的设备,电子设备100无法进行分享。若电子设备100要分享数据给这些在电子设备100附近的设备或者电子设备100通过蓝牙或WiFi搜索不到的设备,需要电子设备100和这些设备上都下载同一个指定应用,并且电子设备100上指定应用的已登录账号和这些设备上指定应用的已登录账号必须具有关联关系,也即,两个账号互为好友关系。这样,分享操作比较复杂。It can be seen from the above data sharing scenario that in the process of sharing data, when the electronic device 100 calls the system sharing function to share, it can only share the nearby devices that the electronic device 100 searches for at a close distance. If there are devices nearby 100 or the electronic device 100 cannot search for devices through Bluetooth or WiFi, the electronic device 100 cannot share. If the electronic device 100 wants to share data with these devices near the electronic device 100 or devices that the electronic device 100 cannot search through Bluetooth or WiFi, the same designated application needs to be downloaded on both the electronic device 100 and these devices, and the electronic device 100 needs to The logged-in account of the specified application and the logged-in account of the specified application on these devices must have an associated relationship, that is, the two accounts are friends with each other. In this way, the sharing operation is more complicated.
本申请实施例中提供一种数据分享方法,可以实现电子设备100在与联系人进行互动过程中或之后,在数据(例如,图片、视频、文档文件、位置信息、链接、联系人、日历、应用程序包,等等)的系统分享界面(或窗口)中或者应用内分享界面(或窗口)中增加当前互动的联系人(例如,当前通话联系人)的选项和/或最近互动的联系人(例如,最近通话联系人、最近私信联系人,等等)的选项,等等。在电子设备100接收到用户对当前互动的联系人的选项和/或最近互动的联系人的选项的输入之后,电子设备100将用户选中的指定数据分享给用户指定的联系人对应的电子设备200。这样,电子设备100可以将数据分享给不在电子设备100附近的设备,也可以对一些陌生设备的内容分享,扩大了分享场景,提升了用户的分享体验。The embodiment of the present application provides a data sharing method, which can enable the electronic device 100 to share data (for example, pictures, videos, document files, location information, links, contacts, calendars, The option to add currently interacting contacts (e.g., current call contacts) and/or recently interacted contacts in the system sharing interface (or window) of an application package, etc.) or in the in-app sharing interface (or window) (For example, recent call contacts, recent private message contacts, etc.) options, and so on. After the electronic device 100 receives the user's input on the options of the currently interacted contact and/or the options of the recently interacted contact, the electronic device 100 shares the specified data selected by the user to the electronic device 200 corresponding to the contact specified by the user. . In this way, the electronic device 100 can share data with devices that are not near the electronic device 100 and can also share content with some unfamiliar devices, which expands the sharing scenarios and improves the user's sharing experience.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备100与电子设备200之间的互动可以包括:运营商通话、收/发短信、在社交应用内的互动,等等。其中,在社交应用内的互动可以包括OTT通话、收/发私信,点赞/被点赞、评论/被评论、关注/被关注、收藏/被收藏对方的直播、好友圈发文内容等应用内互动社交。其中,该社交应用包括但不限于即时通讯类应用、视频直播类应用、音乐播放类应用,等等具有多用户社交属性的应用。In the embodiment of the present application, the interaction between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may include: operator calls, receiving/sending text messages, interactions within social applications, and so on. Among them, interactions within social applications can include OTT calls, receiving/sending private messages, liking/being liked, commenting/being commented on, following/being followed, collecting/favoriting the other party’s live broadcast, content posted in friend circles, etc. Interactive social. Among them, the social applications include but are not limited to instant messaging applications, live video applications, music playing applications, and other applications with multi-user social attributes.
下面结合应用场景介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种数据分享方法。A data sharing method provided in the embodiment of this application is introduced below in combination with application scenarios.
在一些应用场景中,电子设备100可以在与其他设备(例如,电子设备200)的通话(语音通话或视频通话,等等通话)过程中,接收并响应于用户的输入,触发对指定数据(例如,图片、视频、文档文件、位置信息、链接、联系人、日历、应用程序包,备忘录,等等数据)的分享。电子设备100可以显示出该指定数据的系统分享窗口或系统分享界面,其中,该指定数据的系统分享窗口或系统分享界面上包括有当前与电子设备100正在通话的设备对应的分享对象选项(例如,电子设备200对应分享对象选项)。电子设备100可以接收并响应于用户对该分享对象的选项的输入,通过电子设备100与正在通话的设备之间的传输链路,将指定数据传输给正在通话的设备。这样,可以让用户在使用电子设备100与对方正在通话的过程中,将用户要分享的数据内容及时分享给正在通话的对方,提高了用户分享数据的体验。In some application scenarios, the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input and trigger the processing of specified data ( For example, sharing of pictures, videos, document files, location information, links, contacts, calendars, application packages, memos, etc.). The electronic device 100 may display a system sharing window or system sharing interface for the specified data, wherein the system sharing window or system sharing interface for the specified data includes a sharing object option corresponding to the device currently being called by the electronic device 100 (for example, , the electronic device 200 corresponds to the sharing object option). The electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input of the option of the sharing object, and transmit specified data to the device being called through a transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the device being called. In this way, the user can share the data content that the user wants to share with the other party in a timely manner while using the electronic device 100 to communicate with the other party, thereby improving the user's experience of sharing data.
图4A-图4I示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200通话时,电子设备100向电子设备200分享图片等数据的界面示意图。4A to 4I exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram of the electronic device 100 sharing data such as pictures to the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 is talking to the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图4A所示,电子设备100可以与电子设备200进行语音通话,并显示出通话界面4010。该通话界面4010上可以包括有电子设备200的电话号码4013(例如,“186XXXXXXXX”)、通话持续时间4014(例如,“00:15”)以及一个或多个通话功能控件,等等。其中,该一个或多个通话功能控件包括但不限于录音控件、等待控件、添加通话控件、视频通话控件、静音控件、联系人控件、拨号盘控件、挂断控件、外放控件,等等。其中,该录音控件可用于触发电子设备100对电子设备100与电子设备200的通话进行录音。该等待控件可用于触发电子设备100暂停与电子设备200的通话。该添加通话控件可用于触发电子设备100新增与其他设备的通话。该视频通话控件可用于触发电子设备100将与电子设备200的语音通话切换成视频通话,其中,在视频通话过程中,电子设备100可以显示视频通话界面,该视频通话 界面可以包括有电子设备200的摄像头拍摄到的画面,可选的,该视频通话界面还可以包括有电子设备100的摄像头拍摄到的画面。该静音控件可用于触发电子设备100停止将向电子设备200发送语音数据。For example, as shown in FIG. 4A , the electronic device 100 can make a voice call with the electronic device 200 and display the call interface 4010 . The call interface 4010 may include the phone number 4013 of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXXX"), the call duration 4014 (for example, "00:15"), and one or more call function controls, etc. The one or more call function controls include, but are not limited to, recording controls, waiting controls, add call controls, video call controls, mute controls, contact controls, dial controls, hang up controls, external call controls, and so on. The recording control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to record the conversation between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 . The waiting control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to suspend the call with the electronic device 200 . The add call control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add a call with other devices. The video call control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to switch the voice call with the electronic device 200 to a video call. During the video call, the electronic device 100 can display a video call interface. The video call The interface may include images captured by the camera of the electronic device 200 . Optionally, the video call interface may also include images captured by the camera of the electronic device 100 . The mute control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending voice data to the electronic device 200 .
可选的,在该通话界面4010的上方部分区域显示有状态栏4011,该状态栏4011可以包括一个或多个状态指示符,该一个或多个状态指示符包括移动通信信号(又可称为蜂窝信号)的一个或多个信号强度指示符、Wi-Fi信号指示符、电池状态指示符、时间指示符,等等。Optionally, a status bar 4011 is displayed in an upper part of the call interface 4010. The status bar 4011 may include one or more status indicators. The one or more status indicators include mobile communication signals (also known as One or more signal strength indicators for cellular signals, Wi-Fi signal indicators, battery status indicators, time indicators, etc.
可选的,若电子设备100上存储有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称,上述通话界面4010上还可以包括电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称4012(例如,“Alice”)。若电子设备100上还存储有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人头像,上述通话界面4010上还可以包括电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人头像(例如,“Alice”)。Optionally, if the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 is stored on the electronic device 100, the above-mentioned call interface 4010 may also include the contact name 4012 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice") . If the electronic device 100 also stores a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the call interface 4010 may also include a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice").
电子设备100可以接收用户退出该通话界面4010的输入(例如,从显示屏底部边缘向上滑动),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图4B所示的桌面4020。The electronic device 100 may receive an input from the user to exit the call interface 4010 (eg, slide upward from the bottom edge of the display screen), and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 4020 as shown in FIG. 4B .
如图4B所示,该桌面4020中显示了一个放置有应用图标的页面,该页面包括多个应用图标(例如,天气应用图标、股票应用图标、计算器应用图标、设置应用图标、邮件应用图标、音乐应用图标、视频应用图标、浏览器应用图标、地图应用图标4022、图库应用图标4023、备忘录应用图标4024、语音助手应用图标,等等)。多个应用图标下方还显示包括有页面指示符,以表明桌面4020上页面总数,以及当前显示的页面与其他页面的位置关系。例如,桌面4020可以包括三个页面,该页面指示符中为白点可以表示当前显示页面为三个页面中最右边的一个页面。进一步可选的,页面指示符的下方有多个托盘图标(例如拨号应用图标、信息应用图标、联系人应用图标4025、相机应用图标),托盘图标在页面切换时保持显示。可选的,在该桌面4020的上方部分区域显示有上述状态栏4011。As shown in Figure 4B, the desktop 4020 displays a page on which application icons are placed. The page includes multiple application icons (for example, a weather application icon, a stock application icon, a calculator application icon, a settings application icon, and an email application icon). , music application icon, video application icon, browser application icon, map application icon 4022, gallery application icon 4023, memo application icon 4024, voice assistant application icon, etc.). Page indicators are also displayed below multiple application icons to indicate the total number of pages on the desktop 4020 and the positional relationship between the currently displayed page and other pages. For example, the desktop 4020 may include three pages, and a white dot in the page indicator may indicate that the currently displayed page is the rightmost page among the three pages. Further optionally, there are multiple tray icons (such as a dialing application icon, a messaging application icon, a contact application icon 4025, and a camera application icon) below the page indicator, and the tray icons remain displayed when the page is switched. Optionally, the above-mentioned status bar 4011 is displayed in an upper part of the desktop 4020.
由于电子设备100与电子设备200正在通话且电子设备100退出上述通话界面4010。电子设备100可以在状态栏4011上显示通话图标4021。该通话图标4021上可以显示通话时间(例如,“00:18”),可选的,该通话图标4021上还可以显示有电子设备200的电话号码(例如,“186XXXXXXXX”)和/或电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”)。该通话图标4021可用于触发电子设备100显示上述通话界面4010。可选的,该状态栏4011可以在触控屏上显示界面有切换时依然保持显示在触控屏的顶部区域。通话图标4021也可以在触控屏上显示的界面有切换但触控屏上显示的界面不为上述通话界面4010时,依然保持显示在该状态栏4011中。Because the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking and the electronic device 100 exits the above call interface 4010. The electronic device 100 may display a call icon 4021 on the status bar 4011. The call icon 4021 can display the call time (for example, "00:18"). Optionally, the call icon 4021 can also display the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXXX") and/or the electronic device. 200's phone number corresponds to the contact name (for example, "Alice"). The call icon 4021 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the above-mentioned call interface 4010. Optionally, the status bar 4011 can remain displayed in the top area of the touch screen when the display interface on the touch screen is switched. The call icon 4021 can also remain displayed in the status bar 4011 when the interface displayed on the touch screen is switched but the interface displayed on the touch screen is not the above-mentioned call interface 4010.
在一些示例中,该通话图标4021也可以不显示在状态栏4011中,也可以以悬浮球的形式显示在触控屏的任何位置,用户也可以拖动该通话图标4021以调整该通话图标4021在触控屏上的显示位置。In some examples, the call icon 4021 may not be displayed in the status bar 4011, or may be displayed anywhere on the touch screen in the form of a floating ball. The user may also drag the call icon 4021 to adjust the call icon 4021. Display position on the touch screen.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该图库应用图标4023的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图4C所示的图库应用界面4030。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the gallery application icon 4023, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the gallery application interface 4030 as shown in FIG. 4C.
如图4C所示,该图库应用界面4030可以包括有一个或多个相册选项(例如,所有照片相册4031、视频相册、相机相册、截屏目录相册、聊天应用相册、畅连应用相册,等等)。其中,每个相册选项下方都有该相册的名称及相册中照片和/或视频数目。例如,所有照片相册4031中包括有2160张照片,视频相册中包括有6个视频。该图库应用界面4030中还包括有新建相册控件。该新建相册控件可用于触发在图库应用界面4030中建立新的相册。As shown in Figure 4C, the gallery application interface 4030 may include one or more album options (for example, all photo albums 4031, video albums, camera albums, screenshot directory albums, chat application albums, Changlian application albums, etc.) . Among them, below each album option is the name of the album and the number of photos and/or videos in the album. For example, the photo album 4031 contains 2160 photos, and the video album contains 6 videos. The gallery application interface 4030 also includes a new photo album control. The new photo album control can be used to trigger the creation of a new photo album in the gallery application interface 4030.
电子设备100可以接收用户作用于该所有照片相册4031的操作(例如单击),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示如图4D所示的相册界面4040。The electronic device 100 may receive a user's operation (eg, click) on the all-photo album 4031, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display an album interface 4040 as shown in FIG. 4D.
如图4D所示,该相册界面4040的标题可以是“所有照片”。该相册界面4040中包括有一个或多张图片的缩略图(例如,缩略图4041)。As shown in Figure 4D, the title of the album interface 4040 may be "all photos". The album interface 4040 includes thumbnails of one or more pictures (for example, thumbnail 4041).
电子设备100可以接收用户作用于缩略图4041的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图4E所示的图片展示界面4050。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the thumbnail 4041, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a picture display interface 4050 as shown in FIG. 4E.
如图4E所示,该图片展示界面4050的标题可以是“风景”。图片展示界面4050中显示包括有图片4051和菜单4052。其中,该菜单4052中包括有分享按钮4053、收藏按钮、编辑按钮、删除按钮、更多按钮。分享按钮4053可用于触发电子设备100调用系统分享功能,打开系统分享界面。收藏按钮可用于触发收藏该图片4051到图片收藏文件夹。编辑按钮可用于触发对图片的旋转、修剪、增加滤镜、虚化等编辑功能。删除按钮可用于触发删除该图片4051。更多按钮可用于触发打开更多与该图片4051相关的功能。As shown in Figure 4E, the title of the picture display interface 4050 may be "Landscape". The picture display interface 4050 displays a picture 4051 and a menu 4052. Among them, the menu 4052 includes a share button 4053, a collection button, an edit button, a delete button, and a more button. The share button 4053 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and open the system sharing interface. The collection button can be used to trigger collection of the picture 4051 to the picture collection folder. The edit button can be used to trigger editing functions such as rotating, trimming, adding filters, blurring, etc. to the image. The delete button can be used to trigger deletion of the image 4051. The More button can be used to trigger the opening of more features related to that image 4051.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该分享按钮4053的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图4F所示的系统分享界面4060。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the share button 4053, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing interface 4060 as shown in FIG. 4F.
如图4F所示,该系统分享界面4060可以包括区域4061、区域4062和区域4064。其中: As shown in Figure 4F, the system sharing interface 4060 may include an area 4061, an area 4062, and an area 4064. in:
该区域4061可用于显示图库中的一个或多个图片或视频,这一个或多个图片或视频中可以包括用户选择的图片或视频。其中,已选定图片上可以显示有标记,标记可用于表示其对应的图片被选定(也即图片已被用户选择)。该区域4061中显示的图片或视频画面可以是缩略图。区域4061中显示的图片或视频画面对应的原图可以存储于电子设备100上。该区域4062可以用于显示与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200的设备选项4063。可选的,该设备选项4063上可以显示有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人头像,该设备选项4063的周围可以显示有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”),该设备选项4063的周围还可以显示有提示信息4065(例如,文字类提示“通话中”,等等),该提示信息4065用于提示该设备选项4063为与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200对应的设备选项。该区域4062中还可以显示有电子设备100发现的附近设备选项,例如,电子设备100在搜索到附近的设备后可以在区域4062中显示附近设备的设备选项(例如,“Alee的手机”选项,“HUAWEI P50”选项)。该区域4064显示有一个或多个服务选项(例如,邮件图标、浏览器图标、信息图标、WLAN直连图标,等)。针对该区域4064的文字说明可以参考前述图3B所示实施例中区域3023的文字说明,在此不再赘述。This area 4061 can be used to display one or more pictures or videos in the gallery, and the one or more pictures or videos can include pictures or videos selected by the user. A mark may be displayed on the selected picture, and the mark may be used to indicate that the corresponding picture is selected (that is, the picture has been selected by the user). The pictures or video images displayed in this area 4061 may be thumbnails. The original image corresponding to the picture or video picture displayed in area 4061 can be stored on the electronic device 100 . This area 4062 may be used to display device options 4063 of the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking. Optionally, the device option 4063 may display a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, and the device option 4063 may display a contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice"). ), prompt information 4065 (for example, text prompt "on call", etc.) may also be displayed around the device option 4063. The prompt information 4065 is used to prompt that the device option 4063 is an electronic device that is talking to the electronic device 100. Device options corresponding to device 200. The area 4062 may also display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100. For example, after searching for nearby devices, the electronic device 100 may display the device options of the nearby devices in the area 4062 (for example, the "Alee's mobile phone" option, "HUAWEI P50" option). This area 4064 displays one or more service options (eg, mail icon, browser icon, information icon, WLAN direct icon, etc.). For the text description of the area 4064, please refer to the text description of the area 3023 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B, which will not be described again here.
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以同时与多个联系人进行通话,电子设备100可以将与电子设备100正在通话的多个联系人的选项显示在上述系统分享界面中。In one example, the electronic device 100 can talk to multiple contacts at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display options of the multiple contacts with whom the electronic device 100 is talking in the above-mentioned system sharing interface.
可选的,电子设备100可以与多个联系人进行运营商通话。例如,电子设备100可以通过运营商网络与多个联系人同时进行语音会议通话或视频会议通话。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can make operator calls with multiple contacts. For example, the electronic device 100 can conduct voice conference calls or video conference calls with multiple contacts simultaneously through the operator network.
又例如,电子设备100可以在与联系人A通过运营商网络进行运营商通话时,接收到联系人B通过运营商网络的来电。电子设备100可以保留(hold)与联系人A的运营商通话,并通过运营商网络与联系人B进行运营商通话。此时,电子设备100可以确定出与电子设备100正在通话的联系人包括有联系人A和联系人B。For another example, the electronic device 100 may receive an incoming call from contact B through the operator network while having an operator call with contact A through the operator network. The electronic device 100 may hold a carrier call with contact A and conduct a carrier call with contact B through the carrier network. At this time, the electronic device 100 may determine that the contacts being called by the electronic device 100 include contact A and contact B.
可选的,电子设备100可以与多个联系人进行OTT通话。例如,电子设备100可以通过OTT应用与OTT应用中的多个联系人进行语音会议通话或视频会议通话。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can make OTT calls with multiple contacts. For example, the electronic device 100 can make a voice conference call or a video conference call with multiple contacts in the OTT application through the OTT application.
又例如,电子设备100可以先与OTT应用中的联系人A进行OTT通话,电子设备100可以保留(hold)与联系人A的OTT通话,并通过OTT应用与联系人B进行OTT通话。此时,电子设备100可以确定出与电子设备100正在通话的联系人包括有OTT应用中的联系人A和联系人B。For another example, the electronic device 100 may first make an OTT call with contact A in the OTT application, the electronic device 100 may hold the OTT call with contact A, and make an OTT call with contact B through the OTT application. At this time, the electronic device 100 may determine that the contacts being called by the electronic device 100 include contact A and contact B in the OTT application.
可选的,电子设备100可以与多个联系人进行运营商通话和OTT通话。例如,电子设备100可以通过运营商网络与联系人A进行运营商通话时,接收到OTT应用中联系人B的来电。电子设备100可以保留与联系人A的运营商通话,并通过OTT应用与OTT应用中的联系人B进行OTT通话。此时,电子设备100可以确定出与电子设备100正在通话的联系人包括有保留运营商通话的联系人A和通过OTT应用进行OTT通话的联系人B。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can conduct operator calls and OTT calls with multiple contacts. For example, the electronic device 100 may receive an incoming call from contact B in the OTT application while having an operator call with contact A through the operator network. The electronic device 100 can keep the operator call with contact A and make an OTT call with contact B in the OTT application through the OTT application. At this time, the electronic device 100 may determine that the contacts being called by the electronic device 100 include contact A who reserves the call with the operator and contact B who makes the OTT call through the OTT application.
又例如,电子设备100可以通过OTT应用与联系人B进行OTT通话时,通过运营商网络接收到联系人A的来电。电子设备100可以保留与联系人B的OTT通话,并通过运营商网络与联系人A进行运营商通话。此时,电子设备100可以确定出与电子设备100正在通话的联系人包括有通过运营商网络进行运营商通话的联系人A和保留OTT通话的联系人B。For another example, the electronic device 100 may receive an incoming call from contact A through the operator's network while making an OTT call with contact B through an OTT application. The electronic device 100 may keep the OTT call with contact B and conduct a carrier call with contact A through the carrier network. At this time, the electronic device 100 may determine that the contacts being called by the electronic device 100 include contact A who is making the operator call through the operator network and contact B who is holding the OTT call.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该设备选项4063的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以向电子设备200发送数据传输请求,并显示如图4G所示的发送窗口4070。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the device option 4063, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 4070 as shown in FIG. 4G.
如图4G所示,该发送窗口4070可以包括上述图片4051的文件名、上述图片4051的缩略图4071、发送提示4072和取消控件4073。其中,该发送提示4072可用于提示用户当前电子设备100正在请求向与电子设备100通话的电子设备200发送图片。其中,该发送提示4072的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在请求给Alice发送1张图片(2.4MB),等待对方确认接收。”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该取消控件4073可用于触发电子设备100取消向电子设备200发送图片。As shown in Figure 4G, the sending window 4070 may include the file name of the above picture 4051, the thumbnail 4071 of the above picture 4051, a sending prompt 4072 and a cancel control 4073. The sending prompt 4072 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently requesting to send pictures to the electronic device 200 communicating with the electronic device 100 . Among them, the prompt type of the sending prompt 4072 can be a text prompt (for example, "Requesting to send 1 picture (2.4MB) to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt."), picture prompt, animated picture prompt, video prompt, etc. any one or more. The cancel control 4073 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending pictures to the electronic device 200 .
如图4H所示,在电子设备100接收到电子设备200发送的确认信息之后,电子设备100可以显示发送窗口4080。其中,该确认信息用于确认接收电子设备100发送的图片。该发送窗口4080中可以包括有上述图片4051的缩略图4081和发送提示4082。可选的,该发送窗口4080中还可以包括有发送进度条4083和取消控件4084。其中,该发送提示4082可用于提示用户当前电子设备100正在向与电子设备100通话的电子设备200发送图片。其中,该发送提示4082的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在给Alice发送1张图片(2.4MB)”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该发送进度条4083可用于表示电子设备100向电子设备200发送上述图片4051的进度。该取消控件4084可用于触发电子设备100停止向电子设备200发送上述图片4051。 As shown in FIG. 4H, after the electronic device 100 receives the confirmation information sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 4080. The confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the picture sent by the electronic device 100 . The sending window 4080 may include a thumbnail 4081 of the above picture 4051 and a sending prompt 4082. Optionally, the sending window 4080 may also include a sending progress bar 4083 and a cancellation control 4084. The sending prompt 4082 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently sending pictures to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 . The prompt type of the sending prompt 4082 may be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Sending 1 picture (2.4MB) to Alice"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. The sending progress bar 4083 can be used to indicate the progress of the electronic device 100 sending the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 . The cancel control 4084 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 .
可选的,当电子设备100正在向电子设备200发送图片等指定数据时,电子设备100可以接收到用户对上述取消控件4084的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以停止向电子设备200发送指定数据,并向电子设备200发送取消命令。电子设备200在接收到取消命令后,可以删除已经该指定数据中已经接收到的部分内容。Optionally, when the electronic device 100 is sending specified data such as pictures to the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (for example, click) on the above-mentioned cancel control 4084, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may The transmission of designated data to the electronic device 200 is stopped, and a cancellation command is sent to the electronic device 200 . After receiving the cancellation command, the electronic device 200 may delete part of the content that has been received in the specified data.
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以在接收用户对该设备选项4063的输入(例如,单击)后,不需要电子设备200返回确认信息,直接向电子设备200发送上述图片4051。In one example, after receiving the user's input (for example, clicking) on the device option 4063, the electronic device 100 can directly send the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 without the need for the electronic device 200 to return confirmation information.
可选的,如图4I所示,电子设备100可以在将上述图片4051发送给电子设备200之后,显示发送窗口4090。该发送窗口4090可以包括上述图片4051的文件名、上述图片4051的缩略图4091、已发送提示4092和撤回控件4093。该已发送提示4092可用于表示电子设备100当前已经将上述图片4051发送给电子设备200。该撤回控件4093可用于接收并响应于用户的输入,触发电子设备100向电子设备200发送撤回指示。电子设备200在接收到该撤回指示后,可以删除已接收到电子设备100发送的上述图片4051。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 4I , the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 4090 after sending the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 . The sending window 4090 may include the file name of the above picture 4051, the thumbnail 4091 of the above picture 4051, a sent prompt 4092 and a recall control 4093. The sent prompt 4092 may be used to indicate that the electronic device 100 has currently sent the above picture 4051 to the electronic device 200 . The recall control 4093 may be used to receive and respond to user input, triggering the electronic device 100 to send a recall instruction to the electronic device 200 . After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the above-mentioned picture 4051 sent by the electronic device 100.
在一种示例中,上述电子设备200的联系人信息(包括电话号码、名称和头像,等等)可以是用户预先在电子设备100上存储的。In one example, the contact information of the electronic device 200 (including phone number, name, avatar, etc.) may be stored on the electronic device 100 in advance by the user.
在一种示例中,上述电子设备200的联系人信息(包括电话号码、名称和头像,等等),可以是电子设备200发送给电子设备100的。In one example, the contact information (including phone number, name, avatar, etc.) of the electronic device 200 may be sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 .
在一种示例中,上述电子设备200的联系人信息(包括电话号码、名称和头像,等等)可以是运营商网络设备或服务器等中间设备下发给电子设备100的。In one example, the contact information (including phone number, name, avatar, etc.) of the electronic device 200 may be delivered to the electronic device 100 by an intermediate device such as an operator's network device or a server.
在一种示例中,若电子设备100未获取到电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称,在上述图4G所示的发送提示4072、图4H所示的发送提示4082、图4I所述的已发送提示4092中提示的接收方标识可以是电子设备200的电话号码。In one example, if the electronic device 100 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the sending prompt 4072 shown in FIG. 4G, the sending prompt 4082 shown in FIG. 4H, and the sending prompt 4082 shown in FIG. 4I are The recipient identification prompted in the sent prompt 4092 may be the phone number of the electronic device 200 .
在一种示例中,若电子设备100获取到电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”),在上述图4G所示的发送提示4072、图4H所示的发送提示4082、图4I所述的已发送提示4092中提示的接收方标识可以是电子设备200的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”)和/或电子设备200的电话号码(例如,“186XXXXXXXX”)。In one example, if the electronic device 100 obtains the contact name (for example, “Alice”) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the sending prompt 4072 shown in FIG. 4G and the sending prompt 4082 shown in FIG. 4H are The recipient identification prompted in the sent prompt 4092 described in FIG. 4I may be the contact name of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXXX").
图4J-图4N示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200通话时,电子设备200接收电子设备100分享的图片等数据的界面示意图。4J to 4N exemplarily show an interface schematic diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving data such as pictures shared by the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 talks with the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图4J所示,电子设备200与电子设备100正在通话,并显示出通话界面4100。该通话界面4100可以包括电子设备100的电话号码4102(例如,“132XXXXXXXX”)、通话持续时间4103(例如,“00:22”)以及一个或多个通话功能控件,等等。其中,该一个或多个通话功能控件包括但不限于录音控件、等待控件、添加通话控件、视频通话控件、静音控件、联系人控件、拨号盘控件、挂断控件、外放控件,等等。其中,该录音控件可用于触发电子设备200对电子设备200与电子设备100的通话进行录音。该等待控件可用于触发电子设备200暂停与电子设备100的通话。该添加通话控件可用于触发电子设备200新增与其他设备的通话。该视频通话控件可用于触发电子设备200将与电子设备100的语音通话切换成视频通话,其中,在视频通话过程中,电子设备200可以显示视频通话界面,该视频通话界面可以包括有电子设备100的摄像头拍摄到的画面,可选的,该视频通话界面还可以包括有电子设备200的摄像头拍摄到的画面。该静音控件可用于触发电子设备200停止将向电子设备100发送语音数据。For example, as shown in FIG. 4J , the electronic device 200 and the electronic device 100 are talking, and the call interface 4100 is displayed. The call interface 4100 may include the phone number 4102 of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXXX"), the call duration 4103 (for example, "00:22"), and one or more call function controls, etc. The one or more call function controls include, but are not limited to, recording controls, waiting controls, add call controls, video call controls, mute controls, contact controls, dial controls, hang up controls, external call controls, and so on. The recording control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to record the conversation between the electronic device 200 and the electronic device 100 . The waiting control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to suspend the call with the electronic device 100 . The add call control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to add a call with other devices. The video call control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to switch the voice call with the electronic device 100 to a video call. During the video call, the electronic device 200 can display a video call interface, and the video call interface can include the electronic device 100 Optionally, the video call interface may also include images captured by the camera of the electronic device 200 . The mute control can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop sending voice data to the electronic device 100 .
可选的,若电子设备200上存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称,上述通话界面4100上还可以包括电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称4101(例如,“Daniel”)。若电子设备200上还存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人头像,上述通话界面4100上还可以包括电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人头像(例如,“Daniel”)。Optionally, if the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 is stored on the electronic device 200, the above-mentioned call interface 4100 may also include the contact name 4101 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") . If the electronic device 200 also stores a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the call interface 4100 may also include a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel").
如图4K所示,在电子设备200接收到电子设备100发送的数据传输请求后,可以显示接收窗口4110。其中,该数据传输请求可以包括电子设备100待分享给电子设备200的数据的相关信息(例如,包括图片文件的缩略图和/或数据大小和/或名称,等等)。该接收窗口4110可以包括电子设备100想要分享给电子设备200的图片的缩略图4111、接收提示4112、拒绝控件4113和接收控件4114。其中,该接收提示4112可用于提示用户电子设备100请求分享图片给电子设备200。其中,该接收提示4112的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“Daniel想给您分享1张图片(2.4MB),是否接收?”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该拒绝控件4113可用于触发电子设备200向电子设备100发送拒绝信息,该拒绝 信息可用于指示所电子设备100取消向所述电子设备200分享图片。该接收控件4114可用于触发电子设备200向电子设备100发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示电子设备100确认发送图片给电子设备200。As shown in FIG. 4K , after the electronic device 200 receives the data transmission request sent by the electronic device 100 , the receiving window 4110 may be displayed. The data transfer request may include information related to the data to be shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 (for example, including thumbnails and/or data sizes and/or names of picture files, etc.). The receiving window 4110 may include a thumbnail 4111 of a picture that the electronic device 100 wants to share with the electronic device 200 , a receiving prompt 4112 , a reject control 4113 and a receiving control 4114 . The receiving prompt 4112 may be used to prompt the user's electronic device 100 to request sharing the picture to the electronic device 200 . Among them, the prompt type of the receiving prompt 4112 can be any of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share a picture (2.4MB) with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. Kind or variety. The rejection control 4113 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send rejection information to the electronic device 100. The rejection The information may be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel sharing the picture to the electronic device 200 . The receiving control 4114 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100 , and the confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the picture to the electronic device 200 .
电子设备200可以接收用户对该接收控件4114的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备200可以向电子设备100发送确认信息,并在发送该确认信息之后,接收电子设备100发送的图片。The electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 4114, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends picture of.
如图4L所示,在电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的图片过程中,电子设备200可以显示接收窗口4120。该接收窗口4120可以包括电子设备100正在分享给电子设备200的图片的缩略图4121和接收提示4122。可选的,该接收窗口4120中还可以包括有接收进度条4123和取消控件4124。其中,该接收提示4122可用于提示用户当前电子设备200正在接收电子设备100发送的图片。其中,该接收提示4122的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在接收Daniel给您分享的1张图片(2.4MB)”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该接收进度条4123可用于表示电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的图片的进度。该取消控件4124可用于触发电子设备200停止接收电子设备200发送的图片。As shown in FIG. 4L, during the process of the electronic device 200 receiving the picture sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 4120. The receiving window 4120 may include a thumbnail 4121 of the picture being shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 and a receiving prompt 4122. Optionally, the receiving window 4120 may also include a receiving progress bar 4123 and a cancellation control 4124. The receiving prompt 4122 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 200 is currently receiving pictures sent by the electronic device 100 . The prompt type of the receiving prompt 4122 can be any one of text prompts (for example, "receiving 1 picture (2.4MB) shared by Daniel with you"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc., or Various. The reception progress bar 4123 may be used to indicate the progress of the electronic device 200 receiving the picture sent by the electronic device 100 . The cancel control 4124 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop receiving pictures sent by the electronic device 200 .
如图4M所示,在电子设备200接收完电子设备100发送的图片后,电子设备200可以显示接收窗口4130。该接收窗口4130可以包括电子设备100已分享给电子设备200的图片的缩略图4131、接收提示4132、打开控件4133和存储控件4134。其中,该接收提示4132可用于提示用户当前电子设备200已接收完电子设备100发送的图片。其中,该接收提示4132的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“已接收Daniel给您发送的1张图片”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该打开控件4133可用于触发电子设备200显示包括有电子设备100已发送的图片的展示界面。该存储控件4134可用于触发电子设备200将电子设备100已发送的图片保存在电子设备200本地的指定存储路径。As shown in FIG. 4M, after the electronic device 200 receives the picture sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 4130. The receiving window 4130 may include a thumbnail 4131 of a picture that the electronic device 100 has shared with the electronic device 200, a receiving prompt 4132, an opening control 4133, and a storage control 4134. The reception prompt 4132 may be used to prompt the user that the current electronic device 200 has received the picture sent by the electronic device 100 . The prompt type of the receiving prompt 4132 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "I have received a picture sent to you by Daniel"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. The opening control 4133 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to display a display interface including pictures sent by the electronic device 100 . The storage control 4134 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the picture sent by the electronic device 100 in a designated storage path local to the electronic device 200 .
电子设备200可以接收用户对该存储控件4134的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备200可以显示如图4N所示的存储界面4140。Electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to storage control 4134, and in response to the input, electronic device 200 may display storage interface 4140 as shown in FIG. 4N.
如图4N所示,该存储界面4140可以包括一个或多个存储路径的选项、返回上一页控件4141,等等。其中,由于电子设备100分享给电子设备200的图片,因此,该一个或多个存储路径的选项可以包括一个或多个相册选项(例如,“所有照片相册”选项4142、“相机相册”选项、“截屏目录相册”选项、“聊天应用相册”选项、“畅连应用相册”选项、“其他相册”选项,等等)。可选的,该存储界面4140中还可以包括新建控件4143,该新建控件4143可用于触发电子设备200在该存储界面4140新增相册选项。As shown in Figure 4N, the storage interface 4140 may include one or more storage path options, a return to previous page control 4141, and so on. Among them, since the electronic device 100 shares pictures with the electronic device 200, the one or more storage path options may include one or more album options (for example, the "all photo album" option 4142, the "camera album" option, "Screenshot directory album" option, "Chat application album" option, "Changan application album" option, "Other albums" option, etc.). Optionally, the storage interface 4140 may also include a new control 4143, which may be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to add a new photo album option in the storage interface 4140.
电子设备200可以接收用户对该“所有照片相册”选项4142的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备200可以将电子设备100分享给电子设备200的图片存储至所有照片相册对应的存储路径下。在电子设备200将电子设备100分享给电子设备200的图片存储至所有照片相册对应的存储路径下之后,当电子设备200打开图库应用中所有照片相册的相册界面时,该所有照片相册的相册界面可以包括该电子设备100分享给电子设备200的图片的缩略图。The electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the "all photo albums" option 4142, and in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may store the pictures shared by the electronic device 100 to the all photo albums corresponding to under the storage path. After the electronic device 200 stores the pictures shared by the electronic device 100 to the storage paths corresponding to all photo albums, when the electronic device 200 opens the album interface of all photo albums in the gallery application, the album interface of all photo albums The thumbnail of the picture shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 may be included.
在一种示例中,若电子设备200未获取到电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称,在上述图4K所示的接收提示4112、图4L所示的接收提示4122、图4M所述的接收提示4132中提示的发送方标识可以是电子设备100的电话号码。In one example, if the electronic device 200 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the receiving prompt 4112 shown in FIG. 4K, the receiving prompt 4122 shown in FIG. 4L, and the receiving prompt 4122 shown in FIG. 4M are The sender identification prompted in the reception prompt 4132 may be the phone number of the electronic device 100 .
在一种示例中,若电子设备200存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Daniel”),在上述图4K所示的接收提示4112、图4L所示的接收提示4122、图4M所述的接收提示4132中提示的发送方标识可以是电子设备100的联系人名称(例如,“Daniel”)和/或电子设备100的电话号码(例如,“132XXXXXXXX”)。In one example, if the electronic device 200 stores a contact name (for example, “Daniel”) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the above-mentioned reception prompt 4112 shown in FIG. 4K and the reception prompt 4122 shown in FIG. 4L The sender identification prompted in the reception prompt 4132 described in FIG. 4M may be the contact name of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXXX").
在一种示例中,如图4O所示,若电子设备100与电子设备200正在通话,但电子设备100未获取到电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称,上述电子设备100在显示出系统分享界面4060时,该系统分享界面4060中设备选项4063的周围可以直接显示电子设备200的电话号码(例如,186XXXXXXXX)。In one example, as shown in Figure 4O, if the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking, but the electronic device 100 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 displays the system When sharing the interface 4060, the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, 186XXXXXXXX) can be directly displayed around the device option 4063 in the system sharing interface 4060.
在一种示例中,如图4O所示,若电子设备100与电子设备200正在通话,且电子设备100获取到电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称,上述电子设备100在显示出系统分享界面4060时,该系统分享界面4060中设备选项4063的周围可以显示电子设备200的电话号码(例如,“186XXXXXXXX”)和/或联系人名称(例如,“Alice”)。In one example, as shown in FIG. 4O, if the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking, and the electronic device 100 obtains the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 displays the system sharing message. When the interface 4060 is displayed, the phone number (for example, "186XXXXXXXX") and/or the contact name (for example, "Alice") of the electronic device 200 may be displayed around the device option 4063 in the system sharing interface 4060.
其中,电子设备100未获取到电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称包括:电子设备100未从电子设备100本地、和/或电子设备200、和/或运营商网络设备和/或服务器上获取到电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称。The failure of the electronic device 100 to obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 includes: the electronic device 100 has not obtained the contact name from the local electronic device 100, and/or the electronic device 200, and/or the operator's network equipment and/or server. The contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 is obtained.
可选的,该系统分享界面4060中设备选项4063的附近(例如,设备选项4063的左上角位置)还可 以显示通话标记4066,该通话标记4066可用于提示该设备选项4063为与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200对应的设备选项。Optionally, the vicinity of the device option 4063 in the system sharing interface 4060 (for example, the upper left corner of the device option 4063) can also be To display the call mark 4066, the call mark 4066 can be used to prompt that the device option 4063 is a device option corresponding to the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking.
本申请实施例中,电子设备100与电子设备200正在通话过程中,电子设备100不限于向电子设备200分享图片数据,还可以分享其他类型数据,例如,音频、视频、文档(例如word、excel、PPT,PDF等等格式的文档文件)、文章链接、视频播放链接、网页打开连接、应用安装包或应用下载链接、联系人信息、位置信息、文字文本,备忘录等等类型的数据。其中,当电子设备100分享的数据的类型不同时,电子设备200在接收到该数据后,可接收并响应于用户的输入,执行该数据的类型对应的操作。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are in the process of talking. The electronic device 100 is not limited to sharing picture data to the electronic device 200, but can also share other types of data, such as audio, video, documents (such as word, excel). , PPT, PDF and other formats of document files), article links, video playback links, web page opening links, application installation packages or application download links, contact information, location information, text, memos and other types of data. When the types of data shared by the electronic device 100 are different, after receiving the data, the electronic device 200 can receive and respond to the user's input and perform operations corresponding to the types of data.
图5A-图5E示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200通话时,电子设备100向电子设备100分享的应用等数据的界面示意图。5A to 5E exemplarily show interface diagrams of applications and other data shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 communicates with the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图5A所示,电子设备100与电子设备200正在通话,并显示桌面4020。其中,针对该桌面4020的文字说明可以参考前述图4B所示实施例中的文字说明,在此不再赘述。For example, as shown in FIG. 5A , the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking and the desktop 4020 is displayed. For the text description of the desktop 4020, reference may be made to the text description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4B, which will not be described again here.
电子设备100可以接收用户对桌面4020中地图应用图标4022的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示图5B所示的快捷菜单5010。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the map application icon 4022 in the desktop 4020, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the shortcut menu 5010 shown in FIG. 5B.
如图5B所示,该快捷菜单5010中可以包括分享控件5011和卸载控件5012。该分享控件5011可以用于触发电子设备100调用系统分享功能,并显示出系统分享窗口,将该地图应用分享给其他设备或联系人。该卸载控件5012可用于触发电子设备100卸载该地图应用。As shown in Figure 5B, the shortcut menu 5010 may include a sharing control 5011 and an uninstalling control 5012. The sharing control 5011 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing window to share the map application with other devices or contacts. The uninstall control 5012 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to uninstall the map application.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该分享控件5011的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图5C所示的系统分享窗口5020。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the sharing control 5011, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 5020 as shown in FIG. 5C.
如图5C所示,该系统分享窗口5020可以包括地图应用选项5021、区域5022和区域5024。其中,该地图应用选项5021上可以显示有该地图应用的名称(例如,“地图”)、数据大小(例如,“40.82MB”)和文件类型(例如,“base.apk”),等等。该区域5022可以用于显示与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200的设备选项5023。该设备选项5023上可以显示有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人头像,该设备选项5023的周围可以显示有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”)或电话号码,该设备选项5023的周围还可以显示有提示信息5025(例如,文字类提示“通话中”,等等),该提示信息5025用于提示该设备选项5023为与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200对应的设备选项。该区域5022中还可以显示有电子设备100发现的附近设备选项,例如,电子设备100在搜索到附近的设备后可以在区域5022中显示附近设备的设备选项(例如,“Alee的手机”选项,“HUAWEI P50”选项)。针对该区域5024的文字说明可以参考前述图3B所示实施例中区域3023的文字说明,在此不再赘述。As shown in Figure 5C, the system sharing window 5020 may include a map application option 5021, an area 5022, and an area 5024. The map application option 5021 may display the name of the map application (for example, "map"), data size (for example, "40.82MB"), file type (for example, "base.apk"), and so on. This area 5022 may be used to display device options 5023 of the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking. The device option 5023 may display a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 , and the device option 5023 may display a contact name (for example, "Alice") or phone number corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 around the device option 5023 . , the device option 5023 can also be displayed with prompt information 5025 (for example, a text prompt "on call", etc.), the prompt information 5025 is used to prompt that the device option 5023 is an electronic device that is talking to the electronic device 100 200 corresponding device options. The area 5022 may also display options for nearby devices discovered by the electronic device 100. For example, after searching for nearby devices, the electronic device 100 may display device options for nearby devices in the area 5022 (for example, the "Alee's cell phone" option, "HUAWEI P50" option). For the text description of the area 5024, please refer to the text description of the area 3023 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B, which will not be described again here.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该设备选项5023的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以向电子设备200发送数据传输请求,并显示如图5D所示的发送窗口5030。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the device option 5023, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 5030 as shown in FIG. 5D.
如图5D所示,该发送窗口5030中可以包括地图应用图标5031以及地图应用的数据大小(例如,“40.82MB”)和文件类型(例如,“base.apk”)、发送提示5032和取消控件5033等等。其中,该发送提示5032可用于提示用户当前电子设备100正在请求向与电子设备100通话的电子设备200发送地图应用。其中,该发送提示5032的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在请求给Alice发送地图应用(40.82MB),等待对方确认接收”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该取消控件5033可用于触发电子设备100取消向电子设备200发送地图应用的安装包。As shown in Figure 5D, the sending window 5030 may include a map application icon 5031 as well as the data size (for example, "40.82MB") and file type (for example, "base.apk") of the map application, a sending prompt 5032 and a cancel control. 5033 and so on. The sending prompt 5032 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently requesting to send a map application to the electronic device 200 communicating with the electronic device 100 . Among them, the prompt type of the sending prompt 5032 can be any of text prompts (for example, "Requesting to send map application (40.82MB) to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. Kind or variety. The cancellation control 5033 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
如图5E所示,在电子设备100接收到电子设备200发送的确认信息之后,电子设备100可以显示发送窗口5040。其中,该确认信息用于确认接收电子设备100发送的地图应用的安装包。该发送窗口5040中可以包括有地图应用图标5041以及地图应用的数据大小(例如,“40.82MB”)和文件类型(例如,“base.apk”)和发送提示5042等等。其中,该发送提示5042可用于提示用户当前电子设备100正在向与电子设备100通话的电子设备200发送地图应用的安装包。可选的,该发送窗口5040中还可以包括有发送进度条5043和取消控件5044。其中,该发送提示5042的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在给Alice发送地图应用(40.82MB)”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该发送进度条5043可用于表示电子设备100向电子设备200发送地图应用的安装包的进度。该取消控件5044可用于触发电子设备100停止向电子设备200发送地图应用的安装包。As shown in FIG. 5E , after the electronic device 100 receives the confirmation information sent by the electronic device 200 , the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 5040 . The confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 . The sending window 5040 may include a map application icon 5041 as well as the map application's data size (for example, "40.82MB") and file type (for example, "base.apk"), a sending prompt 5042, and so on. The sending prompt 5042 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 communicating with the electronic device 100 . Optionally, the sending window 5040 may also include a sending progress bar 5043 and a cancellation control 5044. The prompt type of the sending prompt 5042 may be any one or more of a text prompt (for example, "Sending a map application (40.82MB) to Alice"), a picture prompt, an animation prompt, a video prompt, and so on. The sending progress bar 5043 may be used to indicate the progress of the electronic device 100 sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 . The cancel control 5044 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以在接收用户对上述图5C所示的设备选项5023的输入(例如,单击)后,不需要电子设备200返回确认信息,直接向电子设备200发送上述地图应用的安装包。In one example, after receiving the user's input (for example, clicking) on the device option 5023 shown in FIG. 5C , the electronic device 100 can directly send the above map to the electronic device 200 without the need for the electronic device 200 to return confirmation information. Application installation package.
可选的,电子设备100在将地图应用的安装包发送给电子设备200之后,可以接收并响应于用户的输 入,向电子设备200发送对该地图应用的安装包的撤回指示。电子设备200在接收到该撤回指示后,可以删除已接收到电子设备100发送的地图应用的安装包。Optionally, after sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input. Enter, and send a withdrawal instruction of the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200. After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the installation package of the map application that has been sent by the electronic device 100 .
在一种示例中,若电子设备100未获取到电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称,在上述图5D所示的发送提示5032、图5E所示的发送提示5042中提示的接收方标识可以是电子设备200的电话号码。In one example, if the electronic device 100 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the recipient identification prompted in the above-mentioned sending prompt 5032 shown in Figure 5D and the sending prompt 5042 shown in Figure 5E It may be the phone number of the electronic device 200.
在一种示例中,若电子设备100存储有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”),在上述图5D所示的发送提示5032、图5E所示的发送提示5042中提示的接收方标识可以是电子设备200的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”)和/或电子设备200的电话号码(例如,“186XXXXXXXX”)。In one example, if the electronic device 100 stores the contact name (for example, “Alice”) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the sending prompt 5032 shown in FIG. 5D and the sending prompt 5042 shown in FIG. 5E are The recipient identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXXX").
图5F-图5I示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备200与电子设备100通话时,电子设备200接收电子设备100分享的应用等数据的界面示意图。5F to 5I exemplarily illustrate the interface diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving application and other data shared by the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 200 talks with the electronic device 100 in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图5F所示,电子设备200与电子设备100正在通话,并显示出通话界面5050。该通话界面5050可以包括电子设备100的电话号码5052(例如,“132XXXXXXXX”)、通话持续时间5053(例如,“00:21”)以及一个或多个通话功能控件,等等。可选的,若电子设备200上存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称,该通话界面5050上还可以包括电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称5051(例如,“Daniel”)。若电子设备200上还存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人头像,该通话界面5050上还可以包括电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人头像(例如,“Daniel”)。其中,针对该一个或多个通话功能控件的文字说明可以参考前述图4J所示实施例中针对通话功能控件的文字说明,在此不再赘述。For example, as shown in FIG. 5F , the electronic device 200 and the electronic device 100 are talking, and the call interface 5050 is displayed. The call interface 5050 may include the phone number 5052 of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXXX"), the call duration 5053 (for example, "00:21"), and one or more call function controls, etc. Optionally, if the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 is stored on the electronic device 200, the call interface 5050 may also include the contact name 5051 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") . If the electronic device 200 also stores a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the call interface 5050 may also include a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel"). For the text description of the one or more call function controls, please refer to the text description of the call function control in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4J , which will not be described again here.
如图5G所示,在电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的数据传输请求后,可以显示接收窗口5060。其中,该数据传输请求可以包括电子设备100待分享给电子设备200的地图应用的相关信息,该地图应用的相关信息可以包括地图应用的图标、地图应用的名称(例如,“地图应用”)、数据大小(例如,40.82MB)、文件类型(例如,base.apk),等等)。该接收窗口5060可以包括电子设备100想要分享给电子设备200的地图应用的相关信息(例如,地图应用图标5061、地图应用的名称、数据大小、文件类型,等等)、接收提示5062、拒绝控件5063和接收控件5064,等等。其中,该接收提示5062可用于提示用户电子设备100请求分享地图应用给电子设备200。其中,该接收提示5062的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“Daniel想给您分享地图应用(40.82MB),是否接收?”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该拒绝控件5063可用于触发电子设备200向电子设备100发送拒绝信息,该拒绝信息可用于指示所电子设备100取消向所述电子设备200分享地图应用。该接收控件5064可用于触发电子设备200向电子设备100发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示电子设备100确认发送地图应用的安装包给电子设备200。As shown in FIG. 5G, after the electronic device 200 receives the data transmission request sent by the electronic device 100, the receiving window 5060 may be displayed. Wherein, the data transmission request may include relevant information of the map application to be shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200. The relevant information of the map application may include the icon of the map application, the name of the map application (for example, "map application"), Data size (e.g., 40.82MB), file type (e.g., base.apk), etc.). The receiving window 5060 may include information related to the map application that the electronic device 100 wants to share with the electronic device 200 (for example, map application icon 5061, name of the map application, data size, file type, etc.), receiving prompt 5062, rejection Control 5063 and receive control 5064, and so on. The receiving prompt 5062 may be used to prompt the user's electronic device 100 to request sharing of the map application to the electronic device 200 . Among them, the prompt type of the receiving prompt 5062 can be any of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share the map application (40.82MB) with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. or more. The rejection control 5063 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send rejection information to the electronic device 100 , and the rejection information can be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel sharing the map application to the electronic device 200 . The receiving control 5064 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100 . The confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the installation package of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
电子设备200可以接收用户对该接收控件5064的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备200可以向电子设备100发送确认信息,并在发送该确认信息之后,接收电子设备100发送的地图应用的安装包。The electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 5064, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends The installation package of the map application.
如图5H所示,在电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的地图应用的安装包过程中,电子设备200可以显示接收窗口5070。该接收窗口5070可以包括地图应用的相关信息(例如,地图应用图标5071、地图应用的名称、数据大小、文件类型,等等)、接收提示5072。可选的,该接收窗口5070中还可以包括有接收进度条5073和取消控件5074。其中,该接收提示5072可用于提示用户当前电子设备200正在接收电子设备100发送的地图应用的安装包。其中,该接收提示5072的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在接收Daniel给您发送的地图应用(40.82MB)”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该接收进度条5073可用于表示电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的地图应用的安装包的进度。该取消控件5074可用于触发电子设备200停止接收电子设备200发送的地图应用的安装包。As shown in FIG. 5H , during the process of the electronic device 200 receiving the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 5070 . The receiving window 5070 may include information related to the map application (for example, map application icon 5071, name of the map application, data size, file type, etc.) and a receiving prompt 5072. Optionally, the receiving window 5070 may also include a receiving progress bar 5073 and a cancellation control 5074. The receiving prompt 5072 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 200 is currently receiving the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 . The prompt type of the receiving prompt 5072 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "receiving the map application (40.82MB) sent to you by Daniel"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. kind. The reception progress bar 5073 may be used to indicate the progress of the electronic device 200 receiving the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 . The cancel control 5074 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop receiving the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 200 .
如图5I所示,在电子设备200接收完电子设备100发送的地图应用的安装包后,电子设备200可以显示接收窗口5080。该接收窗口5080可以包括地图应用的相关信息(例如,地图应用图标5081、地图应用的名称、数据大小、文件类型,等等)、一个或多个功能控件。其中,该一个或多个功能控件包括立即安装控件5082、重新下载控件5083和下次再安装控件5084,等等。该立即安装控件5082可用于触发电子设备200基于电子设备100发送的地图应用的安装包安装该地图应用。该重新下载控件5083可用于触发电子设备200切换显示应用市场应用的界面,从该应用市场服务器上重新下载该地图应用。该下次再安装控件5084可用于触发电子设备200保存该电子设备100发送的地图应用的安装包,等下次用户再手动触发电子设备200基于该地图应用的安装包安装该地图应用。As shown in FIG. 5I , after the electronic device 200 receives the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 5080 . The receiving window 5080 may include information related to the map application (for example, map application icon 5081, name of the map application, data size, file type, etc.), and one or more functional controls. The one or more functional controls include the immediate installation control 5082, the re-download control 5083, the next installation control 5084, and so on. The immediate installation control 5082 may be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to install the map application based on the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100 . The re-download control 5083 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to switch to display the interface of the application market application and re-download the map application from the application market server. The re-install control 5084 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the installation package of the map application sent by the electronic device 100, and the next time the user manually triggers the electronic device 200 to install the map application based on the installation package of the map application.
在一种示例中,若电子设备200未获取到电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称,在上述图5G所示的接收提示5062、图5H所示的接收提示5072中提示的发送方标识可以是电子设备100的电话号码。 In one example, if the electronic device 200 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the sender identification prompted in the above reception prompt 5062 shown in Figure 5G and the reception prompt 5072 shown in Figure 5H It may be the phone number of the electronic device 100 .
在一种示例中,若电子设备200存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Daniel”),在上述图5G所示的接收提示5062、图5H所示的接收提示5072中提示的发送方标识可以是电子设备100的联系人名称(例如,“Daniel”)和/或电子设备100的电话号码(例如,“132XXXXXXXX”)。In one example, if the electronic device 200 stores the contact name (for example, “Daniel”) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the above-mentioned reception prompt 5062 shown in FIG. 5G and the reception prompt 5072 shown in FIG. 5H The sender identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXXX").
图5J-图5P示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200通话时,电子设备100向电子设备200分享的联系人信息等数据的界面示意图。5J to 5P exemplarily illustrate interface diagrams of contact information and other data shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 talks to the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图5J所示,电子设备100与电子设备200正在通话,并显示出联系人应用界面5090。该联系人界面5090中包括有一个或多个联系人的选项(例如,“Alice”选项、“Anna”选项、“Bob”选项5091、“Britney”选项,等等)。For example, as shown in FIG. 5J , the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking, and the contact application interface 5090 is displayed. The contact interface 5090 includes options for one or more contacts (eg, "Alice" options, "Anna" options, "Bob" options 5091, "Britney" options, etc.).
电子设备100可以接收用户对该“Bob”选项5091的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图5K所示的联系人信息界面5100。Electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the "Bob" option 5091, and in response to the input, electronic device 100 may display contact information interface 5100 as shown in FIG. 5K.
如图5K所示,该联系人信息界面5100可以包括联系人“Bob”的名称、头像、电话号码(例如,“180XXXXXXXX”)、语音通话控件5101、视频通话控件5102、短信控件5103、收藏控件5104、编辑控件5105、更多选项控件5106,等等。该语音通话控件5101可用于触发电子设备100向该联系人“Bob”的电子设备拨打语音通话。该视频通话控件5102可用于触发电子设备100向该联系人“Bob”的电子设备拨打视频通话。该短信控件5103可用于触发电子设备100向该联系人“Bob”的电子设备发送短信。该收藏控件5104可用于触发电子设备100将该联系人“Bob”的联系人信息收藏至收藏夹中。该编辑控件5105可用于触发电子设备100对该联系人“Bob”的联系人信息进行修改。该更多选项控件5106可用于触发电子设备100显示出更多的联系人功能。As shown in Figure 5K, the contact information interface 5100 may include the name, avatar, phone number (for example, "180XXXXXXXX") of the contact "Bob", a voice call control 5101, a video call control 5102, a text message control 5103, and a collection control. 5104, edit control 5105, more options control 5106, and so on. The voice call control 5101 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to make a voice call to the electronic device of the contact "Bob". The video call control 5102 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to make a video call to the electronic device of the contact "Bob". The text message control 5103 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send a text message to the electronic device of the contact "Bob". The collection control 5104 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to collect the contact information of the contact "Bob" into favorites. The editing control 5105 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to modify the contact information of the contact "Bob". The more options control 5106 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display more contact functions.
电子设备200可以接收用户对该更多选项控件5106的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图5L所示的菜单窗口5107。Electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more options control 5106, and in response to the input, electronic device 100 may display menu window 5107 as shown in FIG. 5L.
如图5L所示,该菜单窗口5107可以包括分享联系人选项5108、加入黑名单选项、创建快捷方式选项、删除联系人选项,等等。该分享联系人选项5108可用于触发电子设备100调用系统分享功能,并显示出系统分享窗口,以将联系人“Bob”的联系人信息分享给其他联系人或其他设备。As shown in Figure 5L, the menu window 5107 may include a share contact option 5108, a blacklist option, a create shortcut option, a delete contact option, and so on. The share contact option 5108 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing window to share the contact information of the contact "Bob" with other contacts or other devices.
电子设备100接收用户对该分享联系人选项5108的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图5M所述的菜单窗口5110。Electronic device 100 receives user input (eg, click) to the share contact option 5108, and in response to the input, electronic device 100 may display menu window 5110 as described in FIG. 5M.
如图5M所示,该菜单窗口5110可以包括一个或多个分享方式的选项,其中,该一个或多个分享方式的选项包括二维码选项5111、vCard选项5112和文本选项5113,等等。该二维码选项5111可用于触发电子设备100将联系人“Bob”的联系信息以二维码的形式分享给其他联系人或其他设备。该vCard选项5112可用于触发电子设备100将联系人“Bob”的联系信息以vCard形式分享给其他联系人或其他设备。该文本选项5113可用于触发电子设备100将联系人“Bob”的联系信息以文本形式分享给其他联系人或其他设备。As shown in Figure 5M, the menu window 5110 may include one or more sharing mode options, wherein the one or more sharing mode options include a QR code option 5111, a vCard option 5112, a text option 5113, and so on. The QR code option 5111 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Bob" in the form of a QR code to other contacts or other devices. The vCard option 5112 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Bob" in the form of a vCard to other contacts or other devices. This text option 5113 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to share the contact information of the contact "Bob" in text form to other contacts or other devices.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该二维码选项5111的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图5N所示的系统分享窗口5120。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the QR code option 5111, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 5120 as shown in FIG. 5N.
如图5N所示,该系统分享窗口5120可以包括联系信息选项5121、区域5122和区域5124。其中,该联系信息选项5121上可以显示有基于联系人“Bob”的联系信息生成的二维码或二维码的缩略图,以及该二维码的数据大小(例如,21.79KB)、名称(例如,“Bob的联系方式.jpg”)等等。该区域5122可以用于显示与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200的设备选项5123。该设备选项5123上可以显示有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人头像,该设备选项5123的周围可以显示有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”)或电话号码,该设备选项5123的周围还可以显示有提示信息5125(例如,文字类提示“通话中”,等等),该提示信息5125用于提示该设备选项5123为与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200对应的设备选项。该区域5122中还可以显示有电子设备100发现的附近设备选项,例如,电子设备100在搜索到附近的设备后可以在区域5122中显示附近设备的设备选项(例如,“Alee的手机”选项,“HUAWEI P50”选项)。针对该区域5124的文字说明可以参考前述图3B所示实施例中区域3023的文字说明,在此不再赘述。As shown in Figure 5N, the system sharing window 5120 may include a contact information option 5121, an area 5122, and an area 5124. Among them, the contact information option 5121 can display a QR code or a thumbnail of the QR code generated based on the contact information of the contact "Bob", as well as the data size (for example, 21.79KB), name ( For example, "Bob's contact information.jpg") and so on. This area 5122 may be used to display device options 5123 of the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking. The device option 5123 may display a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 , and the device option 5123 may display a contact name (for example, "Alice") or phone number corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 around the device option 5123 . , prompt information 5125 (for example, text prompt "on call", etc.) may also be displayed around the device option 5123. The prompt information 5125 is used to prompt that the device option 5123 is an electronic device that is talking to the electronic device 100. 200 corresponding device options. The area 5122 may also display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100. For example, after searching for nearby devices, the electronic device 100 may display the device options of the nearby devices in the area 5122 (for example, the "Alee's mobile phone" option, "HUAWEI P50" option). For the text description of the area 5124, please refer to the text description of the area 3023 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B, which will not be described again here.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该设备选项5123的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以向电子设备200发送数据传输请求,并显示如图5O所示的发送窗口5130。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the device option 5123, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 5130 as shown in FIG. 5O.
如图5O所示,该发送窗口5130中可以包括基于联系人“Bob”的联系信息生成的二维码或二维码的缩略图5131以及该二维码的数据大小(例如,“21.79KB”)、发送提示5132和取消控件5133等等。其中,该发送提示5132可用于提示用户当前电子设备100正在请求向与电子设备100通话的电子设备200发送 联系人“Bob”的联系信息。其中,该发送提示5132的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在请求给Alice发送Bob的联系方式,等待对方确认接收”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该取消控件5033可用于触发电子设备100取消向电子设备200发送地图应用的联系人“Bob”的联系信息。As shown in Figure 5O, the sending window 5130 may include a QR code or a thumbnail 5131 of the QR code generated based on the contact information of the contact "Bob" and the data size of the QR code (for example, "21.79KB" ), send prompt 5132 and cancel control 5133 and so on. Among them, the sending prompt 5132 can be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently requesting to send a message to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100. Contact information for contact "Bob". Among them, the prompt type of the sending prompt 5132 can be any one of text prompts (for example, "Requesting to send Bob's contact information to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc., or Various. The cancel control 5033 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending the contact information of the contact "Bob" of the map application to the electronic device 200 .
如图5P所示,在电子设备100接收到电子设备200发送的确认信息之后,电子设备100可以显示发送窗口5140。其中,该确认信息用于确认接收电子设备100发送的联系人“Bob”的联系信息。该发送窗口5140中可以包括有基于联系人“Bob”的联系信息生成的二维码或二维码的缩略图5141以及该二维码的数据大小(例如,“21.79KB”)和发送提示5142等等。其中,该发送提示5142可用于提示用户当前电子设备100正在向与电子设备100通话的电子设备200发送联系人“Bob”的联系信息。可选的,该发送窗口5140中还可以包括有发送进度条5143和取消控件5144。其中,该发送提示5142的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在给Alice发送Bob的联系方式”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该发送进度条5143可用于表示电子设备100向电子设备200发送联系人“Bob”的联系信息的进度。该取消控件5144可用于触发电子设备100停止向电子设备200发送联系人“Bob”的联系信息。As shown in FIG. 5P, after the electronic device 100 receives the confirmation information sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 5140. The confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the contact information of the contact “Bob” sent by the electronic device 100 . The sending window 5140 may include a QR code or a thumbnail 5141 of the QR code generated based on the contact information of the contact "Bob", as well as the data size of the QR code (for example, "21.79KB") and a sending prompt 5142 etc. The sending prompt 5142 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently sending the contact information of the contact "Bob" to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 . Optionally, the sending window 5140 may also include a sending progress bar 5143 and a cancellation control 5144. The prompt type of the sending prompt 5142 may be any one or more of a text prompt (for example, "Sending Bob's contact information to Alice"), a picture prompt, an animation prompt, a video prompt, and so on. The sending progress bar 5143 may be used to represent the progress of the electronic device 100 sending the contact information of the contact “Bob” to the electronic device 200 . The cancel control 5144 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending the contact information of the contact "Bob" to the electronic device 200 .
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以在接收用户对上述图5N所示的设备选项5123的输入(例如,单击)后,不需要电子设备200返回确认信息,直接向电子设备200发送联系人“Bob”的联系信息。In one example, after receiving the user's input (for example, clicking) on the device option 5123 shown in FIG. 5N , the electronic device 100 can directly send the contact to the electronic device 200 without the need for the electronic device 200 to return confirmation information. Contact information for "Bob".
可选的,电子设备100在将联系人“Bob”的联系信息发送给电子设备200之后,可以接收并响应于用户的输入,向电子设备200发送对该联系人“Bob”的联系信息的撤回指示。电子设备200在接收到该撤回指示后,可以删除已接收到联系人“Bob”的联系信息。Optionally, after the electronic device 100 sends the contact information of the contact "Bob" to the electronic device 200, it may receive and respond to the user's input and send the withdrawal of the contact information of the contact "Bob" to the electronic device 200. instruct. After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the contact information of the contact "Bob" that has been received.
在一种示例中,若电子设备100未获取到电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称,在上述图5O所示的发送提示5132、图5P所示的发送提示5142中提示的接收方标识可以是电子设备200的电话号码。In one example, if the electronic device 100 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the recipient identification prompted in the sending prompt 5132 shown in FIG. 5O and the sending prompt 5142 shown in FIG. 5P It may be the phone number of the electronic device 200.
在一种示例中,若电子设备100存储有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”),在上述图5O所示的发送提示5132、图5P所示的发送提示5142中提示的接收方标识可以是电子设备200的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”)和/或电子设备200的电话号码(例如,“186XXXXXXXX”)。In one example, if the electronic device 100 stores the contact name (for example, “Alice”) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the sending prompt 5132 shown in FIG. 5O and the sending prompt 5142 shown in FIG. 5P are The recipient identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXXX").
图5Q-图5S示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200通话时,电子设备200接收电子设备100分享的联系人信息等数据的界面示意图。5Q to 5S exemplarily illustrate the interface diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving data such as contact information shared by the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图5Q所示,电子设备200与电子设备100正在通话,并显示出通话界面5150。该通话界面5150可以包括电子设备100的电话号码5152(例如,“132XXXXXXXX”)、通话持续时间5153(例如,“00:21”)以及一个或多个通话功能控件,等等。可选的,若电子设备200上存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称,该通话界面5150上还可以包括电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称5151(例如,“Daniel”)。若电子设备200上还存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人头像,该通话界面5150上还可以包括电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人头像(例如,“Daniel”)。其中,针对该一个或多个通话功能控件的文字说明可以参考前述图4J所示实施例中针对通话功能控件的文字说明,在此不再赘述。For example, as shown in FIG. 5Q , the electronic device 200 and the electronic device 100 are talking, and the call interface 5150 is displayed. The call interface 5150 may include the phone number 5152 of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXXX"), the call duration 5153 (for example, "00:21"), and one or more call function controls, etc. Optionally, if the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 is stored on the electronic device 200, the call interface 5150 may also include the contact name 5151 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") . If the electronic device 200 also stores a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the call interface 5150 may also include a contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel"). For the text description of the one or more call function controls, please refer to the text description of the call function control in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4J , which will not be described again here.
电子设备200在接收到电子设备100发送的数据传输请求后,可以显示接收窗口5160。其中,该数据传输请求中可以包括上述二维码的名称(例如,“Bob的联系方式(二维码)”)、数据大小(例如,“21.79KB”)等等。该接收窗口5160可以包括上述二维码的名称、数据大小、接收提示5162、拒绝控件5163和接收控件5164,等等。其中,该接收提示5162可用于提示用户电子设备100请求分享联系人“Bob”的联系信息给电子设备200。其中,该接收提示5162的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“Daniel想给您分享Bob的联系方式,是否接收?”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该拒绝控件5163可用于触发电子设备200向电子设备100发送拒绝信息,该拒绝信息可用于指示所电子设备100取消向所述电子设备200分享联系人“Bob”的联系信息。该接收控件5164可用于触发电子设备200向电子设备100发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示电子设备100确认发送联系人“Bob”的联系信息给电子设备200。After receiving the data transmission request sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 5160. The data transmission request may include the name of the above-mentioned QR code (for example, "Bob's contact information (QR code)"), the data size (for example, "21.79KB"), and so on. The receiving window 5160 may include the name of the above-mentioned QR code, data size, receiving prompt 5162, reject control 5163, receiving control 5164, and so on. The reception prompt 5162 may be used to prompt the user electronic device 100 to request sharing the contact information of contact “Bob” to the electronic device 200 . The prompt type of the receiving prompt 5162 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share Bob's contact information with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. kind. The rejection control 5163 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send rejection information to the electronic device 100 , and the rejection information can be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel sharing the contact information of the contact "Bob" with the electronic device 200 . The receiving control 5164 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100. The confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the contact information of the contact "Bob" to the electronic device 200.
电子设备200可以接收用户对该接收控件5164的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备200可以向电子设备100发送确认信息,并在发送该确认信息之后,接收电子设备100发送的联系人“Bob”的联系信息。The electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 5164, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends Contact information for "Bob".
如图5R所示,在电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的联系人“Bob”的联系信息过程中,电子设备200可以显示接收窗口5170。该接收窗口5170可以包括接收提示5172。可选的,该接收窗口5170中还可以包括有接收进度条5173和取消控件5174。其中,该接收提示5172可用于提示用户当前电子设备200正在接收电子设备100发送的联系人“Bob”的联系信息。其中,该接收提示5172的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在接收Daniel给您发送的Bob的联系方式”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种 或多种。该接收进度条5173可用于表示电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的联系人“Bob”的联系信息的进度。该取消控件5174可用于触发电子设备200停止接收电子设备200发送的联系人“Bob”的联系信息。As shown in FIG. 5R, during the process of the electronic device 200 receiving the contact information of the contact "Bob" sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 5170. The receive window 5170 may include a receive prompt 5172. Optionally, the receiving window 5170 may also include a receiving progress bar 5173 and a cancellation control 5174. The receiving prompt 5172 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 200 is currently receiving the contact information of the contact "Bob" sent by the electronic device 100 . Among them, the prompt type of the receiving prompt 5172 can be any of text prompts (for example, "receiving Bob's contact information sent to you by Daniel"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. or more. The receiving progress bar 5173 may be used to represent the progress of the electronic device 200 receiving the contact information of the contact “Bob” sent by the electronic device 100 . The cancel control 5174 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop receiving the contact information of the contact "Bob" sent by the electronic device 200 .
如图5S所示,在电子设备200接收完电子设备100发送的联系人“Bob”的联系信息后,电子设备200可以显示接收窗口5180。该接收窗口5180可以包括联系人“Bob”的联系信息对应的二维码、一个或多个功能控件。其中,该一个或多个功能控件包括识别二维码控件5182、保存至图库控件5183,等等。该识别二维码控件5182可用于触发电子设备200识别出该二维码中联系人“Bob”的联系信息。该保存至图库控件5183可用于触发电子设备200将上述二维码保存至图库中。As shown in FIG. 5S, after the electronic device 200 receives the contact information of the contact "Bob" sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 5180. The receiving window 5180 may include a QR code corresponding to the contact information of the contact "Bob" and one or more functional controls. Among them, the one or more functional controls include the recognition QR code control 5182, the save to gallery control 5183, and so on. The recognition QR code control 5182 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to recognize the contact information of the contact "Bob" in the QR code. The save to gallery control 5183 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the above QR code to the gallery.
在一种示例中,若电子设备200未获取到电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称,在上述图5R所示的接收提示5162、图5S所示的接收提示5172中提示的发送方标识可以是电子设备100的电话号码。In one example, if the electronic device 200 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the sender identification prompted in the above reception prompt 5162 shown in Figure 5R and the reception prompt 5172 shown in Figure 5S It may be the phone number of the electronic device 100 .
在一种示例中,若电子设备200存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Daniel”),在上述图5R所示的接收提示5162、图5S所示的接收提示5172中提示的发送方标识可以是电子设备100的联系人名称(例如,“Daniel”)和/或电子设备100的电话号码(例如,“132XXXXXXXX”)。In one example, if the electronic device 200 stores the contact name (for example, "Daniel") corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the above-mentioned reception prompt 5162 shown in Figure 5R and the reception prompt 5172 shown in Figure 5S The sender identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXXX").
图5T-图5W示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200通话时,电子设备100向电子设备200分享的文字文本等数据的界面示意图。5T to 5W exemplarily illustrate interface diagrams of text and other data shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 communicates with the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图5T所示,电子设备100与电子设备200正在通话,并显示出文档编辑界面5190。该文档编辑界面5190可以包括文字编辑区域5191。该文字编辑区域5191中可以显示有文字内容(例如,“去动物园时,带上会员卡”)。For example, as shown in FIG. 5T , the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking, and the document editing interface 5190 is displayed. The document editing interface 5190 may include a text editing area 5191. The text editing area 5191 may display text content (for example, "When you go to the zoo, bring your membership card").
电子设备100可以接收用户对该文字编辑区域5191的文字内容的选择输入(例如,长按操作),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图5U所示的菜单栏5192。The electronic device 100 may receive the user's selection input (for example, a long press operation) of the text content in the text editing area 5191, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a menu bar 5192 as shown in FIG. 5U.
如图5U所示,该菜单栏5192可以包括分享控件5193、剪切控件、复制控件和粘贴控件等等。该分享控件5193可用触发对该用户选择的文字内容分享。As shown in Figure 5U, the menu bar 5192 may include a share control 5193, a cut control, a copy control, a paste control, and so on. The sharing control 5193 can trigger sharing of text content selected by the user.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该分享控件5193的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图5V所示的系统分享窗口5200。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the sharing control 5193, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing window 5200 as shown in FIG. 5V.
如图5V所示,该系统分享窗口5200可以包括文本选项5201、区域5202和区域5204。其中,该文本选项5201上可以显示有该用户选中文字内容的名称、数据大小,等等。该区域5202可以用于显示与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200的设备选项5203。该设备选项5023的周围还可以显示有提示信息5205(例如,文字类提示“通话中”,等等)。针对该区域5202的文字说明可以参考上述图5C所示的实施例中针对该区域5202的文字说明,针对该区域5024的文字说明可以参考前述图3B所示实施例中区域3023的文字说明,在此不再赘述。As shown in Figure 5V, the system sharing window 5200 may include text options 5201, area 5202, and area 5204. Among them, the text option 5201 can display the name, data size, etc. of the text content selected by the user. This area 5202 may be used to display device options 5203 of the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking. Prompt information 5205 may also be displayed around the device option 5023 (for example, a text prompt "on call", etc.). For the text description of the area 5202, please refer to the text description of the area 5202 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5C. For the text description of the area 5024, please refer to the text description of the area 3023 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B. This will not be described again.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该设备选项5203的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以向电子设备200发送数据传输请求,并显示如图5W所示的发送窗口5210。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the device option 5203, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 5210 as shown in FIG. 5W.
如图5W所示,该发送窗口5210中可以用户选中的文本内容的名称5211、发送提示5212和取消控件5213等等。其中,该发送提示5212可用于提示用户当前电子设备100正在请求向与电子设备100通话的电子设备200发送文本。其中,该发送提示5212的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在请求给Alice发送文本,等待对方确认接收”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该取消控件5213可用于触发电子设备100取消向电子设备200发送文本。As shown in Figure 5W, the sending window 5210 can include the name 5211 of the text content selected by the user, the sending prompt 5212, the cancel control 5213, and so on. The sending prompt 5212 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently requesting to send text to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 . The prompt type of the sending prompt 5212 may be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Requesting to send text to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. The cancel control 5213 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending text to the electronic device 200 .
可选的,电子设备100在将文本发送给电子设备200之后,可以接收并响应于用户的输入,向电子设备200发送对该文本的撤回指示。电子设备200在接收到该撤回指示后,可以删除已接收到电子设备100发送的文本。Optionally, after sending the text to the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input and send a withdrawal instruction for the text to the electronic device 200. After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the text sent by the electronic device 100 .
图5X-图5Y示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200通话时,电子设备200接收电子设备100分享的文字文本等数据的界面示意图。5X to 5Y exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving text and other data shared by the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 talks to the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图5X所示,电子设备200与电子设备100正在通话,并显示出通话界面5150,针对该通话界面5150的文字说明可以参考前述图5Q所示实施例,在此不再赘述。Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 5X, the electronic device 200 and the electronic device 100 are talking, and the call interface 5150 is displayed. For the text description of the call interface 5150, please refer to the aforementioned embodiment shown in Figure 5Q, which will not be described again here. .
在电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的数据传输请求后,可以显示接收窗口5220。其中,该数据传输请求可以包括文本的名称,等等。该接收窗口5220可以包括文本图标、接收提示5222、拒绝控件5223和接收控件5224,等等。其中,该接收提示5222可用于提示用户电子设备100请求分享文本给电子设备200。其中,该接收提示5222的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“Daniel想给您分享文本,是否接收?”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该拒绝控件5223可用于触发电子设备200向电子 设备100发送拒绝信息,该拒绝信息可用于指示所电子设备100取消向所述电子设备200分享文本。该接收控件5224可用于触发电子设备200向电子设备100发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示电子设备100确认发送文本给电子设备200。After the electronic device 200 receives the data transmission request sent by the electronic device 100, the receiving window 5220 may be displayed. Among them, the data transfer request may include the name of the text, etc. The receiving window 5220 may include a text icon, a receiving prompt 5222, a reject control 5223, a receiving control 5224, and so on. The receiving prompt 5222 may be used to prompt the user's electronic device 100 to request sharing text to the electronic device 200 . The prompt type of the receiving prompt 5222 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share a text with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. The reject control 5223 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to electronically The device 100 sends a rejection message, which may be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel sharing the text to the electronic device 200 . The receiving control 5224 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100 , and the confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the text to the electronic device 200 .
电子设备200可以接收用户对该接收控件5224的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备200可以向电子设备100发送确认信息,并在发送该确认信息之后,接收电子设备100发送的文本。The electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 5224, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends text.
如图5Y所示,在电子设备200接收完电子设备100发送的文本后,电子设备200可以显示接收窗口5230。该接收窗口5230可以包括文本的部分内容或全部内容5231、一个或多个功能控件。其中,该一个或多个功能控件包括复制到剪贴板控件5232、保存至备忘录控件5233、删除控件5234,等等。该复制到剪贴板控件5232可用于触发电子设备200将该文本中的内容保存至剪贴板。保存至备忘录控件5233可用于触发电子设备200将该文本中的内容保存至备忘录中。该删除控件5234可用于触发电子设备200删除该文本。As shown in FIG. 5Y, after the electronic device 200 has received the text sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 5230. The receiving window 5230 may include part or all of the text content 5231 and one or more functional controls. The one or more functional controls include a copy to clipboard control 5232, a save to memo control 5233, a delete control 5234, and so on. The copy to clipboard control 5232 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the content in the text to the clipboard. The save to memo control 5233 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to save the content in the text to the memo. The delete control 5234 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to delete the text.
在一些应用场景中,电子设备100可以在与其他设备(例如,电子设备200)的通话(语音通话或视频通话,等等通话)过程中,接收并响应于用户的输入,在指定应用的应用界面上触发显示指定应用内自带的分享菜单,并在应用内分享菜单中增加显示当前与电子设备100正在通话的设备对应的分享对象选项(例如,电子设备200对应分享对象选项)。电子设备100可以接收并响应于用户对该分享对象的选项的输入,通过电子设备100与正在通话的设备之间的传输链路,将指定数据传输给正在通话的设备。这样,可以让用户在使用电子设备100与对方正在通话的过程中,在指定应用的分享菜单中显示正在通话的对方,将用户在指定应用内选中的数据内容及时分享给正在通话的对方,提高了用户分享数据的体验。In some application scenarios, the electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input during a call (voice call, video call, etc.) with other devices (eg, the electronic device 200), and perform the specified application in an application. The interface triggers the display of the sharing menu that comes with the specified application, and adds to the in-application sharing menu a sharing object option corresponding to the device currently talking to the electronic device 100 (for example, the sharing object option corresponding to the electronic device 200). The electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input of the option of the sharing object, and transmit specified data to the device being called through a transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the device being called. In this way, when the user is using the electronic device 100 to communicate with the other party, the other party can be displayed in the sharing menu of the designated application, and the data content selected by the user in the designated application can be shared with the other party in a timely manner, thereby improving the efficiency of the conversation. Improve the user experience of sharing data.
图6A-图6D示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200通话时,电子设备100向电子设备200分享链接等数据的界面示意图。6A to 6D exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram of the electronic device 100 sharing data such as links with the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 is talking to the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图6A所示,电子设备100可以与电子设备200正在通话,并显示新闻资讯应用界面6010。该新闻资讯应用界面6010可以包括有新闻文章的标题(例如,“高尔夫小将Alee首秀夺金”)、新闻文章的内容(例如,“昨日,高尔夫小将Alee在高尔夫锦标赛上首秀,以四轮267杆的总成绩夺得金牌。”)、新闻文章的发布者名称(例如,“新闻早报”)及头像、更多控件6013。该新闻资讯应用界面6010的顶部可以显示有状态栏6011,针对该状态栏6011的文字说明可以参考前述实施例针对状态栏的文字说明,在此不再赘述。由于电子设备100可以与电子设备200正在通话,电子设备100可以在该状态栏6011中显示通话图标6012上可以显示通话时间(例如,“00:18”),可选的,该通话图标6012上还可以显示有电子设备200的电话号码(例如,“186XXXXXXXX”)和/或电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”)。该通话图标6012可用于触发电子设备100显示与电子设备200通话的通话界面。For example, as shown in FIG. 6A , the electronic device 100 may be talking to the electronic device 200 and display the news information application interface 6010. The news information application interface 6010 may include the title of the news article (for example, "Golf boy Alee won gold in his debut"), the content of the news article (for example, "Yesterday, golf boy Alee made his debut in the golf tournament, winning four rounds of gold"). The total score of 267 won the gold medal."), the name of the publisher of the news article (for example, "Morning News") and avatar, more controls 6013. A status bar 6011 may be displayed on the top of the news information application interface 6010. For the text description of the status bar 6011, please refer to the text description of the status bar in the previous embodiment, which will not be described again here. Since the electronic device 100 may be talking to the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 may display the call time (for example, "00:18") on the call icon 6012 in the status bar 6011. Optionally, the call icon 6012 The telephone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXXX") and/or the contact name corresponding to the telephone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice") may also be displayed. The call icon 6012 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display a call interface for talking to the electronic device 200 .
电子设备100可以接收用户对该更多控件6013的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图6B所示的分享菜单6020。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more control 6013, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a share menu 6020 as shown in FIG. 6B.
如图6B所示,该分享菜单6020可以包括一个或多个分享服务的选项。其中,该一个或多个分享服务选项可以包括与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200对应的设备选项6021、该新闻资讯应用内的分享选项(例如,私信选项和转发选项,等等)和/或其他应用的分享选项(例如,好友圈选项、聊天应用选项,welink应用选项,等等),以及系统分享选项6022。该分享菜单6020中还可以包括其他功能控件(例如,收藏控件、链接复制控件,等等)。该系统分享选项6022可用于触发电子设备100调用系统分享功能,并显示出系统分享界面,对该新闻文章进行分享,其中,分享新闻文章的系统分享界面的文字说明可以参考上述图5C所示分享地图应用安装包的系统分享界面,在此不再赘述。该设备选项6021的周围可以显示有电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Alice”)和/或电子设备200的电话号码,该设备选项6021的周围还可以显示有提示信息6023(例如,文字类提示“通话中”,等等),该提示信息6023用于提示该设备选项6021为与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200对应的设备选项。可选的,该设备选项6021的附近(例如,设备选项6021的左上角位置)还可以显示通话标记,该通话标记可用于提示该设备选项6021为与电子设备100正在通话的电子设备200对应的设备选项。As shown in FIG. 6B , the sharing menu 6020 may include one or more sharing service options. The one or more sharing service options may include device options 6021 corresponding to the electronic device 200 that the electronic device 100 is talking to, sharing options within the news information application (for example, private message options and forwarding options, etc.) and/ Or other application sharing options (for example, friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc.), and system sharing options 6022. The sharing menu 6020 may also include other functional controls (for example, collection controls, link copy controls, etc.). The system sharing option 6022 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function and display the system sharing interface to share the news article. The text description of the system sharing interface for sharing the news article can refer to the sharing shown in Figure 5C above. The system sharing interface of the map application installation package will not be described in detail here. The contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 (for example, "Alice") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 200 may be displayed around the device option 6021, and a prompt message 6023 may also be displayed around the device option 6021. (For example, a text prompt "on call", etc.), the prompt information 6023 is used to prompt that the device option 6021 is a device option corresponding to the electronic device 200 with which the electronic device 100 is talking. Optionally, a call mark can also be displayed near the device option 6021 (for example, the upper left corner of the device option 6021). The call mark can be used to prompt that the device option 6021 corresponds to the electronic device 200 that the electronic device 100 is talking to. Device options.
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以同时与多个联系人进行通话,电子设备100可以将与电子设备100正在通话的多个联系人的选项显示在上述分享菜单6020中。In one example, the electronic device 100 can talk to multiple contacts at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display options for the multiple contacts with whom the electronic device 100 is talking in the above-mentioned sharing menu 6020 .
电子设备100可以接收用户对该设备选项6021的输入(例如,单击),响应该输入,电子设备100可以向电子设备200发送数据传输请求,并显示如图6C所示的发送窗口6030。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the device option 6021, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a data transfer request to the electronic device 200 and display a sending window 6030 as shown in FIG. 6C.
如图6C所示,该发送窗口6030可以包括上述新闻文章的描述信息6031(例如,“新闻资讯APP:【高 尔夫小将Alee首秀夺金】”)、发送提示6032和取消控件6033。其中,该发送提示6032可用于提示用户当前电子设备100正在请求向与电子设备100通话的电子设备200发送新闻文章的打开链接。其中,该发送提示6032的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在请求给Alice发送新闻资讯,等待对方确认接收。”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该取消控件6033可用于触发电子设备100取消向电子设备200发送新闻文章的打开链接。As shown in Figure 6C, the sending window 6030 may include the description information 6031 of the above-mentioned news article (for example, "News Information APP: [High Young golfer Alee won gold in his first show]"), sending prompt 6032 and cancel control 6033. Among them, the sending prompt 6032 can be used to prompt the user that the current electronic device 100 is requesting to send a news article to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 Open the link. The prompt type of the sending prompt 6032 can be any of text prompts (for example, "Requesting to send news information to Alice, waiting for the other party to confirm receipt."), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. One or more. The cancel control 6033 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 .
如图6D所示,在电子设备100接收到电子设备200发送的确认信息之后,电子设备100可以显示发送窗口6040。其中,该确认信息用于确认接收电子设备100发送的图片。该发送窗口6040中可以包括有上述新闻文章的描述信息6041和发送提示6042。可选的,该发送窗口6040中还可以包括有发送进度条6043和取消控件6044。其中,该发送提示6042可用于提示用户当前电子设备100正在向与电子设备100通话的电子设备200发送新闻文章的打开链接。其中,该发送提示6042的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在给Alice发送新闻资讯”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该发送进度条6043可用于表示电子设备100向电子设备200发送上述新闻文章的打开链接的进度。该取消控件6044可用于触发电子设备100停止向电子设备200发送上述新闻文章的打开链接。As shown in FIG. 6D , after the electronic device 100 receives the confirmation information sent by the electronic device 200 , the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 6040 . The confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the picture sent by the electronic device 100 . The sending window 6040 may include the description information 6041 of the news article and the sending prompt 6042. Optionally, the sending window 6040 may also include a sending progress bar 6043 and a cancellation control 6044. The sending prompt 6042 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 is currently sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 that is talking to the electronic device 100 . The prompt type of the sending prompt 6042 may be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Sending news information to Alice"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, and so on. The sending progress bar 6043 may be used to represent the progress of the electronic device 100 sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 . The cancel control 6044 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to stop sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 .
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以在接收用户对该设备选项6021的输入后,不需要电子设备200返回确认信息,直接向电子设备200发送上述新闻文章的打开链接。In one example, after receiving the user's input on the device option 6021, the electronic device 100 can directly send the opening link of the above news article to the electronic device 200 without the need for the electronic device 200 to return confirmation information.
可选的,电子设备100在将新闻文章的打开链接发送给电子设备200之后,可以接收并响应于用户的输入,向电子设备200发送对该新闻文章的打开链接的撤回指示。电子设备200在接收到该撤回指示后,可以删除已接收到电子设备100发送的新闻文章的打开链接。Optionally, after the electronic device 100 sends the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200, it may receive and respond to the user's input and send a withdrawal instruction of the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200. After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the open link of the news article sent by the electronic device 100 .
图6E-图6G示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备200与电子设备100通话时,电子设备200接收电子设备100分享链接等数据的界面示意图。6E to 6G exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram of the electronic device 200 receiving data such as a shared link from the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 200 communicates with the electronic device 100 in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图6E所示,电子设备200与电子设备100正在通话,并显示出通话界面6050。该通话界面6050可以参考前述图4J所示实施例中针对通话界面4100的文字说明,在此不再赘述。For example, as shown in FIG. 6E , the electronic device 200 and the electronic device 100 are talking, and the call interface 6050 is displayed. For the call interface 6050, reference can be made to the text description of the call interface 4100 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4J, which will not be described again here.
电子设备200在接收到电子设备100发送的数据传输请求后,可以显示接收窗口6060。其中,该数据传输请求中可以包括上述新闻文章的描述信息(例如,“新闻资讯APP:【高尔夫小将Alee首秀夺金】”)。该接收窗口6060可以包括上述新闻文章的描述信息6061、接收提示6062、拒绝控件6063和接收控件6064,等等。其中,该接收提示6062可用于提示用户电子设备100请求新闻文章的打开链接给电子设备200。其中,该接收提示6062的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“Daniel想给您分享新闻资讯,是否接收?”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该拒绝控件6063可用于触发电子设备200向电子设备100发送拒绝信息,该拒绝信息可用于指示所电子设备100取消向所述电子设备200分享新闻文章的打开链接。该接收控件6064可用于触发电子设备200向电子设备100发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示电子设备100确认发送新闻文章的打开链接给电子设备200。After receiving the data transmission request sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 6060. The data transmission request may include the description information of the above-mentioned news article (for example, "News Information APP: [Golfer Alee wins gold medal in debut]"). The receiving window 6060 may include the description information 6061 of the above-mentioned news article, a receiving prompt 6062, a reject control 6063, a receiving control 6064, and so on. The receiving prompt 6062 may be used to prompt the user's electronic device 100 to request the electronic device 200 to open a link to the news article. The prompt type of the receiving prompt 6062 can be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "Daniel wants to share news information with you, do you want to accept it?"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. The rejection control 6063 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send rejection information to the electronic device 100 , and the rejection information can be used to instruct the electronic device 100 to cancel the open link of the news article shared with the electronic device 200 . The receiving control 6064 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to send confirmation information to the electronic device 100 . The confirmation information is used to instruct the electronic device 100 to confirm sending the open link of the news article to the electronic device 200 .
电子设备200可以接收用户对该接收控件6064的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备200可以向电子设备100发送确认信息,并在发送该确认信息之后,接收电子设备100发送的新闻文章的打开链接。The electronic device 200 may receive user input (eg, click) to the receiving control 6064, in response to the input, the electronic device 200 may send confirmation information to the electronic device 100, and after sending the confirmation information, the receiving electronic device 100 sends Open link to a news article.
如图6F所示,在电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的新闻文章的打开链接过程中,电子设备200可以显示接收窗口6070。该接收窗口6070可以包括接收提示6072。可选的,该接收窗口6070中还可以包括有接收进度条6073和取消控件6074。其中,该接收提示6072可用于提示用户当前电子设备200正在接收电子设备100发送的新闻文章的打开链接。其中,该接收提示6072的提示类型可以为文字提示(例如,“正在接收Daniel给您发送的新闻资讯”)、图片提示、动图提示和视频提示等等中任一种或多种。该接收进度条6073可用于表示电子设备200接收电子设备100发送的新闻文章的打开链接的进度。该取消控件6074可用于触发电子设备200停止接收电子设备200发送的新闻文章的打开链接。As shown in FIG. 6F , during the process of the electronic device 200 receiving the opening link of the news article sent by the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 200 may display the receiving window 6070 . The receive window 6070 may include a receive prompt 6072. Optionally, the receiving window 6070 may also include a receiving progress bar 6073 and a cancellation control 6074. The receiving prompt 6072 may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 200 is currently receiving the open link of the news article sent by the electronic device 100 . The prompt type of the receiving prompt 6072 may be any one or more of text prompts (for example, "receiving news information sent to you by Daniel"), picture prompts, animated picture prompts, video prompts, etc. The reception progress bar 6073 may be used to represent the progress of the electronic device 200 receiving the opened link of the news article sent by the electronic device 100 . The cancel control 6074 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to stop receiving open links of news articles sent by the electronic device 200 .
如图6G所示,在电子设备200接收完电子设备100发送的新闻文章的打开链接后,电子设备200可以显示接收窗口6080。该接收窗口6080可以包括新闻文章的描述信息6081、一个或多个功能控件。其中,该一个或多个功能控件包括在新闻资讯应用中打开控件6082、用浏览器打开控件6083、复制到备忘录控件6084,等等。该在新闻资讯应用中打开控件6082可用于触发电子设备200识别出在新闻资讯应用中基于该新闻文章的打开链接,显示包括有该新闻文章的界面。该用浏览器打开控件6083可用于触发电子设备200用浏览器应用基于该新闻文章的打开链接,显示该新闻文章。该复制到备忘录控件6084可用于触发电子设备200将该新闻文章的打开链接复制到备忘录中。 As shown in FIG. 6G , after the electronic device 200 receives the opening link of the news article sent by the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 200 may display a receiving window 6080 . The receiving window 6080 may include description information 6081 of the news article and one or more functional controls. Among them, the one or more functional controls include an open control 6082 in a news information application, an open control 6083 using a browser, a copy to memo control 6084, and so on. The open in news information application control 6082 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to identify an open link based on the news article in the news information application, and display an interface including the news article. The open with browser control 6083 can be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to use a browser application to open a link based on the news article to display the news article. The copy to memo control 6084 may be used to trigger the electronic device 200 to copy the open link of the news article into the memo.
在一种示例中,若电子设备200未获取到电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称,在上述图6E所示的接收提示6062、图6F所示的接收提示6072中提示的发送方标识可以是电子设备100的电话号码。In one example, if the electronic device 200 does not obtain the contact name corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the sender identification prompted in the above reception prompt 6062 shown in Figure 6E and the reception prompt 6072 shown in Figure 6F It may be the phone number of the electronic device 100 .
在一种示例中,若电子设备200存储有电子设备100的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,“Daniel”),在上述图6E所示的接收提示6062、图6F所示的接收提示6072中提示的发送方标识可以是电子设备100的联系人名称(例如,“Daniel”)和/或电子设备100的电话号码(例如,“132XXXXXXXX”)。In one example, if the electronic device 200 stores the contact name (for example, "Daniel") corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 100, the above-mentioned receiving prompt 6062 shown in FIG. 6E and the receiving prompt 6072 shown in FIG. 6F The sender identification prompted in may be the contact name of the electronic device 100 (for example, "Daniel") and/or the phone number of the electronic device 100 (for example, "132XXXXXXXX").
在一些应用场景中,电子设备100可以在与其他设备(例如,电子设备200)的通话(语音通话或视频通话,等等通话)并显示通话界面时,在通话界面上显示数据分享控件。电子设备100可以接收并响应于用户对该数据分享控件的输入,让用户选择电子设备100上的指定数据,通过电子设备100与正在通话的设备之间的传输链路,将指定数据传输给正在通话的设备。这样,可以让用户在使用电子设备100与对方正在通话的过程中,直接在通话界面就可以触发将数据分享给对方,方便用户将电子设备100上的数据分享给通话对方,提高了用户分享数据的体验。In some application scenarios, the electronic device 100 may display a data sharing control on the call interface when making a call (voice call, video call, etc.) with another device (eg, the electronic device 200) and displaying the call interface. The electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input to the data sharing control, allow the user to select specified data on the electronic device 100, and transmit the specified data to the device being called through a transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the device being called. device for calling. In this way, when the user is using the electronic device 100 to have a call with the other party, the user can trigger the sharing of data to the other party directly on the call interface, which facilitates the user to share the data on the electronic device 100 with the other party and improves the user's ability to share data. experience.
图7A-图7G示例性的示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200通话并显示通话界面时向电子设备200分享数据的界面示意图。7A to 7G exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram for sharing data with the electronic device 200 when the electronic device 100 communicates with the electronic device 200 and displays the call interface in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图7A所示,电子设备100可以与电子设备200正在通话并显示通话界面7010。该通话界面7010上可以包括有电子设备200的电话号码7013(例如,“186XXXXXXXX”)、通话持续时间7014(例如,“00:15”)以及一个或多个通话功能控件,等等。该一个或多个通话功能控件包括但不限于录音控件、等待控件、添加通话控件、视频通话控件、静音控件、联系人控件、拨号盘控件、挂断控件、外放控件,等等。其中,针对该一个或多个通话功能控件的文字说明可以参考前述图4A所示实施例,在此不再赘述。电子设备100可以在该通话界面7010上悬浮显示分享菜单7020。其中,该分享菜单7020中可以包括通话模式切换控件7021、位置发送控件7022和文件分享控件7023,等等。该通话模块切换控件7021可用于触发电子设备100切换与电子设备200的通话模式。该位置发送控件7022可用于触发电子设备100将电子设备100的位置信息发送给电子设备200。该文件分享控件7023可用于触发电子设备100将电子设备100上存储的文件数据发送给电子设备200。For example, as shown in FIG. 7A , the electronic device 100 may be talking to the electronic device 200 and display the call interface 7010 . The call interface 7010 may include the phone number 7013 of the electronic device 200 (for example, "186XXXXXXXX"), the call duration 7014 (for example, "00:15"), and one or more call function controls, etc. The one or more call function controls include, but are not limited to, recording controls, waiting controls, add call controls, video call controls, mute controls, contact controls, dial controls, hang up controls, external call controls, and so on. For the text description of the one or more call function controls, reference can be made to the aforementioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , which will not be described again here. The electronic device 100 can display a sharing menu 7020 in a floating manner on the call interface 7010 . The sharing menu 7020 may include a call mode switching control 7021, a location sending control 7022, a file sharing control 7023, and so on. The call module switching control 7021 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to switch the call mode with the electronic device 200 . The location sending control 7022 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send the location information of the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 . The file sharing control 7023 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send the file data stored on the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 .
电子设备100可以接收用户对该文件分享控件7023的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图7B所示的文件选择界面7030。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the file sharing control 7023, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a file selection interface 7030 as shown in FIG. 7B.
如图7B所示,该文件选择界面7030的顶部可以显示有状态栏7011。由于电子设备100与电子设备200正在进行通话且当前已退出通话界面,电子设备100可以在该状态栏7011中显示通话图标7015,该通话图标7015可用于表示当前电子设备100与其他设备正在通话。该文件选择界面7030可以包括一个或多个文件选项(例如,图片文件选项7031、文档选项和发送控件,等等)、发送控件7035和删除控件7034,等等。其中,每个文件选项可以对应显示有选择框,例如,图片文件选项7031上可以显示有图片的缩略图7032,该图片文件选项7032的右边可以有选择框7032。例如,文档文件选项上可以显示有文档的名称(例如,“告家长书”)和文件格式(例如,“.docx”)等等。该删除控件7033可用于触发电子设备100删除已选中的文件。该发送控件可以用于触发电子设备100将已选中的文件发送给电子设备200As shown in Figure 7B, a status bar 7011 may be displayed on the top of the file selection interface 7030. Since the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking and have exited the call interface, the electronic device 100 can display a call icon 7015 in the status bar 7011. The call icon 7015 can be used to indicate that the electronic device 100 and other devices are currently talking. The file selection interface 7030 may include one or more file options (eg, picture file options 7031, document options, and send controls, etc.), a send control 7035, a delete control 7034, and so on. Each file option may be displayed with a selection box corresponding to it. For example, the picture file option 7031 may be displayed with a thumbnail of the picture 7032, and the right side of the picture file option 7032 may be with a selection box 7032. For example, the document file option may display the name of the document (for example, "Letter to Parents") and the file format (for example, ".docx") and so on. The delete control 7033 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to delete the selected file. The sending control can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send the selected file to the electronic device 200
电子设备100可以接收用户针对该选择框7033的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,如图7C所示,电子设备100可以在该选择框7033中显示选中标记,该选中标记可用于提示用户当前已选中该图片文件选项7031对应的图片文件。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) for the selection box 7033, and in response to the input, as shown in FIG. 7C, the electronic device 100 may display a check mark in the selection box 7033, and the check mark may be used to The user is prompted that the image file corresponding to the image file option 7031 is currently selected.
在用户选中图片文件选项7031对应的图片文件后,电子设备100可以接收用户对该发送控件7035的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以向电子设备200发送数据传输请求,并显示如图7D所示的发送窗口7040。After the user selects the picture file corresponding to the picture file option 7031, the electronic device 100 can receive the user's input (for example, click) on the sending control 7035, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 can send a data transmission request to the electronic device 200. , and the sending window 7040 shown in Figure 7D is displayed.
如图7D所示,该发送窗口7040中可以包括上述图片文件的缩略图7041、发送提示7042和取消控件7043。针对该发送窗口7040的文字说明可以参考上述图4G所示实施例中针对发送窗口4070的文字说明,在此不再赘述。As shown in Figure 7D, the sending window 7040 may include a thumbnail 7041 of the above picture file, a sending prompt 7042, and a cancel control 7043. For the text description of the sending window 7040, please refer to the text description of the sending window 4070 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4G, which will not be described again here.
如图7E所示,在电子设备100接收到电子设备200发送的确认信息之后,电子设备100可以显示发送窗口7050。其中,该确认信息用于确认接收电子设备100发送的图片文件。针对该发送窗口7050的文字说明可以参考前述图4H所示实施例中针对发送窗口4080的文字说明,在此不再赘述。As shown in FIG. 7E , after the electronic device 100 receives the confirmation information sent by the electronic device 200 , the electronic device 100 may display the sending window 7050 . The confirmation information is used to confirm receipt of the picture file sent by the electronic device 100 . For the text description of the sending window 7050, please refer to the text description of the sending window 4080 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4H, which will not be described again here.
可选的,如图7F所示,在电子设备100将用户选中的文件发送给电子设备200之后,电子设备100可以显示发送窗口7060。其中,该发送窗口7060中可以包括上述已发送图片文件的缩略图7061、发送提示7062、撤回控件7063和继续发送控件7064。其中,该撤回控件7063可以用于触发电子设备100向电 子设备200发送撤回指示。电子设备200在接收到该撤回指示后,可以删除已接收到电子设备100发送的上述图片文件。该继续发送控件7064可用于触发电子设备100切换至显示上述图7B所示的文件选择界面,让用户继续选择文件发送给电子设备200。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 7F , after the electronic device 100 sends the file selected by the user to the electronic device 200 , the electronic device 100 may display a sending window 7060 . The sending window 7060 may include a thumbnail 7061 of the sent picture file, a sending prompt 7062, a withdrawal control 7063, and a continue sending control 7064. Among them, the withdrawal control 7063 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to The sub-device 200 sends a withdrawal instruction. After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may delete the above picture file sent by the electronic device 100 . The continue sending control 7064 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to switch to displaying the file selection interface shown in FIG. 7B , allowing the user to continue selecting files to send to the electronic device 200 .
在一种示例中,上述图7A所示实施例中的分享菜单7020,可以一直保持悬浮显示在通话界面7010上的固定位置。例如,该分享菜单7020可以一直保持悬浮显示在通话界面7010的顶部。In one example, the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A can remain suspended and displayed at a fixed position on the call interface 7010. For example, the sharing menu 7020 may remain suspended and displayed on the top of the call interface 7010 .
在一种示例中,上述图7A所示实施例中的分享菜单7020,也可以一直保持悬浮显示在所有界面的最上层。例如,电子设备100当前从通话界面7010切换至显示其他应用界面时,该分享菜单7020可以保持悬浮显示在其他应用界面的最上层。In one example, the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A can also remain suspended and displayed at the top of all interfaces. For example, when the electronic device 100 currently switches from the call interface 7010 to display other application interfaces, the sharing menu 7020 can remain suspended and displayed on the top layer of other application interfaces.
在一种示例中,上述图7A所示实施例中的分享菜单7020的显示位置可以根据用户的输入进行调整。In one example, the display position of the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A can be adjusted according to the user's input.
在一种示例中,上述通话模式切换控件7021、位置发送控件7022、文件分享控件7023可以作为通话功能控件,显示在通话界面上。In one example, the above-mentioned call mode switching control 7021, location sending control 7022, and file sharing control 7023 can be used as call function controls and displayed on the call interface.
在一种示例中,上述图7A所示实施例中的分享菜单7020可以在电子设备100与电子设备200之间的数据传输链路建立好之后才显示。或者,In one example, the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A may be displayed after the data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is established. or,
上述图7A所示实施例中分享菜单7020中的文件分享控件7023可以在电子设备100与电子设备200之间的数据传输链路建立好之后才使能,处于使能状态时,该文件分享控件7023才可以响应于用户的输入,触发电子设备100显示上述文件选择界面。该文件分享控件7023在电子设备100与电子设备200之间的数据传输链路建立好之前处于非使能状态,处于非使能状态时,该文件分享控件7023不可触发电子设备100显示上述文件选择界面。其中,文件分享控件7023在非使能状态的显示颜色与在使能状态时的显示颜色不同,例如,在非使能状态的显示颜色可以为灰色,在使能状态时的显示颜色可以为白色或绿色。The file sharing control 7023 in the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A can be enabled after the data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is established. When in the enabled state, the file sharing control 7023 in the sharing menu 7020 can be enabled. 7023 can trigger the electronic device 100 to display the above file selection interface in response to the user's input. The file sharing control 7023 is in a disabled state before the data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is established. When in the disabled state, the file sharing control 7023 cannot trigger the electronic device 100 to display the above file selection. interface. Among them, the display color of the file sharing control 7023 in the non-enabled state is different from the display color in the enabled state. For example, the display color in the non-enabled state can be gray, and the display color in the enabled state can be white. or green.
在一种示例中,上述图7A所示实施例中的分享菜单7020还可以包括电子设备200对应的电话号码和/或电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,Alice)和/或电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人头像,等等。In one example, the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A may also include the phone number corresponding to the electronic device 200 and/or the contact name (for example, Alice) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200 and/or The contact avatar corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, and so on.
示例性的,如图7G所示,电子设备100可以在通话界面7010上悬浮显示分享菜单7070。其中,该分享菜单7070中可以包括电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称(例如,Alice)、电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人头像7071、退出控件7072、通话模式切换控件7073、位置发送控件7074、文件分享控件7075,等等。其中,该通话模式切换控件7073、位置发发送控件7074、文件分享控件7075的文字说明,可以参考前述图7A所示实施例中针对分享菜单7020的文字说明,在此不再赘述。其中,电子设备100可以接收并响应于用户针对该分享菜单7070的输入(例如拖动),调整该分享菜单7070的显示位置。For example, as shown in FIG. 7G , the electronic device 100 can display the sharing menu 7070 in a floating manner on the call interface 7010 . The sharing menu 7070 may include the contact name (for example, Alice) corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the contact avatar 7071 corresponding to the phone number of the electronic device 200, the exit control 7072, the call mode switching control 7073, and the location. Send control 7074, file sharing control 7075, and so on. For text descriptions of the call mode switching control 7073, the location sending control 7074, and the file sharing control 7075, please refer to the text description of the sharing menu 7020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7A, and will not be described again here. The electronic device 100 may receive and respond to the user's input (eg, dragging) on the sharing menu 7070 and adjust the display position of the sharing menu 7070 .
如图7H所示,当电子设备100接收用户对该退出控件7072的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以隐藏该分享菜单7070。其中,在电子设备100隐藏该分享菜单7070后,电子设备100可以显示标记按钮7076。该标记按钮7076可用于提示触发电子设备100重新显示该分享菜单7070。该标记按钮7076可以显示在触控屏的边缘,以节省触控屏的显示空间。可选的,在该分享菜单7070被用户移动至触控屏边缘或移动至触控屏边缘停留一定时间(例如,1秒)时,电子设备100可以隐藏该分享菜单7070,并显示上述标记按钮7076。该标记按钮7076的显示位置也可以基于用户的输入进行调整。As shown in FIG. 7H , when the electronic device 100 receives user input (eg, click) to the exit control 7072, in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may hide the share menu 7070. After the electronic device 100 hides the sharing menu 7070, the electronic device 100 can display the mark button 7076. The mark button 7076 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to re-display the sharing menu 7070 . The mark button 7076 can be displayed on the edge of the touch screen to save the display space of the touch screen. Optionally, when the sharing menu 7070 is moved to the edge of the touch screen by the user or moves to the edge of the touch screen and stays for a certain period of time (for example, 1 second), the electronic device 100 can hide the sharing menu 7070 and display the above-mentioned mark button. 7076. The display position of the mark button 7076 may also be adjusted based on user input.
可选的,如图7I所示,该标记7076的上还可以显示电子设备200的电话号码和/或电子设备200的电话号码对应的联系人名称,等等。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 7I , the mark 7076 may also display the telephone number of the electronic device 200 and/or the contact name corresponding to the telephone number of the electronic device 200, and so on.
在一些应用场景中,电子设备100可以在与联系人(例如,电子设备200对应的联系人“Alice”)的互动(例如,通话,发短信,或者,即时通讯应用内发私信、点赞/评论联系人在好友圈内发送的内容,等等)之后,当用户触发对指定数据的分享时,在指定数据的分享界面(系统分享界面或应用内分享界面)或分享窗口(系统分享窗口或应用内分享窗口)中显示出一个或多个最近联系人的选项,当用户在分享界面或分享窗口中选择将指定数据分享给该一个或多个最近联系人中的指定联系人之后,电子设备100可以将该指定数据传输给该指定联系人的设备。这样,可以让用户将数据分享给最近联系人,提高了用户分享数据的体验。In some application scenarios, the electronic device 100 can interact with a contact (for example, the contact "Alice" corresponding to the electronic device 200) (for example, make a call, send a text message, or send a private message or like/ After commenting on the content sent by the contact in the circle of friends, etc.), when the user triggers the sharing of the specified data, the specified data will be displayed in the sharing interface (system sharing interface or in-app sharing interface) or sharing window (system sharing window or The option of one or more recent contacts is displayed in the in-app sharing window). When the user chooses to share the specified data with the specified contact in the one or more recent contacts in the sharing interface or sharing window, the electronic device 100 can transmit the specified data to the specified contact's device. In this way, users can share data with recent contacts, improving the user experience of sharing data.
图8A-图8B示例性示出了本申请实施例中在系统分享界面分享数据给最近互动联系人的界面示意图。8A-8B exemplarily illustrate an interface diagram for sharing data to recently interacted contacts on the system sharing interface in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图8A所示,电子设备100可以显示图片展示界面8010。该图片展示界面8010中包括有图片8011和菜单8012。其中,该菜单8012中包括有分享按钮8013、收藏按钮、编辑按钮、删除按钮、更多按钮。针对菜单8012的文字说明,可以参考前述图4E所示实施例中的菜单4052,在此不再赘述。 For example, as shown in FIG. 8A , the electronic device 100 can display a picture display interface 8010. The picture display interface 8010 includes a picture 8011 and a menu 8012. Among them, the menu 8012 includes a share button 8013, a collection button, an edit button, a delete button, and a more button. For the text description of menu 8012, reference may be made to menu 4052 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4E, which will not be described again here.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该分享按钮8013的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图8B所示的系统分享界面8020。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) on the share button 8013, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display the system sharing interface 8020 as shown in FIG. 8B.
如图8B所示,该系统分享界面8020可以包括区域8021、区域8022和区域8023。其中:As shown in Figure 8B, the system sharing interface 8020 may include an area 8021, an area 8022, and an area 8023. in:
该区域8021可用于显示图库中的一个或多个图片或视频,这一个或多个图片或视频中可以包括用户选择的图片或视频。其中,已选定图片上可以显示有标记,标记可用于表示其对应的图片被选定(也即图片已被用户选择)。该区域8021中显示的图片或视频画面可以是缩略图。区域8021中显示的图片或视频画面对应的原图可以存储于电子设备100上。该区域8022可以包括有与电子设备100最近互动(例如,最近半个小时互动)的一个或多个最近互动联系人对应的选项(例如,选项8024和选项8027,等等)。其中,最近互动联系人对应的选项上可以显示有该最近联系人的头像,最近互动联系人对应的选项的周围可以显示有该最联系人的名称。该最近互动联系人的周围还可以显示有提示信息(例如,文字类提示“最近联系人”),该提示信息用于提示用户该选项为最近联系人的选项。可选的,该最近联系人对应的选项周围可以显示有应用标记,该应用标记可以用于表示该最近联系人所属的应用。例如,选项8024对应电子设备100上电话应用中的联系人“Alice”,选项8024下方可以显示有联系人名称“Alice”和提示信息8025(例如,“最近联系人”),该选项8024的左上角可以显示有电话应用标记8026。选项8027对应电子设备100上聊天应用中的联系人“Kiki”,选项8027下方可以显示有联系人名称“Kiki”和提示信息8028(例如,“最近联系人”),该选项8027的左上角可以显示有聊天应用标记8029。该区域8022中还可以显示有电子设备100发现的附近设备选项,例如,电子设备100在搜索到附近的设备后可以在区域8022中显示附近设备的设备选项(例如,“HUAWEI P50”选项)。该区域8023显示有一个或多个服务选项(例如,邮件图标、浏览器图标、信息图标、WLAN直连图标,等)。针对该区域4064的文字说明可以参考前述图3B所示实施例中区域3023的文字说明,在此不再赘述。This area 8021 can be used to display one or more pictures or videos in the gallery, and the one or more pictures or videos can include pictures or videos selected by the user. A mark may be displayed on the selected picture, and the mark may be used to indicate that the corresponding picture is selected (that is, the picture has been selected by the user). The pictures or video images displayed in this area 8021 may be thumbnails. The original image corresponding to the picture or video picture displayed in area 8021 can be stored on the electronic device 100 . The area 8022 may include options (eg, options 8024 and 8027, etc.) corresponding to one or more recently interacted contacts with which the electronic device 100 has recently interacted (eg, interacted in the last half hour). Among them, the option corresponding to the recently interacted contact may display the avatar of the recent contact, and the option corresponding to the recently interacted contact may display the name of the most recent contact. Prompt information (for example, a text prompt "Recent Contact") may also be displayed around the recently interacted contact, and the prompt information is used to remind the user that this option is an option for recent contacts. Optionally, an application mark may be displayed around the option corresponding to the recent contact, and the application mark may be used to indicate the application to which the recent contact belongs. For example, option 8024 corresponds to the contact "Alice" in the phone application on the electronic device 100. The contact name "Alice" and prompt information 8025 (for example, "Recent Contacts") may be displayed below the option 8024. The upper left corner of the option 8024 Corner can be displayed with phone application mark 8026. Option 8027 corresponds to the contact "Kiki" in the chat application on the electronic device 100. The contact name "Kiki" and prompt information 8028 (for example, "Recent Contacts") can be displayed below the option 8027. The upper left corner of the option 8027 can Chat application tag 8029 is displayed. The area 8022 may also display nearby device options discovered by the electronic device 100. For example, after the electronic device 100 searches for nearby devices, the device options of the nearby devices may be displayed in the area 8022 (for example, the "HUAWEI P50" option). This area 8023 displays one or more service options (eg, mail icon, browser icon, information icon, WLAN direct icon, etc.). For the text description of the area 4064, please refer to the text description of the area 3023 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B, which will not be described again here.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该选项8024的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以将用户选中的图片发送给最近互动联系人“Alice”对应的电子设备200。The electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (for example, click) on the option 8024, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send the picture selected by the user to the electronic device 200 corresponding to the recent interaction contact "Alice".
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以在发送用户选中的数据给最近互动联系人“Alice”对应的电子设备200之前,向电子设备200发送数据传输请求。当电子设备100接收到电子设备200发送的确认信息之后,电子设备100才将用户选中的数据发送给最近互动联系人“Alice”对应的电子设备200。其中,电子设备100向电子设备200发送过程中,电子设备100上显示的发送窗口可以参考前述图4G-图4I所示实施例,电子设备200上显示的接收窗口,可以参考前述图4K-图4M所示实施例,在此不再赘述。In one example, the electronic device 100 may send a data transmission request to the electronic device 200 before sending the data selected by the user to the electronic device 200 corresponding to the recent interaction contact "Alice". After the electronic device 100 receives the confirmation information sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 sends the data selected by the user to the electronic device 200 corresponding to the recent interactive contact "Alice". During the process of the electronic device 100 sending to the electronic device 200, the sending window displayed on the electronic device 100 can refer to the aforementioned embodiment shown in FIGS. 4G-4I, and the receiving window displayed on the electronic device 200 can refer to the aforementioned Figure 4K-FIG. The embodiment shown in 4M will not be described again here.
在一种示例中,当电子设备100的最近互动联系人即时通讯类应用中的联系人时,电子设备100可以将用户选中的内容通过该即时通讯类应用以及该即时通讯类应用的服务器,发送给该最近互动联系人对应的电子设备200上。其中,该电子设备200上安装有该即时通讯类应用,并且登录有该最近互动联系人的账户。In one example, when the electronic device 100 recently interacts with a contact in an instant messaging application, the electronic device 100 can send the content selected by the user through the instant messaging application and the server of the instant messaging application. on the electronic device 200 corresponding to the recently interacted contact. Wherein, the instant messaging application is installed on the electronic device 200, and the account of the recently interacted contact is logged in.
图8C-图8D示例性示出了本申请实施例中在应用内分享界面分享数据给最近互动联系人的界面示意图。Figures 8C-8D exemplarily illustrate the interface diagram of sharing data to recently interacted contacts in the in-application sharing interface in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,如图8C所示,电子设备100可以显示新闻资讯应用界面8030。该新闻资讯应用界面8030可以包括有新闻文章的标题(例如,“高尔夫小将Alee首秀夺金”)、新闻文章的内容(例如,“昨日,高尔夫小将Alee在高尔夫锦标赛上首秀,以四轮267杆的总成绩夺得金牌。”)、新闻文章的发布者名称(例如,“新闻早报”)及头像、更多控件8031。针对该新闻资讯应用界面8030的文字说明可以参考前述图6A所示实施例中针对新闻资讯应用界面6010的文字说明,在此不再赘述。For example, as shown in FIG. 8C , the electronic device 100 can display a news information application interface 8030. The news information application interface 8030 may include the title of the news article (for example, "Golf boy Alee won gold in his debut"), the content of the news article (for example, "Yesterday, golf boy Alee made his debut in the golf tournament, winning four rounds of gold"). The total score of 267 won the gold medal."), the name of the publisher of the news article (for example, "Morning News") and avatar, more controls 8031. For the text description of the news information application interface 8030, please refer to the text description of the news information application interface 6010 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6A, which will not be described again here.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该更多控件8031的输入(例如单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以显示如图6B所示的分享菜单窗口8040。The electronic device 100 may receive user input (eg, click) to the more control 8031, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may display a share menu window 8040 as shown in FIG. 6B.
如图8D所示,该分享菜单窗口8040可以包括一个或多个分享服务的选项。其中,该一个或多个分享服务选项可以包括与电子设备100最近互动(例如,最近半个小时互动)的一个或多个最近互动联系人对应的选项(例如,选项8024和选项8027,等等)、该新闻资讯应用内的分享选项(例如,私信选项和转发选项,等等)和/或其他应用的分享选项(例如,好友圈选项、聊天应用选项,welink应用选项,等等),和/或系统分享选项8047。该分享菜单8040中还可以包括其他功能控件(例如,收藏控件、链接复制控件,等等)。该系统分享选项8047可用于触发电子设备100调用系统分享功能,并显示出系统分享界面,对该新闻文章进行分享,其中,分享新闻文章的系统分享界面的文字说明可以参考上述图8B所示分享图片的 系统分享界面,在此不再赘述。其中,最近互动联系人对应的选项上可以显示有该最近联系人的头像,最近互动联系人对应的选项的周围可以显示有该最联系人的名称。该最近互动联系人的周围还可以显示有提示信息(例如,文字类提示“最近联系人”),该提示信息用于提示用户该选项为最近联系人的选项。可选的,该最近联系人对应的选项周围可以显示有应用标记,该应用标记可以用于表示该最近联系人所属的应用。例如,选项8041对应电子设备100上电话应用中的联系人“Alice”,选项8041下方可以显示有联系人名称“Alice”和提示信息8042(例如,“最近联系人”),该选项8041的左上角可以显示有电话应用标记8043。选项8044对应电子设备100上聊天应用中的联系人“Kiki”,选项8044下方可以显示有联系人名称“Kiki”和提示信息8045(例如,“最近联系人”),该选项8044的左上角可以显示有聊天应用标记8046。As shown in FIG. 8D , the sharing menu window 8040 may include one or more sharing service options. Wherein, the one or more sharing service options may include options (for example, option 8024 and option 8027, etc.) corresponding to one or more recently interacted contacts with which the electronic device 100 has recently interacted (for example, interacted in the last half hour). ), sharing options within the news information application (e.g., private message options, forwarding options, etc.) and/or sharing options in other applications (e.g., friend circle options, chat application options, welink application options, etc.), and /or system sharing option 8047. The sharing menu 8040 may also include other functional controls (for example, collection controls, link copy controls, etc.). The system sharing option 8047 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to call the system sharing function, and display the system sharing interface to share the news article. The text description of the system sharing interface for sharing the news article can refer to the sharing shown in Figure 8B above. pictorial The system sharing interface will not be described in detail here. Among them, the option corresponding to the recently interacted contact may display the avatar of the recent contact, and the option corresponding to the recently interacted contact may display the name of the most recent contact. Prompt information (for example, a text prompt "Recent Contact") may also be displayed around the recently interacted contact, and the prompt information is used to remind the user that this option is an option for recent contacts. Optionally, an application mark may be displayed around the option corresponding to the recent contact, and the application mark may be used to indicate the application to which the recent contact belongs. For example, option 8041 corresponds to the contact "Alice" in the phone application on the electronic device 100. The contact name "Alice" and prompt information 8042 (for example, "Recent Contacts") may be displayed below the option 8041. The upper left corner of the option 8041 Corner can be displayed with phone application mark 8043. Option 8044 corresponds to the contact "Kiki" in the chat application on the electronic device 100. The contact name "Kiki" and prompt information 8045 (for example, "Recent Contacts") can be displayed below the option 8044. The upper left corner of the option 8044 can Shows chat application tag 8046.
电子设备100可以接收用户对该选项8041的输入(例如,单击),响应于该输入,电子设备100可以将用户选中的新闻文章的打开链接发送给最近互动联系人“Alice”对应的电子设备200。The electronic device 100 may receive the user's input (for example, click) on the option 8041, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send the open link of the news article selected by the user to the electronic device corresponding to the recent interaction contact "Alice" 200.
在本申请实施例中,上述系统分享界面或应用内分享界面中的内容的显示形式不作限定,可以是以界面的形式呈现,也可以是以窗口或菜单的形式呈现。例如,当系统分享界面中的内容以界面形式呈现时可以被称为系统分享界面,当系统分享界面中的内容以窗口或菜单形式呈现时,可以被称为系统分享窗口、系统分享菜单,等等。又例如,当应用内分享界面中的内容以界面形式呈现时可以被称为应用内分享界面,当应用内分享界面中的内容以窗口或菜单的形式呈现时,可以被称为分享菜单窗口、分享菜单、应用内分享窗口,等等。In this embodiment of the present application, the display form of the content in the above-mentioned system sharing interface or in-application sharing interface is not limited, and may be presented in the form of an interface, or may be presented in the form of a window or menu. For example, when the content in the system sharing interface is presented in the form of an interface, it can be called the system sharing interface. When the content in the system sharing interface is presented in the form of a window or menu, it can be called the system sharing window, system sharing menu, etc. wait. For another example, when the content in the in-application sharing interface is presented in the form of an interface, it can be called an in-application sharing interface. When the content in the in-application sharing interface is presented in the form of a window or menu, it can be called a sharing menu window, or Share menu, in-app sharing window, and more.
在本申请实施例中,对用户输入的类型,也不作限定,上述实施例中只是列举了优选的用户输入类型,具体实现中,用户输入类型可以如下任一种或多种操作的组合:单击、双击、长按、滑动、拖动、多指长按、多指滑动、指关节触摸、指关节滑动,等等。In the embodiments of this application, there is no limit to the type of user input. The above embodiment only lists preferred user input types. In specific implementation, the user input type can be any one of the following or a combination of multiple operations: Single Click, double-click, long press, slide, drag, multi-finger press and hold, multi-finger swipe, knuckle touch, knuckle slide, and more.
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种通信系统90。The following introduces a communication system 90 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
图9示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种通信系统90的架构示意图。Figure 9 shows a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system 90 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图9所示,该通信系统90可以包括电子设备100和电子设备200。其中,电子设备100上可以与电子设备200通过主链路进行通话。其中,电子设备100与电子设备200的通话可以包括但不限于运营商通话和/或OTT通话。其中,电子设备100与电子设备200的通话的类型还可以分为语音通话、视频通话、电话会议、彩铃彩振、等等。电子设备100可以通过主链路分享内容数据给电子设备200,也可以通过辅助链路分享内容数据给电子设备200。例如,电子设备100可以通过运营商通话链路与电子设备200通话,电子设备100可以通过运营商通话链路分享内容数据给电子设备200。As shown in FIG. 9 , the communication system 90 may include an electronic device 100 and an electronic device 200 . Among them, the electronic device 100 can communicate with the electronic device 200 through the main link. The call between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may include, but is not limited to, operator calls and/or OTT calls. Among them, the types of calls between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can also be divided into voice calls, video calls, conference calls, ringback tones, and so on. The electronic device 100 can share content data to the electronic device 200 through the primary link, and can also share content data to the electronic device 200 through the auxiliary link. For example, the electronic device 100 can talk to the electronic device 200 through the operator's call link, and the electronic device 100 can share content data to the electronic device 200 through the operator's call link.
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以通过运营商通话链路与电子设备200通话,电子设备100可以通过辅助链路分享内容数据给电子设备200。In one example, the electronic device 100 can talk to the electronic device 200 through the operator call link, and the electronic device 100 can share content data to the electronic device 200 through the auxiliary link.
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以通过运营商通话链路与电子设备200通话,电子设备100可以通过运营商通话链路和辅助链路分享内容数据给电子设备200。其中,分享内容数据中的部分可以走运营商通话链路,另一部分可以走辅助链路。In one example, the electronic device 100 can talk to the electronic device 200 through the operator call link, and the electronic device 100 can share content data to the electronic device 200 through the operator call link and the auxiliary link. Among them, part of the shared content data can use the operator's call link, and the other part can use the auxiliary link.
其中,辅助链路可以是通过近场通信技术建立的数据传输链路,例如,通过Wi-Fi、BT、端到端(device-to-device,D2D)、车对外界(vehicle to everything,V2X),等等通信技术建立的数据传输链路。辅助链路也可以是通过远场通信技术建立的数据传输链路,例如,主卡/副卡的蜂窝通信(例如,2G/3G/4G/5G/6G)技术、卫星通信技术,Wi-Fi等通信技术建立的数据传输链路。辅助链路可以是上述任意一种类型通信技术建立的链路,也可以是多种相同或不同通信技术建立的多条链路。Among them, the auxiliary link can be a data transmission link established through near field communication technology, for example, through Wi-Fi, BT, end-to-end (device-to-device, D2D), vehicle to everything (V2X) ), and other data transmission links established by communication technology. The auxiliary link can also be a data transmission link established through far-field communication technology, such as primary card/secondary card cellular communication (for example, 2G/3G/4G/5G/6G) technology, satellite communication technology, Wi-Fi Data transmission links established by other communication technologies. The auxiliary link can be a link established by any of the above types of communication technologies, or it can be multiple links established by multiple same or different communication technologies.
电子设备100与电子设备200相互分享的数据可以是电子设备本地的(例如,图片、视频、音频、联系人信息、应用APK、PPT/PDF/Word/Excel文档,等等),也可以是第三方应用中的内容(例如,图片、视频、音频、新闻文章、位置信息、链接,等等)。The data shared by the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may be local to the electronic device (for example, pictures, videos, audios, contact information, application APKs, PPT/PDF/Word/Excel documents, etc.), or may be Content in third-party applications (for example, pictures, videos, audios, news articles, location information, links, etc.).
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种数据分享方法。The following introduces a data sharing method provided in the embodiment of this application.
图10示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种数据分享方法。Figure 10 shows a data sharing method provided in the embodiment of this application.
如图10所示,该方法可以包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 10, the method may include the following steps:
S1001、电子设备100接收用户触发分享指定数据的分享输入。S1001. The electronic device 100 receives a user's sharing input that triggers sharing of specified data.
其中,指定数据可以是文件类数据、文本类数据、链接类数据、粘贴板类数据,等等类型的数据。其中:1、文件类数据可以包括图片、视频、音频、DOCX/PPTX/PDF/XLS等格式的文档、应用的APK/安装 包、联系人的二维码、联系人的vCard、图片/富媒体形式的位置信息,等等。2、文本类数据可以包括联系人的文本、文本化的位置信息,等等。3、链接类数据可以包括:本地应用或第三方应用的内容(例如,图片、视频、音频、新闻、文章等)的链接、位置信息的查看链接。4、粘贴板类数据可以包括当前选中的内容、或粘贴板上的内容或对象。指定数据还可以是可以分享给其他设备的其他类型的数据内容,本申请实施例中不作限定。Among them, the specified data can be file-type data, text-type data, link-type data, pasteboard-type data, and other types of data. Among them: 1. File data can include pictures, videos, audios, documents in DOCX/PPTX/PDF/XLS and other formats, and application APKs/installations Packages, contact QR codes, contact vCards, location information in the form of images/rich media, etc. 2. Text data can include contact text, textual location information, etc. 3. Link data may include: links to local application or third-party application content (for example, pictures, videos, audios, news, articles, etc.), and location information viewing links. 4. Pasteboard data can include the currently selected content, or the content or objects on the pasteboard. The specified data may also be other types of data content that can be shared with other devices, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
示例性的,该分享输入可以上述图4A-图4O,或图5A-图5Y,或图8A-图8B,等等所示实施例中,针对分享控件/按钮的输入,在本申请实施例中,对分享输入的操作类型不作限定,例如,可以为单击、长按、滑动、双击,等等。具体内容可以参考前述图4A-图4O,或图5A-图5Y或图8A-图8B,等等所示实施例,在此不再赘述。Exemplarily, the sharing input can be as shown in the embodiments shown in the above-mentioned Figures 4A to 4O, or Figures 5A to 5Y, or Figures 8A to 8B, etc. For the input of the sharing control/button, in the embodiment of the present application , there is no limit to the operation type of sharing input, for example, it can be click, long press, slide, double-click, etc. For specific content, reference may be made to the embodiments shown in the aforementioned FIGS. 4A to 4O, or FIGS. 5A to 5Y, or FIGS. 8A to 8B, etc., which will not be described again here.
S1002、电子设备100判断电子设备100是否在通话中。S1002. The electronic device 100 determines whether the electronic device 100 is in a call.
其中,该通话可以包括但不限于运营商通话和/或OTT通话(例如,聊天语音电话或视频电话)。通话的类型还可以分为语音通话、视频通话、电话会议、彩铃彩振、等等。The call may include but is not limited to operator calls and/or OTT calls (for example, chat voice calls or video calls). The types of calls can also be divided into voice calls, video calls, conference calls, ringback tones, and so on.
S1003、当电子设备100正在通话中,电子设备100获取当前通话联系人的信息。S1003. When the electronic device 100 is on a call, the electronic device 100 obtains the information of the current call contact.
其中,若上述通话是运营商通话,当前通话联系人的信息可以包括以下一项或多项:当前通话联系人的电话号码、联系人名称、联系人头像等等。若上述通话时OTT通话,当前通话联系人的信息可以包括以下一项或多项:联系人账户ID、联系人昵称、联系人头像,等等。Among them, if the above call is an operator call, the information of the current call contact may include one or more of the following: the current call contact's phone number, contact name, contact avatar, etc. If the above call is an OTT call, the information of the current call contact may include one or more of the following: contact account ID, contact nickname, contact avatar, etc.
S1004、电子设备100与当前通话联系人的电子设备200建立数据传输链路。S1004. The electronic device 100 establishes a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
具体的,电子设备100与电子设备200建立数据传输链路的过程,可以参考后续实施例,在此不赘述。Specifically, reference can be made to the subsequent embodiments for the process of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 and will not be described in detail here.
S1005、电子设备100判断是否与当前通话联系人的电子设备200建立完数据传输链路。S1005. The electronic device 100 determines whether the data transmission link has been established with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
S1006、当电子设备100与电子设备200建立好数据传输链路后,电子设备100可以在系统分享界面显示当前通话联系人的选项。S1006. After the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 have established a data transmission link, the electronic device 100 can display the options of the current call contact on the system sharing interface.
在一种示例中,当数据传输链路完全或部分走当前通话的主链路时,电子设备100可以在系统分享界面中立即显示当前通话联系人的选项。In one example, when the data transmission link completely or partially takes the main link of the current call, the electronic device 100 can immediately display options for the current call contact in the system sharing interface.
在一种示例中,当数据传输链路完全走新建立的辅助链路(包括一条或多条链路)时,电子设备100可以在辅助链路中至少一条链路建立好之后,在系统分享界面中显示当前通话联系人的选项。In one example, when the data transmission link completely takes the newly established auxiliary link (including one or more links), the electronic device 100 can share the data in the system after at least one of the auxiliary links is established. The interface displays options for current call contacts.
在一种示例中,电子设备100与当前通话联系人的电子设备200的建立数据传输链路的时机,可以在电子设备100接收到上述分享输入之前,也可以在接收到上述分享输入之后。其中:In one example, the timing of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 of the current call contact may be before the electronic device 100 receives the above sharing input, or after receiving the above sharing input. in:
1、当电子设备100与电子设备200建立数据传输链路的时机在接收到上述分享输入之前时,电子设备100可以先与电子设备200建立好数据传输链路。在响应于上述分享输入,显示系统分享界面之后,电子设备100可以显示系统分享界面,并在该系统分享界面中显示当前通话联系人的选项建立好辅助链路,电子设备100可以在系统分享界面中更新显示当前通话联系人的选项。1. When the time to establish a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is before receiving the above sharing input, the electronic device 100 can first establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 . After displaying the system sharing interface in response to the above sharing input, the electronic device 100 can display the system sharing interface, and display the option of the current call contact in the system sharing interface. After establishing the auxiliary link, the electronic device 100 can display the system sharing interface in the system sharing interface. Updates the option to display current call contacts.
2、当电子设备100与电子设备200建立数据传输链路的时机在接收到上述分享输入之后时,电子设备100可以在响应于上述分享输入,显示系统分享界面,此时,系统分享界面中不包括有当前通话联系人的选项,在电子设备100与电子设备200建立数据传输链路之后,电子设备100可以在系统分享界面中更新显示出当前通话联系人的选项。2. When the timing of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is after receiving the above sharing input, the electronic device 100 can display the system sharing interface in response to the above sharing input. At this time, there is no system sharing interface. Including options for current call contacts. After the electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 establish a data transmission link, the electronic device 100 can update and display the options for current call contacts in the system sharing interface.
3、电子设备100可以先响应于上述分享输入,显示系统分享界面并在系统分享界面中显示当前通话联系人的选项。电子设备100在接收用户对当前通话联系人的选项的选择操作,可以响应于该选择操作与当前通话联系人的电子设备200建立数据传输链路。在建立完数据传输链路之后,电子设备100可以基于该数据传输链路向电子设备200发送指定数据。3. The electronic device 100 may first respond to the above sharing input, display the system sharing interface and display the options of the current call contact in the system sharing interface. After receiving the user's selection operation on the option of the current call contact, the electronic device 100 may establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact in response to the selection operation. After establishing the data transmission link, the electronic device 100 can send designated data to the electronic device 200 based on the data transmission link.
其中,针对系统分享界面,以及当前通话联系人的选项的文字描述,可以参考前述图4A-图4O,或图5A-图5Y或图8A-图8B所示实施例,在此不再赘述。For the text description of the system sharing interface and the options of the current call contact, please refer to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 4A to 4O, or 5A to 5Y or 8A to 8B, which will not be described again here.
S1007、电子设备100接收用户对当前通话联系人的选项的选择操作。S1007. The electronic device 100 receives the user's selection operation on the options of the current call contact.
S1008、电子设备100响应于该选择操作,获取指定数据。S1008. The electronic device 100 obtains specified data in response to the selection operation.
其中,当指定数据为文件类数据时,电子设备100可以通过系统文件操作的应用程序编程接口(application programming interface,API)对文件类数据进行打开、读取操作。例如,可以通过函数“fopen”打开文件类数据,通过函数“fread”读取文件内容。其中,读取的方式可以是文本方式读取,也可以是二进制流方式读取。当指定数据为文本、链接、粘贴板上的数据时,电子设备100也可以用类似的系统接口函 数或者三方APP的接口进行数据的读取。When the designated data is file-type data, the electronic device 100 can open and read the file-type data through an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) of the system file operation. For example, you can open file data through the function "fopen" and read the file content through the function "fread". Among them, the reading method can be text reading or binary stream reading. When the specified data is text, link, or data on the pasteboard, the electronic device 100 can also use a similar system interface function. Data can be read through the interface of digital or third-party APP.
S1009、电子设备100将指定数据通过数据传输链路发送给当前通话联系人的电子设备200。S1009. The electronic device 100 sends the specified data to the electronic device 200 of the current call contact through the data transmission link.
具体有关,电子设备100向电子设备200发送指定数据的过程中,显示的界面变化可以参考前述图4A-图4O,或图5A-图5Y或图8A-图8B,等等所示实施例,在此不再赘述。Specifically, during the process of the electronic device 100 sending specified data to the electronic device 200, the displayed interface changes may refer to the embodiments shown in the aforementioned Figures 4A to 4O, or Figures 5A to 5Y, or Figures 8A to 8B, etc. I won’t go into details here.
S1010、当电子设备100未在通话中,电子设备100可以获取一个或多个最近互动联系人的信息。S1010. When the electronic device 100 is not in a call, the electronic device 100 can obtain information of one or more recently interacted contacts.
其中,最近互动联系人可以是在指定时间范围内(例如,最近1小时内),电子设备100的用户与电子设备100对应的联系人进行互动的联系人。The most recently interacted contacts may be contacts with which the user of the electronic device 100 interacted with the contact corresponding to the electronic device 100 within a specified time range (for example, within the last hour).
在本申请实施例中,电子设备100与电子设备200之间的互动可以包括:运营商通话、收/发短信、在社交应用内的互动,等等。其中,在社交应用内的互动可以包括OTT通话、收/发私信,点赞/被点赞、评论/被评论、关注/被关注、收藏/被收藏,对方的直播、好友圈发文内容等应用内互动社交。其中,该社交应用包括但不限于即时通讯类应用(例如,畅连应用,等等)、视频直播类应用(例如,华为视频应用,等等)、音乐播放类应用(例如,华为音乐应用,等等),等等具有多用户社交属性的应用。In the embodiment of the present application, the interaction between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may include: operator calls, receiving/sending text messages, interactions within social applications, and so on. Among them, interactions within social applications can include OTT calls, receiving/sending private messages, liking/being liked, commenting/being commented on, following/being followed, favorites/being favorites, the other party’s live broadcast, content posted in friend circles, etc. Interactive social interaction. Among them, the social applications include but are not limited to instant messaging applications (for example, Changlian application, etc.), live video applications (for example, Huawei Video application, etc.), music playback applications (for example, Huawei Music application, etc.), and other applications with multi-user social attributes.
在一种示例中,最近互动联系人也可以是指定时间范围内,电子设备100的用户与上述一个或多个指定应用中进行互动过的联系人。In one example, the most recently interacted contacts may also be contacts with whom the user of the electronic device 100 has interacted with one or more of the above specified applications within a specified time range.
在一种示例中,电子设备100也可以按照互动时间由近到远排序,确定出互动时间最近的指定数量(例如,3个)的最近互动联系人。In one example, the electronic device 100 can also sort the contacts from recent to far in terms of interaction time, and determine a specified number (for example, 3) of recent interaction contacts with the most recent interaction time.
最近互动联系人的信息可以包括以下一项或多项:最近互动联系人的电话号码、最近互动联系人的应用ID、最近互动联系人的账户ID、最近互动联系人的昵称、最近互动联系人的头像,等等。Information about recently interacted contacts may include one or more of the following: phone number of recently interacted contacts, application ID of recently interacted contacts, account ID of recently interacted contacts, nickname of recently interacted contacts, recently interacted contacts avatar, etc.
S1011、电子设备100在系统分享界面显示一个或多个最近互动联系人的选项。S1011. The electronic device 100 displays options for one or more recently interacted contacts on the system sharing interface.
其中,针对在系统分享界面中显示一个或多个最近互动联系人的选项可以参考上述图8B所示实施例中系统分享界面8020,在此不再赘述。For the option of displaying one or more recently interacted contacts in the system sharing interface, please refer to the system sharing interface 8020 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8B , which will not be described again here.
当电子设备100接收用户选择一个或多个最近互动联系人中指定最近互动联系人的选项后,电子设备100可以将指定数据在数据传输链路上发送给该指定最近互动联系人对应的电子设备200。When the electronic device 100 receives the user's selection of the option of specifying a recently interacted contact among one or more recently interacted contacts, the electronic device 100 may send the specified data on the data transmission link to the electronic device corresponding to the specified recently interacted contact. 200.
具体有关,电子设备100向电子设备200发送指定数据的过程中,显示的界面变化可以参考前述图4A-图4O,或图5A-图5Y或图8A-图8B所示实施例,在此不再赘述。Specifically, when the electronic device 100 sends specified data to the electronic device 200, the displayed interface changes may refer to the embodiments shown in the aforementioned FIGS. 4A to 4O, or FIGS. 5A to 5Y or 8A to 8B, which will not be mentioned here. Again.
可选的,当电子设备100判断当前通话联系人的电子设备200未建立完数据传输链路时,电子设备100可以执行上述步骤S1010、步骤S1011。Optionally, when the electronic device 100 determines that the electronic device 200 of the current call contact has not completed establishing the data transmission link, the electronic device 100 may perform the above steps S1010 and S1011.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以在系统分享界面中同时显示当前通话联系人的选项和最近互动联系人的选项。当用户在系统分享界面选择当前通话联系人的选项后,电子设备100可以将指定数据分享给当前通话联系人的设备,当用户在系统分享界面选择最近互动联系人的选项后,电子设备100可以将指定数据分享给最近互动联系人的设备。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also simultaneously display options for current call contacts and recently interacted contacts in the system sharing interface. When the user selects the option of the current call contact on the system sharing interface, the electronic device 100 can share the specified data with the device of the current call contact. When the user selects the option of the recently interacted contact on the system sharing interface, the electronic device 100 can Share specified data to devices of recently interacted contacts.
下面介绍本申请另一实施例中提供的一种数据分享方法。The following introduces a data sharing method provided in another embodiment of the present application.
图11示出了本申请另一实施例中提供的一种数据分享方法。Figure 11 shows a data sharing method provided in another embodiment of the present application.
如图11所示,该方法可以包括:As shown in Figure 11, the method may include:
S1101、电子设备100接收用户触发分享指定应用中指定数据的输入。S1101. The electronic device 100 receives a user's input to trigger sharing of specified data in a specified application.
其中,指定数据可以是文件类数据、文本类数据、链接类数据、粘贴板类数据,等等类型的数据。其中:1、文件类数据可以包括图片、视频、音频、DOCX/PPTX/PDF/XLS等格式的文档、应用的APK/安装包、联系人的二维码、联系人的vCard、图片/富媒体形式的位置信息,等等。2、文本类数据可以包括联系人的文本、文本化的位置信息,等等。3、链接类数据可以包括:本地应用或第三方应用的内容(例如,图片、视频、音频、新闻、文章等)的链接、位置信息的查看链接。4、粘贴板类数据可以包括当前选中的内容、或粘贴板上的内容或对象。指定数据还可以是可以分享给其他设备的其他类型的数据内容,本申请实施例中不作限定。Among them, the specified data can be file-type data, text-type data, link-type data, pasteboard-type data, and other types of data. Among them: 1. File data can include pictures, videos, audios, documents in DOCX/PPTX/PDF/XLS and other formats, application APK/installation packages, contact QR codes, contact vCards, pictures/rich media location information, etc. 2. Text data can include contact text, textual location information, etc. 3. Link data may include: links to local application or third-party application content (for example, pictures, videos, audios, news, articles, etc.), and location information viewing links. 4. Pasteboard data can include the currently selected content, or the content or objects on the pasteboard. The specified data may also be other types of data content that can be shared with other devices, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
示例性的,触发分享指定应用中指定数据的输入可以上述图6A-图6G,或图8C-图8D等等所示实施例中,针对分享控件/按钮的输入,在本申请实施例中,对分享输入的操作类型不作限定,例如,可以为单击、长按、滑动、双击,等等。具体内容可以参考上述图6A-图6G,或图8C-图8D等等所示实施例,在 此不再赘述。Exemplarily, the input that triggers the sharing of specified data in the specified application can be the input of the sharing control/button in the embodiments shown in Figures 6A to 6G, or Figure 8C to 8D, etc. In the embodiment of the present application, There is no limit to the operation type of sharing input, for example, it can be click, long press, slide, double click, etc. For specific content, please refer to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 6A to 6G, or 8C to 8D, etc., in This will not be described again.
S1102、电子设备100判断是否进入系统分享。S1102. The electronic device 100 determines whether to enter system sharing.
S1103、当电子设备100不进入系统分享,电子设备100判断是否在通话中。S1103. When the electronic device 100 does not enter the system sharing, the electronic device 100 determines whether it is in a call.
其中,该通话可以包括但不限于运营商通话和/或OTT通话(例如,聊天应用的语音电话或视频电话)。通话的类型还可以分为语音通话、视频通话、电话会议、彩铃彩振、等等。Wherein, the call may include but is not limited to operator calls and/or OTT calls (for example, voice calls or video calls of chat applications). The types of calls can also be divided into voice calls, video calls, conference calls, ringback tones, and so on.
S1104、当电子设备100在通话中时,电子设备100可以获取当前通话联系人的信息。S1104. When the electronic device 100 is in a call, the electronic device 100 can obtain the information of the current call contact.
其中,若上述通话是运营商通话,当前通话联系人的信息可以包括以下一项或多项:当前通话联系人的电话号码、联系人名称、联系人头像等等。若上述通话时OTT通话,当前通话联系人的信息可以包括以下一项或多项:联系人账户ID、联系人昵称、联系人头像,等等。Among them, if the above call is an operator call, the information of the current call contact may include one or more of the following: the current call contact's phone number, contact name, contact avatar, etc. If the above call is an OTT call, the information of the current call contact may include one or more of the following: contact account ID, contact nickname, contact avatar, etc.
S1105、电子设备100可以与当前通话联系人的电子设备200建立数据传输链路。S1105. The electronic device 100 can establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
具体的,电子设备100与电子设备200建立数据传输链路的过程,可以参考后续实施例,在此不赘述。Specifically, reference can be made to the subsequent embodiments for the process of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 and will not be described in detail here.
S1106、电子设备100可以判断是否与当前通话联系人的电子设备200建立完数据传输链路。S1106. The electronic device 100 may determine whether the data transmission link has been established with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
S1107、当电子设备100与电子设备200建立完数据传输链路,电子设备100可以在应用内分享界面显示当前通话联系人的选项。S1107. After the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 have established a data transmission link, the electronic device 100 can display options for the current call contact on the in-application sharing interface.
在一种示例中,当数据传输链路完全或部分走当前通话的主链路时,电子设备100可以在应用内分享界面中立即显示当前通话联系人的选项。In one example, when the data transmission link completely or partially takes the main link of the current call, the electronic device 100 can immediately display options for the current call contact in the in-application sharing interface.
在一种示例中,当数据传输链路完全走新建立的辅助链路(包括一条或多条链路)时,电子设备100可以在辅助链路中至少一条链路建立好之后,在应用内分享界面中显示当前通话联系人的选项。In one example, when the data transmission link completely takes the newly established auxiliary link (including one or more links), the electronic device 100 can, after at least one of the auxiliary links is established, within the application. Option to display current call contacts in the sharing interface.
在一种示例中,电子设备100与当前通话联系人的电子设备200的建立数据传输链路的时机,可以在电子设备100接收到上述触发分享指定应用中指定数据的输入之前,也可以在接收到上述触发分享指定应用中指定数据的输入之后。其中:In one example, the timing of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 of the current call contact may be before the electronic device 100 receives the above input that triggers the sharing of specified data in the specified application, or may be after receiving to the above trigger to share the input of specified data in the specified application. in:
1、当电子设备100与电子设备200建立数据传输链路的时机在接收到上述触发分享指定应用中指定数据的输入之前时,电子设备100可以先与电子设备200建立好数据传输链路。在响应于上述触发分享指定应用中指定数据的输入,显示应用内分享界面之后,电子设备100可以显示应用内分享界面,并在该应用内分享界面中显示当前通话联系人的选项建立好辅助链路,电子设备100可以在系统分享界面中更新显示当前通话联系人的选项。1. When the time to establish a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is before receiving the input of the specified data in the specified application that triggers sharing, the electronic device 100 can first establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 . After displaying the in-application sharing interface in response to the input of specified data in the triggering sharing specified application, the electronic device 100 may display the in-application sharing interface, and display the option of the current call contact in the in-application sharing interface to establish the auxiliary link. way, the electronic device 100 can update the option of displaying the current call contact in the system sharing interface.
2、当电子设备100与电子设备200建立数据传输链路的时机在接收到上述触发分享指定应用中指定数据的输入之后时,电子设备100可以在响应于上述触发分享指定应用中指定数据的输入,显示应用内分享界面,此时,应用内分享界面中不包括有当前通话联系人的选项,在电子设备100与电子设备200建立数据传输链路之后,电子设备100可以在应用内分享界面中更新显示出当前通话联系人的选项。2. When the timing of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is after receiving the input of specified data in the specified application that triggers sharing, the electronic device 100 may respond to the input of specified data in the specified application that triggers sharing. , display the in-application sharing interface. At this time, the in-application sharing interface does not include the option of the current call contact. After the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 establish a data transmission link, the electronic device 100 can Updated options showing current call contacts.
3、电子设备100可以先响应于上述触发分享指定应用中指定数据的输入,显示应用内分享界面并在应用内分享界面中显示当前通话联系人的选项。电子设备100在接收用户对当前通话联系人的选项的选择操作,可以响应于该选择操作与当前通话联系人的电子设备200建立数据传输链路。在建立完数据传输链路之后,电子设备100可以基于该数据传输链路向电子设备200发送指定数据。3. The electronic device 100 may first respond to the input of specified data in the specified application that triggers sharing, display the in-application sharing interface and display the option of the current call contact in the in-application sharing interface. After receiving the user's selection operation on the option of the current call contact, the electronic device 100 may establish a data transmission link with the electronic device 200 of the current call contact in response to the selection operation. After establishing the data transmission link, the electronic device 100 can send designated data to the electronic device 200 based on the data transmission link.
其中,针对应用内分享界面,以及当前通话联系人的选项的文字描述,可以参考前述图6A-图6G,或图8C-图8D,等等实施例中的分享菜单或分享菜单窗口,在此不再赘述。For text descriptions of the in-application sharing interface and the options of the current call contact, please refer to the aforementioned FIGS. 6A to 6G, or FIGS. 8C to 8D, and other embodiments of the sharing menu or sharing menu window. Here No longer.
S1108、电子设备100可以接收用户对当前通话联系人的选项的选择操作。S1108. The electronic device 100 may receive the user's selection operation on the options of the current call contact.
S1109、响应于该选择操作,电子设备100可以获取指定数据。S1109. In response to the selection operation, the electronic device 100 can obtain specified data.
其中,当指定数据为文件类数据时,电子设备100可以通过系统文件操作的应用程序编程接口(application programming interface,API)对文件类数据进行打开、读取操作。例如,可以通过函数“fopen”打开文件类数据,通过函数“fread”读取文件内容。其中,读取的方式可以是文本方式读取,也可以是二进制流方式读取。当指定数据为文本、链接、粘贴板上的数据时,电子设备100也可以用类似的系统接口函数或者三方APP的接口进行数据的读取。When the designated data is file-type data, the electronic device 100 can open and read the file-type data through an application programming interface (API) for system file operations. For example, you can open file data through the function "fopen" and read the file content through the function "fread". Among them, the reading method can be text reading or binary stream reading. When the designated data is text, links, or data on a pasteboard, the electronic device 100 can also use similar system interface functions or third-party APP interfaces to read the data.
S1110、电子设备100可以将指定数据发送给当前通话联系人的电子设备200。S1110. The electronic device 100 can send the specified data to the electronic device 200 of the current call contact.
具体有关,电子设备100向电子设备200发送指定数据的过程中,显示的界面变化可以参考前述图6A-图6G,或图8C-图8D,等等实施例,在此不再赘述。Specifically, when the electronic device 100 sends specified data to the electronic device 200, the displayed interface changes may refer to the aforementioned embodiments of FIGS. 6A-6G, or 8C-8D, etc., which will not be described again here.
S1111、当电子设备100不在通话中时,电子设备100可以获取最近互动联系人的信息。S1111. When the electronic device 100 is not in a call, the electronic device 100 can obtain the information of the recently interacted contacts.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备100与电子设备200之间的互动可以包括:运营商通话、收/发短信、在 社交应用内的互动,等等。其中,在社交应用内的互动可以包括OTT通话、收/发私信,点赞/被点赞、评论/被评论、关注/被关注、收藏/被收藏,对方的直播、好友圈发文内容等应用内互动社交。其中,该社交应用包括但不限于即时通讯类应用(例如,畅连应用,等等)、视频直播类应用(例如,华为视频应用,等等)、音乐播放类应用(例如,华为音乐应用,等等),等等具有多用户社交属性的应用。In the embodiment of the present application, the interaction between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 may include: calling with the operator, receiving/sending text messages, Interactions within social apps, and more. Among them, interactions within social applications can include OTT calls, receiving/sending private messages, liking/being liked, commenting/being commented on, following/being followed, favorites/being favorites, the other party’s live broadcast, content posted in friend circles, etc. Interactive social interaction. Among them, the social applications include but are not limited to instant messaging applications (for example, Changlian application, etc.), live video applications (for example, Huawei Video application, etc.), music playback applications (for example, Huawei Music application, etc.), and other applications with multi-user social attributes.
在一种示例中,最近互动联系人也可以是指定时间范围内,电子设备100的用户与上述一个或多个指定应用中进行互动过的联系人。In one example, the most recently interacted contacts may also be contacts with whom the user of the electronic device 100 has interacted with one or more of the above specified applications within a specified time range.
在一种示例中,电子设备100也可以按照互动时间由近到远排序,确定出互动时间最近的指定数量(例如,3个)的最近互动联系人。In one example, the electronic device 100 can also sort the contacts from recent to far in terms of interaction time, and determine a specified number (for example, 3) of recent interaction contacts with the most recent interaction time.
最近互动联系人的信息可以包括以下一项或多项:最近互动联系人的电话号码、最近互动联系人的应用ID、最近互动联系人的账户ID、最近互动联系人的昵称、最近互动联系人的头像,等等。Information about recently interacted contacts may include one or more of the following: phone number of recently interacted contacts, application ID of recently interacted contacts, account ID of recently interacted contacts, nickname of recently interacted contacts, recently interacted contacts avatar, etc.
S1112、电子设备100可以在应用内分享界面显示最近互动联系人。S1112. The electronic device 100 can display recently interacted contacts on the in-application sharing interface.
其中,针对在应用内分享界面中显示一个或多个最近互动联系人的选项可以参考上述图8D所示实施例中的分享菜单窗口8040,在此不再赘述。For the option of displaying one or more recently interacted contacts in the in-application sharing interface, reference may be made to the sharing menu window 8040 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8D , which will not be described again here.
当电子设备100接收用户选择一个或多个最近互动联系人中指定最近互动联系人的选项后,电子设备100可以将指定数据在数据传输链路上发送给该指定最近互动联系人对应的电子设备200。When the electronic device 100 receives the user's selection of the option of specifying a recently interacted contact among one or more recently interacted contacts, the electronic device 100 may send the specified data on the data transmission link to the electronic device corresponding to the specified recently interacted contact. 200.
具体有关,电子设备100向电子设备200发送指定数据的过程中,显示的界面变化可以参考前述图6A-图6G,或图8C-图8D,等等实施例,在此不再赘述。Specifically, when the electronic device 100 sends specified data to the electronic device 200, the displayed interface changes may refer to the aforementioned embodiments of FIGS. 6A-6G, or 8C-8D, etc., which will not be described again here.
可选的,当电子设备100判断当前通话联系人的电子设备200未建立完数据传输链路时,电子设备100可以执行上述步骤S1111、步骤S1112。Optionally, when the electronic device 100 determines that the electronic device 200 of the current call contact has not completed establishing the data transmission link, the electronic device 100 may perform the above steps S1111 and S1112.
S1113、当电子设备100判断进入系统分享,电子设备100可以执行系统分享流程。S1113. When the electronic device 100 determines that it has entered system sharing, the electronic device 100 can execute the system sharing process.
其中,系统分享流程可以参考上述图10所示实施例中的步骤S1001至步骤S1011,在此不再赘述。For the system sharing process, reference may be made to steps S1001 to S1011 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 , which will not be described again here.
下面介绍本申请实施例中电子设备100获取最近互动联系人的信息的过程。The following describes the process by which the electronic device 100 obtains information about recently interacted contacts in the embodiment of the present application.
图12A-图12C示例性示出了本申请实施例中对最近互动联系人的信息的获取过程。Figures 12A-12C exemplarily illustrate the process of obtaining information about recently interacted contacts in this embodiment of the present application.
电子设备100可以包括系统分享模块、互动应用。其中,系统分享模块可用于提供电子设备100分享数据的功能。互动应用包括可以包括电子设备100上系统自带的应用(例如,拨号应用、短信应用(也可以称为信息应用),等等),也可以是非系统自带的社交应用,其中,该社交应用包括但不限于即时通讯类应用(例如,畅连应用,等等)、视频直播类应用(例如,华为视频应用,等等)、音乐播放类应用(例如,华为音乐应用,等等),等等具有多用户互动的应用。The electronic device 100 may include a system sharing module and interactive applications. Among them, the system sharing module can be used to provide the electronic device 100 with the function of sharing data. Interactive applications may include applications that are provided by the system on the electronic device 100 (for example, dialing applications, text messaging applications (which may also be called messaging applications), etc.), or may be social applications that are not provided by the system, where the social application Including but not limited to instant messaging applications (for example, Changlian application, etc.), live video applications (for example, Huawei Video application, etc.), music playback applications (for example, Huawei Music application, etc.), etc. and other applications with multi-user interaction.
其中:in:
1、如图12A所示,互动应用可以提供调用接口给系统分享模块调用,系统分享模块可以调用获取函数获取互动应用中指定数量的最近互动联系人的信息。其中,该互动应用可以返回指定数量的最近互动联系人的信息。其中,该最近互动联系人信息可以包括以下一项或多项:互动应用ID(appid)、用户ID(userid)、电话号码(phonenumber)、头像(portrait)、昵称(nickname)、互动时间(time),等等。1. As shown in Figure 12A, the interactive application can provide a calling interface for the system sharing module to call. The system sharing module can call the acquisition function to obtain the information of a specified number of recent interactive contacts in the interactive application. Among them, the interactive application can return the information of a specified number of recent interactive contacts. The recently interacted contact information may include one or more of the following: interactive application ID (appid), user ID (userid), phone number (phonenumber), avatar (portrait), nickname (nickname), interaction time (time) ),etc.
例如,系统分享模块可以通过调用获取函数“get_last_interaction(appid,count)”,获取互动应用中指定数量的最近互动联系人的信息,其中,该调用函数“get_last_interaction(appid,count)”中携带互动应用的ID(“appid”)和最近互动联系人的数量(“count”)。For example, the system sharing module can obtain the information of a specified number of recently interacted contacts in an interactive application by calling the acquisition function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)", where the interactive application is carried in the calling function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)" ID ("appid") and the number of recently interacted contacts ("count").
互动应用在接收到系统分享模块通过获取函数“get_last_interaction(appid,count)”发送的调用请求之后,可以向系统分享模块返回指定数量的最近互动联系人的信息。After receiving the call request sent by the system sharing module through the acquisition function "get_last_interaction(appid,count)", the interactive application can return the specified number of recent interactive contact information to the system sharing module.
系统分享模块可以将最近互动联系人作为待分享对象,并将最近互动联系人的选项显示在系统分享界面中。The system sharing module can use recently interacted contacts as objects to be shared, and display options for recently interacted contacts in the system sharing interface.
在一种示例中,当电子设备100有多个互动应用时,电子设备100可以同时或依次调用获取函数获取每个互动应用中一个或多个最近互动联系人的信息,然后再从多个互动应用中一个或多个最近互动联系人的信息中,筛选出时间最近的指定数量的最近互动联系人的作为待分享对象,并将最近互动联系人的选项显示在系统分享界面中。In one example, when the electronic device 100 has multiple interactive applications, the electronic device 100 can call the acquisition function simultaneously or sequentially to obtain the information of one or more recently interacted contacts in each interactive application, and then obtain information from the multiple interactive applications. From the information of one or more recently interacted contacts in the application, a specified number of recently interacted contacts with the most recent time are filtered out as objects to be shared, and the option of the recently interacted contacts is displayed in the system sharing interface.
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以周期性(例如,每3分钟)调用获取函数获取互动应用中最近互动联系人的信息。In one example, the electronic device 100 may periodically (for example, every 3 minutes) call the acquisition function to obtain information about recent interactive contacts in the interactive application.
2、如图12B所示,系统分享模块可以提供注册接口供互动应用注册一个或多个互动联系人的信息。 互动应用可以通过供给(kit)方式调用注册函数主动向系统分享模块注册一个或多个互动联系人的信息。2. As shown in Figure 12B, the system sharing module can provide a registration interface for interactive applications to register the information of one or more interactive contacts. The interactive application can actively register the information of one or more interactive contacts with the system sharing module by calling the registration function in the kit mode.
例如,互动应用可以通过调用注册函数“register interaction(appid,userid,portrait,nickname,status)”向系统分享模块注册该互动应用内的互动联系人的信息。其中,该最近互动联系人信息可以包括以下一项或多项:互动应用ID(appid)、用户ID(userid)、头像(portrait)、昵称(nickname)、状态(status),等等。其中,互动应用可以在互动开始和互动结束时都通过调用注册函数注册互动联系人的信息到系统分享模块上。该状态可以包括互动开始(start)或互动结束(end)。系统分享模块可以从一个和多个互动应用注册的互动联系人,筛选出一个或多个最近互动联系人作为待分享对象,显示在系统分享界面中。For example, an interactive application can register the information of interactive contacts within the interactive application with the system sharing module by calling the registration function "register interaction(appid, userid, portrait, nickname, status)". The recently interacted contact information may include one or more of the following: interactive application ID (appid), user ID (userid), avatar (portrait), nickname (nickname), status (status), and so on. Among them, the interactive application can register the interactive contact information to the system sharing module by calling the registration function at the beginning and end of the interaction. The status can include interaction start (start) or interaction end (end). The system sharing module can filter out one or more recently interacted contacts from the interactive contacts registered in one or multiple interactive applications as objects to be shared, and display them in the system sharing interface.
在一种示例中,互动应用可以只在互动结束时通过调用注册函数注册互动联系人的信息到系统分享模块上,此时,该最近互动联系人信息可以包括以下一项或多项:互动应用ID(appid)、用户ID(userid)、头像(portrait)、昵称(nickname),等等。系统分享模块可以从一个和多个互动应用注册的互动联系人中,筛选出一个或多个最近互动联系人作为待分享对象,显示在系统分享界面中。In one example, the interactive application can only register the interactive contact information to the system sharing module by calling the registration function at the end of the interaction. At this time, the recent interactive contact information can include one or more of the following: Interactive application ID (appid), user ID (userid), avatar (portrait), nickname (nickname), etc. The system sharing module can filter out one or more recently interacted contacts from the interactive contacts registered by one or multiple interactive applications as objects to be shared, and display them in the system sharing interface.
3、如图12C所示,在系统分享模块通过上述图12A或图12B所示的方式获取到一个或多个最近互动联系人的信息之后,系统分享模块可以提供调用接口给分享应用调用,分享应用可以调用获取函数从系统分享模块获取指定数量的最近互动联系人的信息。其中,该系统分享模块可以返回指定数量的最近互动联系人的信息给分享应用。其中,该分享应用可以是上述实施例中具有应用内分享功能的应用。例如,新闻资讯类应用、地图应用,等等。3. As shown in Figure 12C, after the system sharing module obtains the information of one or more recently interacted contacts through the method shown in Figure 12A or Figure 12B, the system sharing module can provide a calling interface for the sharing application to call, share The application can call the acquisition function to obtain the information of the specified number of recently interacted contacts from the system sharing module. Among them, the system sharing module can return the information of a specified number of recently interacted contacts to the sharing application. The sharing application may be an application with an in-application sharing function in the above embodiment. For example, news information applications, map applications, etc.
例如,分享应用可以通过调用获取函数“get_last_interaction(appid,count)”,从系统分享模块获取指定数量的最近互动联系人的信息,其中,该调用函数“get_last_interaction(appid,count)”中携带互动应用的ID(“appid”)和最近互动联系人的数量(“count”)。For example, a sharing application can obtain the information of a specified number of recently interacted contacts from the system sharing module by calling the acquisition function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)", where the interactive application is carried in the calling function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)" ID ("appid") and the number of recently interacted contacts ("count").
系统分享模块可以在接收到分享应用通过获取函数“get_last_interaction(appid,count)”的调用请求之后,可以向分享应用返回指定数量的最近互动联系人的信息。分享应用可以从指定数量的最近互动联系人中,筛选出一个或多个最近互动联系人作为待分享对象,显示在应用内分享界面(或者称为应用内分享窗口)中。The system sharing module can return the information of a specified number of recently interacted contacts to the sharing application after receiving a request to call the function "get_last_interaction(appid,count)" from the sharing application. The sharing application can filter out one or more recently interacted contacts from a specified number of recently interacted contacts as objects to be shared, and display them in the in-app sharing interface (or in-app sharing window).
在一种示例中,分享应用模块可以将该调用函数“get_last_interaction(appid,count)”中携带互动应用的ID(“appid”)设置为全选值(例如,“0”),系统分享模块可以在接收到该“appid”的值为全选值(例如,“0”)时,将所有类型应用中指定数量的最近互动联系人的信息给分享应用。分享应用可以从所有类型应用中指定数量的最近互动联系人中,筛选出一个或多个最近互动联系人作为待分享对象,显示在应用内分享界面(或者称为应用内分享窗口)中。In one example, the sharing application module can set the ID ("appid") of the interactive application carried in the calling function "get_last_interaction(appid, count)" to the all-select value (for example, "0"), and the system sharing module can When receiving that the value of the "appid" is a select-all value (for example, "0"), the information of the specified number of recently interacted contacts in all types of applications is given to the sharing application. The sharing application can filter out one or more recently interacted contacts from a specified number of recently interacted contacts in all types of applications as objects to be shared, and display them in the in-app sharing interface (or in-app sharing window).
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种通信系统架构。The following introduces a communication system architecture provided in the embodiment of this application.
图13A示例性的示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种通信系统1300的架构图。FIG. 13A exemplarily shows an architectural diagram of a communication system 1300 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图13A所示,该通信系统1300可以包括电子设备100、电子设备200和云服务器300。As shown in FIG. 13A , the communication system 1300 may include an electronic device 100 , an electronic device 200 and a cloud server 300 .
其中:in:
1、电子设备100可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP)1310、高保真(high-fidelity,HiFi)模块1320、调制解调器(modem)1330。1. The electronic device 100 may include an application processor (application processor, AP) 1310, a high-fidelity (high-fidelity, HiFi) module 1320, and a modem (modem) 1330.
应用处理器1310中可以包括一个或多个功能模块,该一个或多个功能模块可以包括融合通话(fusion call,FusionCall)模块1311、网络地址转换服务(network address translation service,NatService)模块1312。其中,该FusionCall模块1311可用于与云服务器300中账号服务器1371进行用户级认证,获取接入令牌(access token,AT)。该FusionCall模块1311还可用于请求业务云服务器1380对AT进行认证、生成点对点令牌(point to point,P2P Token)、NAT穿越的会话标识(session identifier,sessionID)的交换,推送(push)服务对接,等等。该NatService模块1312可用于与网络地址转换(network address translation,NAT)穿越云服务器1390进行NAT穿越信令的交互,完成电子设备100到电子设备200之间点对点(point to point,P2P)辅助链路之间的NAT穿越以及电子设备100与电子设备200之间的中继链路建立。The application processor 1310 may include one or more functional modules, and the one or more functional modules may include a fusion call (FusionCall) module 1311 and a network address translation service (Network address translation service, NatService) module 1312. Among them, the FusionCall module 1311 can be used to perform user-level authentication with the account server 1371 in the cloud server 300 to obtain an access token (access token, AT). The FusionCall module 1311 can also be used to request the business cloud server 1380 to authenticate AT, generate point to point tokens (P2P Token), exchange session identifiers (session identifiers, sessionID) for NAT traversal, and push service docking. ,etc. The NatService module 1312 can be used to interact with the network address translation (NAT) traversal cloud server 1390 for NAT traversal signaling to complete a point-to-point (P2P) auxiliary link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 NAT traversal and a relay link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are established.
在一种示例中,该FusionCall模块1311还可用于请求业务云服务器1380对电子设备100进行设备级认证,例如,校验电子设备100的设备证书。In one example, the FusionCall module 1311 can also be used to request the business cloud server 1380 to perform device-level authentication on the electronic device 100, for example, to verify the device certificate of the electronic device 100.
在一种示例中,该FusionCall模块1311还可用于与HiFi模块1320进行数据交互,对RTP数据包进行截流、和/或合并、和/或替换等操作,以实现将用户选中的数据内容通过通话的主链路发送给电子设备200。 In one example, the FusionCall module 1311 can also be used to perform data interaction with the HiFi module 1320, and perform operations such as intercepting, and/or merging, and/or replacing RTP data packets, so as to realize the data content selected by the user through the call. The main link is sent to the electronic device 200.
该FusionCall模块1311的作用还可还包括但不限于如下功能:负责调用网络地址服务模块管理辅助链路(例如,辅助链路的建立与释放)。负责分享内容数据的读取(例如,文件数据、位置信息、打开链接、日历、应用安装包,等等)。负责分享内容数据的分流封包、传输、解包,等等。负责分享内容数据的写入与存储。负责相关用户体验(user experience,UX)界面显示,例如包括但不限于:系统分享界面(包括正在互动联系人的选项或最近互动联系人的选项)、应用内分享界面/窗口中的正在互动联系人的选项或最近互动联系人的选项、发送窗口、接收窗口、提示信息,按钮/控件,等等。The role of the FusionCall module 1311 may also include but is not limited to the following functions: responsible for calling the network address service module to manage the auxiliary link (for example, the establishment and release of the auxiliary link). Responsible for reading shared content data (for example, file data, location information, open links, calendars, application installation packages, etc.). Responsible for offloading, transmitting, unpacking, etc. of shared content data. Responsible for writing and storing shared content data. Responsible for the display of relevant user experience (UX) interfaces, including but not limited to: system sharing interface (including options for currently interacting contacts or options for recently interacted contacts), in-application sharing interfaces/windows for interactive contacts Options for people or recently interacted contacts, sending windows, receiving windows, prompt messages, buttons/controls, etc.
该NatService模块1312可用于实现对辅助链路的建立、释放,等等。The NatService module 1312 can be used to implement the establishment and release of auxiliary links, etc.
该HiFi模块1320可用于通过实时传输协议(real-time transport protocol,RTP)/实时传输控制协议(real-time transport control protocol,RTCP)实现对实时通话数据的传输。The HiFi module 1320 can be used to realize the transmission of real-time call data through the real-time transport protocol (real-time transport protocol, RTP)/real-time transport control protocol (real-time transport control protocol, RTCP).
该调制解调器1330中可以包括路由网际互联协议(internet protocol,IP)多媒体系统(IP multimedia subsystem,IMS)适配器(IMS adapter,IMSA)和IMS协议栈。IMSA可用于实现RTP/RTCP协议与IMS协议栈之间的协议数据传输。该调制解调器1330可用于基于IMS协议栈在运营商网络上的主链路上实现与电子设备200之间的IMS通话。其中,IMS通话可以包括但不限于VoLTE、ViLTE、VoNR、ViNR、VoWiFi、ViWiFi、EPS-Fallback等类型的通话。The modem 1330 may include a routing Internet protocol (IP) multimedia system (IP multimedia subsystem, IMS) adapter (IMS adapter, IMSA) and an IMS protocol stack. IMSVA can be used to implement protocol data transmission between the RTP/RTCP protocol and the IMS protocol stack. The modem 1330 may be used to implement IMS calls with the electronic device 200 on the main link on the operator's network based on the IMS protocol stack. Among them, IMS calls may include but are not limited to VoLTE, ViLTE, VoNR, ViNR, VoWiFi, ViWiFi, EPS-Fallback and other types of calls.
2、电子设备200可以包括应用处理器1340、HiFi模块1350、调制解调器1360。2. The electronic device 200 may include an application processor 1340, a HiFi module 1350, and a modem 1360.
应用处理器1340中可以包括一个或多个功能模块,该一个或多个功能模块可以包括FusionCall模块1341、NatService模块1342。其中,该FusionCall模块1341可用于与云服务器300中账号服务器1371进行用户级认证,获取接入令牌(access token,AT)。该FusionCall模块1341还可用于请求业务云服务器1380对AT进行认证、生成P2P Token、NAT穿越的sessionID的交换,push服务对接,等等。该NatService模块1342可用于与NAT穿越云服务器1390进行NAT穿越信令的交互,完成电子设备100到电子设备200之间P2P辅助链路之间的NAT穿越以及电子设备100与电子设备200之间的中继链路建立。The application processor 1340 may include one or more functional modules, and the one or more functional modules may include a FusionCall module 1341 and a NatService module 1342. Among them, the FusionCall module 1341 can be used to perform user-level authentication with the account server 1371 in the cloud server 300 to obtain an access token (access token, AT). The FusionCall module 1341 can also be used to request the business cloud server 1380 to authenticate AT, generate P2P Token, exchange session ID for NAT traversal, push service docking, etc. The NatService module 1342 can be used to interact with NAT traversal signaling with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 to complete NAT traversal between the P2P auxiliary link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 and between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 The trunk link is established.
在一种示例中,该FusionCall模块1341还可用于请求业务云服务器1380对电子设备100进行设备级认证,例如,校验电子设备100的设备证书。In one example, the FusionCall module 1341 can also be used to request the service cloud server 1380 to perform device-level authentication on the electronic device 100, for example, to verify the device certificate of the electronic device 100.
在一种示例中,该FusionCall模块1341还可用于与HiFi模块1320进行数据交互,对RTP数据包进行截流、和/或合并、和/或替换等操作,以实现在通话的主链路上接收电子设备100发送的数据内容。In one example, the FusionCall module 1341 can also be used to perform data interaction with the HiFi module 1320, and perform operations such as interception, and/or merging, and/or replacement of RTP data packets to achieve reception on the main link of the call. The data content sent by the electronic device 100.
该NatService模块1342可用于实现对辅助链路的建立、释放,等等。The NatService module 1342 can be used to implement the establishment and release of auxiliary links, etc.
该HiFi模块1350可用于通过RTP/RTCP实现对实时通话数据的传输。The HiFi module 1350 can be used to transmit real-time call data through RTP/RTCP.
该调制解调器1360可以包括IMSA和IMS协议栈。该IMSA可用于实现RTP/RTCP协议与IMS协议栈之间的协议数据传输。该调制解调器1360可用于基于IMS协议栈在运营商网络上的主链路上实现与电子设备200之间的IMS通话。其中,IMS通话可以包括但不限于VoLTE、ViLTE、VoNR、ViNR、VoWiFi、ViWiFi、EPS-Fallback等类型的通话。The modem 1360 may include IMSVA and IMS protocol stack. The IMSVA can be used to implement protocol data transmission between the RTP/RTCP protocol and the IMS protocol stack. The modem 1360 can be used to implement IMS calls with the electronic device 200 on the main link on the operator's network based on the IMS protocol stack. Among them, IMS calls may include but are not limited to VoLTE, ViLTE, VoNR, ViNR, VoWiFi, ViWiFi, EPS-Fallback and other types of calls.
3、云服务器300可以包括一个或多个云服务功能模块。其中,该一个或多个云服务功能模块可以包括账号和唤醒云服务器1370、业务云服务器1380、网络地址转换(network address translation,NAT)穿越云服务器1390。其中,账号和唤醒云服务器1370可以包括账号服务器1371和推送服务器1372。该业务云服务器1380可以包括智慧功能(wise fuction,WiseFunction)模块1381。NAT穿越云服务器1390可以包括终端路由(terminal router system,TRS)服务器1391、NAT环境下的会话传输工具(session traversal utilities for NAT,STUN)服务器1392、中继穿透NAT(travelersal using relays around NAT,TURN)服务器1393、连接(Connector)服务器1394。3. The cloud server 300 may include one or more cloud service function modules. Among them, the one or more cloud service function modules may include an account and wake-up cloud server 1370, a business cloud server 1380, and a network address translation (network address translation, NAT) traversal cloud server 1390. Among them, the account and wake-up cloud server 1370 may include an account server 1371 and a push server 1372. The business cloud server 1380 may include a wise function (WiseFunction) module 1381. The NAT traversal cloud server 1390 may include a terminal router system (TRS) server 1391, a session traversal utilities for NAT (STUN) server 1392 in a NAT environment, and a relay penetration NAT (travelersal using relays around NAT). TURN server 1393, Connector server 1394.
其中,账号服务器1371可用于对电子设备100或电子设备200进行认证,其中,认证包括用户级认证和设备级认证(例如,校验电子设备的设备证书)。The account server 1371 may be used to authenticate the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200, where the authentication includes user-level authentication and device-level authentication (for example, verifying the device certificate of the electronic device).
当使用用户级认证时,账号服务器1371可以在对电子设备100的用户账号或电子设备200的用户账号认证成功后,可以生成AT给电子设备100或电子设备200。其中,用户账号不同,生成的AT也不同。该AT可用于作为电子设备100或电子设备200调用应用程序编程接口(application programming interface,API)访问云服务器300上资源时所需要的资源凭证,例如,通过该AT,电子设备100可以访问到业务服务器1380。When user-level authentication is used, the account server 1371 may generate an AT to the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200 after successfully authenticating the user account of the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200 . Among them, different user accounts generate different ATs. The AT can be used as a resource credential required when the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200 calls an application programming interface (API) to access resources on the cloud server 300. For example, through the AT, the electronic device 100 can access services. Server 1380.
以账号服务器1371对电子设备100进行用户级认证为例,用户级认证生成AT的过程可以如下:Taking the account server 1371 to perform user-level authentication on the electronic device 100 as an example, the process of generating AT through user-level authentication can be as follows:
(1)电子设备100上的应用客户端识别需要的用户权限。 (1) The application client on the electronic device 100 identifies the required user permissions.
(2)电子设备100上的应用客户端将用户重定向到账号服务器1371(例如,oAuth服务器)上,并在重定向链接中携带向用户申请的权限(scope)列表。(2) The application client on the electronic device 100 redirects the user to the account server 1371 (for example, oAuth server), and carries the permission (scope) list applied to the user in the redirect link.
(3)电子设备100接收用户输入的设备系统的用户账号和密码。(3) The electronic device 100 receives the user account and password of the device system input by the user.
(4)电子设备100接收用户将设备系统的用户账号和密码授权登录应用客户端的确认输入。若该应用客户端为免授权应用,电子设备100可以直接使用设备系统的用户账号与密码授权登录应用客户端。(4) The electronic device 100 receives the confirmation input from the user who authorizes the user account and password of the device system to log in to the application client. If the application client is an authorization-free application, the electronic device 100 can directly use the user account and password of the device system to authorize and log in to the application client.
(5)电子设备100可以使用用户账号和密码发送登录请求到账号服务器1371(例如,oAuth服务器)。账号服务器1371(例如,oAuth服务器)在接收到登录请求后,可以验证电子设备100上的用户账号与密码。验证成功后,账号服务器1371(例如,oAuth服务器)可以签发一个AT,并把这个AT发送给电子设备100上,电子设备100收到AT之后,可以将AT存储起来,例如,存入电子设备100上客户端的小型文本文件(cookie)或者本地存储(local stroge)中。电子设备100每次请求向云服务器300请求资源的时候需要带着账号服务器1371签发的AT,其中,AT可以携带在HTTP报文的头(header)中。云服务器300在收到电子设备100的请求后,可以通过账号服务器1371先验证请求中携带的AT,如果验证成功,可以向电子设备100返回请求的数据。(5) The electronic device 100 can use the user account and password to send a login request to the account server 1371 (eg, oAuth server). After receiving the login request, the account server 1371 (eg, oAuth server) can verify the user account and password on the electronic device 100 . After successful verification, the account server 1371 (for example, oAuth server) can issue an AT and send the AT to the electronic device 100. After the electronic device 100 receives the AT, it can store the AT, for example, into the electronic device 100 In the client's small text file (cookie) or local storage (local stroge). Each time the electronic device 100 requests resources from the cloud server 300, it needs to carry the AT signed by the account server 1371, where the AT can be carried in the header of the HTTP message. After receiving the request from the electronic device 100, the cloud server 300 can first verify the AT carried in the request through the account server 1371. If the verification is successful, the cloud server 300 can return the requested data to the electronic device 100.
其中,账号服务器1371可以基于用户账号等信息生成AT。例如,可以使用用户账号、系统时间、随机数、过期时间得到的用户信息数据,对用户信息数据进行RSA非对称加密/AES对称加密得到一个加密字符串,将加密字符串再次进行签名得到一个签名数据。然后将签名数据和加密字符串进行拼接,最后使用base64算法进行编码,得到最终AT。Among them, the account server 1371 can generate AT based on the user account and other information. For example, you can use the user information data obtained from the user account, system time, random number, and expiration time, perform RSA asymmetric encryption/AES symmetric encryption on the user information data to obtain an encrypted string, and sign the encrypted string again to obtain a signature. data. Then the signature data and encrypted string are spliced, and finally encoded using the base64 algorithm to obtain the final AT.
例如,账号服务器1371可以通过HTTP响应向电子设备100返回AT,其中,HTTP响应的内容可以如下:
For example, the account server 1371 can return AT to the electronic device 100 through an HTTP response, where the content of the HTTP response can be as follows:
在一种示例中,当使用设备级认证时,电子设备(电子设备100或电子设备200)可以将设备证书生成摘要,然后用私钥签名得到签名数据,并将设备证书和签名数据发送给云服务器300。云服务器300可以在接收到设备证书和签名数据后用该私钥对应的公钥对该签名数据进行验证,若验证成功后,则云服务器300可以允许电子设备100访问云服务器300上的数据。In one example, when using device-level authentication, the electronic device (electronic device 100 or electronic device 200) can generate a digest from the device certificate, then use a private key to sign to obtain the signature data, and send the device certificate and signature data to the cloud. Server 300. After receiving the device certificate and signature data, the cloud server 300 can use the public key corresponding to the private key to verify the signature data. If the verification is successful, the cloud server 300 can allow the electronic device 100 to access the data on the cloud server 300 .
在一种示例中,云服务器300也可以对电子设备的序列号(serial number,SN)码进行验证,验证通过后,云服务器300可以允许电子设备访问云服务器300上的数据。In one example, the cloud server 300 can also verify the serial number (SN) code of the electronic device. After the verification is passed, the cloud server 300 can allow the electronic device to access data on the cloud server 300.
其中,推送服务器1372可用于唤醒电子设备200启动建立辅助链路。Among them, the push server 1372 can be used to wake up the electronic device 200 to start establishing the auxiliary link.
业务云服务器1380可用于实现链路的寻址,如用于NAT穿越的会话标识(sessionID)交换,电子设备100与电子设备200之间唤醒服务的唤醒对接,等等。其中,sessionID的交换过程可以参考后续实施例,在此不再赘述。The service cloud server 1380 can be used to implement link addressing, such as session ID exchange for NAT traversal, wake-up docking of wake-up services between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 , and so on. For the session ID exchange process, please refer to subsequent embodiments and will not be described in detail here.
NAT穿越云服务器1390可以用于基于电子设备100或电子设备200之间的NAT穿越信令实现电子设备100与电子设备200之间的NAT P2P穿越链路建立及传输,或,电子设备100与电子设备200之间的TURN中继链路建立及传输。其中,NAT P2P穿越链路建立及传输,TURN中继链路建立及传输的具体过程,可以参考后续实施例,在此不再赘述。The NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can be used to implement NAT P2P traversal link establishment and transmission between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 based on the NAT traversal signaling between the electronic device 100 or the electronic device 200, or, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200. The TURN relay link between devices 200 is established and transmitted. Among them, the specific processes of NAT P2P traversal link establishment and transmission, and TURN relay link establishment and transmission can be referred to subsequent embodiments and will not be described again here.
图13B示例性的示出了本申请实施例中提供的另一种通信系统的架构图。Figure 13B exemplarily shows the architecture diagram of another communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图13B所示,电子设备100的应用处理器1310中可以包括FusionCall模块1311系统分享模块1313、 应用内分享模块1314、数据通道(data channel,DC)模块1315。电子设备100的调制解调器(modem)1330中可以包括数据路由模块1331、服务质量等级标识(quality of service class identifier,QCI)/5G服务质量等级标识(5G quality of service class identifier,5QI)配置模块1332。As shown in Figure 13B, the application processor 1310 of the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311, a system sharing module 1313, In-application sharing module 1314 and data channel (DC) module 1315. The modem 1330 of the electronic device 100 may include a data routing module 1331 and a quality of service class identifier (QCI)/5G quality of service class identifier (5QI) configuration module 1332.
其中,系统分享模块1313可用于提供系统分享的功能。应用内分享模块1314可用于提供在应用内分享数据的功能。Among them, the system sharing module 1313 can be used to provide a system sharing function. The in-application sharing module 1314 may be used to provide functionality for sharing data within the application.
DC模块1315中可以实现对数据通道的通道管理和路由配置。DC模块1315还可以基于流控制传输协议(stream control transmission protocl,STCP)、数据包传输层安全性(datagram transport layer security,DTLS)协议实现主链路中数据通道中的媒体流或控制流的传输。DC模块1315可以将媒体流(包括有指定数据的数据内容)和控制流(包括有分享指定数据时的控制指令)传输给调制解调器1330。Channel management and routing configuration of data channels can be implemented in the DC module 1315. The DC module 1315 can also realize the transmission of media streams or control streams in the data channel in the main link based on the stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, STCP) and datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocols. . The DC module 1315 may transmit the media stream (including data content of specified data) and the control stream (including control instructions for sharing specified data) to the modem 1330 .
调制解调器1330可以基于TCP/IP协议栈在主链路的数据通道上与电子设备200之间实现媒体流的传输。调制解调器1330可以基于IMS协议栈和TCP/IP协议栈在主链路的数据通道上与电子设备200之间实现控制流的传输。调制解调器1330中的数据路由模块1331可以实现对媒体流或控制流中的路由控制。调制解调器1330中的QCI/5QI配置模块1332可以基于实现对媒体流或控制流中服务质量等级的划分和标识。The modem 1330 can realize the transmission of media streams between the electronic device 200 and the data channel of the main link based on the TCP/IP protocol stack. The modem 1330 can implement control flow transmission between the electronic device 200 and the data channel of the main link based on the IMS protocol stack and the TCP/IP protocol stack. The data routing module 1331 in the modem 1330 can implement routing control in the media stream or control stream. The QCI/5QI configuration module 1332 in the modem 1330 may be based on implementing the classification and identification of quality of service levels in media streams or control streams.
电子设备200的应用处理器1340中可以包括FusionCall模块1341系统分享模块1343、应用内分享模块1344、数据通道(data channel,DC)模块1345。电子设备200的调制解调器(modem)1360中可以包括数据路由模块1361、服务质量等级标识(quality of service class identifier,QCI)/5G服务质量等级标识(5G quality of service class identifier,5QI)配置模块1362。The application processor 1340 of the electronic device 200 may include a FusionCall module 1341, a system sharing module 1343, an in-application sharing module 1344, and a data channel (data channel, DC) module 1345. The modem 1360 of the electronic device 200 may include a data routing module 1361 and a quality of service class identifier (QCI)/5G quality of service class identifier (5QI) configuration module 1362.
其中,系统分享模块1343可用于提供系统分享的功能。应用内分享模块1344可用于提供在应用内分享数据的功能。Among them, the system sharing module 1343 can be used to provide a system sharing function. The in-application sharing module 1344 may be used to provide functionality for sharing data within the application.
DC模块1345中可以实现对数据通道的通道管理和路由配置。DC模块1345还可以基于流控制传输协议(stream control transmission protocl,STCP)、数据包传输层安全性(datagram transport layer security,DTLS)协议实现主链路中数据通道中的媒体流或控制流的传输。DC模块1345可以将媒体流(包括有指定数据的数据内容)和控制流(包括有分享指定数据时的控制指令)传输给调制解调器1360。Channel management and routing configuration of data channels can be implemented in the DC module 1345. The DC module 1345 can also realize the transmission of media streams or control streams in the data channel in the main link based on the stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, STCP) and datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocols. . The DC module 1345 may transmit the media stream (including the data content of the specified data) and the control stream (including the control instructions when sharing the specified data) to the modem 1360.
调制解调器1360可以基于TCP/IP协议栈在主链路的数据通道上与电子设备200之间实现媒体流的传输。调制解调器1360可以基于IMS协议栈和TCP/IP协议栈在主链路的数据通道上与电子设备200之间实现控制流的传输。调制解调器1360中的数据路由模块1361可以实现对媒体流或控制流中的路由控制。调制解调器1360中的QCI/5QI配置模块1361可以基于实现对媒体流或控制流中服务质量等级的划分和标识。The modem 1360 can realize the transmission of media streams between the electronic device 200 and the data channel of the main link based on the TCP/IP protocol stack. The modem 1360 can implement control flow transmission between the electronic device 200 and the data channel of the main link based on the IMS protocol stack and the TCP/IP protocol stack. The data routing module 1361 in the modem 1360 can implement routing control in the media stream or control stream. The QCI/5QI configuration module 1361 in the modem 1360 may be based on implementing the classification and identification of service quality levels in media streams or control streams.
图13C示例性的示出了本申请实施例中提供的另一种通信系统的架构图。Figure 13C exemplarily shows the architecture diagram of another communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图13C所示,电子设备100的应用处理器1310中可以包括FusionCall模块1311系统分享模块1313、应用内分享模块1314、数据通道(data channel,DC)管理模块1316。电子设备100的调制解调器(modem)1330中可以包括数据路由模块1331、服务质量等级标识(quality of service class identifier,QCI)/5G服务质量等级标识(5G quality of service class identifier,5QI)配置模块1332、数据通道(data channel,DC)协议模块1333。As shown in Figure 13C, the application processor 1310 of the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311, a system sharing module 1313, an in-application sharing module 1314, and a data channel (data channel, DC) management module 1316. The modem 1330 of the electronic device 100 may include a data routing module 1331, a quality of service class identifier (QCI)/5G quality of service class identifier (5QI) configuration module 1332, Data channel (DC) protocol module 1333.
DC管理模块1316中可以实现对数据通道的通道管理和路由配置。The DC management module 1316 can implement channel management and routing configuration of the data channel.
DC协议模块1333可以基于流控制传输协议(stream control transmission protocl,STCP)、数据包传输层安全性(datagram transport layer security,DTLS)协议实现主链路中数据通道中的媒体流或控制流的传输。DC协议模块1333可以将媒体流(包括有指定数据的数据内容)传输给调制解调器1330的TCP/IP协议栈进行处理。DC协议模块1333可以将控制流(包括有分享指定数据时的控制指令)传输给调制解调器1330的IMS协议栈进行处理,IMS协议栈对控制流处理完后传输给TCP/IP协议栈继续处理。The DC protocol module 1333 can realize the transmission of media streams or control streams in the data channel in the main link based on the stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, STCP) and datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocols. . The DC protocol module 1333 may transmit the media stream (data content including specified data) to the TCP/IP protocol stack of the modem 1330 for processing. The DC protocol module 1333 can transmit the control flow (including control instructions when sharing specified data) to the IMS protocol stack of the modem 1330 for processing. After the IMS protocol stack processes the control flow, it transmits it to the TCP/IP protocol stack for continued processing.
电子设备200的应用处理器1340中可以包括FusionCall模块1341系统分享模块1343、应用内分享模块1344、数据通道(data channel,DC)管理模块1346。电子设备200的调制解调器(modem)1360中可以包括数据路由模块1361、服务质量等级标识(quality of service class identifier,QCI)/5G服务质量等级标识(5G quality of service class identifier,5QI)配置模块1362、数据通道(data channel,DC)协议模块1363。The application processor 1340 of the electronic device 200 may include a FusionCall module 1341, a system sharing module 1343, an in-application sharing module 1344, and a data channel (data channel, DC) management module 1346. The modem 1360 of the electronic device 200 may include a data routing module 1361, a quality of service class identifier (QCI)/5G quality of service class identifier (5QI) configuration module 1362, Data channel (DC) protocol module 1363.
DC管理模块1346中可以实现对数据通道的通道管理和路由配置。The DC management module 1346 can implement channel management and routing configuration of the data channel.
DC协议模块1363可以基于流控制传输协议(stream control transmission protocl,STCP)、数据包传输层安全性(datagram transport layer security,DTLS)协议实现主链路中数据通道中的媒体流或控制流的传 输。DC协议模块1363可以将媒体流(包括有指定数据的数据内容)传输给调制解调器1360的TCP/IP协议栈进行处理。DC协议模块1363可以将控制流(包括有分享指定数据时的控制指令)传输给调制解调器1360的IMS协议栈进行处理,IMS协议栈对控制流处理完后传输给TCP/IP协议栈继续处理。The DC protocol module 1363 can realize the transmission of the media stream or control stream in the data channel in the main link based on the stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, STCP) and the datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocol. lose. The DC protocol module 1363 may transmit the media stream (data content including specified data) to the TCP/IP protocol stack of the modem 1360 for processing. The DC protocol module 1363 can transmit the control flow (including control instructions when sharing specified data) to the IMS protocol stack of the modem 1360 for processing. After the IMS protocol stack processes the control flow, it transmits it to the TCP/IP protocol stack for continued processing.
其中,有关电子设备100和电子设备200中的其他功能模块的描述可以参考上述图13B所示实施例,在此不再赘述。For descriptions of other functional modules in the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 , reference may be made to the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 13B , and details will not be described again here.
下面介绍本申请实施例中的电子设备100与电子设备200建立数据传输链路过程。The following describes the process of establishing a data transmission link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例中,当电子设备100与电子设备200正在通话时,数据传输链路的建立方式可以包括如下等方式:In the embodiment of the present application, when the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are talking, the data transmission link may be established in the following ways:
1、复用通话的主链路。1. Reuse the main link of the call.
例如,电子设备100与电子设备200的通话为IMS通话时,使用的是IMS协议。可以在原有RTP报文中扩展增加用于传输分享数据的报文类型。或者,可以通过RTP报文中的同步信源标识符(synchronous source,SSRC)来标记该RTP报文中携带的是通话的语音/视频帧数据,还是电子设备100分享给电子设备200的指定数据。在这种方式中,蜂窝网络设备的核心网络设备需要进入透传模式,对该RTP报文不作过滤和转码。For example, when the call between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is an IMS call, the IMS protocol is used. The original RTP message can be expanded to add message types for transmitting shared data. Alternatively, the synchronization source identifier (SSRC) in the RTP message can be used to mark whether the RTP message carries the voice/video frame data of the call or the designated data shared by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 . In this method, the core network equipment of the cellular network equipment needs to enter the transparent transmission mode and does not filter or transcode the RTP packets.
2、使用通话链路的数据通道(data channel)。2. Use the data channel of the call link.
例如,电子设备100与电子设备200之间使用IMS协议建立的通话链路中包括有数据通道。该数据通道是相对通话信令QCI5通道、音频QCI1/音频QCI2通道之外的一个数据传输通道。其中,该数据通道的介绍可以参考协议规范TS 26.114,在此不再赘述。For example, the call link established between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 using the IMS protocol includes a data channel. This data channel is a data transmission channel other than the call signaling QCI5 channel and the audio QCI1/audio QCI2 channel. Among them, the introduction of this data channel can refer to the protocol specification TS 26.114, which will not be repeated here.
3、建立辅助链路。3. Establish an auxiliary link.
3.1电子设备100和电子设备200可以通过通话主链路的RTCP数据包携带连接信息,协商建立辅助链路。3.1 Electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 can negotiate to establish a secondary link by carrying connection information through the RTCP packet of the main call link.
其中,可以在RTCP源描述(source description,SDES)数据包中携带连接信息的文本数据,发送给电子设备200。其中,该连接新可以包括用于NAT穿越的通信ID、IP地址等信息。其中,该连接信息可以携带SDES条目(items)字段中的规范名称(canonical name,CNAME)项中。Among them, the text data of the connection information can be carried in an RTCP source description (SDES) packet and sent to the electronic device 200 . The connection information may include communication ID, IP address and other information used for NAT traversal. Among them, the connection information can carry the canonical name (CNAME) item in the SDES entry (items) field.
例如,如图14A所示,RTCP数据可以包括包头(header)、一个或多个块(chunk)。其中,For example, as shown in Figure 14A, RTCP data may include a header and one or more chunks. in,
包头(header)可以包括版本号(version,V)字段、源描述项目数(number of SDES items,SC)字段、包类型(packet type,PT)字段、长度(length)字段、填充(padding,P)字段。The header (header) can include a version number (V) field, a source description item number (SC) field, a packet type (packet type, PT) field, a length (length) field, and padding (P). ) field.
其中,chunk中可以包括信源标识符(同步信源标识符(SSRC)或特约信源标识符(CSRC))、源描述条目(SDES items)。其中,版本号字段的值可以为“2”,PT字段的值可以“202”(用于表示该RTCP数据包为SDES包。Among them, the chunk can include source identifiers (synchronous source identifiers (SSRC) or special source identifiers (CSRC)) and source description items (SDES items). Among them, the value of the version number field can be "2", and the value of the PT field can be "202" (used to indicate that the RTCP data packet is an SDES packet.
如图14B所示,该SDES items字段可以包括CNME字段(值可以为“1”)、长度(length)字段(例如,长度可以为36bit)、连接信息,该长度(length)字段可用于指示该连接信息的数据长度。As shown in Figure 14B, the SDES items field may include a CNME field (the value may be "1"), a length field (for example, the length may be 36 bits), and connection information. The length field may be used to indicate the The data length of the connection information.
3.2电子设备100可以与电子设备200通过云服务器300寻址到对方的通信ID,电子设备100和电子设备200可以基于双方的通信ID建立电子设备100与电子设备200之间的辅助链路。3.2 Electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 can address each other's communication ID through cloud server 300. Electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 can establish an auxiliary link between electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 based on the communication IDs of both parties.
图15示例性的示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种辅助链路建立流程。Figure 15 illustrates an auxiliary link establishment process provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图15所示,该链路建立流程可以包括如下3个阶段:注册/登录阶段、寻址阶段、链路建立阶段。其中,注册/登录阶段包括如下步骤S1501至步骤S1502,寻址阶段包括如下步骤S1503至步骤S1506,链路建立阶段包括如下步骤S1507。其中:As shown in Figure 15, the link establishment process may include the following three stages: registration/login stage, addressing stage, and link establishment stage. The registration/login phase includes the following steps S1501 to S1502, the addressing phase includes the following steps S1503 to S1506, and the link establishment phase includes the following step S1507. in:
S1501、电子设备100将电子设备100的ID组A和通信标识A绑定注册登录到云服务器300上保存。S1501. The electronic device 100 binds, registers and logs in the ID group A and the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 to the cloud server 300 and saves them.
S1502、电子设备200将电子设备200的ID组B和通信标识B绑定注册登录到云服务器300。S1502. The electronic device 200 binds and registers the ID group B and the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 to the cloud server 300.
其中,该查询请求A可用于获取电子设备200的通信标识B。The query request A can be used to obtain the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 .
S1503、电子设备100可以向云服务器300发送查询请求A,该查询请求A中携带电子设备200的ID组B的全部或部分信息。S1503. The electronic device 100 may send a query request A to the cloud server 300, where the query request A carries all or part of the information of the ID group B of the electronic device 200.
S1504、云服务器300可以向电子设备100返回电子设备200的通信标识B。S1504. The cloud server 300 may return the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100.
S1505、电子设备200可以向云服务器300发送查询请求B,该查询请求B中携带电子设备100的ID组A的全部或部分信息。该查询请求B可用于查询电子设备100的通信标识A。S1505. The electronic device 200 may send a query request B to the cloud server 300. The query request B carries all or part of the information of the ID group A of the electronic device 100. The query request B can be used to query the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 .
S1506、云服务器300可以向电子设备200返回电子设备100的通信标识A。 S1506. The cloud server 300 may return the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200.
S1507、电子设备100与电子设备200基于通信标识A、通信标识B建立辅助链路。其中,该辅助链路包括IP直连链路、NAT穿透点对点链路或者服务器中继链路,等等。S1507. The electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 establish an auxiliary link based on the communication identifier A and the communication identifier B. The auxiliary link includes an IP direct link, a NAT penetration point-to-point link, or a server relay link, etc.
其中,上述图15中所示的云服务器300,具体可以是云服务器300中的业务云服务器1380。The cloud server 300 shown in FIG. 15 may specifically be the business cloud server 1380 in the cloud server 300 .
下面结合图16所示的原理具体上述辅助链路建立流程。The above-mentioned auxiliary link establishment process will be detailed below in conjunction with the principle shown in Figure 16 .
图16示例性示出了本申请实施中电子设备100向业务云服务器1380获取电子设备200通信标识的原理示意图。FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram illustrating the principle in which the electronic device 100 obtains the communication identification of the electronic device 200 from the business cloud server 1380 in the implementation of this application.
如图16所示,电子设备100可以和电子设备200可以将各自的ID组和通信标识绑定后,注册登录到业务云服务器1380上。即,电子设备100可以将电子设备100的ID组A和通信标识A绑定成绑定信息A,注册登录到业务云服务器1380上保存。电子设备200可以将电子设备200的ID组B和通信标识B绑定成绑定信息B,注册到业务服务器1380上保存。其中,ID组可以包括以下一种或多种的组合:一个或多个电话号码、一个或多个OTT ID(例如,即时通信应用的用户ID、email地址,等等),等等。As shown in Figure 16, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can register and log in to the business cloud server 1380 after binding their respective ID groups and communication identifiers. That is, the electronic device 100 can bind the ID group A and the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 into binding information A, register and log in to the business cloud server 1380 and save it. The electronic device 200 can bind the ID group B and the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 into binding information B, register it on the service server 1380 and save it. Among them, the ID group may include one or a combination of the following: one or more phone numbers, one or more OTT IDs (for example, user ID of an instant messaging application, email address, etc.), and so on.
在一种示例中,绑定信息可以经过去隐私(例如哈希(hash)运算)后,注册登录到业务服务器1380上保存。In one example, the binding information can be registered and logged into the business server 1380 and saved after being deprived of privacy (for example, hash operation).
其中,业务服务器1380上保存的绑定信息可以是临时性的,由业务服务器1380控制删除与否,也可以是准确性的,由电子设备(电子设备100或电子设备200)控制删除与否。The binding information saved on the business server 1380 may be temporary, and the business server 1380 controls whether to delete it, or it may be accurate, and the electronic device (electronic device 100 or electronic device 200) controls whether to delete it.
对于临时性的,业务服务器1380可以给与电子设备的会话(session)设置一个会话时间阈值(session timer),例如10分钟,在业务服务器1380与电子设备之间的会话持续时间超过session timer后,业务服务器1380可以自动删除该电子设备的绑定信息,或者设置为闲置(inactive)状态。电子设备可以在会话超过session timer之前,刷新(refresh)会话,延长session timer。For temporary ones, the business server 1380 can set a session time threshold (session timer) for the session with the electronic device, for example, 10 minutes. After the session duration between the business server 1380 and the electronic device exceeds the session timer, The service server 1380 can automatically delete the binding information of the electronic device, or set it to an inactive state. The electronic device can refresh the session and extend the session timer before the session exceeds the session timer.
对于准确性的,电子设备可以决定什么时候删除绑定信息,例如可以在电子设备通话结束后,也可以是在网络状态变更后,请求业务服务器1380删除保存的绑定信息。For accuracy, the electronic device can decide when to delete the binding information. For example, the electronic device can request the service server 1380 to delete the saved binding information after the call ends or after the network status changes.
在业务云服务器1380上保存有电子设备100的绑定信息A和电子设备200的绑定信息B后,电子设备100从业务云服务器1380查询电子设备200的通信标识的流程可以包括如下步骤:After the binding information A of the electronic device 100 and the binding information B of the electronic device 200 are saved on the business cloud server 1380, the process of the electronic device 100 querying the communication identification of the electronic device 200 from the business cloud server 1380 may include the following steps:
1、电子设备100获取到电子设备200的ID组A中全部或部分信息。1. The electronic device 100 obtains all or part of the information in the ID group A of the electronic device 200 .
2、电子设备100向业务服务器1380发送查询请求,查询电子设备200的通信标识B。其中,该查询请求携带电子设备200的ID组B中的全部或部分信息。2. The electronic device 100 sends a query request to the service server 1380 to query the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 . The query request carries all or part of the information in ID group B of the electronic device 200 .
3、业务服务器1380在接收到电子设备100的查询请求后,根据电子设备200的ID组B中的全部或部分信息,查询到电子设备200的通信标识B,并向电子设备100返回电子设备200的通信标识B。3. After receiving the query request of the electronic device 100, the business server 1380 queries the communication identification B of the electronic device 200 based on all or part of the information in the ID group B of the electronic device 200, and returns the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100. Communication identification B.
在一种示例中,通信标识可以是NAT穿越云服务器1390为电子设备(电子设备100或电子设备200)生成的会话标识(sessionID)。电子设备可以通过会话标识与NAT穿越云服务器1390进行会话通信。电子设备100与电子设备200通过业务云服务器1380进行寻址,交换双方的sessionID。在电子设备100和电子设备200拿到对方的sessionID后,可以通过NAT穿越云服务器1390进行NAT穿越拿到对方的NAT公网信息(包括NAT公网地址和端口号)建立P2P链路,或拿到对方的中继地址,建立服务器中继链路。In one example, the communication identification may be a session identification (sessionID) generated by the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 for the electronic device (electronic device 100 or electronic device 200). The electronic device can perform session communication with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 through the session identifier. The electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are addressed through the business cloud server 1380 and exchange session IDs of both parties. After the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 obtain the other party's session ID, they can perform NAT traversal through the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 to obtain the other party's NAT public network information (including the NAT public network address and port number) to establish a P2P link, or obtain Go to the other party's relay address and establish a server relay link.
在一种示例中,电子设备100和电子设备200在同一局域网中时,通信标识可以是电子设备的局域网内IP地址,电子设备100和电子设备200在拿到对方的局域网IP地址,可以直接基于对方的局域网内IP地址建立辅助链路(包括P2P链路或者服务器中继链路)。此时,电子设备100和电子设备200可以互相通过云服务器300拿到对方的局域网内IP地址,也可以互相通过局域网络内的路由设备拿到对方的局域网内IP地址。In one example, when the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are in the same local area network, the communication identifier can be the IP address of the electronic device in the local area network. After the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 obtain the other party's local area network IP address, they can directly use Establish an auxiliary link (including P2P link or server relay link) with the IP address in the other party's LAN. At this time, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can obtain each other's IP address in the local area network through the cloud server 300, or they can obtain each other's IP address in the local area network through the routing device in the local area network.
在一种示例中,电子设备100和电子设备100使用互联网协议第6版(internet protocol version 6,IPV6)等网络协议时,通信标识可以是电子设备(电子设备100或电子设备200)的IPV6地址。电子设备100和电子设备200通过云服务器300拿到对方的IPV6地址信息(包括IPV6地址和端口(port)号)之后,直接基于对方的IPV6地址信息建立辅助链路(包括P2P链路或者服务器中继链路)。In an example, when the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 100 use a network protocol such as Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPV6), the communication identifier may be the IPV6 address of the electronic device (electronic device 100 or electronic device 200). . After the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 obtain the other party's IPV6 address information (including the IPV6 address and port number) through the cloud server 300, they directly establish an auxiliary link (including a P2P link or a server) based on the other party's IPV6 address information. relay link).
下面具体介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种辅助链路中的寻址流程。The following is a detailed introduction to the addressing process in an auxiliary link provided in the embodiment of the present application.
图17示出了本申请实施例中提供一种辅助链路中的寻址流程示意图。Figure 17 shows a schematic diagram of the addressing process in an auxiliary link provided in this embodiment of the present application.
如图17所示,寻址流程可以包括如下4个阶段:认证生成点对点令牌(point-to-point token,P2P Token)阶段、绑定或刷新阶段、寻址阶段、会话结束阶段。其中,该认证生成P2P Token阶段可以包括步骤S1701至步骤S1702,绑定或刷新阶段可以包括步骤S1703至步骤S1704,寻址阶段可以包括步骤S1705至步骤 S1713,会话结束阶段包括步骤S1714至步骤S1715。其中:As shown in Figure 17, the addressing process may include the following four stages: authentication and generation of point-to-point token (P2P Token) stage, binding or refreshing stage, addressing stage, and session end stage. The authentication and P2P Token generation phase may include steps S1701 to S1702, the binding or refreshing phase may include steps S1703 to S1704, and the addressing phase may include steps S1705 to S1704. S1713, the session end phase includes steps S1714 to S1715. in:
S1701、电子设备100与业务云服务器1380进行认证(包括用户级认证或设备级认证)。S1701. The electronic device 100 performs authentication with the business cloud server 1380 (including user-level authentication or device-level authentication).
其中,针对电子设备100向业务云服务器1380的认证过程,可以参考前述图13A所示实施例中电子设备100向账号服务器1371认证的过程,在此不再赘述。For the authentication process of the electronic device 100 to the business cloud server 1380, reference may be made to the authentication process of the electronic device 100 to the account server 1371 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 13A, which will not be described again.
S1702、业务云服务器1380在对电子设备100认证通过后,可以返回点对点令牌A(P2P Token-A)给电子设备100。S1702. After the business cloud server 1380 passes the authentication of the electronic device 100, it can return the point-to-point token A (P2P Token-A) to the electronic device 100.
其中,该P2P Token-A可用于电子设备100访问NAT穿越云服务器1390的数据,请求NAT穿越云服务器1390上的服务功能。Among them, the P2P Token-A can be used by the electronic device 100 to access the data of the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 and request the service function on the NAT traversal cloud server 1390.
电子设备100在获取到P2P Token-A后,可以发送长连接请求给NAT穿越云服务器1390,请求与NAT穿越云服务器1390建立长连接。其中,该长连接请求携带有该P2P Token-A。NAT穿越云服务器1390可以请求业务云服务器1380对该P2P Token-A进行验证,若验证成功,则NAT穿越云服务器1390可以为电子设备100生成长连接会话的会话标识A(sessionID-A)给电子设备100。After obtaining the P2P Token-A, the electronic device 100 can send a long connection request to the NAT traversal cloud server 1390, requesting to establish a long connection with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390. Among them, the long connection request carries the P2P Token-A. The NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can request the business cloud server 1380 to verify the P2P Token-A. If the verification is successful, the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can generate the session ID A (sessionID-A) of the long connection session for the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 100. Equipment 100.
S1703、电子设备100将绑定信息A发送给业务云服务器1380进行保存。其中,该绑定信息A包括电子设备100的ID组A和NAT穿越云服务器1390返回给电子设备100的会话标识A(sessionID-A)。S1703. The electronic device 100 sends the binding information A to the business cloud server 1380 for storage. The binding information A includes the ID group A of the electronic device 100 and the session ID A (sessionID-A) returned by the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 to the electronic device 100 .
其中,ID组A可以包括电子设备100的以下一种或多种ID的组合:一个或多个电话号码、一个或多个应用账户ID(例如,即时通信应用的用户ID、email地址,等等),等等。The ID group A may include one or more combinations of the following IDs of the electronic device 100: one or more phone numbers, one or more application account IDs (for example, user IDs of instant messaging applications, email addresses, etc. ),etc.
在一种示例中,电子设备100对电子设备100的ID进行压缩后,放入ID组A中。例如,电子设备100可以运行有2张SIM卡,这2张SIM卡的手机号分别为手机号A1和手机号A2。电子设备100可以将手机号A1进行哈希运算得到哈希值1、对手机号A2进行哈希运算得到哈希值2。并将哈希值1和哈希值2放入ID组A中。In one example, the electronic device 100 compresses the ID of the electronic device 100 and puts it into ID group A. For example, the electronic device 100 can run two SIM cards, and the mobile phone numbers of these two SIM cards are mobile phone number A1 and mobile phone number A2 respectively. The electronic device 100 can perform a hash operation on the mobile phone number A1 to obtain a hash value 1, and perform a hash operation on the mobile phone number A2 to obtain a hash value 2. And put hash value 1 and hash value 2 into ID group A.
可选的,S1704、电子设备100可以更新绑定信息A,并将更新后的绑定信息A保存到业务云服务器1380上。Optionally, S1704, the electronic device 100 can update the binding information A, and save the updated binding information A to the business cloud server 1380.
其中,电子设备100可以在ID组A中的信息和/或NAT穿越云服务器1390分配给电子设备100的会话标识A有变化时,更新绑定信息A,并将更新后的绑定信息A保存到业务云服务器1380上。The electronic device 100 may update the binding information A when the information in the ID group A and/or the session ID A assigned to the electronic device 100 by the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 changes, and save the updated binding information A. Go to business cloud server 1380.
例如,电子设备100可以运行有2张SIM卡,SIM卡1和SIM卡2。其中,SIM卡1对应手机号A1,SIM卡2对应手机号A2。电子设备100可以将手机号A1和手机号A2放入ID组A中和会话标识A绑定生成绑定信息A,并将绑定信息A发送给业务云服务器1380。当电子设备100上的SIM卡1断网或者手机号A1欠费停机,等情况不能正常功能,但是SIM卡2正常工作时,电子设备100可以将手机号A2放入ID组A中与会话标识A绑定,生成更新后的绑定信息A,并将更新后的绑定信息A发送给业务云服务器1380。For example, the electronic device 100 may operate with 2 SIM cards, SIM Card 1 and SIM Card 2. Among them, SIM card 1 corresponds to mobile phone number A1, and SIM card 2 corresponds to mobile phone number A2. The electronic device 100 can put the mobile phone number A1 and the mobile phone number A2 into the ID group A and bind the session identifier A to generate the binding information A, and send the binding information A to the business cloud server 1380. When the SIM card 1 on the electronic device 100 is disconnected or the mobile phone number A1 is out of service, etc., it cannot function normally, but when the SIM card 2 works normally, the electronic device 100 can put the mobile phone number A2 into the ID group A and the session identifier. A binds, generates updated binding information A, and sends the updated binding information A to the business cloud server 1380.
又例如,在电子设备100与NAT穿越云服务器1390的长连接断开又重连等情况时,NAT穿越云服务器1390可以为电子设备100生成新的会话标识A。电子设备100可以将ID组A和新的会话标识A绑定生成更新后的绑定信息A,并将更新后的绑定信息A发送给业务云服务器1380。For another example, when the long connection between the electronic device 100 and the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 is disconnected and reconnected, the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 may generate a new session identifier A for the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 may bind the ID group A and the new session identification A to generate updated binding information A, and send the updated binding information A to the business cloud server 1380 .
S1705、电子设备100可以发送查询请求A给业务云服务器1380,其中,该查询请求A可以包括电子设备200的ID组B中的全部或部分信息,该查询请求A可用于查询电子设备200的会话标识B。S1705. The electronic device 100 can send a query request A to the business cloud server 1380. The query request A can include all or part of the information in the ID group B of the electronic device 200. The query request A can be used to query the session of the electronic device 200. Logo B.
其中,ID组B中可以包括电子设备200的以下一种或多种ID的组合:一个或多个电话号码、一个或多个应用账户ID(例如,即时通信应用的用户ID、email地址,等等),等等。Among them, ID group B may include one or a combination of the following IDs of the electronic device 200: one or more phone numbers, one or more application account IDs (for example, user IDs of instant messaging applications, email addresses, etc. wait wait wait.
ID组B中的全部或部分信息可以指ID组B中的全部ID或者某一个或多个ID。All or part of the information in ID group B may refer to all IDs in ID group B or one or more IDs.
S1706、业务云服务器1380在接收到电子设备100发送的查询请求后,可以判断是否匹配到电子设备200的会话标识B。S1706. After receiving the query request sent by the electronic device 100, the business cloud server 1380 may determine whether the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 is matched.
S1707、当业务云服务器1380匹配到电子设备200的会话标识B后,可以返回向电子设备100返回电子设备200的会话标识B。S1707. After the business cloud server 1380 matches the session identifier B of the electronic device 200, it may return the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100.
可选的,S1708、当业务云服务器1380未查询到电子设备200的会话标识B后,业务云服务器1380可以判断是否需要唤醒电子设备200。Optionally, S1708, when the business cloud server 1380 does not query the session identifier B of the electronic device 200, the business cloud server 1380 may determine whether the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up.
其中,在电子设备200处于休眠状态或灭屏状态等非唤醒状态时,电子设备200可能访问不到业务云 服务器1380。因此,业务云服务器1380可以唤醒电子设备200与业务服务器1380通信。Among them, when the electronic device 200 is in a sleep state or a non-awakened state such as a screen-off state, the electronic device 200 may not be able to access the business cloud. Server 1380. Therefore, the business cloud server 1380 can wake up the electronic device 200 to communicate with the business server 1380 .
可选的,S1709、若需要唤醒电子设备200,业务云服务器1380可以通过推送(push)服务器1372唤醒电子设备200。Optionally, S1709, if the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up, the business cloud server 1380 can wake up the electronic device 200 through the push server 1372.
可选的,S1710、若不需要唤醒电子设备200,业务云服务器1380可以返回失败原因给电子设备200。Optionally, S1710, if there is no need to wake up the electronic device 200, the business cloud server 1380 can return the failure reason to the electronic device 200.
例如,该失败原因可以包括电子设备200未唤醒、电子设备200已关机,等等。For example, the failure reasons may include the electronic device 200 not waking up, the electronic device 200 being powered off, and so on.
可选的,S1711、当唤醒电子设备200之后,电子设备200可以与业务云服务器1380进行认证。Optionally, S1711, after waking up the electronic device 200, the electronic device 200 can authenticate with the business cloud server 1380.
其中,业务云服务器1380对电子设备200的认证过程,可以参考上述实施例中业务云服务器1380对电子设备100的认证过程,在此不再赘述。For the authentication process of the electronic device 200 by the business cloud server 1380, reference can be made to the authentication process of the electronic device 100 by the business cloud server 1380 in the above embodiment, which will not be described again here.
可选的,S1712、业务云服务器1380可以向电子设备200返回点对点令牌B(P2P Token-B)给电子设备200。Optionally, in S1712, the business cloud server 1380 can return a point-to-point token B (P2P Token-B) to the electronic device 200.
其中,其中,该P2P Token-B可用于电子设备200访问NAT穿越云服务器1390的数据,请求NAT穿越云服务器1390上的服务功能。Among them, the P2P Token-B can be used by the electronic device 200 to access the data of the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 and request the service function on the NAT traversal cloud server 1390.
电子设备100在获取到P2P Token-B后,可以发送长连接请求给NAT穿越云服务器1390,请求与NAT穿越云服务器1390建立长连接。其中,该长连接请求携带有该P2P Token-B。NAT穿越云服务器1390可以请求业务云服务器1380对该P2P Token-B进行验证,若验证成功,则NAT穿越云服务器1390可以为电子设备200生成长连接会话的会话标识B(sessionID-B)给电子设备100。After obtaining the P2P Token-B, the electronic device 100 can send a long connection request to the NAT traversal cloud server 1390, requesting to establish a long connection with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390. Among them, the long connection request carries the P2P Token-B. The NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can request the business cloud server 1380 to verify the P2P Token-B. If the verification is successful, the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can generate the session ID B (sessionID-B) of the long connection session for the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 200. Equipment 100.
可选的,S1713、电子设备200将绑定信息B发送给业务云服务器1380进行保存。其中,该绑定信息B包括电子设备100的ID组B和NAT穿越云服务器1390返回给电子设备200的会话标识B。Optionally, S1713, the electronic device 200 sends the binding information B to the business cloud server 1380 for storage. The binding information B includes the ID group B of the electronic device 100 and the session identifier B returned by the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 to the electronic device 200 .
其中,在电子设备200上传绑定信息B给业务云服务器1380之后,业务云服务器1380可以向电子设备100返回电子设备200的会话标识B。After the electronic device 200 uploads the binding information B to the business cloud server 1380, the business cloud server 1380 may return the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100.
S1714、电子设备100可以在接收到电子设备200的会话标识B之后,主动请求释放与业务云服务器1380之间长连接会话。S1714. After receiving the session identifier B of the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can actively request to release the long connection session with the business cloud server 1380.
可选的,S1715、业务云服务器1380也可以在将电子设备200的会话标识B发送给电子设备100后自动释放与电子设备100之间的会话。Optionally, in S1715, the business cloud server 1380 can also automatically release the session with the electronic device 100 after sending the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100.
下面介绍本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200之间的功能模块交互流程。The following describes the functional module interaction process between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
图18示出了本申请实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200之间的功能模块交互流程。Figure 18 shows the functional module interaction process between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
如图18所示,电子设备100中可以包括融合通话(FusionCall)模块1311、网络地址转换服务(NatService)模块1312。电子设备200中可以包括FusionCall模块1341、NatService模块1342。其中,上述功能模块之间的交互流程可以如下:As shown in Figure 18, the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311 and a Network Address Translation Service (NatService) module 1312. The electronic device 200 may include a FusionCall module 1341 and a NatService module 1342. Among them, the interaction process between the above functional modules can be as follows:
S1801、FusionCall模块1311初始化NatService模块1312的传输服务。S1801. FusionCall module 1311 initializes the transmission service of NatService module 1312.
例如,FusionCall模块1311可以通过函数“RfcManager.int”,初始化NatService模块1312中的传输服务。For example, the FusionCall module 1311 can initialize the transmission service in the NatService module 1312 through the function "RfcManager.int".
S1802、FusionCall模块1311向NatService模块1312申请长连接通道的会话标识A。S1802. The FusionCall module 1311 applies to the NatService module 1312 for the session identifier A of the long connection channel.
例如,FusionCall模块1311可以通过函数“allocTunnelID(p2ptoken,cb)”向NatService模块1312申请与NAT穿越云服务器1390之间长连接通道的会话标识A。其中,该FusionCall模块1311可以通过函数“allocTunnelID(p2ptoken,cb)”,将业务云服务器1380为电子设备100生成的P2P Token-A给到NatService模块1312。NatService模块1312在发送长连接请求给NAT穿越云服务器1390时,可以携带该P2P Token-A。For example, the FusionCall module 1311 can apply to the NatService module 1312 for the session ID A of the long connection channel with the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 through the function "allocTunnelID(p2ptoken, cb)". Among them, the FusionCall module 1311 can provide the P2P Token-A generated by the business cloud server 1380 for the electronic device 100 to the NatService module 1312 through the function "allocTunnelID (p2ptoken, cb)". The NatService module 1312 can carry the P2P Token-A when sending a long connection request to the NAT traversal cloud server 1390.
S1803、NatService模块1312向FusionCall模块1311返回长连接通道的会话标识A。S1803. The NatService module 1312 returns the session identifier A of the long connection channel to the FusionCall module 1311.
例如,NAT穿越云服务器1390在向NatService模块1312返回长连接通道的会话标识A后,可以通过函数“cb(TunnelID)”返回会话标识A给FusionCall模块1311,该函数“cb(TunnelID)”中的参数“TunnelID”,即会话标识A。For example, after returning the session ID A of the long connection channel to the NatService module 1312, the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 can return the session ID A to the FusionCall module 1311 through the function "cb(TunnelID)". The parameter "TunnelID" is session ID A.
S1804、FusionCall模块1311向NatService模块1312请求创建与电子设备200的会话。S1804. The FusionCall module 1311 requests the NatService module 1312 to create a session with the electronic device 200.
其中,FusionCall模块1311可以将电子设备100的会话标识A以及电子设备200的会话标识B都给到NatService模块1312,请求NatService模块1312建立与电子设备200之间的传输会话。 Among them, the FusionCall module 1311 can provide the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312, and request the NatService module 1312 to establish a transmission session with the electronic device 200.
NatService模块1312可以将电子设备200的会话标识B发送给NAT穿越云服务器1390,请求NAT穿越云服务器1390完成电子设备100与电子设备200之间传输会话的建立。The NatService module 1312 may send the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 to the NAT traversal cloud server 1390, and request the NAT traversal cloud server 1390 to complete the establishment of a transmission session between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200.
例如,FusionCall模块1311可以通过函数“createSessionByTunnelID(p2ptoken,remoteTunnelID,flag,IsessionCallback callback)”向NatService模块1312请求建立与电子设备200的传输会话。其中,该函数“createSessionByTunnelID(p2ptoken,remoteTunnelID,flag,IsessionCallback callback)”中的参数“p2ptoken”为上述P2P Token-A,参数“remoteTunnelID”为电子设备200的会话标识B。For example, the FusionCall module 1311 can request the NatService module 1312 to establish a transmission session with the electronic device 200 through the function "createSessionByTunnelID (p2ptoken, remoteTunnelID, flag, IsessionCallback callback)". Among them, the parameter "p2ptoken" in the function "createSessionByTunnelID (p2ptoken, remoteTunnelID, flag, IsessionCallback callback)" is the above-mentioned P2P Token-A, and the parameter "remoteTunnelID" is the session ID B of the electronic device 200.
S1805、NatService模块1312向FusionCall模块1311返回传输会话创建结果。S1805. The NatService module 1312 returns the transmission session creation result to the FusionCall module 1311.
其中,传输会话创建结果可以包括创建成功和创建失败。The transfer session creation result may include creation success and creation failure.
例如,NatService模块1312可以通过函数“ISessionCallback”返回会话创建结果给FusionCall模块1311。其中,函数“ISessionCallback”可以包括创建成功函数“onSessionCreate(Session session)”、创建失败函数“onconnectorState(int errorCode,String desc)”。For example, the NatService module 1312 can return the session creation result to the FusionCall module 1311 through the function "ISessionCallback". Among them, the function "ISessionCallback" can include the creation success function "onSessionCreate(Session session)" and the creation failure function "onconnectorState(int errorCode, String desc)".
S1806、在传输会话创建成功后,FusionCall模块1311可以向NatService模块1312添加监听事件。S1806. After the transmission session is successfully created, the FusionCall module 1311 can add a listening event to the NatService module 1312.
其中,该NatService模块1312添加监听事件后,可用于监听电子设备200在传输会话上发送给电子设备100的数据。Among them, after the NatService module 1312 adds a listening event, it can be used to monitor the data sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 on the transmission session.
例如,FusionCall模块1311可以通过函数“addListener(p2ptoken,ISessionListener listener)”向NatService模块1312添加监听事件,以监听传输会话上来自电子设备200的数据。其中,NatService模块1312可以通过函数“ISessionListener listener”,向FusionCall模块1311返回监听事件的监听结果。For example, the FusionCall module 1311 can add a listening event to the NatService module 1312 through the function "addListener (p2ptoken, ISessionListener listener)" to listen to data from the electronic device 200 on the transmission session. Among them, the NatService module 1312 can return the listening result of the listening event to the FusionCall module 1311 through the function "ISessionListener listener".
S1807、电子设备200上的FusionCall模块1341向NatService模块1342提供发送数据。S1807. The FusionCall module 1341 on the electronic device 200 provides sending data to the NatService module 1342.
S1808、NatService模块1342通过P2P直传/服务器中继等方式,将数据发送给电子设备100上的NatService模块1312。S1808. The NatService module 1342 sends the data to the NatService module 1312 on the electronic device 100 through P2P direct transmission/server relay, etc.
S1809、NatService模块1312可以在接收到NatService模块1342发送的数据之后,将接收数据返回给FusionCall模块1311。S1809. After receiving the data sent by the NatService module 1342, the NatService module 1312 may return the received data to the FusionCall module 1311.
例如,NatService模块1312可以用函数“onAcceptBytes(byte[]data)”向FusionCall模块1311返回成功监听到电子设备200发送的数据。NatService模块1312可以用函数“onLisetenError(int errorCode,String desc)”向FusionCall模块1311返回监听失败的原因(例如,错误码“errorCode”)。For example, the NatService module 1312 can use the function "onAcceptBytes(byte[]data)" to return to the FusionCall module 1311 the data sent by the electronic device 200 after being successfully monitored. The NatService module 1312 can use the function "onLisetenError(int errorCode, String desc)" to return the reason for the monitoring failure (for example, error code "errorCode") to the FusionCall module 1311.
S1810、FusionCall模块1311向NatService模块1312提供发送数据。S1810. FusionCall module 1311 provides sending data to NatService module 1312.
例如,FusionCall模块1311可以通过函数“Session.sendBytes(byte[]data)”向NatService模块1312提供要发给电子设备200的数据。For example, the FusionCall module 1311 can provide the NatService module 1312 with data to be sent to the electronic device 200 through the function "Session.sendBytes(byte[]data)".
S1811、NatService模块1312通过P2P直传/服务器中继等方式,将会话传输数据发送给电子设备200上的NatService模块1342。S1811. The NatService module 1312 sends the session transmission data to the NatService module 1342 on the electronic device 200 through P2P direct transmission/server relay, etc.
S1812、电子设备200上的NatService模块1342可以在接收到电子设备100上的NatService模块1312发送的数据之后,将接收数据返回给FusionCall模块1341。S1812. After receiving the data sent by the NatService module 1312 on the electronic device 100, the NatService module 1342 on the electronic device 200 may return the received data to the FusionCall module 1341.
S1813、FusionCall模块1311向NatService模块1312移除监听事件。S1813. The FusionCall module 1311 removes the listening event from the NatService module 1312.
其中,FusionCall模块1311可以在电子设备100与电子设备200之间的数据完成之后,向NatService模块1312移除监听事件。Among them, the FusionCall module 1311 can remove the listening event to the NatService module 1312 after the data between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is completed.
例如,FusionCall模块1311可以通过函数“removeListener(SessionListener listener)”向NatService模块1312移除监听事件。For example, the FusionCall module 1311 can remove the listening event to the NatService module 1312 through the function "removeListener (SessionListener listener)".
S1814、FusionCall模块1311向NatService模块1312请求释放会话。S1814. The FusionCall module 1311 requests the NatService module 1312 to release the session.
例如,FusionCall模块1311可以通过函数“releaseSession(Session session)”向NatService模块1312请求释放与电子设备200的传输会话。For example, the FusionCall module 1311 can request the NatService module 1312 to release the transmission session with the electronic device 200 through the function "releaseSession (Session session)".
S1815、FusionCall模块1311向NatService模块1312请求销毁传输服务。S1815. The FusionCall module 1311 requests the NatService module 1312 to destroy the transmission service.
例如,FusionCall模块1311可以通过函数“RfcManager.free(Session session)”请求销毁NatService模块1312上已初始化的传输服务。For example, the FusionCall module 1311 can request the destruction of the initialized transmission service on the NatService module 1312 through the function "RfcManager.free(Session session)".
下面介绍本申请实施例中的P2P直传链路建立流程。The following describes the P2P direct link establishment process in the embodiment of this application.
图19示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种P2P直传链路建立流程的示意图。Figure 19 shows a schematic diagram of a P2P direct link establishment process provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图19所示,电子设备100上可以包括FusionCall模块1311、NatService模块1312。NAT穿越云服 务器1390可以包括TRS服务器1391、Connector服务器1394、TURN服务器1393、STUN服务器1392。As shown in Figure 19, the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311 and a NatService module 1312. NAT traversal cloud server The server 1390 may include a TRS server 1391, a Connector server 1394, a TURN server 1393, and a STUN server 1392.
该P2P直传链路建立流程可以包括如下阶段:The P2P direct link establishment process may include the following stages:
1.获取TRS路由:步骤S1901至步骤S1902。1. Obtain TRS route: step S1901 to step S1902.
2.获取本端会话标识(sessionID):步骤S1903至步骤S1904。2. Obtain the local session ID (sessionID): step S1903 to step S1904.
3.交换sessionID:步骤S1905。3. Exchange session ID: step S1905.
4.NAT穿越流程。4.NAT traversal process.
其中,NAT穿越阶段包括:Among them, the NAT traversal stage includes:
4.1.获取本端的NAT公网信息:步骤S1906至步骤S1907。4.1. Obtain the local NAT public network information: Step S1906 to Step S1907.
4.2.两端NAT公网信息交换:步骤S1908至步骤S1910。4.2. NAT public network information exchange at both ends: step S1908 to step S1910.
4.3.连接探测、传输通道建立:步骤S1911。4.3. Connection detection and transmission channel establishment: step S1911.
步骤S1901至步骤S1911可以如下:Steps S1901 to S1911 may be as follows:
S1901、NatService模块1312可以发送路由获取请求给TRS服务器1391。S1901. The NatService module 1312 may send a route acquisition request to the TRS server 1391.
其中,路由获取请求用于获取Connector服务器1394的地址信息、TURN服务器1393的地址信息、STUN服务器1392的地址信息。其中,该地址信息可以包括IP地址和端口(port)号。该路由获取请求中可以携带有业务服务器1380给电子设备100发送的P2P Token-A。The route acquisition request is used to obtain the address information of the Connector server 1394, the address information of the TURN server 1393, and the address information of the STUN server 1392. The address information may include an IP address and a port number. The route acquisition request may carry the P2P Token-A sent by the service server 1380 to the electronic device 100.
例如,NatService模块1312可以通过TRS服务器1391提供的接口“getroute”,获取TRS服务器1391上的路由信息。其中,TRS服务器1391的接口协议可以是传输控制协议(transmission control protocol,TCP)或超文本传输安全协议(hyper text transfer protocol over secure socket layer,HTTPS),等等。For example, the NatService module 1312 can obtain the routing information on the TRS server 1391 through the interface "getroute" provided by the TRS server 1391. Among them, the interface protocol of the TRS server 1391 can be transmission control protocol (transmission control protocol, TCP) or hyper text transfer protocol (hyper text transfer protocol over secure socket layer, HTTPS), etc.
S1902、TRS服务器1391在接收到路由获取请求后,可以向NatService模块1312返回路由信息。S1902. After receiving the route acquisition request, the TRS server 1391 may return routing information to the NatService module 1312.
其中,该路由信息包括获取Connector服务器1394的地址信息、TURN服务器1393的地址信息、STUN服务器1392的地址信息。其中,该地址信息可以包括IP地址和端口(port)。The routing information includes obtaining the address information of the Connector server 1394, the address information of the TURN server 1393, and the address information of the STUN server 1392. The address information may include an IP address and a port.
S1903、NatService模块1312长连接登录至TRS服务器1391。S1903. The NatService module 1312 logs in to the TRS server 1391 through a long connection.
其中,NatService模块1312通过Connector服务器1394提供的接口长连接登录至TRS服务器1391时,将P2P Token-A发送给Connector服务器1394。该Connector服务器1394的接口协议可以是TCP或传输层安全性协议(transport layer security,TLS)。在Connector服务器1394提供的接口传输P2P Token-A给Connector服务器1394时,P2P Token-A的数据读写方式可以是二进制大端的读写方式,即低地址存放P2P Token-A的最高有效字节。Among them, when the NatService module 1312 logs in to the TRS server 1391 through a long connection through the interface provided by the Connector server 1394, it sends P2P Token-A to the Connector server 1394. The interface protocol of the Connector server 1394 may be TCP or transport layer security (TLS). When the interface provided by the Connector server 1394 transmits P2P Token-A to the Connector server 1394, the data reading and writing method of P2P Token-A can be the binary big-endian reading and writing method, that is, the most significant byte of P2P Token-A is stored in the low address.
S1904、Connector服务器1394返回会话标识A(sessionID-A)给NatService模块1312。S1904. The Connector server 1394 returns the session ID A (sessionID-A) to the NatService module 1312.
S1905、FusionCall模块1311通过业务服务器1380与电子设备200交换双方的会话标识。S1905. FusionCall module 1311 exchanges session identifiers of both parties with electronic device 200 through service server 1380.
具体内容,可以参考前述图15-图17所示实施例,在此不再赘述。For specific content, reference may be made to the aforementioned embodiments shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 , which will not be described again here.
S1906、NatService模块1312向STUN服务器1392发送针对电子设备100的NAT公网信息的获取请求。S1906. The NatService module 1312 sends an acquisition request for the NAT public network information of the electronic device 100 to the STUN server 1392.
其中,该针对电子设备100的NAT公网信息的获取请求中携带有上述P2P Token-A。Among them, the request for obtaining the NAT public network information of the electronic device 100 carries the above-mentioned P2P Token-A.
例如,NatService模块1312可以在STUN服务器1392提供的接口通过函数“Binding”发送针对电子设备100的NAT公网信息的获取请求给STUN服务器1392。其中,该STUN服务器1392的接口协议可以是STUN协议或数据包传输层安全性(datagram transport layer security,DTLS)协议。For example, the NatService module 1312 can send a request for obtaining the NAT public network information of the electronic device 100 to the STUN server 1392 through the function "Binding" through the interface provided by the STUN server 1392. The interface protocol of the STUN server 1392 may be the STUN protocol or the datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocol.
S1907、STUN服务器1392向FusionCall模块1311返回电子设备100的NAT公网信息A。S1907. The STUN server 1392 returns the NAT public network information A of the electronic device 100 to the FusionCall module 1311.
其中,该NAT公网信息A可以包括电子设备100的公网IP地址和公网转内网的端口号。The NAT public network information A may include the public network IP address of the electronic device 100 and the port number from the public network to the intranet.
在一种示例中,STUN服务器1392可以将电子设备100的NAT公网信息A压缩或者加密后返回给FusionCall模块1311。例如,可以将NAT公网信息A异或后,返回给FusionCall模块1311。In one example, the STUN server 1392 may compress or encrypt the NAT public network information A of the electronic device 100 and return it to the FusionCall module 1311. For example, the NAT public network information A can be XORed and then returned to the FusionCall module 1311.
S1908、NatService模块1312向Connector服务器1394发送消息A。S1908. The NatService module 1312 sends message A to the Connector server 1394.
其中,该消息A中携带有电子设备100的NAT公网信息A和电子设备200的会话标识B(sessionID-B)。其中,电子设备200的会话标识B(sessionID-B)为Connector服务器1394给电子设备200生成的会话标识。电子设备200可以基于sessionID-B与Connector服务器1394进行长连接会话。The message A carries the NAT public network information A of the electronic device 100 and the session ID-B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200 . The session ID-B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200 is a session ID generated by the Connector server 1394 for the electronic device 200 . The electronic device 200 can conduct a long connection session with the Connector server 1394 based on sessionID-B.
S1909、Connector服务器1394转发该消息中电子设备100的NAT公网信息A给电子设备200。S1909. The Connector server 1394 forwards the NAT public network information A of the electronic device 100 in the message to the electronic device 200.
S1910、Connector服务器1394可以将电子设备200的NAT公网信息B发送给NatService模块1312。 S1910. The Connector server 1394 may send the NAT public network information B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312.
其中,电子设备200也可以向STUN服务器1392发送针对电子设备200的NAT公网信息的获取请求。该针对电子设备200的NAT公网信息的获取请求中携带有业务云服务器1380分配给电子设备200的P2P Token-B。STUN服务器1392可以将电子设备200的NAT公网信息B返回给电子设备200。该NAT公网信息B中包括有电子设备200的公网IP地址和公网转内网的端口号。电子设备200可以发送消息B给Connector服务器1394。其中,消息B携带有电子设备100的会话标识A和电子设备200的NAT公网信息B。Connector服务器1394在接收到消息B后,可以将电子设备200的NAT公网信息B转发给电子设备100上的NatService模块1312。The electronic device 200 may also send a request for obtaining the NAT public network information of the electronic device 200 to the STUN server 1392. The request for obtaining the NAT public network information of the electronic device 200 carries the P2P Token-B assigned to the electronic device 200 by the business cloud server 1380. The STUN server 1392 may return the NAT public network information B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 200 . The NAT public network information B includes the public network IP address of the electronic device 200 and the port number from the public network to the intranet. Electronic device 200 may send message B to Connector server 1394. Message B carries the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the NAT public network information B of the electronic device 200 . After receiving the message B, the Connector server 1394 can forward the NAT public network information B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312 on the electronic device 100 .
S1911、NatService模块1312收到电子设备200的NAT公网信息B后,可以基于NAT公网信息B,与电子设备200进行连接探测,建立P2P传输链路。S1911. After receiving the NAT public network information B of the electronic device 200, the NatService module 1312 can perform connection detection with the electronic device 200 based on the NAT public network information B and establish a P2P transmission link.
电子设备100可以基于该P2P传输链路传输用户选中分享给电子设备200的指定数据内容,以及控制信息(例如,撤回指令,文件销毁指令等等)等内容给电子设备200。电子设备200也可以基于该P2P传输链路返回控制信息(例如,确认接收指令、拒绝接收指令,等等)或其他数据给电子设备100。The electronic device 100 can transmit specified data content selected by the user to be shared with the electronic device 200 based on the P2P transmission link, as well as control information (such as withdrawal instructions, file destruction instructions, etc.) to the electronic device 200 . The electronic device 200 may also return control information (eg, confirm receipt of instructions, refuse to receive instructions, etc.) or other data to the electronic device 100 based on the P2P transmission link.
下面介绍本申请实施例中的中继链路建立流程。The following describes the relay link establishment process in the embodiment of this application.
图20示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种中继链路建立流程的示意图。Figure 20 shows a schematic diagram of a relay link establishment process provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图20所示,电子设备100上可以包括FusionCall模块1311、NatService模块1312。NAT穿越云服务器1390可以包括TRS服务器1391、Connector服务器1394、TURN服务器1393、STUN服务器1392。As shown in Figure 20, the electronic device 100 may include a FusionCall module 1311 and a NatService module 1312. The NAT traversal cloud server 1390 may include a TRS server 1391, a Connector server 1394, a TURN server 1393, and a STUN server 1392.
该中继链路建立流程可以包括如下阶段:The trunk link establishment process may include the following stages:
1.获取TRS路由:步骤S2001至步骤S2002。1. Obtain TRS route: step S2001 to step S2002.
2.获取本端会话标识(sessionID):步骤S2003至步骤S2004。2. Obtain the local session ID (sessionID): step S2003 to step S2004.
3.交换sessionID:步骤S2005。3. Exchange session ID: step S2005.
4.中继流程。其中,NAT穿越阶段包括:4. Relay process. Among them, the NAT traversal stage includes:
4.1.通道分配:步骤S2006至步骤S2007。4.1. Channel allocation: step S2006 to step S2007.
4.2.两端中继地址交换:步骤S2008至步骤S2010。4.2. Relay address exchange at both ends: step S2008 to step S2010.
4.3.创建许可:步骤S2011至步骤S2012。4.3. Create license: step S2011 to step S2012.
4.4.发送/接收数据:步骤S2013至步骤S2016。4.4. Send/receive data: step S2013 to step S2016.
步骤S2001至步骤S2016可以如下:Step S2001 to step S2016 may be as follows:
S2001、NatService模块1312可以发送路由获取请求给TRS服务器1391。S2001. The NatService module 1312 may send a route acquisition request to the TRS server 1391.
S2002、TRS服务器1391在接收到路由获取请求后,可以向NatService模块1312返回路由信息。S2002. After receiving the route acquisition request, the TRS server 1391 may return routing information to the NatService module 1312.
S2003、NatService模块1312长连接登录至TRS服务器1391。S2003. The NatService module 1312 logs in to the TRS server 1391 through a long connection.
S2004、TRS服务器1391返回会话标识A(sessionID-A)给NatService模块1312。S2004. The TRS server 1391 returns the session ID A (sessionID-A) to the NatService module 1312.
S2005、FusionCall模块1311通过业务服务器1380与电子设备200交换双方的会话标识。S2005. FusionCall module 1311 exchanges session identifiers of both parties with electronic device 200 through service server 1380.
其中,步骤S2001步骤S2005,可以参考前述图19所示实施例中的步骤S1901至步骤S1905,在此不再赘述。For steps S2001 and S2005, reference may be made to steps S1901 to S1905 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 19 , which will not be described again here.
S2006、NatService模块1312向TURN服务器1393发送针对电子设备100的中继地址的获取请求。S2006. The NatService module 1312 sends an acquisition request for the relay address of the electronic device 100 to the TURN server 1393.
其中,针对电子设备100的中继地址的获取请求中携带有上述P2P Token-A。Among them, the acquisition request for the relay address of the electronic device 100 carries the above-mentioned P2P Token-A.
例如,NatService模块1312可以在TURN服务器1393提供的接口中通过函数“Allocation”或“Refresh”发送针对电子设备100的中继地址的获取请求给TURN服务器1393。其中,该TURN服务器1393的接口协议可以是TURN协议或数据包传输层安全性(datagram transport layer security,DTLS)协议。该函数“Allocation”或“Refresh”读写P2P Token-A的数据的方式可以是二进制大端的读写方式,即低地址存放P2P Token-A的最高有效字节。P2P Token-A的数据格式可以是标签长度值(tag length value,TLV)格式。For example, the NatService module 1312 may send an acquisition request for the relay address of the electronic device 100 to the TURN server 1393 through the function "Allocation" or "Refresh" in the interface provided by the TURN server 1393. The interface protocol of the TURN server 1393 may be the TURN protocol or the datagram transport layer security (DTLS) protocol. The function "Allocation" or "Refresh" can read and write the data of P2P Token-A in binary big-endian way, that is, the most significant byte of P2P Token-A is stored in the low address. The data format of P2P Token-A can be tag length value (TLV) format.
S2007、TURN服务器1393向FusionCall模块1311返回电子设备100的中继地址A。S2007. The TURN server 1393 returns the relay address A of the electronic device 100 to the FusionCall module 1311.
在一种示例中,STUN服务器1392可以将电子设备100的中继地址A压缩或者加密后返回给FusionCall模块1311。例如,可以将中继地址A异或后,返回给FusionCall模块1311。In an example, the STUN server 1392 may compress or encrypt the relay address A of the electronic device 100 and return it to the FusionCall module 1311. For example, the relay address A can be XORed and then returned to the FusionCall module 1311.
S2008、NatService模块1312向Connector服务器1394发送消息C。S2008. The NatService module 1312 sends message C to the Connector server 1394.
其中,该消息C中携带有电子设备100的中继地址A和电子设备200的会话标识B(sessionID-B)。 其中,电子设备200的会话标识B(sessionID-B)为Connector服务器1394给电子设备200生成的会话标识。电子设备200可以基于sessionID-B与Connector服务器1394进行长连接会话。The message C carries the relay address A of the electronic device 100 and the session ID-B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200 . The session ID-B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200 is a session ID generated by the Connector server 1394 for the electronic device 200 . The electronic device 200 can conduct a long connection session with the Connector server 1394 based on sessionID-B.
例如,NatService模块1312可以在Connector服务器1394提供的接口中通过函数“SendMsg()”发送消息A给在Connector服务器1394。其中,该消息C中的数据可以是二进制大端的读写方式。Connector服务器1394的接口协议可以是TCP协议或者TLS协议。For example, the NatService module 1312 can send message A to the Connector server 1394 through the function "SendMsg()" in the interface provided by the Connector server 1394. Among them, the data in the message C can be read and written in binary big-endian format. The interface protocol of the Connector server 1394 may be the TCP protocol or the TLS protocol.
S2009、Connector服务器1394转发该消息C中电子设备100的中继地址A给电子设备200。S2009. The Connector server 1394 forwards the relay address A of the electronic device 100 in the message C to the electronic device 200.
S2010、Connector服务器1394可以将电子设备200的中继地址B发送给NatService模块1312。S2010. The Connector server 1394 may send the relay address B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312.
其中,电子设备200也可以向TURN服务器1393发送针对电子设备200的中继地址的获取请求。该针对电子设备200的中继地址的获取请求中携带有业务云服务器1380分配给电子设备200的P2P Token-B。TURN服务器1393可以将电子设备200的中继地址B返回给电子设备200。电子设备200可以发送消息D给Connector服务器1394。其中,消息D携带有电子设备100的会话标识A和电子设备200的中继地址。Connector服务器1394在接收到消息B后,可以将电子设备200的中继地址B转发给电子设备100上的NatService模块1312。The electronic device 200 may also send an acquisition request for the relay address of the electronic device 200 to the TURN server 1393. The request for obtaining the relay address of the electronic device 200 carries the P2P Token-B assigned to the electronic device 200 by the business cloud server 1380. The TURN server 1393 may return the relay address B of the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 200 . Electronic device 200 may send message D to Connector server 1394. The message D carries the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the relay address of the electronic device 200 . After receiving the message B, the Connector server 1394 may forward the relay address B of the electronic device 200 to the NatService module 1312 on the electronic device 100 .
S2011、NatService模块1312可以发送许可创建请求A给TURN服务器1393。S2011. The NatService module 1312 may send the license creation request A to the TURN server 1393.
其中,该许可创建请求A可以携带有电子设备100的P2P Token-A、电子设备200的中继地址B。该许可创建请求A可用于请求TURN服务器1393创建电子设备100到电子设备200的中继转发链路。Among them, the license creation request A may carry the P2P Token-A of the electronic device 100 and the relay address B of the electronic device 200. The permission creation request A may be used to request the TURN server 1393 to create a relay forwarding link from the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 .
例如,该NatService模块1312可以在TURN服务器1393的接口上基于TURN协议或DTLS协议,通过函数“CreatePermission()”发送许可创建请求A给TURN服务器1393。For example, the NatService module 1312 can send the permission creation request A to the TURN server 1393 through the function "CreatePermission()" based on the TURN protocol or the DTLS protocol on the interface of the TURN server 1393.
S2012、电子设备200可以发送许可创建请求B给TURN服务器1393。S2012. The electronic device 200 may send the license creation request B to the TURN server 1393.
其中,该许可创建请求B可以携带有电子设备200的P2P Token-B、电子设备100的中继地址A。该许可创建请求B可用于请求TURN服务器1393创建电子设备200到电子设备100的中继转发链路。Among them, the license creation request B may carry the P2P Token-B of the electronic device 200 and the relay address A of the electronic device 100. This permission creation request B may be used to request the TURN server 1393 to create a relay forwarding link from the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 .
例如,该电子设备200可以在TURN服务器1393提供的接口上基于TURN协议或DTLS协议,通过函数“CreatePermission()”发送许可创建请求B给TURN服务器1393。For example, the electronic device 200 can send the permission creation request B to the TURN server 1393 through the function "CreatePermission()" based on the TURN protocol or the DTLS protocol on the interface provided by the TURN server 1393.
S2013、NatService模块1312可以发送数据包A给TURN服务器1393。S2013. The NatService module 1312 can send data packet A to the TURN server 1393.
其中,该数据包A中携带有电子设备200的会话标识B(sessionID-B)、电子设备200的中继地址B和数据A。The data packet A carries the session ID B (sessionID-B) of the electronic device 200, the relay address B and the data A of the electronic device 200.
例如,NatService模块1312可以在TURN服务器1393提供的接口上通过函数“Send()”发送数据包A给TURN服务器1393。其中,该数据包A中数据的读写方式可以二进制大端的读写方式,即低地址存放数据包A中数据的最高有效字节。数据包A的数据格式可以是标签长度值(tag length value,TLV)格式。For example, the NatService module 1312 can send the data packet A to the TURN server 1393 through the function "Send()" on the interface provided by the TURN server 1393. Among them, the data in the data packet A can be read and written in the binary big-endian reading and writing mode, that is, the most significant byte of the data in the data packet A is stored at the low address. The data format of packet A may be tag length value (TLV) format.
S2014、TURN服务器1393可以将数据包A转发给电子设备200。S2014. The TURN server 1393 may forward the data packet A to the electronic device 200.
TURN服务器1393在接收到数据包A后,可以解析出数据包A中携带的电子设备200的会话标识B和电子设备200的中继地址B。因此,TURN服务器1393可以基于电子设备200的会话标识B和电子设备200的中继地址B,确定该数据包A中的数据是发送给电子设备200的。TURN服务器1393将该数据包A中的数据A转发给电子设备200。After receiving the data packet A, the TURN server 1393 can parse out the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 and the relay address B of the electronic device 200 carried in the data packet A. Therefore, the TURN server 1393 can determine that the data in the data packet A is sent to the electronic device 200 based on the session identifier B of the electronic device 200 and the relay address B of the electronic device 200 . The TURN server 1393 forwards the data A in the data packet A to the electronic device 200 .
S2015、电子设备200可以向TURN服务器1393发送数据包B。S2015. The electronic device 200 can send data packet B to the TURN server 1393.
其中,该数据包B中携带有电子设备100的会话标识A(sessionID-A)、电子设备200的中继地址B和数据B。The data packet B carries the session ID A (sessionID-A) of the electronic device 100, the relay address B and the data B of the electronic device 200.
S2016、TURN服务器1393可以转发数据包B给NatService模块1312。S2016. The TURN server 1393 can forward the data packet B to the NatService module 1312.
TURN服务器1393在接收到数据包B后,可以解析出数据包B中携带的电子设备100的会话标识A和电子设备100的中继地址A。因此,TURN服务器1393可以基于电子设备100的会话标识A和电子设备100的中继地址A,确定该数据包B中的数据是发送给电子设备100的。TURN服务器1393可以将该数据包B中的数据B转发给电子设备100。After receiving the data packet B, the TURN server 1393 can parse out the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the relay address A of the electronic device 100 carried in the data packet B. Therefore, the TURN server 1393 can determine that the data in the data packet B is sent to the electronic device 100 based on the session identifier A of the electronic device 100 and the relay address A of the electronic device 100 . The TURN server 1393 may forward data B in the data packet B to the electronic device 100 .
例如,NatService模块1312可以在TURN服务器1393提供的接口上通过函数“Recv()”接收数据B。其中,该数据B的读写方式可以是二进制大端的读写方式,即低地址存放数据B的最高有效字节。数据包A的数据格式可以是标签长度值(tag length value,TLV)格式。For example, the NatService module 1312 can receive the data B through the function "Recv()" on the interface provided by the TURN server 1393. Among them, the reading and writing method of the data B can be the binary big-endian reading and writing method, that is, the most significant byte of the data B is stored in the low address. The data format of packet A may be tag length value (TLV) format.
其中,该电子设备100的中继地址A可用于指示TURN服务器1393上为电子设备200提供通信接口 的接入端A的IP地址。该电子设备200的中继地址B可用于指示TURN服务器1393上为电子设备200提供通信接口的接入端B的IP地址。在一种示例中,接入端A的IP地址和接入端B的IP地址可以相同,在一种示例中,接入端A的IP地址和接入端B的IP地址也可以不同。The relay address A of the electronic device 100 can be used to instruct the TURN server 1393 to provide a communication interface for the electronic device 200 The IP address of access terminal A. The relay address B of the electronic device 200 may be used to indicate the IP address of the access terminal B on the TURN server 1393 that provides a communication interface for the electronic device 200 . In an example, the IP address of access terminal A and the IP address of access terminal B may be the same. In an example, the IP address of access terminal A and the IP address of access terminal B may also be different.
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种设备唤醒流程。The following introduces a device wake-up process provided in the embodiment of this application.
图21示出了本申请实施例中一种设备唤醒流程的示意图。Figure 21 shows a schematic diagram of a device wake-up process in an embodiment of the present application.
如图21所示,以云服务器唤300唤醒电子设备200为例,电子设备200可以包括有应用、移动服务(例如,华为移动服务(huawei mobile service,HMS),等等)、推送代理(push agent)。云服务器300上可以包括推送(push)服务器和业务云服务器1380。该设备唤醒流程可以包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 21, taking the cloud server 300 to wake up the electronic device 200 as an example, the electronic device 200 may include applications, mobile services (for example, Huawei mobile service (HMS), etc.), push agents (push agents), etc. agent). The cloud server 300 may include a push server and a business cloud server 1380. The device wake-up process may include the following steps:
S2101、融合通话应用可以向移动服务请求推送令牌(push Token)。S2101. The integrated call application can request a push token from the mobile service.
S2102、移动服务可以通过发送广播给push agent。S2102. The mobile service can send a broadcast to the push agent.
S2103、push agent在接收到广播后,可以从push服务器1372上请求push Token。S2103. After receiving the broadcast, the push agent can request the push Token from the push server 1372.
S2104、push服务器1372返回推送令牌A(push Token-A)给push agent。S2104. The push server 1372 returns push token A (push Token-A) to the push agent.
其中,该push服务器1372可以对电子设备100进行认证,在认证成功之后,向push agent返回push token-B。该认证包括用户级认证或设备级认证,对电子设备100的认证过程,可以参考前述图13A所示实施例,在此不再赘述。Among them, the push server 1372 can authenticate the electronic device 100, and after successful authentication, return push token-B to the push agent. The authentication includes user-level authentication or device-level authentication. For the authentication process of the electronic device 100, reference can be made to the aforementioned embodiment shown in FIG. 13A, which will not be described again here.
S2105、push agent可以将push Token返回给融合通话应用。S2105, the push agent can return the push Token to the converged call application.
S2106、融合通话应用可以将push Token-B保存至应用服务器。S2106. The integrated call application can save push Token-B to the application server.
S2107、融合通话应用关闭,断开与应用服务器之间的长连接。S2107. The converged call application is closed and the long connection with the application server is disconnected.
其中,由于电子设备200锁屏或者灭屏或者用户主动关闭该应用等情况,导致融合通话应用关闭,从而断开与业务云服务器1380之间的长连接。Among them, due to the electronic device 200 locking or extinguishing the screen or the user actively closing the application, etc., the converged call application is closed, thereby disconnecting the long connection with the business cloud server 1380 .
S2108、业务云服务器1380可以确定需要唤醒电子设备200。S2108. The business cloud server 1380 may determine that the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up.
其中,业务云服务器1380可以在接收到用于查询电子设备200的会话标识的查询请求A之后,查询业务云服务器1380上是否保存有电子设备200的会话标识。若业务云服务器1380未查询到电子设备200的会话标识,且业务云服务器1380与电子设备200的长连接已经断开时,业务云服务器1380可以确定需要唤醒电子设备200。Wherein, after receiving the query request A for querying the session ID of the electronic device 200, the business cloud server 1380 may query whether the session ID of the electronic device 200 is stored on the business cloud server 1380. If the business cloud server 1380 does not query the session ID of the electronic device 200 and the long connection between the business cloud server 1380 and the electronic device 200 has been disconnected, the business cloud server 1380 may determine that the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up.
在一种示例中,在业务云服务器1380未查询到电子设备200的会话标识时,业务云服务器1380可以发送通知给电子设备100,该通知用于通知电子设备100,电子设备200未唤醒。电子设备100可以接收用户确认唤醒电子设备200的输入,响应于该输入,电子设备100可以发送唤醒指示给业务云服务器1380。该业务云服务器1380在接收到该唤醒指示后,可以确定需要唤醒电子设备200。In one example, when the business cloud server 1380 does not query the session ID of the electronic device 200, the business cloud server 1380 can send a notification to the electronic device 100. The notification is used to notify the electronic device 100 that the electronic device 200 has not woken up. The electronic device 100 may receive an input from the user confirming to wake up the electronic device 200, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a wake-up indication to the business cloud server 1380. After receiving the wake-up instruction, the business cloud server 1380 may determine that the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up.
S2109、业务云服务器1380在确定需要唤醒电子设备200之后,可以发送唤醒指令给push服务器1372。其中,该唤醒指令中携带有push Token-B。S2109. After determining that the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up, the business cloud server 1380 may send a wake-up instruction to the push server 1372. Among them, the wake-up command carries push Token-B.
S2110、push服务器1372在接收到业务云服务器1380可以发送唤醒消息给push agent。S2110. After receiving the push server 1372, the business cloud server 1380 can send a wake-up message to the push agent.
S2111、push agent可以在接收到唤醒消息后,唤醒融合通话应用长连接登录至业务云服务器1380。S2111, the push agent can wake up the integrated call application to log in to the business cloud server 1380 through a long connection after receiving the wake-up message.
在一种示例中,该push Token-B中携带有融合通话应用的应用标识和电子设备200的设备标识。push服务器1372在接收到该携带有push Token-B的唤醒指令后,push服务器1372可以发送唤醒消息给与push服务器1372建立长连接的一个或多个push agent,其中,该唤醒消息中包括以后push Token-B。电子设备200上的push agent在接收到该唤醒消息后,可以判断该push Token-B中携带的设备标识是否为电子设备200的设备标识,若是,则电子设备200的push agent可以唤醒该push Token-B中应用标识指示的融合通话应用。In one example, the push Token-B carries the application identification of the converged call application and the device identification of the electronic device 200 . After the push server 1372 receives the wake-up instruction carrying push Token-B, the push server 1372 can send a wake-up message to one or more push agents that have established long connections with the push server 1372, where the wake-up message includes the following push Token-B. After receiving the wake-up message, the push agent on the electronic device 200 can determine whether the device identification carried in the push Token-B is the device identification of the electronic device 200. If so, the push agent on the electronic device 200 can wake up the push Token. -The converged call application indicated by the application identifier in B.
在一种示例中,电子设备200的push agent在向push服务器1372请求push Token时,可以将融合通话应用的应用标识和电子设备200的设备标识发送给push服务器1372。push服务器1372可以基于融合通话应用的应用标识和电子设备200的设备标识,生成push Token-B。push服务器1372可以将于融合通话应用的应用标识和电子设备200的设备标识、以及push Token-B绑定成映射关系进行保存。push服务器1372在接收到该唤醒指令后,可以基于唤醒指令中的push Token-B,从本地存储映射关系中确定出需要唤醒的是电子设备200上的融合通话应用。push服务器1372可以发送唤醒消息给电子设备200的push agent。其中,该唤醒消息中携带有融合通话应用的应用标识,或者,该唤醒消息中携带有融合通话应用的应用标识和电子设备200的设备标识。电子设备200的push agent在接收到该唤醒消息后,可以唤醒电子设备200的人融合通话应用。 In one example, when requesting a push Token from the push server 1372, the push agent of the electronic device 200 may send the application identification of the fused call application and the device identification of the electronic device 200 to the push server 1372. The push server 1372 may generate push Token-B based on the application identification of the integrated call application and the device identification of the electronic device 200 . The push server 1372 may bind the application identification of the converged calling application, the device identification of the electronic device 200 and the push Token-B into a mapping relationship and save them. After receiving the wake-up instruction, the push server 1372 may determine from the local storage mapping relationship that the converged call application on the electronic device 200 needs to be awakened based on the push Token-B in the wake-up instruction. The push server 1372 may send a wakeup message to the push agent of the electronic device 200 . The wake-up message carries the application identification of the converged calling application, or the wake-up message carries the application identification of the converged calling application and the device identification of the electronic device 200 . After receiving the wake-up message, the push agent of the electronic device 200 can wake up the human fusion call application of the electronic device 200 .
在一种示例中,电子设备200可以不将push Token-B保存至业务云服务器1380电子设备100可以在唤醒电子设备200之前,获取到电子设备200的push Token-B,电子设备100可以接收用户确认唤醒电子设备200的输入,响应于该输入,电子设备100可以发送唤醒指示给业务云服务器1380。其中,该唤醒指示中携带有电子设备200的push Token-B。该业务云服务器1380在接收到该唤醒指示后,可以确定需要唤醒电子设备200,并向电子设备200的push agent发送上述携带有push Token-B的唤醒消息。In one example, the electronic device 200 may not save the push Token-B to the business cloud server 1380. The electronic device 100 may obtain the push Token-B of the electronic device 200 before waking up the electronic device 200, and the electronic device 100 may receive the user The input to wake up the electronic device 200 is confirmed, and in response to the input, the electronic device 100 may send a wake-up indication to the business cloud server 1380 . Among them, the wake-up instruction carries the push Token-B of the electronic device 200. After receiving the wake-up instruction, the business cloud server 1380 may determine that the electronic device 200 needs to be woken up, and send the above-mentioned wake-up message carrying push Token-B to the push agent of the electronic device 200.
下面介绍本申请实施例中数据封包和解包过程。The following describes the data packetizing and unpacking process in the embodiment of this application.
电子设备100在读取到用户选中的指定数据后,可以对指定数据进行封包处理。在通过网络传输该指定数据时,需要对网络字节序进行数据的对齐。因此,本申请实施例中提供一种数据包格式。After reading the designated data selected by the user, the electronic device 100 can perform packet processing on the designated data. When transmitting the specified data through the network, the data needs to be aligned in network byte order. Therefore, a data packet format is provided in this embodiment of the present application.
图22示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种数据包的数据结构。Figure 22 shows the data structure of a data packet provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图22所示,该数据包可以包括传输头(transmission head,TransHead)、传输数据(transmission data,TransData)。其中,TransData中可以是上述用户选中的指定数据的二进制数据。As shown in Figure 22, the data packet may include a transmission header (transmission head, TransHead) and transmission data (transmission data, TransData). Among them, TransData can be the binary data of the specified data selected by the above user.
其中,对该数据包的定义可以如下所示:
Among them, the definition of the data package can be as follows:
其中,在上述定义中,TransHead中可以包括数据类型(type)字段、长度(length)字段、序号(sequence number,seq)字段。该数据类型字段可用用于指示该数据包中传输数据的类型。例如,该传输数据的类型可以包括未经加工图像格式(raw image format,RAW)、命令(command,CMD)、语音(voice),等等类型。长度(length)字段可用于指示传输数据的数据长度。序号(sequence)字段可用于指示该数据包的在指定数据分片后的多个数据包中的序号。Among them, in the above definition, TransHead can include a data type (type) field, a length (length) field, and a sequence number (sequence number, seq) field. The data type field can be used to indicate the type of data transmitted in this packet. For example, the types of transmitted data may include raw image format (RAW), command (CMD), voice (voice), and other types. The length field can be used to indicate the data length of the transmitted data. The sequence field can be used to indicate the sequence number of the data packet in multiple data packets after the specified data fragmentation.
其中,由于,网络传输协议中最大传输单元(maximum transmission unit,MTU)的限制(例如,数据包的最大长度不能超过1500bit)。因此,需要按照上述数据包的格式,将指定数据切割成多个数据包。其中,由于TransHead中包括有seq字段,表明该数据包的顺序序号。因此,接收端可以方便基于TransHead中的seq字段,将多个数据包组装成完整的指定数据。这样,无论底层协议使用的是UDP、TCP协议或者快传(quick)协议,接收端依然能够从多个数据包中恢复出指定数据。Among them, due to the limitation of the maximum transmission unit (MTU) in the network transmission protocol (for example, the maximum length of the data packet cannot exceed 1500 bits). Therefore, the specified data needs to be cut into multiple data packets according to the above data packet format. Among them, since TransHead includes the seq field, it indicates the sequence number of the data packet. Therefore, the receiving end can easily assemble multiple data packets into complete specified data based on the seq field in TransHead. In this way, no matter whether the underlying protocol uses UDP, TCP protocol or quick protocol, the receiving end can still recover the specified data from multiple data packets.
在一种示例中,可以在TransHead中不设置seq字段,直接使用底层的TCP协议传输,这样,可以在TCP层完成指定数据的顺序传输。In one example, the seq field can not be set in TransHead and the underlying TCP protocol can be directly used for transmission. In this way, the sequential transmission of specified data can be completed at the TCP layer.
在一种示例中,可以根据指定数据的类型使用适合该类型的传输协议。例如,传输实时流媒体数据可以使用RTP协议,传输文件数据可以使用文件传输协议(file transfer protocol,FTP)。In one example, depending on the type of specified data, a transport protocol appropriate for that type may be used. For example, the RTP protocol can be used to transmit real-time streaming media data, and the file transfer protocol (FTP) can be used to transmit file data.
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的数据分流和传输的策略。The following describes the data offloading and transmission strategies provided in the embodiments of this application.
由于电子设备100向电子设备200分享用户选中的指定数据可以走通话的主链路,也可以走辅助链路。并且辅助链路也可以是多条的。因此,需要确定数据分流的策略。其中,策略可以如下:Since the electronic device 100 shares the designated data selected by the user with the electronic device 200, it can use the main link of the call or the auxiliary link. And there can also be multiple auxiliary links. Therefore, a data offloading strategy needs to be determined. Among them, the strategy can be as follows:
1、传输速度优先。1. Transmission speed is priority.
电子设备100可以选择主链路和辅助链路中传输速度最快的一个或多个数据传输链路,或者在主链路和辅助链路中的多链路中并发用户选中的指定数据。The electronic device 100 may select one or more data transmission links with the fastest transmission speed among the primary link and the auxiliary link, or concurrently transmit specified data selected by the user in multiple links among the primary link and the auxiliary link.
在一种示例中,当电子设备100选择在多链路并发时,电子设备100可以在多链路中可以冗余重复传输一些数据包,方便电子设备200从多链路中传输的数据包中恢复出用户选中的指定数据。In one example, when the electronic device 100 chooses to concurrently transmit some data packets on multiple links, the electronic device 100 can redundantly and repeatedly transmit some data packets in the multi-links, so that the electronic device 200 can obtain data from the data packets transmitted in the multi-links. Recover the specified data selected by the user.
2、低耗电优先。 2. Low power consumption is given priority.
电子设备100可以选择主链路和辅助链路中传输时功耗较低的链路上传输用户选中的指定数据。The electronic device 100 can select the link with lower power consumption during transmission among the primary link and the auxiliary link to transmit the specified data selected by the user.
3、低费用优先。3. Low cost is preferred.
电子设备100可以选择主链路和辅助链路中费用最低的链路上,传输用户选择中的指定数据。例如,可以优先选择Wi-Fi链路上传输用户选中的指定数据。The electronic device 100 can select the link with the lowest cost among the primary link and the auxiliary link to transmit the specified data selected by the user. For example, specified data selected by the user can be prioritized for transmission over the Wi-Fi link.
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种文件撤回机制的流程。The following describes the process of a file withdrawal mechanism provided in the embodiment of this application.
图23示例的示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种文件撤回机制的流程示意图。Figure 23 illustrates a schematic flow chart of a file recall mechanism provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图23所示,该文件撤回机制可以包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 23, the file recall mechanism may include the following steps:
S2301、电子设备100可以传输指定数据给电子设备200。S2301. The electronic device 100 can transmit specified data to the electronic device 200.
其中,具体有关电子设备100将用户选中的指定数据传输给电子设备200的过程以及界面显示,可以参考前述实施例,在此不再赘述。For details about the process of the electronic device 100 transmitting the designated data selected by the user to the electronic device 200 and the interface display, reference may be made to the foregoing embodiments and will not be described again here.
S2302、电子设备200可以在接收到指定数据后,保存指定数据,并记录指定数据的保存路径。S2302. After receiving the specified data, the electronic device 200 can save the specified data and record the saving path of the specified data.
可选的,S2303、电子设备200可以监听并记录指定数据在移动/或复制之后的保存路径。Optionally, S2303, the electronic device 200 can monitor and record the saving path of the specified data after being moved/or copied.
S2304、电子设备100可以向电子设备200发送撤回指示。S2304. The electronic device 100 may send a withdrawal instruction to the electronic device 200.
其中,电子设备100可以在数据传输链路上发送撤回指示给电子设备200。具体有关指定数据的撤回时的界面显示,可以参考前述图4I所示实施例,在此不再赘述。Wherein, the electronic device 100 may send the withdrawal instruction to the electronic device 200 on the data transmission link. For specific information on the interface display when withdrawing designated data, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 4I , which will not be described again here.
S2305、电子设备200在接收到撤回指示后,可以判断是否指定数据的保存时间是否超时。S2305. After receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may determine whether the storage time of the specified data has expired.
S2306、当指定数据的保存时间未超时时,电子设备200可以找到指定数据的保存路径,删除指定数据。S2306. When the storage time of the specified data has not expired, the electronic device 200 can find the storage path of the specified data and delete the specified data.
在一种示例中,电子设备200也可以在接收到撤回指示后,不判断是否超时,直接将找到指定数据的保存路径,并删除该指定数据。In one example, after receiving the withdrawal instruction, the electronic device 200 may directly find the storage path of the specified data and delete the specified data without determining whether it times out.
可选的,S2307、在电子设备200删除指定数据之后,可以更新指定数据的接收状态。Optionally, S2307, after the electronic device 200 deletes the specified data, the reception status of the specified data can be updated.
其中,电子设备200可以显示撤回提示,该撤回提示用于提示用户,该指定数据已经被撤回。The electronic device 200 may display a withdrawal prompt, which is used to remind the user that the specified data has been withdrawn.
例如,电子设备200可以在接收文件列表中显示指定数据的选项,并将该指定数据的选项的状态标记为撤回状态。For example, the electronic device 200 may display an option of specifying data in the received file list, and mark the status of the option of specifying data as a withdrawn status.
下面介绍本申请实施例中电子设备100对发送给电子设备200的指定数据进行权限管理。The following describes how the electronic device 100 performs permission management on designated data sent to the electronic device 200 in this embodiment of the present application.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以对发送给电子设备200的指定数据进行权限管理。其中,该权限管理包括阅后即焚(即只允许电子设备200查看,不允许电子设备200转存)、只允许电子设备200存储不允许电子设备200转发、允许电子设备200转发,等等。不限于此,还可以对指定数据进行更多的权限管理,例如,不允许电子设备200修改指定数据中的内容,等等。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also perform permission management on designated data sent to the electronic device 200 . Among them, the permission management includes burning after reading (that is, only allowing the electronic device 200 to view and not allowing the electronic device 200 to transfer), only allowing the electronic device 200 to store and not allowing the electronic device 200 to forward, allowing the electronic device 200 to forward, and so on. Not limited to this, more rights management can be performed on the designated data, for example, the electronic device 200 is not allowed to modify the content in the designated data, and so on.
其中,可以通过如下方式对指定数据进行权限管理:Among them, permissions can be managed on designated data in the following ways:
1、在电子设备100传输指定数据给电子设备200之前,电子设备100可以与电子设备200协商好密钥和证书。其中,该证书中包括有电子设备100允许电子设备200对指定数据进行操作的权限。电子设备100可以将指定数据用协商好的密钥进行加密,并将加密后的指定数据发送给电子设备200。电子设备200在接收到加密后的指定数据后,可以将加密后的指定数据与之前协商好的密钥设备证书分开存储。电子设备200可以在接收用户对该指定数据进行指定操作(例如,打开、转存、转发,等等)的输入时,先验证证书中是否包括有指定操作的权限,若有权限,则电子设备200可以继续校验密钥,并在校验完密钥后对指定数据进行指定操作。若没有权限,则电子设备200可以不对指定数据进行指定操作。1. Before the electronic device 100 transmits specified data to the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can negotiate the key and certificate with the electronic device 200. The certificate includes the permission of the electronic device 100 to allow the electronic device 200 to operate the specified data. The electronic device 100 may encrypt the specified data using the negotiated key, and send the encrypted specified data to the electronic device 200 . After receiving the encrypted designated data, the electronic device 200 may store the encrypted designated data separately from the previously negotiated key device certificate. When receiving input from the user to perform a specified operation (for example, open, transfer, forward, etc.) on the specified data, the electronic device 200 may first verify whether the certificate includes permission for the specified operation. If there is permission, the electronic device 200 200 can continue to verify the key, and perform specified operations on the specified data after verifying the key. If there is no authority, the electronic device 200 may not perform the specified operation on the specified data.
2、电子设备100可以在指定数据的文件头添加权限信息。电子设备200在接收用户对该指定数据进行指定操作的输入时,可以先基于指定数据的文件头中的权限信息判断是否有权限对指定数据进行指定操作。若有权限,则电子设备200可以对指定数据进行指定操作,若没有,则电子设备200拒绝对指定数据进行指定操作。2. The electronic device 100 can add permission information to the file header of the specified data. When the electronic device 200 receives input from the user to perform a specified operation on the specified data, the electronic device 200 may first determine whether there is permission to perform the specified operation on the specified data based on the permission information in the file header of the specified data. If there is permission, the electronic device 200 can perform the specified operation on the specified data. If not, the electronic device 200 refuses to perform the specified operation on the specified data.
下面介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种通话场景。The following introduces a call scenario provided in the embodiment of this application.
在一些应用场景中,电子设备100通话的对方可以为非手机类的设备。例如,电子设备100可以通过服务中心与连接到服务中心上的坐席设备进行通话。例如,交互式语音应答(interactive voice response,IVR)通话系统。电子设备100可以与坐席设备通话的过程中,将用户选中的指定数据发送给坐席设备。In some application scenarios, the counterparty of the call to the electronic device 100 may be a non-mobile phone device. For example, the electronic device 100 can communicate with an agent device connected to the service center through a service center. For example, interactive voice response (IVR) call system. The electronic device 100 may send specified data selected by the user to the agent device during the conversation.
图24示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种IVR通话系统。Figure 24 shows an IVR call system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图24所示,该IVR通话系统,可以包括电子设备100、运营商网络、服务中心和坐席设备。 As shown in Figure 24, the IVR call system may include electronic device 100, operator network, service center and agent equipment.
其中,电子设备100可以拨打服务中心的服务号码,通过运营商网络与服务中心建立通话链路。服务中心可以与坐席设备建立通话链路,将电子设备100的通话转接给坐席设备。Among them, the electronic device 100 can dial the service number of the service center and establish a call link with the service center through the operator's network. The service center can establish a call link with the agent device and transfer the call from the electronic device 100 to the agent device.
电子设备100可以通过运营商网络到服务中心的通信路径、服务中心到坐席设备的通信路径组成的通话链路,与坐席设备进行通话。电子设备100与坐席设备之间可以创建一条或多条辅助链路,并通过这一条或多条辅助链路将用户选中的指定数据发送给坐席设备。The electronic device 100 can communicate with the agent device through a call link composed of a communication path from the operator network to the service center and a communication path from the service center to the agent device. One or more auxiliary links may be created between the electronic device 100 and the agent device, and designated data selected by the user may be sent to the agent device through the one or more auxiliary links.
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以与服务中心建立辅助链路1,通过辅助链路1以及服务中心与坐席设备之间的通话链路将用户选中的指定数据发送给坐席设备。In one example, the electronic device 100 can establish an auxiliary link 1 with the service center, and send the specified data selected by the user to the agent device through the auxiliary link 1 and the call link between the service center and the agent device.
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以与坐席设备之间建立辅助链路2,并通过辅助链路2将用户选中的指定数据发送给坐席设备。In one example, the electronic device 100 can establish an auxiliary link 2 with the agent device, and send the specified data selected by the user to the agent device through the auxiliary link 2 .
在一种示例中,电子设备100可以同时使用辅助链路1以及服务中心与坐席设备之间的通话链路,和辅助链路2将用户选中的指定数据发送给坐席设备。In one example, the electronic device 100 can simultaneously use the auxiliary link 1 and the call link between the service center and the agent device, and the auxiliary link 2 to send the specified data selected by the user to the agent device.
图25示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种IVR通话系统中辅助链路的建立流程。Figure 25 shows the establishment process of an auxiliary link in an IVR call system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图25所示,IVR通话系统中辅助链路的建立流程可以包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 25, the establishment process of the auxiliary link in the IVR call system may include the following steps:
S2501、电子设备100通过运营商网络、服务中心与坐席设备建立通话链路。S2501. The electronic device 100 establishes a call link with the agent device through the operator network and service center.
电子设备100可以基于该通话链路与坐席设备进行通话。The electronic device 100 can communicate with the agent device based on the communication link.
S2502、电子设备100可以将通话绑定信息A发送至寻址服务器。S2502. The electronic device 100 may send the call binding information A to the addressing server.
其中,该通话绑定信息A中包括电子设备100的的通信标识A、电子设备100的电话号码、服务中心的服务号码、电子设备100的通话设备类型A(例如,手机)。The call binding information A includes the communication identification A of the electronic device 100, the phone number of the electronic device 100, the service number of the service center, and the call device type A of the electronic device 100 (for example, a mobile phone).
寻址服务器在接收到通话绑定信息A后,可以保存该通话绑定信息A。After receiving the call binding information A, the addressing server can save the call binding information A.
S2503、服务中心可以将通话绑定信息B发送至寻址服务器。S2503. The service center can send the call binding information B to the addressing server.
其中,该通话绑定信息B中包括服务中心的通信标识B、电子设备100的电话号码、服务中心的服务号码、服务中心的通话设备类型B(例如,服务中心)。The call binding information B includes the communication identifier B of the service center, the telephone number of the electronic device 100, the service number of the service center, and the call equipment type B of the service center (eg, service center).
寻址服务器在接收到通话绑定信息B后,可以保存该通话绑定信息B。After receiving the call binding information B, the addressing server can save the call binding information B.
S2504、坐席设备可以将通话绑定信息C发送至寻址服务器。S2504. The agent device can send the call binding information C to the addressing server.
其中,该通话绑定信息C中包括坐席设备的通信标识C、电子设备100的电话号码、服务中心的服务号码、坐席设备的通话设备类型C(例如,坐席设备)。The call binding information C includes the communication identifier C of the agent device, the phone number of the electronic device 100, the service number of the service center, and the call device type C of the agent device (for example, the agent device).
寻址服务器在接收到通话绑定信息C后,可以保存该通话绑定信息C。After receiving the call binding information C, the addressing server can save the call binding information C.
S2505、电子设备100可以发送查询请求A给寻址服务器,该查询请求A可用于查询服务中心的通信标识B,和/或,坐席设备的通信标识C。S2505. The electronic device 100 can send a query request A to the addressing server. The query request A can be used to query the communication identifier B of the service center and/or the communication identifier C of the agent device.
其中,该查询请求A中携带有通话设备类型B和/或通话设备类型C。当查询请求A中携带有通话设备类型B时,查询请求A用于查询服务中心的通信标识B。当查询请求A中携带有通话设备类型C时,查询请求A用于查询坐席设备的通信标识C。当查询请求A中携带有通话设备类型B和通话设备类型C时,查询请求A用于查询服务中心的通信标识B和坐席设备的通信标识C。Wherein, the query request A carries the calling device type B and/or the calling device type C. When the query request A carries the calling device type B, the query request A is used to query the communication identifier B of the service center. When the query request A carries the calling device type C, the query request A is used to query the communication identifier C of the agent device. When the query request A carries the communication device type B and the communication device type C, the query request A is used to query the communication identifier B of the service center and the communication identifier C of the agent device.
S2506、寻址服务器可以在接收到查询请求A后,向电子设备100返回服务中心的通信标识B,和/或,坐席设备的通信标识C。S2506. After receiving the query request A, the addressing server may return the communication identification B of the service center and/or the communication identification C of the agent device to the electronic device 100.
S2507、服务中心可以发送查询请求B给寻址服务器,该查询请求B可用于查询电子设备100的通信标识A。S2507. The service center can send a query request B to the addressing server. The query request B can be used to query the communication identification A of the electronic device 100.
其中,查询请求B中携带有通话设备类型A。Among them, the query request B carries the calling device type A.
S2508、寻址服务器可以在接收到查询请求B后,向服务中心返回电子设备100的通信标识A。S2508. After receiving the query request B, the addressing server may return the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 to the service center.
S2509、坐席设备可以发送查询请求C给寻址服务器,该查询请求C可用于查询电子设备100的通信标识A。S2509. The agent device can send a query request C to the addressing server. The query request C can be used to query the communication identification A of the electronic device 100.
其中,查询请求B中携带有通话设备类型A。Among them, the query request B carries the calling device type A.
S2510、寻址服务器可以在接收到查询请求B后,向坐席设备返回电子设备100的通信标识A。S2510. After receiving the query request B, the addressing server may return the communication identification A of the electronic device 100 to the agent device.
S2511、电子设备100和服务中心通过通信标识A和通信标识B建立辅助链路1。S2511. The electronic device 100 and the service center establish the auxiliary link 1 through the communication identifier A and the communication identifier B.
S2512、电子设备100和坐席设备通过通信标识A和通信标识C建立辅助链路2。S2512. The electronic device 100 and the agent device establish the auxiliary link 2 through the communication identifier A and the communication identifier C.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备100的通信标识A的获取、服务中心的通信标识B的获取、坐席设备的通信标识C的获取,可以参考前述图13A以及图15-图20所示实施例中电子设备100获取通信标识A的流程,在此不再赘述。 In this embodiment of the present application, to obtain the communication identification A of the electronic device 100, the communication identification B of the service center, and the communication identification C of the agent device, please refer to the aforementioned embodiments shown in Figure 13A and Figures 15-20 The process for the electronic device 100 to obtain the communication identification A will not be described again here.
本申请实施例中的寻址服务器,可以是上述图13A以及图15-图20所示实施例中的业务云服务器1380。The addressing server in the embodiment of the present application may be the business cloud server 1380 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 13A and FIG. 15 to FIG. 20 .
本申请实施例中的辅助链路1和辅助链路2的建立流程,可以参考前述图15-图20所示实施例中电子设备100与电子设备200建立链路的过程,在此不再赘述。For the establishment process of auxiliary link 1 and auxiliary link 2 in the embodiment of the present application, you can refer to the process of establishing a link between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 in the embodiment shown in Figures 15 to 20, and will not be described again here. .
以上所述,以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。 As mentioned above, the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solution of the present application, but not to limit it. Although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that they can still make the foregoing technical solutions. The technical solutions described in each embodiment may be modified, or some of the technical features may be equivalently replaced; however, these modifications or substitutions do not cause the essence of the corresponding technical solutions to depart from the scope of the technical solutions in each embodiment of the present application.

Claims (25)

  1. 一种数据分享方法,其特征在于,包括:A data sharing method, characterized by including:
    第一电子设备显示通话界面,所述通话界面包括所述第二电子设备的联系人信息,所述通话界面用于表示所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备正在进行运营商通话;The first electronic device displays a call interface, the call interface includes contact information of the second electronic device, and the call interface is used to indicate that the first electronic device and the second electronic device are on an operator call;
    所述第一电子设备在与所述第二电子设备进行所述运营商通话的过程中,接收到分享第一指定数据的第一输入;The first electronic device receives a first input to share the first specified data during the operator call with the second electronic device;
    响应于所述第一输入,所述第一电子设备显示第一分享界面,并在所述第一分享界面中显示所述第二电子设备对应的第一选项;In response to the first input, the first electronic device displays a first sharing interface, and displays a first option corresponding to the second electronic device in the first sharing interface;
    所述第一电子设备接收到对所述第一选项的第二输入;the first electronic device receives a second input to the first option;
    响应于所述第二输入,所述第一电子设备将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备。In response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一选项的周围显示有通话标记,所述通话标记用于表示所述第一选项为正在与所述第一电子设备进行通话的第二电子设备对应的选项。The method according to claim 1, characterized in that a call mark is displayed around the first option, and the call mark is used to indicate that the first option is a third person who is talking to the first electronic device. 2. Options corresponding to electronic equipment.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一选项的周围还显示有所述第二电子设备对应的联系人信息,所述第二电子设备对应的联系人信息包括以下一项或多项:所述第二电子设备的电话号码、所述第一电子设备对所述第二电子设备的电话号码已备注的联系人名称、所述第一电子设备对所述第二电子设备的电话号码已备注的联系人头像、通话应用标记;其中,所述通话应用标记用于表示所述通话界面所属的通话应用。The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, the contact information corresponding to the second electronic device is also displayed around the first option, and the contact information corresponding to the second electronic device includes the following: One or more items: the phone number of the second electronic device, the name of the contact person that the first electronic device has noted for the phone number of the second electronic device, the phone number of the first electronic device for the second electronic device. The phone number of the electronic device has been noted as a contact avatar and a call application mark; wherein the call application mark is used to represent the call application to which the call interface belongs.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述响应于所述第二输入,所述第一电子设备将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备,具体包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, characterized in that, in response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first designated data to the second electronic device , specifically including:
    响应于所述第二输入,所述第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送数据传输请求,所述数据传输请求用于请求向所述第二电子设备传输所述第一指定数据;In response to the second input, the first electronic device sends a data transmission request to the second electronic device, the data transmission request being used to request transmission of the first specified data to the second electronic device;
    所述第一电子设备接收所述第二电子设备发送的确认信息,所述确认信息用于表示所述第二电子设备允许所述第一电子设备发送所述第一指定数据给所述第二电子设备;The first electronic device receives confirmation information sent by the second electronic device, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the second electronic device allows the first electronic device to send the first designated data to the second electronic device. Electronic equipment;
    响应于所述确认信息,所述第一电子设备将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备。In response to the confirmation information, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 4, further comprising:
    响应于所述第二输入,所述第一电子设备显示第一提示,所述第一提示,用于提示用户所述第一电子设备正在请求向所述第二电子设备发送所述第一指定数据。In response to the second input, the first electronic device displays a first prompt, the first prompt is used to prompt the user that the first electronic device is requesting to send the first designation to the second electronic device. data.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述第一电子设备在将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备的过程中,显示第二提示和发送进度条,所述第二提示用于提示用户所述第一电子设备正在向所述第二电子设备发送所述第一指定数据,所述发送进度条用于提示用户所述第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送所述第一指定数据的进度。During the process of sending the first designated data to the second electronic device, the first electronic device displays a second prompt and a sending progress bar. The second prompt is used to prompt the user of the first electronic device. The first specified data is being sent to the second electronic device, and the sending progress bar is used to prompt the user of the progress of the first electronic device sending the first specified data to the second electronic device.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 6, further comprising:
    所述第一电子设备在所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备的过程中,显示发送取消控件,所述取消控件用于触发所述第一电子设备暂停发送所述第一指定数据给所述第二电子设备。During the process of sending the first specified data to the second electronic device, the first electronic device displays a sending cancel control, and the cancel control is used to trigger the first electronic device to suspend sending the first specified data. data to the second electronic device.
  8. 根据权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-7, characterized in that the method further includes:
    在所述第一电子设备将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备之后,显示第三提示和撤回控件,所述第三提示用于提示所述用户所述第一电子设备已经向所述第二电子设备发送完所述第一指定数据,所述撤回控件用于触发所述第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送撤回指示,所述撤回指示用于请求所述第二电子设备删除已接收到所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一指定数据。After the first electronic device sends the first designated data to the second electronic device, a third prompt and a withdrawal control are displayed. The third prompt is used to prompt the user that the first electronic device has After sending the first designated data to the second electronic device, the withdrawal control is used to trigger the first electronic device to send a withdrawal instruction to the second electronic device, and the withdrawal instruction is used to request the third electronic device. The second electronic device deletes the first designated data that has been received by the first electronic device.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一分享界面为系统分享界面,所述第一分享界面还包括所述第一电子设备通过近场通信技术发现的一个或多个附近设备的选项、一个或多个服 务选项,所述附近设备的选项用于触发所述第一电子设备将所述第一指定数据分享给所述附近设备,所述服务选项可用于触发所述第一电子设备通过所述服务选项对应的应用程序或协议分享所述第一指定数据。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that the first sharing interface is a system sharing interface, and the first sharing interface further includes the first electronic device discovering the system through near field communication technology. options for one or more nearby devices, one or more services Service options, the options of the nearby device are used to trigger the first electronic device to share the first specified data to the nearby device, and the service options can be used to trigger the first electronic device to use the service options. The corresponding application or protocol shares the first specified data.
  10. 根据权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一分享界面为第一应用的应用内分享界面,所述第一分享界面还包括所述第一应用中的一个或多个功能选项;The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that the first sharing interface is an in-application sharing interface of the first application, and the first sharing interface further includes an in-app sharing interface in the first application. One or more functional options;
    所述第一电子设备在与所述第二电子设备进行所述运营商通话的过程中,接收到分享第一指定数据的第一输入,具体包括:During the operator call with the second electronic device, the first electronic device receives a first input to share the first specified data, which specifically includes:
    所述第一电子设备在与所述第二电子设备进行所述运营商通话的过程中,显示第一应用的第一界面,所述第一界面包括有所述第一指定数据和第一控件,所述第一控件用于分享所述第一指定数据,其中,所述分享所述第一指定数据包括分享所述第一指定数据的获取链接;During the operator call with the second electronic device, the first electronic device displays a first interface of the first application, and the first interface includes the first specified data and a first control. , the first control is used to share the first specified data, wherein the sharing the first specified data includes sharing the acquisition link of the first specified data;
    所述第一电子设备接收到对所述第一控件的所述第一输入。The first electronic device receives the first input to the first control.
  11. 根据权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指定数据包括以下一项或多项:图片、音频、视频、文档文件、位置信息、链接、联系人信息、日历、应用程序包、备忘录。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, characterized in that the first specified data includes one or more of the following: pictures, audio, video, document files, location information, links, contact information , Calendar, Application Package, Notes.
  12. 根据权利要求1-11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-11, characterized in that the method further includes:
    在所述第一电子设备将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备之后,所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备结束所述运营商通话;After the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, the first electronic device and the second electronic device end the operator call;
    所述第一电子设备接收到分享第二指定数据的第三输入;The first electronic device receives a third input sharing second specified data;
    响应于所述第三输入,所述第一电子设备显示第二分享界面,所述第二分享界面包括一个或多个最近互动联系人的选项;其中,所述最近互动联系人为在所述第一电子设备接收到所述第三输入时的最近一段时间内与所述第一电子设备互动过的联系人,所述一个或多个最近互动联系人的选项包括第三电子设备对应的第二选项;In response to the third input, the first electronic device displays a second sharing interface, the second sharing interface includes options for one or more recently interacted contacts; wherein the most recently interacted contacts are in the first Contacts who have interacted with the first electronic device within a recent period of time when an electronic device receives the third input, and the options of the one or more recently interacted contacts include second contacts corresponding to the third electronic device. options;
    所述第一电子设备接收到所述第二选项的第二输入;the first electronic device receives a second input of the second option;
    响应于所述第二输入,所述第一电子设备将所述第二指定数据发送给所述第三电子设备。In response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the second specified data to the third electronic device.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述最近互动联系人的选项的周围显示有所述最近互动联系人的联系人信息,所述最近互动联系人的联系人信息包括有以下一项或多项:所述最近互动联系人的联系人信息包括以下一项或多项:所述最近互动联系人的电话号码、所述最近互动联系人的联系人名称、所述最近互动联系人的联系人头像、联系应用标记;其中,所述联系应用标记用于表示所述第一电子设备与所述最近互动联系人进行互动时所使用的应用。The method according to claim 12, characterized in that, the contact information of the recently interacted contact is displayed around the option of the recently interacted contact, and the contact information of the recently interacted contact includes one of the following: Item or items: The contact information of the recently interacted contact includes one or more of the following: the phone number of the recently interacted contact, the contact name of the recently interacted contact, the recently interacted contact The contact avatar and the contact application mark; wherein the contact application mark is used to represent the application used by the first electronic device to interact with the recently interacted contact.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述互动包括以下任一种:运营商通话、接收短信、发送短信、过顶OTT通话、在社交应用内接收或发送私信。The method according to claim 13, characterized in that the interaction includes any of the following: calling with an operator, receiving text messages, sending text messages, over-the-top calls, receiving or sending private messages within social applications.
  15. 根据权利要求1-14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-14, characterized in that, before the first electronic device sends the first designated data to the second electronic device, the method further includes:
    所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备建立第一数据传输链路;The first electronic device establishes a first data transmission link with the second electronic device;
    所述响应于所述第二输入,所述第一电子设备将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备,具体包括:In response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device, specifically including:
    响应于所述第二输入,所述第一电子设备在所述第一数据传输链路上将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备。In response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first specified data to the second electronic device over the first data transmission link.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 15, further comprising:
    所述第一电子设备在与所述第二电子设备进行所述运营商通话过程中且在接收到所述第一输入之前,与所述第二电子设备建立完所述第一数据传输链路;The first electronic device has established the first data transmission link with the second electronic device during the operator call and before receiving the first input. ;
    所述响应于所述第一输入,所述第一电子设备显示第一分享界面,并在所述第一分享界面中显示所述第二电子设备对应的第一选项,具体包括:In response to the first input, the first electronic device displays a first sharing interface, and displays a first option corresponding to the second electronic device in the first sharing interface, specifically including:
    响应于所述第一输入,所述第一电子设备显示所述第一分享界面,所述第一分享界面包括所述第二电 子设备对应的所述第一选项。In response to the first input, the first electronic device displays the first sharing interface, the first sharing interface includes the second electronic device The first option corresponding to the sub-device.
  17. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述响应于所述第一输入,所述第一电子设备显示第一分享界面,并在所述第一分享界面中显示所述第二电子设备对应的第一选项,具体包括:The method of claim 15, wherein in response to the first input, the first electronic device displays a first sharing interface, and displays the second electronic device in the first sharing interface. The first option corresponding to the device includes:
    响应于所述第一输入,所述第一电子设备显示所述第一分享界面;In response to the first input, the first electronic device displays the first sharing interface;
    在所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备建立完所述第一数据传输链路后,所述第一电子设备在所述第一分享界面中显示所述第二电子设备对应的第一选项。After the first electronic device and the second electronic device establish the first data transmission link, the first electronic device displays the third data corresponding to the second electronic device in the first sharing interface. One option.
  18. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述响应于所述第二输入,所述第一电子设备在所述第一数据传输链路上将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备,具体包括:The method of claim 15, wherein in response to the second input, the first electronic device sends the first designated data to the first data transmission link. Second electronic equipment, specifically including:
    响应于所述第二输入,所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备建立所述第一数据传输链路;In response to the second input, the first electronic device establishes the first data transmission link with the second electronic device;
    在所述第一数据传输链路建立完之后,所述第一电子设备在所述第一数据传输链路上将所述第一指定数据发送给所述第二电子设备。After the first data transmission link is established, the first electronic device sends the first designated data to the second electronic device on the first data transmission link.
  19. 根据权利要求15-18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一数据传输链路包括以下一条或多条链路:所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备进行运营商通话的主链路、所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备之间的一条或多条辅助链路。The method according to any one of claims 15-18, characterized in that the first data transmission link includes one or more of the following links: the first electronic device and the second electronic device perform The main link of the operator call and one or more auxiliary links between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一条或多条辅助链路包括以下一种或多种:互联网协议IP直连链路、点对点P2P链路、服务器中继链路。The method according to claim 19, characterized in that the one or more auxiliary links include one or more of the following: Internet Protocol IP direct link, point-to-point P2P link, and server relay link.
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一数据传输链路包括所述一条或多条辅助链路时,所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备建立第一数据传输链路,具体包括:The method according to claim 19 or 20, characterized in that when the first data transmission link includes the one or more auxiliary links, the first electronic device and the second electronic device establish The first data transmission link specifically includes:
    所述第一电子设备获取云服务器为所述第一电子设备分配的第一通信标识;The first electronic device obtains the first communication identification assigned by the cloud server to the first electronic device;
    所述第一电子设备将所述第一电子设备的电话号码和所述第一通信标识发送到所述云服务器上绑定保存;The first electronic device sends the phone number of the first electronic device and the first communication identification to the cloud server for binding and storage;
    所述第一电子设备发送第一查询请求给所述云服务器,所述第一查询请求包括所述第二电子设备的电话号码,所述第一查询请求用于查询所述第二电子设备的第二通信标识;The first electronic device sends a first query request to the cloud server. The first query request includes the phone number of the second electronic device. The first query request is used to query the phone number of the second electronic device. second communication identification;
    所述第一电子设备接收所述云服务器发送的所述第二通信标识;The first electronic device receives the second communication identification sent by the cloud server;
    所述第一电子设备基于所述第一通信标识和所述第二通信标识与所述电子设备建立所述辅助链路。The first electronic device establishes the auxiliary link with the electronic device based on the first communication identifier and the second communication identifier.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述辅助链路包括P2P链路;所述第一通信标识为所述第一电子设备与所述云服务器进行会话通信时使用的第一会话标识,所述第二通信标识为所述第二电子设备与所述云服务器进行会话通信时使用的第二会话标识;The method according to claim 21, wherein the auxiliary link includes a P2P link; the first communication identifier is the first session used when the first electronic device conducts session communication with the cloud server. Identity, the second communication identification is the second session identification used when the second electronic device performs session communication with the cloud server;
    所述第一电子设备基于所述第一通信标识和所述第二通信标识与所述电子设备建立所述辅助链路,具体包括:The first electronic device establishes the auxiliary link with the electronic device based on the first communication identifier and the second communication identifier, which specifically includes:
    所述第一电子设备发送第一获取请求给所述云服务器,所述第一获取请求用于请求获取所述第一电子设备的第一NAT公网信息;The first electronic device sends a first acquisition request to the cloud server, where the first acquisition request is used to request acquisition of the first NAT public network information of the first electronic device;
    所述第一电子设备接收所述云服务器发送的所述第一NAT公网信息,所述第一NAT公网信息包括所述第一电子设备的公网IP地址和所述第一电子设备的公网转内网的端口号;The first electronic device receives the first NAT public network information sent by the cloud server. The first NAT public network information includes the public network IP address of the first electronic device and the IP address of the first electronic device. The port number from the public network to the intranet;
    所述第一电子设备向所述云服务器发送第一消息,所述第一消息中携带有所述第二会话标识和所述第一NAT公网信息,所述第一消息用于所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备交换NAT公网信息;The first electronic device sends a first message to the cloud server, the first message carries the second session identifier and the first NAT public network information, and the first message is used for the third An electronic device exchanges NAT public network information with the second electronic device;
    所述第一电子设备接收所述云服务器发送的所述第二电子设备的第二NAT公网信息,所述第二NAT公网信息包括所述第二电子设备的公网IP地址和所述第二电子设备的公网转内网的端口号;The first electronic device receives the second NAT public network information of the second electronic device sent by the cloud server. The second NAT public network information includes the public network IP address of the second electronic device and the The port number of the second electronic device from the public network to the intranet;
    所述第一电子设备基于所述第一NAT公网信息和所述第二NAT公网信息与所述第二电子设备建立P2P链路。The first electronic device establishes a P2P link with the second electronic device based on the first NAT public network information and the second NAT public network information.
  23. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述辅助链路包括服务器中继链路;所述第一通信标识为所述第一电子设备与所述云服务器进行会话通信时使用的第一会话标识,所述第二通信标识为所述第 二电子设备与所述云服务器进行会话通信时使用的第二会话标识;The method of claim 21, wherein the auxiliary link includes a server relay link; and the first communication identifier is the first communication identifier used by the first electronic device to communicate with the cloud server. a session identifier, the second communication identifier being the first 2. A second session identifier used when the electronic device conducts session communication with the cloud server;
    所述第一电子设备基于所述第一通信标识和所述第二通信标识与所述电子设备建立所述辅助链路,具体包括:The first electronic device establishes the auxiliary link with the electronic device based on the first communication identifier and the second communication identifier, which specifically includes:
    所述第一电子设备发送第二获取请求,所述第二获取请求用于获取所述第一电子设备的第一中继地址;The first electronic device sends a second acquisition request, the second acquisition request is used to acquire the first relay address of the first electronic device;
    所述第一电子设备接收到所述云服务器发送的第一中继地址;The first electronic device receives the first relay address sent by the cloud server;
    所述第一电子设备向所述云服务器发送第一消息,所述第一消息中携带有所述第二会话标识和所述第一中继地址,所述第一消息用于所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备交换中继地址;The first electronic device sends a first message to the cloud server, the first message carries the second session identifier and the first relay address, and the first message is used for the first The electronic device exchanges relay addresses with the second electronic device;
    所述第一电子设备接收所述云服务器发送的所述第二电子设备的第二中继地址;The first electronic device receives the second relay address of the second electronic device sent by the cloud server;
    在所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备交换完中继地址后,所述第一电子设备与所述第二电子设备建立完服务器中继链路。After the first electronic device and the second electronic device complete the exchange of relay addresses, the first electronic device and the second electronic device complete establishing a server relay link.
  24. 一种电子设备,为第一电子设备,其特征在于,包括显示屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器,所述显示屏、所述一个或多个存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,实现如权利要求1-23中任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, which is a first electronic device, is characterized in that it includes a display screen, one or more processors and one or more memories, and the display screen, the one or more memories and the one or more memories are coupled to a processor, the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, the computer program code includes computer instructions, when the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the implementation of claims 1-23 any one of the methods.
  25. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机存储介质存储有计算机指令,所述计算机指令被处理器执行时,实现如权利要求1-23中任一项所述的方法。 A computer storage medium, characterized in that the computer storage medium stores computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by a processor, the method according to any one of claims 1-23 is implemented.
PCT/CN2023/115722 2022-09-01 2023-08-30 Data sharing method and system, and related apparatus WO2024046347A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211067060.6 2022-09-01
CN202211067060.6A CN117676480A (en) 2022-09-01 2022-09-01 Data sharing method, system and related device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024046347A1 true WO2024046347A1 (en) 2024-03-07

Family

ID=90065055

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/115722 WO2024046347A1 (en) 2022-09-01 2023-08-30 Data sharing method and system, and related apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117676480A (en)
WO (1) WO2024046347A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103503385A (en) * 2012-12-27 2014-01-08 华为技术有限公司 Method for information share and device
CN110191045A (en) * 2019-05-05 2019-08-30 珠海格力电器股份有限公司 A kind of information sharing method, device, terminal and readable storage medium storing program for executing
WO2021023208A1 (en) * 2019-08-08 2021-02-11 华为技术有限公司 Data sharing method, graphical user interface, related device, and system
WO2022143071A1 (en) * 2020-12-31 2022-07-07 华为技术有限公司 Connection establishment method and electronic device
WO2022171009A1 (en) * 2021-02-10 2022-08-18 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and electronic device

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103503385A (en) * 2012-12-27 2014-01-08 华为技术有限公司 Method for information share and device
CN110191045A (en) * 2019-05-05 2019-08-30 珠海格力电器股份有限公司 A kind of information sharing method, device, terminal and readable storage medium storing program for executing
WO2021023208A1 (en) * 2019-08-08 2021-02-11 华为技术有限公司 Data sharing method, graphical user interface, related device, and system
WO2022143071A1 (en) * 2020-12-31 2022-07-07 华为技术有限公司 Connection establishment method and electronic device
WO2022171009A1 (en) * 2021-02-10 2022-08-18 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and electronic device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117676480A (en) 2024-03-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110138937B (en) Call method, device and system
EP3926448A1 (en) Device control page display method, related apparatus and system
WO2020041952A1 (en) Method and electronic apparatus for controlling express delivery cabinet on the basis of express delivery message
CN105359560B (en) Pass through the service provision of intelligent personal gateway
WO2020155014A1 (en) Smart home device sharing system and method, and electronic device
CN110198362B (en) Method and system for adding intelligent household equipment into contact
CN111628916B (en) Method for cooperation of intelligent sound box and electronic equipment
US20230021994A1 (en) Cross-Device Content Projection Method and Electronic Device
WO2021000923A1 (en) Router configuration method, terminal, and router
JP7416519B2 (en) Multi-terminal multimedia data communication method and system
WO2020042119A1 (en) Message transmission method and device
WO2022037407A1 (en) Method and system for replying to message, and electronic device
WO2022068513A1 (en) Wireless communication method and terminal device
EP4187872A1 (en) Task processing method and related electronic device
CN113170279B (en) Communication method based on low-power Bluetooth and related device
WO2020034075A1 (en) Photo sharing method and electronic device
WO2024046347A1 (en) Data sharing method and system, and related apparatus
WO2020216144A1 (en) Method for adding mail contact, and electronic device
CN113676902B (en) System, method and electronic equipment for providing wireless internet surfing
US11968058B2 (en) Method for adding smart home device to contacts and system
WO2022022435A1 (en) Method for quickly joining conference and related device
WO2024017296A1 (en) Sharing method, electronic device and system
CN116708674B (en) Communication method and electronic equipment
CN115022849B (en) Data transmission method based on Wi-Fi P2P and electronic equipment
WO2021218544A1 (en) Wireless connection providing system, method, and electronic apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23859376

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1